Meridian 1
Meridian Link/Customer Controlled Routing
Installation and Upgrade Guide
Publication number: 553-3202-210
Product release:
Document status:
Date:
Meridian Link Release 5C/Customer Contolled Routing Release 3C
Standard 1.0
October 1998
© 1998 Northern Telecom
All rights reserved
Printed in the United States of America
Northern Telecom reserves the right to make changes in equipment, design, or components as progress in
engineering or manufacturing may warrant.
Meridian 1, SL-1, and Nortel are trademarks of Northern Telecom. UNIX is a trademark of AT&T. Motorola is a
trademark of the Motorola Corporation. MVME products are trademarked by the Motorola Corporation.
Ethernet is a trademark of the Xerox Corporation. Reflection is a trademark of Walker Richer & Quinn, Inc.
DEC, VT220, VT320, and VT420 are trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation. UDS is a trademark of
Motorola Incorporated.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iii
Publication history
October 1998
Standard 1.0
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iv Publication history
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
v
Contents
About this guide
References
xv
xviii
Chapter 1: Meridian Link/CCR
Co-residency overview
Keycode
Ethernet LAN-based PC
Module address and module name
1
1
4
5
7
Chapter 2: Overview of Meridian Link
Meridian Link application
Operating system overview
New with Meridian Link Release 5C
Link overview
AML and the Host Link (or Meridian Link)
Meridian Mail Link
Diagnostic tools
System console and maintenance console
Meridian Link administration and maintenance
Host support service requirements
Meridian 1
9
13
13
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
18
21
23
23
24
24
26
26
Hardware overview
Software overview
Host
Meridian Link service requirements
Host connection considerations
Ethernet LAN-based host
Meridian Mail software requirements
Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M)
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
vi Contents
Chapter 3: Overview of Customer Controlled
Routing
CCR application
27
30
30
31
31
32
32
32
32
33
33
34
34
36
An example of CCR call handling
Key CCR concepts
Operating system
New with CCR Release 3C
Application Module Link
Diagnostic tools
System console and maintenance console
CCR administration and maintenance
Consoles/printers
Meridian 1
Hardware overview
Software overview
Chapter 4: Meridian Link/CCR hardware
IPE Module
39
39
42
45
46
50
53
54
58
66
Connector panel and I/O connectors (Option 11)
Connector panel and I/O connectors (Options 21Ð81)
IPE Module components
Application Module
AEM power
Application Module components
Single board computer card (Application Module)
MVME333-2 X.25 communication controller (XCC) card
MVME332XT or MVME332XTS asynchronous
communication controller (ACC) card
Transition cards
P2 adapter board
Power supply
Disk/tape unit
VME bus backplane (Application Module)
Power sense card (Application Module)
I/O connectors (Application Module)
Input/output panel
68
70
78
79
80
82
82
82
83
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents vii
Chapter 5: Hardware installation overview
Preparing for installation
Installing an IPE Module or an Application Module
87
87
88
Chapter 6: Site survey/installation checklist
General information
End user
91
91
91
92
92
93
93
93
94
94
95
97
Distributor
Nortel support representative
Delivery information
Customer site
Freight company
Loading equipment required
Meridian 1 software checklists
Requirements for Meridian Link
Requirements for CCR
Requirements for Meridian Mail to support Meridian Link
Meridian Mail hardware checklist to support Meridian Link
IPE Module and Application Module: Meridian Link/CCR
software
99
100
101
IPE Module and Application Module: Meridian Link/CCR
software current status
Changes to IPE Module and Application Module
Meridian Link/CCR tapes and keycode
Documentation
101
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
107
108
111
112
112
113
Hardware
Equipment room information
Power and ground considerations
Equipment cabling
Input/output device cabling
Peripheral device cabling
Telephony connections
Equipment room cooling conditions
Additional considerations
Comments and recommendations
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
viii Contents
Chapter 7: Unpack and inspect hardware
Receiving the IPE Module and Application Module
components
Unpacking the IPE Module and Application Module
components
115
116
117
Chapter 8: Hardware installation procedures
Installing the IPE Module
Installing the Application Module
Installing the power supply and disk/tape unit
Checking the card option settings (Application Module)
Installing an NTAK02 SDI/DCH card
119
120
125
127
129
142
145
Installing an ESDI or MSDL card
Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling 151
IPE Module cabling
IPE Module cables
External I/O cables
External I/O cable pinouts (IPE Module)
Cabling the Option 11 IPE Module to external equipment
Cabling to external equipment
151
151
154
155
177
177
Backplane cable rerouting for Options 21Ð81 CE/PE and IPE
backplanes
185
Backplane cable rerouting for the NT8D11 CE/PE Module
backplane
Backplane cable rerouting for NT8D37 IPE Module
187
195
Cabling the Options 21Ð81 IPE Module to external equipment 209
Application Module cabling
Power cables
Input/output cables
Cabling the Application Module to external equipment
Installing Ethernet LAN support
216
216
219
227
256
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents ix
Chapter 10: Installing peripheral devices
VT220, VT320, and VT420 terminals
Personal computer running Reflection 4+
Meridian Terminal Emulator (MTE 8)
Dot-matrix printer switch settings
LaserJet series II printer switch settings
LaserJet series III printer switch settings
LaserJet series IV printer switch settings
DeskJet and DeskJet 500 printer switch settings
261
261
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
Chapter 11: Peripheral device cabling interface 273
DCE and DTE connections
273
276
276
277
278
278
279
280
282
Using an A/B switchbox to share system consoles
Connecting the A/B switchbox
Using the A/B switchbox to switch applications
Modems
Limited-distance modem
USRobotics Sportster modem
Gandalf LDS 120E limited-distance modem
Dial-up modem
Chapter 12: Meridian 1 configuration
Conventional notation
Configuration overview
Configuring the VSID, HSID, and AML prompts
Configure ESDI port (X11 Release 17)
Options 21Ð81 ESDI configuration
Enable ESDI port (X81 phase 7 or X11 Release 17)
Configure ESDI or MSDL port (X11 Release 18 or later)
Option 11 ESDI configuration
Option 21Ð81 ESDI or MSDL configuration
Enable ESDI or MSDL port (X11 Release 18 or later)
Configure SDI port for conshare (X11 Release 17)
Configure SDI port for conshare (X11 Release 18 or later)
Enable SDI port
293
293
295
296
299
299
302
305
305
308
312
315
317
318
319
319
320
322
324
Configuring DNIS to use auto-terminating trunks
LD 15ÑCustomer data block
LD 16ÑRoute data block
LD 14ÑTrunk data block
Configuring DNIS to use Incoming Digit Conversion
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
x
Contents
Configure devices for status change host notification
Define status message groups
Assign telephones to status message groups (Meridian
Link)
330
333
335
344
346
349
350
351
353
354
Configure ACD DNs
Configure Control DNs (CCR)
Configuring a Phantom Loop
Configuring a Phantom Superloop
Creating a Phantom Set
Configuring Dual VAS ID
Traffic statistics
Chapter 13: Meridian Mail configuration
Meridian Mail call processing
355
357
358
358
360
Configuring Meridian 1 for Meridian Mail
Creating a Meridian Mail ACD queue
Defining virtual agent DNs for voice channels
Configuring Meridian Mail for Host Enhanced Voice
Processing (HEVP)
363
363
Adding the Meridian Mail ACD DN to the Voice Service DN
(VSDN) Table
Defining voice channels in the Channel Allocation Table
(CAT)
Defining a new mailbox for the application
366
368
Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and
update procedures
371
To configure the software after installing a new IPE Module
or Application Module
375
Section 1: To upgrade Meridian Link from Release 2 to
Release 5C or Co-residency using a Release 2 backup
tape
Section 2: To upgrade Meridian Link from Release 3 to
Release 5C or Co-residency using a Release 3 backup
tape
376
377
Section 3: To upgrade Meridian Link from Release 4 to
Release 5C
Section 4: To upgrade Meridian Link from Release 4 to
Section 5: To upgrade Meridian Link from Release 4B to
Release 5C
378
379
380
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents xi
Section 6: To upgrade Meridian Link from Release 4B to
Release 5C and Co-residency
Section 7: To update Meridian Link from Release 5 to
Release 5C
Section 8: To update Meridian Link from Release 5 to
Section 9: To upgrade CCR from Release 2 to Release 3C
or
381
382
382
383
Section 10: To update CCR from Release 3 to Release 3C 384
Section 11: To update CCR from Release 3 to Co-
residency
384
385
Section 12: To update CCR Release 3B to Release 3C
sSection 13: To update CCR from Release 3B to Co-
residency
Section 14: To update Co-residency from one issue to
another issue of the same release
385
385
Section 15: Activating or de-activating a Meridian Link or
CCR feature
386
386
388
397
399
Section 16: To install or reinstall the software from tape
Procedure 1: Application configuration and start-up
Procedure 2: Start the update process
Procedure 3: Load application software from tape
Procedure 4: Power down the IPE Module or the
Application Module
Procedure 5: Load the operating system tape on an
Application Module with an MVME147 card
Procedure 6: Load the operating system tape on an IPE
Module or an Application Module with an MVME167
card
Procedure 7: Reboot and go through setup
Procedure 8: Load the application software from tape
Procedure 9: Restore configuration files and data files from
the backup tape
Procedure 10: Verify the installation
Procedure 11: Back up configuration files and data files
411
413
429
448
458
471
475
476
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
xii Contents
Chapter 15: Link configuration
Default configuration
Link 0ÑApplication Module Link
Link 1ÑX.25 protocol
Link 1ÑTCP/IP host link protocol
Link 2ÑMeridian Mail Link
Changing your configuration
479
479
479
480
481
481
482
483
484
Procedure 12: Verifying the link status
Procedure 13: Changing AML (link 0) parameters
Procedure 14: Changing Meridian Link (link 1) parameters 489
Procedure 15: Changing Meridian Mail Link (link 2)
parameters
Procedure 16: Replacing the default configuration file
Procedure 17: Creating a configuration file
497
499
500
Chapter 16: Additional application configuration503
Procedure 18: Turn off auto-start
505
506
507
509
511
513
Procedure 19: Change the Meridian 1 customer number
Procedure 20: Schedule regular backups
Procedure 21: Change the default system languages
Procedure 22: Configure terminal ports
Procedure 23: Configure printer ports
Chapter 17: Hardware upgrade
To upgrade an Application Module SBC card from an
MVME147 card to an MVME167 card
To upgrade an Option 11 IPE Module to an Options 21Ð81
IPE Module
517
517
517
518
520
Procedure 24: Software powerdown
Procedure 25: Hardware powerdown
Procedure 26: Upgrading the Application Module from an
MVME147 card to an MVME167 card
Procedure 27: Upgrading an Option 11 to an Options
21Ð81 IPE Module
Procedure 28: Installing the cables for Ethernet LAN
support (Application Module)
Procedure 29: Installing the MVME332XT or
MVME332XTS ACC card
521
522
524
526
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents xiii
Chapter 18: Acceptance testing
Meridian Link/CCR
Meridian Mail
527
527
529
529
530
530
531
531
Using Edit Voice to create voice segment files
Recording and trimming voice segments
Creating a header file
Using Edit Voice for the first time
Example of customer account balance query
Chapter 19: Single Terminal Access
Hardware and software requirements
Before you begin
533
533
534
537
Setting up STA
Chapter 20: Ordering
List of terms
Index
545
553
559
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
xiv Contents
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
xv
About this guide
This document details the steps and procedures required to successfully
install the hardware and software for your Meridian Link and/or Customer
Controlled Routing (CCR) system.
Meridian Link enables the call and voice processing capabilities of a
Meridian 1 system to be integrated with a customerÕs computer-based
business applications. Through Meridian Link, an application can place and
answer calls, route calls, and even implement Interactive Voice Response
applications.
CCR enables you to control and route Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
calls entering your Meridian 1 system. For example, for an incoming ACD
call, you can provide a specific recorded announcement, music, or both,
before assigning the call to an agent.
The hardware for both applications can be either an Intelligent Peripheral
Equipment (IPE) Module or an Application Module.
The software consists of a base operating system (BOS) and application
programs, referred to as the Meridian Applications.
This guide contains the following main areas of information:
Chapter 1: Meridian Link/CCR co-residency The first chapter provides an
overview of Meridian Link/CCR co-residency and describes the keycode
and the Ethernet LAN-based PC features.
Chapter 2: Overview of Meridian Link This chapter provides an overview
of Meridian Link, describes its concepts, and lists required hardware and
software.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
xvi About this guide
Chapter 3: Overview of Customer Controlled Routing This chapter
provides an overview of CCR, describes its concepts, and lists required
hardware and software.
Chapter 4: Meridian Link/CCR hardware This chapter provides an
overview of hardware components.
Chapter 5: Hardware installation overview This chapter lists the tools and
provides tables to describe the installation of an IPE Module or an
Application Module.
Note: If you intend to install an IPE Module or an Application
Module, refer to Table 11 (IPE Module) or Table 12 (Application
Module) in this chapter.
Chapter 6: Site survey/installation checklist This chapter provides a
checklist to ensure that all hardware and software requirements are met for a
successful installation.
Chapter 7: Unpack and inspect hardware This chapter provides
information on receiving, unpacking, and inspecting the IPE Module and
Application Module hardware components.
Chapter 8: Hardware installation procedures This chapter contains all of
the main hardware installation procedures, with references to surrounding
chapters for further information.
Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling This chapter describes
the cabling requirements. Two following chapters describe how to set up
terminals, and how to configure the Meridian 1 system.
Chapter 10: Installing peripheral devices This chapter describes the
procedures for how to set up and configure video display terminals and
printers supported by the Meridian Link and CCR appplications.
Chapter 11: Peripheral device cabling interface This chapter provides
information on installing and configuring modems and the A/B switchbox.
Chapter 12: Meridian 1 configuration for Meridian Link/CCR This
chapter shows how to use various software programs to configure the
Meridian 1 to support Meridian Link and CCR.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About this guide xvii
Chapter 13: Meridian Mail configuration This chapter shows how to
configure the Meridian 1 to support Meridian Mail.
Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures
This chapter describes procedures for
¥
¥
¥
¥
configuring the IPE Module and the Application Module, along with
start-up information
upgrading the software from one release to another (for example, from
Meridian Link Release 4B to Release 5C)
updating the software from one issue of a release to another issue of the
same release (for example, from issue 4.17 to issue 4.25)
reinstalling software (for example, after replacing a hard disk)
Chapter 15: Link configuration This chapter describes the configuration
procedures for the links used by the applications.
Chapter 16: Additional application configuration This chapter describes
the procedures used for scheduling backups and configuring terminal and
printer ports.
Chapter 17: Hardware upgrade This chapter describes the procedures for
upgrading from an MVME147 card to an MVME167 card and upgrading an
Option 11 IPE Module to an Options 21Ð81 IPE Module.
Chapter 18: Acceptance testing This chapter describes the various
acceptance tests you can perform.
Chapter 19: Single Terminal Access This chapter describes how to
configure the Meridian 1 system to support Single Terminal Access.
Chapter 20: Ordering This chapter lists field-replaceable items for both the
IPE Module and Application Module.
Note: The term ÒMeridian 1Ó is used throughout this document, and
refers to Meridian 1 and ÒMeridian 1-readyÓ systems (such as Meridian
SL-1 style cabinets that have been upgraded).
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
xviii About this guide
References
Refer to the following related documents:
¥
¥
Application Equipment Module Installation Guide (NTP 553-3201-200)
Application Module and Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Module
Diagnostic and Maintenance Guide (NTP 553-3211-510)
¥
¥
¥
Application Module and Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Module
Advanced Maintenance Guide (NTP 553-3211-512)
Meridian Link/Customer Controlled Routing Engineering Guide
(NTP 553-3211-520)
Customer Controlled Routing User Guide (P0747008)
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
Chapter 1: Meridian Link/CCR
co-residency
Co-residency overview
With Meridian Link Release 5C and CCR Release 3C, you can install both
Meridian Link and CCR in a single IPE Module or Application Module.
You should be aware that both applications use the same CPU, RAM, and
hard disk, so you cannot expect the same performance from a
co-resident application as you would get from a stand alone application.
As shown in Figure 1, Meridian Link and CCR applications communicate
with the Meridian 1 through the same Application Module Link (AML), and
at the same time.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
Chapter 1: Meridian Link/CCR co-residency
Figure 1
Meridian Link/CCR co-residency
IPE Module
Host Link
Host
Meridian
Link
CCR
AML
Meridian 1
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1: Meridian Link/CCR co-residency 3
This guide provides more detailed information on both the Meridian Link
and CCR applications in the following chapters:
¥
¥
Chapter 2, ÒOverview of Meridian LinkÓ
Chapter 3, ÒOverview of Customer Controlled RoutingÓ
If you intend to activate both Meridian Link and CCR in an Application
Module, the Application Module must have an MVME332XTS ACC card
and an NT6D51AA transition card installed. Refer to Chapter 4, ÒMeridian
Link/CCR hardwareÓ for descriptions of these cards.
If you intend to activate both Meridian Link and CCR in an IPE Module,
you should know that only two ports (7 and 8) will be available for CCR
terminals or printers. Port 6 will be used for the Host Link. However, you
can use LAN-based PCs as additional terminals. For more information, refer
to ÒEthernet LAN-based PCÓ later in this chapter.
Note: If you expect the maximum number of active CDN script
associations at any one time to be 20 or fewer, you should consider
installing CCR-S instead of the larger version (Large CCR). By doing
so, you will enhance the processing power available to Meridian Link
and CCR. Large CCR accommodates as many as 240 active CDN
script associations at any one time.
For more information about Meridian 1 configuration changes for co-
resident systems, refer to ÒConfiguring the VSID, HSID, and AML
promptsÓ in Chapter 12, ÒMeridian 1 Configuration for Meridian
Link/CCR.Ó
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
Chapter 1: Meridian Link/CCR co-residency
Keycode
IPE or Application Module software may or may not be pre-loaded:
¥
If the module is shipped to the United States, Europe, or Japan, the
software is likely to be already loaded.
¥
If the module is shipped to a Caribbean or Latin American location, to
Canada, or to the Asia Pacific region, the software may not be loaded.
If the software is preinstalled, a special keycode activates only the ordered
application or applications during installation. When the module is installed
at your site, you must enter a keycode to activate the correct application or
applications before you can configure the new module. You also need a
keycode anytime you upgrade to a new software release.
A keycode consists of 20 alphanumeric characters divided into five groups
of four characters each. This keycode is obtained from Northern Telecom
and defines the features and hardware configuration purchased by the
customer. A keycode label is attached to your application tape, and a label
is provided as a loose item. If you require new features or capacities, you
must obtain a new keycode.
In each system operation, the software prompts the operator for the
appropriate group of alphanumeric characters within the keycode necessary
to perform that operation. Keycodes are matched to serial numbers, and
only one keycode is necessary to perform multiple system operations. The
system software compares the parameters that the keycode defines with the
new configuration and the serial number during a system operation. If an
exact match is not found, the keycode will not work and will be rejected.
If the keycode is rejected, you may reenter the keycode (if it was entered
incorrectly) or reboot the system into service, because the system has not
been altered during the attempt to use the rejected keycode. However, if a
keycode is rejected during conversion, you must either complete the
operation or restore the old operating system. For more information, refer to
Chapter 14, ÒSoftware installation, upgrade, and update procedures.Ó
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1: Meridian Link/CCR co-residency 5
Ethernet LAN-based PC
Meridian Link and CCR co-residency also provides support for an Ethernet
LAN-based PC. This networking service is included for all Meridian Link
and CCR customers.
Note: Support for an Ethernet LAN-based PC should not be confused
with support for an Ethernet LAN-based host. For more information on
Ethernet LAN-based host connections, refer to ÒEthernet LAN-based
hostÓ in Chapter 2, ÒOverview of Meridian Link.Ó
This feature allows users to log in to an IPE Module or Application Module,
and work with CCR scripts or perform OA&M tasks remotely from a PC.
To use this feature, a local area network (LAN) must be installed between
the Ethernet LAN-based PC and the Meridian Link/CCR IPE Module or
Application Module. Each node must have the Network Service Extension
(NSE) software running to provide TCP/IP (Transmission Control
Protocol/Internet Protocol) service.
Although this feature is designed to meet CCR requirements, it provides a
networking option for the Meridian Link application. With the minimum
configuration offered by Northern Telecom, Meridian Link customers may
use the Ethernet LAN-based PC to perform administrative tasks remotely.
The Ethernet LAN-based PC connection is compatible with IEEE802.3
Ethernet Standards and Ethernet II Standards using 10-based T, 10-based 2,
10-based 5, and fiber optics.
Ethernet support is automatically enabled during application installation. All
NSE files will be loaded to the hard disk, but only those customers who
purchased the service option will be able to configure the NSE. To
configure the NSE, see Procedure 8 in Chapter 14, ÒSoftware installation,
upgrade, and update procedures.Ó
Note: If you do not intend to provide an Ethernet LAN-based PC on
your system, you should disable this support during application
installation (you do this by entering the appropriate keycode). By
disabling LAN-based PC support, you increase the processing power
available to Meridian Link and CCR.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6
Chapter 1: Meridian Link/CCR co-residency
The Ethernet LAN-based PC must
¥
¥
¥
¥
be fully compatible with an IBM PC (AT or higher)
have a 20-Mbyte hard disk or larger
have 1 Mbyte of RAM with at least 384 Kbytes free
contain an Ethernet LAN adapter card that is ODI, NDIS, ASI, or
packet driver compatible
¥
have a VGA or EGA color monitor and card with at least a 256-Kbyte
buffer
The PC must contain
¥
¥
Microsoft MS-DOS, Version 5.0 or higher
FTP Software Inc.Õs PC/TCP for DOS 2.05 or higher
In addition, the PC must contain one of the following terminal emulation
packages:
¥
Walker, Richer & Quinn Inc.Õs Reflection 2 for Windows (version 4.11
or later) with Telnet Connect for PC (version 1.1 or later)
¥
¥
FTP Software Inc.Õs Wtnvt program (version 2.3 or later)
Wollongong GroupÕs Pathway Access for Windows 3.0
Note: Windows applications also require Microsoft Windows; refer to
the Windows application for the version required.
Northern Telecom has tested and supports the following LAN adapter cards:
¥
¥
¥
3COM Etherlink II/MC
3COM Etherlink II
3COM Etherlink III
Other cards supported by FTP Software Inc.Õs PC/TCP Kernel for DOS 2.05
or higher and compliant with Industry Standard Open Driver Specifications
may also work.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1: Meridian Link/CCR co-residency 7
For Ethernet LAN support, Application Modules must contain:
¥
¥
¥
¥
an MVME167-02 SBC card
an MVME712M transition card
a generic I/O panel
NT7D47DA and NT7D47EA cables
For more information about installing the NT7D47DA and NT7D47EA
cables, refer to Procedure 28: Installing the cables for Ethernet LAN support
(Application Module) in Chapter 17, ÒHardware upgrade.Ó
For more information about the MVME167-02 card, the MVME712M
transition card, and the generic I/O panel, refer to Chapter 4,
ÒMeridian Link/CCR hardware.Ó
If an IPE Module or an Application Module is removed from the network,
the remaining modules and PCs that used to have access must be informed
of the disconnection. How to remove the IPE Module or Application
Module entry from the accessing database depends on the TCP/IP software
used on the PC.
When you disconnect the IPE Module or Application Module from the
network, you must use the maint command stopNSE to disable the NSE
software, or error messages will appear on the system console.
Module address and module name
Meridian Link allows a personal computer connected to an Ethernet LAN to
be used as a maintenance terminal for an IPE Module or Application
Module also connected to the LAN. To use this feature, you must tell
Meridian Link
¥
where the IPE Module or Application Module is located in the network
(the module address)
¥
how the IPE Module or the Application Module can be identified (the
module name)
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8
Chapter 1: Meridian Link/CCR co-residency
The module address is a 4-byte (32-bit) address expressed as four decimal
numbers separated by dots (such as 123.45.68.8). The module name can
have as many as eight alphanumeric characters.
See your network administrator for more information on creating a module
address and a module name.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9
Chapter 2: Overview of Meridian Link
Meridian Link is an application that allows a Meridian 1 system to
exchange information with a host computer so that users can integrate the
capabilities of both into a business application. An order desk clerk, for
example, can see information about an incoming call (for example, the
callerÕs name, address, and calling history) on a computer screen while the
telephone is still ringing.
An optional connection to a Meridian Mail system enables the host to
control voice-processing applications. For example, the host application can
intercept a call and ask the caller for information before routing the call to
the appropriate order desk.
Principal hardware components used by Meridian Link are
¥
¥
¥
a Meridian 1 system
a computer or network of computers that runs the business application
an Intelligent Peripheral Equipment (IPE) Module or an Application
Module, which contains the Meridian Link application
¥
(optionally) a Meridian Mail system, to provide voice processing if
required
Figure 2 shows the hardware components for an IPE Module, while
Figure 3 shows the hardware components for the Application Module.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10 Chapter 2: Overview of Meridian Link
Figure 2
Meridian Link hardware connections (IPE Module)
Telephone
Network
Meridian 1
Universal
Equipment
Module (UEM)
Meridian Mail
Command and
Status Link (CSL)
Meridian IVR
AM
Meridian Mail
Link (MML)
Application Module
Link (AML)
AML
Meridian Link
IPE Module (or AM)
T
Ethernet
(LAN)
Host Link
(X.25)
Meridian Link/CCR
Co-residency
AML
Host Link
(TCP/IP)
IPE Module (or AM)
Host computer
Remote system console
Host Link
(TCP/IP)
Host Link (X.25)
Redundant
Meridian Link/CCR
Co-residency
Host computer
IPE Module (or AM)
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2: Overview of Meridian Link 11
Figure 3
Meridian Link hardware connections (Application Module)
Meridian 1 Universal
Equipment Module (UEM)
Meridian Mail
Command and
Status Link (CSL)
optional
Meridian 1
OA&M access
Application
Module Link
(AML)
Meridian Mail
Link (MML)
Host computer
Application Equipment
Module (AEM)
to optional
modem
Telephone
network
Meridian Link
(X.25 or TCP/IP)
Meridian Link
Module
Modem
System console
Remote
system console
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12 Chapter 2: Overview of Meridian Link
Connecting these hardware components requires two (optionally three)
signaling links:
¥
Link 0 is an Application Module Link (AML), which connects the
Meridian 1 system to the IPE Module or the Application Module.
¥
Link 1 is a Host Link (or Meridian Link), which connects the host
computer to the IPE Module or the Application Module. This Host Link
can be implemented as a dedicated X.25 link supporting a single host
computer or as a TCP/IP Ethernet LAN link supporting as many as 16
Meridian Link applications.
Note 1: If both the Meridian Link (using TCP/IP) and CCR
applications are running, the Meridian Link third-party application can
support only up to 15 Meridian Link applications.
Note 2: Any mlusr administration sessions requiring association IDs
will reduce the number of association IDs available for Meridian Link
applications. For example, if your system has eight association IDs
registered to Meridian Link applications and then you register two
association IDs for mlusr administration, your system will have six
association IDs available (five, if CCR is running).
Note: If you have registered all 16 association IDs (15 if CCR is
running) to Meridian Link applications, two overflow association IDs
are available for mlusr administration only.
¥
Link 2 is (optionally) a Meridian Mail Link (MML), which connects a
Meridian Mail system to the IPE Module or the Application Module.
In addition, the IPE Module and the Application Module provide an
interface for a system console, which enables you to perform administration
and maintenance. A port that is designed to be connected to a modem
allows you to perform these activities from a remote location.
The key software required to make these hardware components and links
work together is the Meridian Link application, which resides in the IPE
Module or Application Module.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2: Overview of Meridian Link 13
Meridian Link application
The Meridian Link application enables a host computer to control and
monitor telephone functions, such as making a call, answering a call,
tracking calls as they move through the Meridian 1 system, and conducting
Interactive Voice Response (IVR) sessions with a call.
To provide the required communication, Meridian Link passes messages
back and forth between a host computer and the Meridian 1 system, and
between a host computer and Meridian Mail system, through the Meridian
Link application in the IPE Module or the Application Module.
A customer application can use Meridian Link messages to
¥
monitor calls presented to, answered at, and released from phone sets,
including Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) agents
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
set an agentÕs state (login, MSB, RDY)
set CFWD (call forward all calls) for an associated set (AST)
toggle a telephone message indicator (MWI)
monitor the activity of an associated set
make, answer, and release calls on behalf of an associated set
transfer and set up conference calls on behalf of associated sets and
AST ACD agents
¥
control the routing of a call based on the number dialed (Dialed
Number Identification Service or DNIS) or the number from which the
call is placed (Automatic Number Identification or ANI, Calling Line
Identification or CLID), the time of day, the incoming trunk, and so on
¥
control a Host Enhanced Voice Processing (HEVP) session to play
voice prompts and collect Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) touch-
tone digits to read the callerÕs response
Operating system overview
The IPE Module and the Application Module provide the base operating
system (BOS) software. BOS is release 3 version 7.1 of UNIX System V for
68000-family CPUs. For advanced users, the BOS tape contains online
operating-system information in the form of manual (MAN) pages.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14 Chapter 2: Overview of Meridian Link
New with Meridian Link Release 5C
The Meridian Link Release 5C introduces the following new features:
redundant Meridian Link
dual VAS ID
¥
¥
¥
¥
expanded DNIS support
SFN (login) message with agent ID
Redundant Meridian Link This feature implements a second Meridian
Link between the Meridian 1 and the host to increase the reliability of the
CTI interface. In normal operation, one of the Meridian Link modules is
active while the other is in warm standby mode. In the event of a failure (for
example, the AML goes down or the active Meridian Link crashes), a
switch-over to the redundant Meridian Link occurs automatically.
Dual VAS ID Meridian Mail (MMail) and Meridian Link communicate with
Meridian 1 through the Application Module Link (AML). In the ACD Data
Block, we associate the MMail ACD-DN with MMail through a VAS ID for
the corresponding AML. AML is defined per ACD DN basis. Currently,
only one VAS ID (for MMail) can be associated to an MMail ACD-DN.
Hence AML messages are communicated only to the MMail for any event
on MMail ports. The Dual VAS ID feature offers the facility to have MMail
and Meridian Link to be associated with an MMail ACD-DN so that AML
messages would flow to both MMail and Meridian Link.
Expanded DNIS support This feature allows an ACD agent to identify a
particular product the caller is interested in via the dialed number presented
to the agent. A third party application uses this DNIS number to display
product information on an agent's screen enabling the agent to answer the
call with correct responses. With Meridian Link 5C, up to 31 DNIS digits
are supported. X11 Release 24 is required to support greater than a seven-
digit DNIS. Prior to Release 24, only seven digits were supported.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2: Overview of Meridian Link 15
SFN (login) message with agent ID This feature sends an unsolicited
message to the host application when an AST/Acquired agent logs in by
manually pressing the MSB key on the ACD set or by invoking the ACD set
feature through the Set Feature Invocation (Login) message. The existing
SFN Login message has been enhanced to provide an optional four-digit
Agent ID at the time of logging, enabling the agent to log in at different
positions.
Note: X11 Release 24 is required to support this feature.
Link overview
Although Meridian Link effectively provides a single link between the host
computer and the Meridian 1 system, from an administrative and
maintenance standpoint there are actually three links.
Link 0 The link between the IPE Module or Application Module and
Meridian 1 is called link 0 or Application Module Link (AML).
Link 1 The link between the IPE Module or Application Module and the
host computer is called link 1, the Host Link, or the Meridian Link.
Link 2 The link between the IPE Module or Application Module and
Meridian Mail is called link 2 or the Meridian Mail Link (MML).
AML and the Host Link (or Meridian Link)
The AML (link 0) uses the LAPB protocol to transfer command and status
messages, primarily to perform call-processing functions. The Host Link or
Meridian Link (link 1) uses an X.25 switched virtual circuit or a TCP/IP
protocol to transfer application messages.
In data communication terms, the Meridian Link interface begins with the
physical (RS-232) layer, upon which the link (LAPB) and network (X.25 or
TCP/IP) layers are established. Messages are then sent across the link
between the host computer and Meridian 1 at the application layer level.
If the link uses an X.25 or TCP/IP connection, the host application
communicates with the Meridian 1 switch using Meridian Link formatted
messages.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16 Chapter 2: Overview of Meridian Link
Note: When setting up a redundant Meridian Link, two
communication paths must be set up to two separate Meridian Link
modules. This may involve two X.25 ports or two TCP/IP addresses.
Meridian Mail Link
The MML is an optional asynchronous link that connects the IPE Module or
Application Module to a Meridian Mail system running software version
MM8 (or later) with the Access Enable option. This link allows voice
processing messages to be used.
Diagnostic tools
For diagnosing link problems, you can use the loopback and continuity
commands to test link 0 and link 1. You can also use link traces, system
logs, console messages, and other tools to diagnose hardware, software, and
link problems. For more detailed information on diagnosing problems, refer
to the Application Module and Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Module
Diagnostic and Maintenance Guide (NTP 553-3211-510) and the
Application Module and Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Module
Advanced Maintenance Guide (NTP 553-3211-512).
If you are an advanced technical user of the IPE Module or Application
Module, you have access to the following diagnostic tools, which provide
extra maintenance capabilities:
¥
Remote maintenance access This enables a technician to dial into the
system from a remote site in order to perform troubleshooting
procedures.
¥
Standalone System Interactive Diagnostics (SSID) software This is
for testing many of the hardware components when the application
software is not running.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2: Overview of Meridian Link 17
System console and maintenance console
You can use a customer-supplied console to enter OA&M commands to the
IPE Module or the Application Module. The console should be an
asynchronous ASCII terminal that is 100 percent compatible with ANSI and
DEC VT220. You can use an IBM-compatible personal computer running
Reflection 4+.
An NT1R03D cable connects the customer-supplied console to the IPE
Module. An NT7D61 External I/O cable or a customer-supplied 9-pin-to-
25-pin cable connects the customer-supplied console to the Application
Module. Refer to Chapter 9, ÒMeridian Link/CCR interface cablingÓ for
more information.
If you configure the optional conshare capability available to an IPE
Module or an Application Module, you can access the Meridian 1
input/output programs from the Meridian Link console.
Meridian Link administration and maintenance
As a Meridian Link administrator, you can use commands to do the
following:
¥
enable and disable the link between the host and the IPE Module or the
Application Module (link 1), the link between the IPE Module or the
Application Module and the Meridian 1 (link 0), and the link between
the IPE Module or the Application Module and Meridian Mail (link 2)
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
configure link 0, link 1, and link 2
display the status of a link or all links
display protocol statistics for a link
trace messages flowing on the links
display messages flowing on the links on the system console
filter particular messages
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
18 Chapter 2: Overview of Meridian Link
You can also use commands to do the following:
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
back up and restore configuration and data files
display how much disk space has been used up
verify files
delete files
power down or reset the IPE Module or Application Module
Although the IPE Module and the Application Module arrive with the
software already installed, you can reinstall the software from tapes that are
supplied with the IPE Module or the Application Module (if it is necessary
to replace or reformat the hard disk).
Host support service requirements
The Meridian 1 system requires specific software to be installed in the
Meridian 1, and specific software to be installed in the IPE Module or
Application Module. Messages used by Meridian Link are divided into
related groups, called services in the IPE Module or Application Module.
The services required depend on the type of host computer. For more
specific information, refer to the ÒHostÓ section later in this chapter.
Meridian 1
This section provides overviews of the Meridian 1 hardware and software
required for Meridian Link.
Hardware overview
One of the following system types must be installed and operational:
¥
¥
Meridian 1 system options 11, 11C, 21, 51, 51C, 61, 61C, 71, 81, or
81C (not all system options are supported in all markets)
Meridian SL-1 systems (upgraded) capable of operating on Generic
X11 Release 16, or later, software
The Meridian 1 system must have particular cards installed:
one of the following interface cards for the AML connection:
¥
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2: Overview of Meridian Link 19
Ñ QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface (ESDI) card (vintage G or
later)
Ñ NT6D80 Multi-purpose Serial Data Link (MSDL) card
Ñ (Option 11 only) NTAK02AB Serial Data Interface/D-Channel
Interface (SDI/DCH) card
Ñ If using a redundant Meridian Link, two AML connections are
required.
¥
a Serial Data Interface (SDI) card if conshare capability is desired
Note: Conshare capability, which gives you access to Meridian 1
input/output programs from the Meridian Link console, is
recommended to allow for more effective support for your system.
Option 11 systems support an SDI port on any of the following cards:
Ñ the CPU/CONF card (NTAK01AB)
Ñ the SDI/DCH card (NTAK02AB)
Ñ the TDS/DTR card (NTAK03AB)
¥
¥
for optional voice-processing capability, a Meridian Mail system
limited-distance modems for communications facilities if the IPE
Module or the Application Module is greater than 15 m (50 ft) from the
host computer
An Application Equipment Module (AEM), if present, must be installed in
one of the following configurations:
¥
¥
a stand-alone AEM column or Meridian SL-1 style cabinet
a module in a Meridian 1 column
Refer to Application Equipment Module Installation Guide
(NTP 553-3201-200) for AEM installation procedures.
The following table shows hardware supported for the Meridian Link and
CCR applications.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
20 Chapter 2: Overview of Meridian Link
Table 1
Hardware supported for Meridian Link and CCR
Application
MVME147 AM
MVME167 AM
Yes
IPE Module
Yes
Meridian Link 5C with X.25
Meridian Link 5C with TCP/IP
Meridian Link 5C and CCR 3C
Yes**
No
Yes*
Yes
No
Yes*
Yes
* This configuration is supported provided it is Ethernet accessible.
Upgrading the MVME147 AM with an MVME167 card is not equivalent to
an MVME167 AM therefore Meridian Link 5C using TCP/IP transport is
not supported.
** Refer to the Meridian Link/Customer Controlled Routing Engineering
Guide (NTP 553-3211-520) for details on the MVME147 CPU card.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2: Overview of Meridian Link 21
Software overview
The Meridian 1 must be equipped with the following release of software:
¥
¥
X11 Release 17 or later for Meridian 1 systems using Meridian Link
Release 4
X11 Release 20 or later for all Option 11 systems (X11 Release 18 will
be supported in Europe)
¥
¥
X11 Release 16.82G or later for Options 21Ð81 for international
markets
X11 Release 19 or later for the Host Enhanced Routing, Host Enhanced
Voice Processing, and Unique Call ID features of Meridian Link
Release 4, and for Single Terminal Access (STA) support
¥
¥
X11 Release 23 or later is required to support the Redundant Meridian
Link and Dual VAS ID features
X11 Release 24 or later is required for the Expanded DNIS support and
Agent Login ID features
The following X11 software packages constitute Meridian Link:
¥
For Option 11:
Ñ Advanced Application Software (contains packages 153 and 209)
¥
For Options 21Ð81:
Ñ Application Module (package 209)
Prerequisites for Meridian Link operations are
¥
¥
Meridian Mail Link (package 35)
Command and Status Link (package 77)
These software options may be bundled in various marketing packages that
may vary by market and by X11 software release.
Following is a minimum software requirement compatibility matrix for the
Meridian Link/CCR application.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
22 Chapter 2: Overview of Meridian Link
Table 2
X11 software compatibility matrix
Application
Rls. 17
Rls. 18
Rls. 19
Rls. 20
Rls. 21
Rls. 22-24
Meridian Link 4B
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Meridian Link 4B
and CCR 3B
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Meridian Link 5
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Meridian Link 5
and CCR 3B
Meridian Link 5
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Upissue and CCR 3B
Meridian Link 5C and
CCR 3C
Other software options may be required depending on specific application
needs. These may include options for ISDN and ACD, for example.
For information about software package prerequisites, refer to X11 Features
and Services (NTP 553-3001-305).
Meridian Link does not support pretranslation for outbound calls if the HVS
(Hospitality Voice Services), package 179, is installed.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2: Overview of Meridian Link 23
Host
This section describes the services and software that Meridian Link requires
to support the connection to the host computer. Normally these services are
bundled in marketing packages that may vary by market.
Meridian Link service requirements
Meridian Link requires specific software services to be installed in the IPE
Module or Application Module to support the host connection. The services
required depend on the type of host computer.
X.25 and TCP/IP services are compatible with commonly available host
computers (including those from Hewlett Packard, IBM Corporation, and
Tandem Corporation). At least one of the following services is required:
Ñ Inbound Call Management (service 97) supports inbound call
applications such as telemarketing and customer service (includes
transfer and conference). This service does not support outbound
applications.
Ñ Outbound Call Management (service 98) supports outbound call
applications such as power or predictive dialing (includes transfer and
conference). This service does not support inbound applications.
Ñ Host Enhanced Routing (service 100) supports the RouteRequest and
RouteCall messages, giving the host application the ability to route
incoming calls.
Ñ Host Enhanced Voice Processing (service 101) supports voice-
processing capability for applications.
Service No.
Description
95
Obsolete
96
Obsolete
97
Inbound Call Management
Outbound Call Management
Host Enhanced Routing
Host Enhanced Voice Processing
98
100
101
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
24 Chapter 2: Overview of Meridian Link
Host connection considerations
The link to the host computer should be installed and configured following
the host manufacturerÕs recommendations. The host may establish one of
the following, depending on the type of host computer:
¥
an X.25 Switched Virtual Circuit (SVC) connection over a serial
RS-232 (up to 19.2 kbps) physical interface
¥
TCP/IP connection over an Ethernet LAN
If the host computer is located more than 15 m (50 ft) from the IPE Module
or Application Module with an RS-232 connection, limited-distance
modems must be used at each end to carry the data signal (using standard
data communication techniques). You may select and install limited-
distance modems to connect the host computer and the IPE Module or
Application Module. Nortel neither supplies nor recommends a particular
make or model of modem for this purpose. If diagnostic activities indicate
that problems exist with the modems, Nortel support personnel will
recommend that the customer call in service representatives for the modem
equipment.
Note: When setting up a redundant Meridian Link, two host
connections are required, and two AML links must be configured on
the Meridian 1. Also, two communication paths (either two X.25 ports
or two TCP/IP addresses) must be set up to connect with two Meridian
Link modules.
Ethernet LAN-based host
To use an Ethernet LAN-based host computer, a local area network (LAN)
must be installed between an Ethernet LAN-based host computer and the
Meridian Link/CCR IPE Module or Application Module. Each IPE Module
or Application Module must have the Network Service Extension (NSE)
software running to provide TCP/IP service.
The Ethernet LAN-based host connection is compatible with IEEE802.3
Ethernet Standards and Ethernet II Standards using 10-based T, 10-based 2,
10-based 5, and fiber optics.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2: Overview of Meridian Link 25
Ethernet support is automatically enabled during application installation. All
NSE files will be loaded to the hard disk for configuration by the customer
during installation. To configure the NSE, see Procedure 8 in Chapter 14,
ÒSoftware installation, upgrade, and update procedures.Ó
Note: If you do not intend to provide Ethernet LAN-based
communications on your system, you should disable the support during
application installation (you do this by entering the appropriate
keycode). By disabling this support, you increase the processing power
available to Meridian Link and CCR.
For Ethernet LAN support, Application Modules must contain
¥
¥
¥
¥
an MVME167-02 SBC card
an MVME712M transition card
a generic I/O panel
NT7D47DA and NT7D47EA cables
For more information about installing the NT7D47DA and NT7D47EA
cables, refer to Procedure 28: Installing the cables for Ethernet LAN support
in Chapter 17, ÒHardware upgrade.Ó
For more information about the MVME167-02 card, the MVME712M
transition card, and the generic I/O panel, refer to Chapter 4,
ÒMeridian Link/CCR hardware.Ó
If an IPE Module or an Application Module is removed from the network,
the remaining modules and PCs that used to have access must be informed
of the disconnection. How to remove the IPE Module or Application
Module entry from the accessing database depends on the TCP/IP software
used on the PC.
When you disconnect the IPE Module or Application Module from the
network, you must use the maint command stopNSE to disable the NSE
software, or error messages will appear on the system console. For more
information on the stopNSE command, refer to the Application Module and
Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Module Diagnostic and Maintenance
Guide (NTP 553-3211-510).
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
26 Chapter 2: Overview of Meridian Link
Meridian Mail software requirements
A Meridian Mail system can be connected to the IPE Module or Application
Module to provide voice-processing capability to an application based on
Meridian Link. The link between the IPE Module or Application Module
and the Meridian Mail system is called the Meridian Mail Link (MML).
The Meridian Mail system must be equipped with Release 8 (or later)
software with the Access Enable option, and Meridian 1 must be equipped
with X11 Release 19 (or later) software.
Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M)
The IPE Module and the Application Module also provide a basic
Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) command interface,
which allows you to perform functions such as the following:
¥
access and configure applications (start or stop applications, configure
the application to start automatically and enter the application interface)
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
power down the system safely
schedule and perform system backup and restore operations
run diagnostics
change user passwords
run traces on links
access the Meridian 1 console, if console-sharing capability is
configured
¥
look at system information (system version, system logs)
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
27
Chapter 3: Overview of Customer
Controlled Routing
Customer Controlled Routing (CCR) is a product that enables you to control
and route Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) calls entering your Meridian 1
system. For example, for an incoming ACD call, you can provide a specific
recorded announcement, music, or both, before assigning the call to an
agent.
Principal hardware components used by CCR are
¥
¥
a Meridian 1 system
an Application Module or Intelligent Peripheral Equipment (IPE)
Module (which contains the CCR application, service 99)
Connecting these hardware components is a signaling link called the
Application Module Link (AML), sometimes referred to as a Command and
Status Link (CSL).
In addition, the IPE Module or Application Module provides an interface
for a system console, which enables you to perform administration and
maintenance. A port that is designed to be connected to a modem allows
you to perform these activities from a remote location.
CCR also provides for as many as three terminals or printers on an IPE
Module (depending on the applications installed) or eight terminals or
printers on an Application Module. You can increase the number of
terminals by adding LAN-based PCs.
Figures 4 and 5 show how these hardware components are connected.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
28 Chapter 3: Overview of Customer Controlled Routing
Figure 4
CCR hardware connections (IPE Module)
PC using
Reflection 4+
Printer
LAN
Printer
Meridian 1
AML
Cable
NT1R03AA
Cable
NT1R03BA
Terminal
Maintenance
Console
IPE Module installed in a Meridian 1
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3: Overview of Customer Controlled Routing 29
Figure 5
CCR hardware connections (Application Module)
Remote
Diagnostics
PC using
Reflection 4+
Meridian 1
AML
Printer
Maintenance
Console
PC using
Reflection 4+
LAN
Application Module installed in a Meridian 1
The key software required to make these hardware components and links
work together is the CCR application, which resides in the IPE Module or
the Application Module.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
30 Chapter 3: Overview of Customer Controlled Routing
CCR application
CCR works with the Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) feature on your
Meridian 1 to give you more control over the handling of incoming calls.
Each call coming through an ACD queue can be given individualized
handling and treatment. CCR provides specialized treatments for different
types of calls and, at the same time, pools your ACD resources to best
handle your call load.
CCR accomplishes this using a special kind of ACD Directory Number
(DN) called a Control DN (CDN), which is assigned to each incoming call.
Each CDN defined in Meridian 1 can have a unique series of call-handling
instructions applied to it. These instructions are contained in a script, which
is maintained using the CCR application.
The script determines how a call will be routed to the appropriate
destination and how that call is treated while waiting in an ACD queue.
Scripts can be as simple or as sophisticated as your application requires and
are not limited to a specific number of steps.
Using a script, you can, for example
¥
simultaneously queue a call to as many as eight ACD DNs, also
referred to as ACD queues
¥
¥
simultaneously assign a call a different priority level for each queue
change priority levels, depending on special conditions such as the age
of the call
¥
¥
define recorded announcements, music, or both, for incoming calls
determine how long a customer must wait before some action is taken
An example of CCR call handling
A customer service organization typically receives calls from a number of
different types of users. The organization may have different products that
they sell and support, and they may also have an elite client list to which
they provide special services.
These requirements can be handled using a single script that contains the
following types of instructions:
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3: Overview of Customer Controlled Routing 31
¥
For elite clients Any incoming call coming from telephone number
XXX or YYY goes into the ACD queue with a higher priority (using
the Calling Line Identification, or CLID, feature).
¥
¥
¥
Sales for all products Any incoming call to DN 1234 goes into the
ACD queue for the sales group.
Support for product X Any incoming call to DN 2345 goes into the
ACD queue for the product X support group.
Support for product Y Any incoming call to DN 3456 receives a
recorded announcement (RAN) regarding new product information
before going into the ACD queue for the product Y support group.
Key CCR concepts
This section describes terms used for CCR.
Script This is a collection of statements defining call routing and treatment.
CDN A Control DN is a special ACD DN, configured in Meridian 1, to
which no agents are assigned. You must create a script to control calls in the
CDN, otherwise the calls are put into the default mode. A script is
associated with a CDN, so all calls entering a CDN are handled by the same
script.
Association This is a mapping between a script and CDNs. The
Association Table tells the system which script controls the calls entering a
CDN.
Variable This is a user-defined name that represents a value or set of
values. Variables, such as Òafter_hoursÓ representing the value Ò17:00 to
06:00,Ó are defined in the Variable Table.
Profile All CCR application users have a profile that defines their level of
access to the system and the language they will use (French or English).
Operating system
The IPE Module and Application Module provide base operating system
(BOS) software. BOS is release 3 version 7.1 of UNIX System V for 68000-
family CPUs. For advanced users, BOS contains online operating system
information in the form of manual (MAN) pages.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
32 Chapter 3: Overview of Customer Controlled Routing
New with CCR Release 3C
CCR Release 3C introduces the following new features:
expanded DNIS support
support for 8 "Queue to" commands
¥
¥
Expanded DNIS support CCR can route and treat calls based on the DNIS.
With CCR Release 5C, the DNIS digits supported have been expanded from
seven digits to a maximum of 31 digits. X11 Release 24 is required to
support more than seven digits.
Support for 8 "Queue to" commands" This feature allows a call waiting
for an available agent to be queued to up to eight different queues
simultaneously. A call can be queued at each of the eight ACD DNs at the
same priority or at different priorities, offering better customer service due
to faster response times.
Application Module Link
The Application Module Link (AML) (link 0) uses the LAPB protocol to
transfer command and status messages, primarily to perform call processing
functions.
Diagnostic tools
Advanced technical users of the IPE Module or Application Module have
access to the following diagnostic tools, which provide extra maintenance
capabilities:
¥
Remote maintenance access This enables a technician to dial in to the
system from a remote site to perform troubleshooting procedures.
¥
Standalone System Interactive Diagnostics (SSID) software This is
used for testing hardware components when CCR is not running.
System console and maintenance console
You can use a customer-supplied console to enter OA&M commands to the
IPE Module or Application Module. The console should be an
asynchronous ASCII terminal that is 100 percent compatible with ANSI and
DEC VT220. You can use an IBM-compatible personal computer running
Reflection 4+.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3: Overview of Customer Controlled Routing 33
An NT1R03D cable connects the customer-supplied console to the IPE
Module. An NT7D61 External I/O cable or a customer-supplied 9-pin-to-
25-pin cable connects the customer-supplied console to the Application
Module. Refer to Chapter 9, ÒMeridian Link/CCR interface cablingÓ for
more information.
If you configure the optional conshare capability available to the IPE
Module or Application Module, you can access the Meridian 1 input/output
programs from the CCR console.
CCR administration and maintenance
CCR provides an interface for a system console user and as many as eight
other terminal users at one time. All users have access to basic OA&M
commands and to the CCR application itself. But only one user can create,
edit, install, associate, and access CCR data at a time.
CCR employs a full-screen, menu-driven interface that allows you to
¥
¥
¥
set up and maintain profiles for CCR application users
create, modify, and verify scripts
set up and maintain a list of variables that are used within scripts to
make script maintenance easier
¥
set up and maintain associations between scripts and the CDNs defined
on Meridian 1
Consoles/printers
In addition to the system console, CCR can support as many as eight
terminals or printers. The additional terminals allow as many as eight
application users to have access to the CCR user interface at the same time,
although only one user can change CCR data at a time.
Note: The IPE Module can support only a maximum of three
terminals or printers; only two if CCR is co-resident with Meridian
Link. However, you can increase the number of terminals by adding
LAN-based PCs.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
34 Chapter 3: Overview of Customer Controlled Routing
Meridian 1
This section provides overviews of the Meridian 1 hardware and software
required for CCR.
Hardware overview
One of the following system types must be installed and operational:
¥
Meridian 1 system options 21, 51, 61, 71, or 81 (not all system options
are supported in all markets)
¥
¥
Meridian 1 system option 11
Meridian SL-1 systems (upgraded) capable of operating on generic X11
Release 17, or later, software
The Meridian 1 system must be up and running, and have the following
hardware installed:
¥
one of the following interface cards:
Ñ QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface (ESDI) card (vintage G or
later)
Ñ NT6D80 Multi-purpose Serial Data Link (MSDL) card
Ñ (Option 11 only) NTAK02AB Serial Data Interface/D-Channel
Interface (SDI/DCH) card
¥
a Serial Data Interface (SDI) card if conshare capability is desired
Note: Conshare capability, which gives you access to Meridian 1
input/output programs from the IPE Module or Application Module
console, is highly recommended to allow for more effective support for
your system. If you want to access Meridian 1 and up to three other
applications, the Single Terminal Access (STA) feature is available
with X11 release 19 and greater. For more information on STA, refer to
Chapter 19, ÒSingle Terminal Access.Ó
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3: Overview of Customer Controlled Routing 35
Option 11 systems support an SDI port on any of the following cards:
Ñ the CPU/CONF card (NTAK01AB)
Ñ the SDI/DCH card (NTAK02AB)
Ñ the TDS/DTR card (NTAK03AB)
¥
limited-distance modems for communications facilities if the IPE
Module or Application Module is greater than 15 m (50 ft) from the
Meridian 1 or peripheral devices, such as terminals and printers
An Application Equipment Module (AEM), if present, must be installed in
one of the following configurations:
¥
as a stand-alone AEM column (the configuration used with Meridian
SL-1 style cabinets)
¥
as a module in a Meridian 1 column
Refer to Application Equipment Module Installation Guide
(NTP 553-3201-200) for AEM installation procedures.
The following table shows hardware supported for the Meridian Link and
CCR applications.
Table 3
Hardware supported for Meridian Link and CCR
Application
MVME147 AM
MVME167 AM
Yes
IPE Module
Yes
CCR 3C
Meridian Link 5C and CCR 3C
No
No
Yes*
Yes
* This configuration is supported provided it is Ethernet accessible.
Upgrading the MVME147 AM with an MVME167 card is not equivalent to
an MVME167 AM therefore Meridian Link 5C using TCP/IP transport is
not supported.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
36 Chapter 3: Overview of Customer Controlled Routing
Software overview
The Meridian 1 must be equipped with one of the following software
releases:
¥
¥
Customer Controlled Routing: X11 Release 17 or later (Release 20 for
all Option 11 systems) or X81
Customer Controlled Routing with access to Interactive Voice
Response (IVR) applications: X11 Release 18 (or later)
Following is a minimum software requirement compatibility matrix for the
Meridian Link/CCR application.
Table 4
X11 software compatibility matrix
Application
Rls. 17
Rls. 18
Rls. 19
Rls. 20
Rls. 21
Rls. 22-24
Meridian Link 4B
and CCR 3B
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
CCR 3B
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Meridian Link 5
and CCR 3B
Meridian Link 5
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Upissue and CCR 3B
Meridian Link 5C and
CCR 3C
The following software packages (and their prerequisites) are required for
Customer Controlled Routing:
¥
¥
¥
¥
Basic ACD (packages 40, 41, and 45)
Command and Status Link (CSL) (package 77)
Enhanced ACD Routing (package 214)
Customer Controlled Routing (package 215)
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3: Overview of Customer Controlled Routing 37
¥
¥
Interactive Voice Response (package 218) if the Hold In Queue for IVR
feature is to be used
Call ID (package 247) (requires X11 Release 19 or later)
The following software packages (and their prerequisites) are optional for
Customer Controlled Routing:
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
Dialed Number Identification Service (package 98)
Automatic Call Distribution Package C (package 42)
ACD Load Management (package 43)
Automatic Call Distribution Package D (package 50)
ACD Package D Auxiliary Link Processor (package 51)
Integrated Services Digital Network Signaling (package 145)
ISDN Primary Rate Access (package 146)
ISDN Signaling Link (package 147)
Multi-use Serial Data Link (package 222)
For information about software package prerequisites, refer to X11 Features
and Services (NTP 553-3001-305).
CCR may take advantage of many other software packages if they are
installed and configured.
Single Terminal Access (STA)
Single Terminal Access allows a single terminal (an STA terminal) to be
used as a maintenance terminal for the Meridian 1 system and for any
subsystem connected to it (including an IPE Module or an Application
Module) to perform all OA&M functions. For more information, refer to
Chapter 19, ÒSingle Terminal Access.Ó
The STA feature is supported on
¥
¥
an IPE Module connected to a Meridian 1 Options 21Ð81 system
an Application Module with an MVME167 card
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
38 Chapter 3: Overview of Customer Controlled Routing
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
39
Chapter 4: Meridian Link/CCR hardware
Meridian Link and CCR hardware consists of either an IPE Module or an
Application Module. This chapter describes both of these modules.
Note: If you require a redundant Meridian Link, an additional
Meridian Link Module (either an IPE Module or an Application
Module) must be installed.
Both the IPE Module and the Application Module use a base operating
system (BOS), which supports Meridian Link and CCR. BOS is release 3
version 7.1 of UNIX System V for 68000-family CPUs. For advanced users
who need more information, BOS provides operating system information in
the form of online manual (MAN) pages.
IPE Module
The IPE Module can be installed in a Meridian 1 Option 11 main cabinet or
expansion cabinet, or in a Meridian 1 Options 21Ð81 IPE shelf.
In a Meridian 1 Option 11 system, the IPE Module occupies three
consecutive slots in the main cabinet (Figure 6) or expansion cabinet
(Figure 7). Those three slots must not include slot 1 (reserved for the
SDI/TDS [NTAK03AA] card) or slots 10Ð12 in the main cabinet (reserved
for Meridian Mail).
Power for the IPE Module comes from the cabinetÕs IPE backplane and
consists of +5 V and Ð48 V.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
40 Chapter 4: Meridian Link/CCR hardware
Figure 6 illustrates the IPE Module occupying slots 5Ð7 of the Option 11
main cabinet. Figure 7 illustrates the IPE Module occupying slots 14Ð16 of
the expansion cabinet.
Figure 6
Option 11 main cabinet
Meridian 1
Pwr
AC/DC Pwr
Meridian Link
SCSI
Power
supply
Meridian Mail
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Connector
panel
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4: Meridian Link/CCR hardware 41
Figure 7
Option 11 expansion cabinet
Meridian 1
AC/DC Pwr
Meridian Link
SCSI
Power
supply
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Connector
panel
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
42 Chapter 4: Meridian Link/CCR hardware
Connector panel and I/O connectors (Option 11)
Underneath each cabinet of the Option 11 is a connector panel with ten
numbered connector ports. Each connector port connects to the
corresponding numbered slot directly above it, inside the cabinet. Figure 8
shows the connector panel for the main cabinet, and Figure 9 shows the
connector panel for the expansion cabinet.
The I/O connectors for the IPE Module installed in an Option 11 system are
standard, shielded, 50-pin tip-ring-type connector ports on the connector
panel, which is located under the cabinet containing the module. The
connector ports used depend on the slots occupied by the IPE Module.
Tables 5 and 6 show the connector ports used for each possible location of
the IPE Module. Figure 6 shows the IPE Module installed in slots 5, 6, and
7 of an Option 11 main cabinet. Table 5 shows that the cables are connected
to connector ports J5 and J7.
Figure 8
Option 11 connector panel (main cabinet)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
¥
Table 5
Option 11 IPE Module connectors used (main cabinet)
Slots occupied by IPE Module
Connector ports used
2, 3, 4
3, 4, 5
4, 5, 6
5, 6, 7
6, 7, 8
7, 8, 9
J2 and J4
J3 and J5
J4 and J6
J5 and J7
J6 and J8
J7 and J9
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4: Meridian Link/CCR hardware 43
Figure 9
Option 11 connector panel (expansion cabinet)
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
¥
Table 6
Option 11 IPE Module connectors used (expansion cabinet)
Slots occupied by IPE Module
11, 12, 13
Connector ports used
J11 and J13
12, 13, 14
J12 and J14
13, 14, 15
J13 and J15
14, 15, 16
15, 16, 17
16, 17, 18
17, 18, 19
18, 19, 20
J14 and J16
J15 and J17
J16 and J18
J17 and J19
J18 and J20
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
44 Chapter 4: Meridian Link/CCR hardware
IPE Module Options 21Ð81
In a Meridian 1 Options 21Ð81 system, the IPE Module occupies four
consecutive slots on an IPE shelf (Figure 10). Power for the IPE Module
comes from the shelfÕs IPE backplane and consists of +5 V and Ð48 V.
Figure 10
Options 21Ð81 cabinet
!
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
TP
!
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4: Meridian Link/CCR hardware 45
Connector panel and I/O connectors (Options 21Ð81)
The I/O connectors for the IPE Module installed in an Options 21Ð81 IPE
shelf are standard, shielded, 50-pin tip-ring-type connectors on one of the
I/O panels in the rear of the IPE shelf containing the module. Each panel has
ten connector ports. The I/O panel and connector ports used depend on the
slots occupied by the IPE Module. Figure 11 shows the connector ports used
for an IPE Module installed in slots 0Ð3 of an NT8D37 shelf. This figure is
illustrative only; for specific information about the relationship between
slots and connector ports, refer to Chapter 9, ÒMeridian Link/CCR interface
cabling.Ó
Note: Older CE/PE or IPE shelves (vintages AA and DC) do not have
fully cabled backplanes. They have one and a half cards per cable and
therefore you must reroute backplane cables inside the CE/PE or IPE
shelves before installing the IPE Module. For more information, refer
to the section on ÒBackplane cable rerouting for Options 21Ð81 CE/PE
and IPE backplanesÓ in Chapter 9, ÒMeridian Link/CCR interface
cabling.Ó
Figure 11
Options 21Ð81 IPE Module connectors (rear view)
50-Pin connector
NT1R03BA
L
K
B
A
S
R
N
M
F
E
D
C
U
T
H
G
NT1R03AA
Ethernet
IPE backplane
Left I/O panel
Right I/O panel
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
46 Chapter 4: Meridian Link/CCR hardware
IPE Module components
The IPE Module (Figure 12) contains an SMM167 single board computer
(SBC) card, a 240-Mbyte disk drive, a 600-Mbyte tape drive, and a CPU
adapter card. Only the IPE Module as a whole is field-replaceable.
SMM167 single board computer (SBC) card
This card, one of the Motorola MVME167 family, consists of the following:
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
MC68040 microprocessor operating at 25 MHz
16 Mbytes of dynamic random access memory (DRAM)
MC68882 floating point coprocessor
shared dynamic random access memory (DRAM) with parity
time-of-day clock and calendar with battery backup
128 kbytes of static random access memory (SRAM)
The SBC card provides the following interfaces:
¥
Small Computer Systems Interface (SCSI) bus interface with direct
memory access (DMA) channel to control the disk/tape unit
¥
¥
eight serial I/O ports with EIA-232-D buffers
Ethernet transceiver interface
The SMM167 card is not field-replaceable.
The distance between the IPE Module and the terminals must be 15 m
(50 ft) or less due to the restriction of the RS-232 connections. Any
distances over 30 m (100 ft) require a limited-distance modem. See
Chapter 11, ÒPeripheral device cabling interfaceÓ later in this guide.
IPE Module faceplate
The IPE Module faceplate contains a SCSI connector, four light-emitting
diodes (LEDs), and three switches, as illustrated in Figure 12.
The SCSI connector must contain a SCSI terminator.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4: Meridian Link/CCR hardware 47
The LEDs show the following conditions:
¥
¥
PWR indicator This green LED is lit when power is turned on.
Run indicator This yellow LED is lit almost continuously when an
application is running, but flickers every few seconds.
¥
¥
SCSI indicator This yellow LED is lit almost continuously when in
use. The intensity varies according to the amount of data movement.
Fail indicator This red LED is lit continuously when a hardware
failure occurs on the SBC card. It is normal for this indicator to flash
while diagnostics are being run (after power-on or during rebooting).
The switches perform the following functions:
¥
Power pushbutton This pushbutton turns power on and off the IPE
Module.
¥
ABORT button This button, when pressed, stops program execution
and returns control to the debugger. Do not press this button. If you
accidentally press it, all software operations will stop and you will be in
the firmware debugger. In this case, press the red RESET button
immediately to reboot the system. Software diagnostics during system
boot will attempt to repair possible file system damage caused by the
non-standard shutdown.
¥
RESET button This button invokes a cold restart. The system performs
a self test and then reboots. Do not press the button while an
application is running. Exit the application and prepare the system for
powering down before pressing the RESET button. If the SBC card is
the system controller, this button also generates a VME bus system
reset. The software powerdown procedure is provided in
Chapter 14, ÒSoftware installation, upgrade, and update procedures.Ó
CAUTION
Risk of data loss
Do not press both the ABORT and RESET buttons at
the same timeÑyou risk losing device configuration
information.
!
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
48 Chapter 4: Meridian Link/CCR hardware
Figure 12
IPE Module
Hard disk
!
Fits to the IPE
backplane for
PWR
RUN
SCSI
power and I/O
External
SCSI connector
SCSI
ABORT
RESET
FAIL
CPU adapter
card
Tape drive
TP
!
SMM167 CPU board
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4: Meridian Link/CCR hardware 49
Tape drive (IPE Module)
The tape drive is a 600-Mbyte cassette tape drive, and cannot be replaced in
the field.
The following tapes are supplied with the IPE Module:
¥
a 155-Mbyte tape that provides the operating system for the IPE
Module
¥
¥
a 155-Mbyte tape that provides the application software
at least one blank tape for backups
Note: As shown in Table 7, the IPE Module cannot write to a
155-Mbyte tape, so you should only use a 600-Mbyte tape for backup.
(You cannot see through the sprocket holes of a 600-Mbyte tape.)
Table 7
Tape usage
Module
600-Mbyte tape
155-Mbyte tape
IPE Module
Read and write operations
(backup and program load)
Read operation only
(program load only)
Application Module with
155-Mbyte tape drive
(NT7D62)
Not compatible
Read and write operations
(backup and program load)
Disk drive (IPE Module)
The disk drive is a 240-Mbyte drive, and cannot be replaced in the field.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
50 Chapter 4: Meridian Link/CCR hardware
Application Module
An Application Module (AM) is a Versa Module Eurocard (VME) platform
that is packaged with the Application Equipment Module (AEM) of a
Meridian 1. The AEM is a modified Universal Equipment Module (UEM),
and can house two separate Application Modules.
The Application Module consists of a VME bus backplane, a single board
computer (SBC) card, one or more I/O cards and corresponding transition
cards, a hard disk and streamer cassette tape unit, and a power supply. The
Application Module chassis measures approximately 35.5 cm (14 in.) high,
32 cm (12-3/4 in.) wide and 32 cm (12-1/2 in.) deep.
An Application Module can co-reside with another Application Module in a
single Application Equipment Module.
If your Application Module contains Meridian Link but not CCR, it is
referred to as a Meridian Link Module and may have one of the five
configurations shown in Table 8. Table 8 shows the upgrade path for each
configuration. Notice that the second and fourth configurations are the first
and third configurations upgraded to an MVME167 card.
If your Application Module contains CCR but not Meridian Link, it is
referred to as a CCR Module and may have one of the five configurations
shown in Table 9. Table 9 shows the upgrade path for each configuration.
Notice that the second and fourth configurations are the first and third
configurations upgraded to an MVME167 card.
Your current module may have other hardware that varies from other
modules (for example, I/O panels, tapes, and disk drives), but these are not
important for determining upgrade paths.
The Application Module allows PC-based Meridian Link and CCR
maintenance consoles, CCR scripting consoles, and LAN-based host
computers to be connected to the Application Module through Ethernet.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4: Meridian Link/CCR hardware 51
Table 8
Hardware upgrade paths for Meridian Link Modules
Meridian Link Module
configuration
Upgrade path to
Release 5C
Supports
co-residency?
Supports
Ethernet LAN?
MVME147 card
None required.
No
No
MVME712AM card
No NT6D51AA card
Internal modem
Possible upgrade to
MVME167 card for
increased performance
(see below).
AC or DC power
MVME167 card
None required.
No
No
(Upgrade from above)
MVME712AM card
No NT6D51AA card
Internal modem
AC or DC power
MVME147 card
MVME712A card
No NT6D51AA card
No internal modem
DC power
None required.
No
No
No
No
Possible upgrade to
MVME167 card for
increased performance
(see below).
MVME167 card
None required.
(Upgrade from above)
MVME712A card
No NT6D51AA card
No internal modem
DC power
MVME167 card
MVME712M card
NT6D51AA card
No internal modem
AC or DC power
None required.
Yes.
Requires an
MVME332 card.
Yes.
Requires
NT7D47DA
internal cable and
NT7D47EA drop
cable.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
52 Chapter 4: Meridian Link/CCR hardware
Table 9
Hardware upgrade paths for CCR Modules
CCR Module
configuration
Upgrade path to
Release 3C
Supports
co-residency?
Supports
Ethernet LAN?
MVME147 card
None required.
Yes.
No
MVME712AM card
MVME332 card
NT6D51AA card
Internal modem
AC or DC power
Possible upgrade to
MVME167 card for
increased performance
(see below).
Requires an
MVME167 card
(see below).
MVME167 card
None required.
Yes
No
(Upgrade from above)
MVME712AM card
MVME332 card
NT6D51AA card
Internal modem
AC or DC power
MVME147 card
MVME712A card
MVME332 card
NT6D51AA card
No internal modem
DC power
None required.
Yes.
No
No
Possible upgrade to
MVME167 card for
increased performance
(see below).
Requires an
MVME167 card
(see below).
MVME167 card
None required.
Yes
(Upgrade from above)
MVME712A card
No MVME332 card
No NT6D51AA card
No internal modem
DC power
MVME167 card
MVME712M card
MVME332 card
NT6D51AA card
No internal modem
AC or DC power
None required.
Yes.
Yes.
Requires
NT7D47DA
internal cable and
NT7D47EA drop
cable.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4: Meridian Link/CCR hardware 53
AEM power
The AEM has an NT7D54AA (for AC power) or NT7D54AB (for DC
power) module power distribution unit (MPDU) on the left side (as you face
the AEM). The top circuit breaker in the MPDU controls power to the left-
side Application Module (closest to the MPDU). The bottom breaker
controls power to the Application Module on the right side of the AEM.
Figure 13 illustrates an AEM viewed from the front.
Note: Only the NT7D54AB (DC power) AEM is available in Europe.
Figure 13
AEMÑfront view
Module Power
Distribution Unit
(MPDU)
Breaker for
left-side module
Application
Module
(left side)
Application
Module
(right side)
Breaker for
right-side module
Note: Either side of the AEM could house the Application Module
running Meridian Link and/or CCR. The other Application Module
could support another application.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
54 Chapter 4: Meridian Link/CCR hardware
CAUTION
Risk of hardware damage
If you want to remove a card from an Application
Module, you must perform the required software and
hardware power-down processes. Hardware can be
damaged if a component is reseated on the VME bus
while the power is on, and the operating system can be
corrupted if the power switch is turned off before the
application performs a shutdown.
!
Application Module components
The Application Module chassis assembly houses the following basic
components (order codes for field-replaceable components are listed in
Chapter 20, ÒOrderingÓ at the end of this guide):
¥
an MVME147SA-1 or an MVME167-03 single board computer (SBC)
card
¥
¥
an MVME333-102 X.25 Communication Controller (XCC) card
an MVME332XTS transition card to support co-residency (present only
if CCR is installed)
¥
¥
¥
an MVME712M, MVME712A or MVME712AM transition card
an MVME705B transition card
an NT6D51AA transition card (required only if an MVME332XTS
card is present)
¥
¥
¥
a P2 adapter board
a slide-in AC or DC power supply
a slide-in disk-tape unit, which could be any of the following:
Ñ NT7D62AA: a 104-Mbyte hard disk drive and a 155-Mbyte tape
drive
Ñ NT7D62AB: a 172-Mbyte or a 180-Mbyte hard disk drive and a
155-Mbyte tape drive
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4: Meridian Link/CCR hardware 55
Ñ NT7D62AC: a 240-Mbyte hard disk drive and a 155-Mbyte tape
drive
¥
¥
¥
¥
a six-slot VME bus backplane
a power sense card
a SCSI bus interface with direct memory access (DMA)
an input/output (I/O) subpanel, a universal I/O panel, or a generic I/O
panel
CAUTION
Risk of system interruption
It is recommended that suitable battery backup or
!
uninterruptible power supply (UPS) be installed so that
applications running on the Application Equipment
Module are not affected by commercial power outages.
As shown in Figure 14, slots in the front of the Application Module house
the power supply, circuit cards, and the disk/tape unit as follows:
¥
¥
¥
the first card slot houses an MVME147 or MVME167 SBC card
the second slot houses the MVME333-2 XCC card
the third slot houses the MVME332XT or MVME332XTS card (for
CCR/Co-resident Module)
¥
the remaining slots are covered by blank faceplates to channel air flow
and thus maintain adequate cooling
CAUTION
Risk of hardware damage
Do not operate the Application Module if the blank
faceplates have been removed; overheating may cause
equipment damage.
!
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
56 Chapter 4: Meridian Link/CCR hardware
Figure 14
Application ModuleÑfront view
CCR/Co-resident Module (left side)
Meridian Link Module (right side)
M
V
M
E
1
4
7
or
1
6
M
V
M
E
3
3
3
-
2
M
V
M
E
3
3
2
X
T
S
M
V
M
E
3
3
3
-
2
M
V
M
E
1
4
7
or
1
6
7
7
Power
supply
Disk/tape unit: topÑtape drive
bottomÑhard disk drive
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4: Meridian Link/CCR hardware 57
Figure 15
Application ModuleÑrear view
Meridian Link Module
CCR/Co-resident Module
M
V
M
E
7
1
2
M
M
V
M
E
7
0
5
B
N
T
6
D
5
1
A
A
M
V
M
E
7
0
5
B
M
V
M
E
7
1
2
M
J8
or
A
or
A
or
or
AM
AM
J9
Transition cards
Part of chassis
(cannot be ordered) Power sense card
As shown in Figure 15, slots at the rear of the Application Module house the
following cards:
¥
MVME712M (double-width), MVME712A, or MVME712AM
transition card
¥
¥
MVME705B transition card
NT6D51AA transition card (for CCR/Co-resident Module)
The power sense card and the adapter board are mounted in the rear of the
Application Module, either on the I/O subpanel, which is installed in the
AEM I/O panel in older installations, or on a central bracket at the bottom
of the AEM.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
58 Chapter 4: Meridian Link/CCR hardware
Single board computer card (Application Module)
The first VME card slot (left-hand slot) of the Application Module is
occupied by the single board computer (SBC) card. One of two cards may
be installed, either the MVME147 or the MVME167 card.
MVME147SA-1
The MVME147 card consists of the following:
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
MC68030 microprocessor
8 Mbytes of random access memory (RAM)
MC68882 floating point coprocessor
shared dynamic random access memory (DRAM) with parity
time-of-day clock and calendar with battery backup
2 kbytes of static random access memory (SRAM)
four read-only memory (ROM) sockets
two 16-bit tick timers for periodic interrupts
watchdog timer
The SBC card provides the following interfaces:
¥
¥
¥
SCSI bus interface with DMA channel to control the disk/tape unit
four serial I/O ports with RS-232 interface
Ethernet transceiver interface
The SBC card also provides the following functions:
¥
¥
¥
¥
VME bus interrupter
VME bus system controller functions
VME bus master interface
VME bus requester
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4: Meridian Link/CCR hardware 59
There are four light-emitting diodes (LEDs) and two switches on the
faceplate of the SBC card, as illustrated in Figure 16.
The LEDs show the following conditions:
¥
Fail indicator This red LED is lit continuously when a hardware or
software failure occurs on the SBC. It is normal for this indicator to
flash while diagnostics are being run (after power-on or during
rebooting).
¥
Status indicator This yellow LED is lit when the MC68030 Status
signal goes low. When steadily lit, the LED indicates that the processor
has stopped. When applications are running, the LED is lit almost
continuously but flickers every few seconds.
¥
¥
Run indicator This green LED is lit when the microprocessor executes
a bus cycle. When applications are running, the LED is lit almost
continuously but flickers every few seconds.
SCON indicator This green LED is always steadily lit to indicate that
the SBC card is the VME bus system controller.
The switches perform the following functions:
¥
ABORT switch This switch, when pressed, stops program execution
and returns control to the debugger. Do not press this switch. If you
accidentally press it, all software operations will stop and you will be in
the firmware debugger. In this case, press the red RESET switch
immediately to reboot the system. Software diagnostics during system
boot will attempt to repair possible file system damage caused by the
non-standard shutdown.
¥
RESET switch This switch invokes a cold restart. The system
performs a self test and then reboots. Do not press the switch while
applications are running. Exit all applications and prepare the system
for powering down before pressing the RESET switch. If the SBC card
is the system controller, this switch also generates a VME bus system
reset. The software power-down procedure is provided later in this
guide.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
60 Chapter 4: Meridian Link/CCR hardware
CAUTION
Risk of data loss
Do not press both the ABORT and the RESET switches at
the same timeÑyou risk losing device configuration
information.
!
The MVME712 transition card makes all serial I/O connections for the SBC
card. The SBC card communicates with the transition card through the
P2/J2 connector and the P2 adapter board. The SBC card connects to the
VME bus through the P1/J1 connector for address and data signals.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4: Meridian Link/CCR hardware 61
Figure 16
MVME147SA-1 single board computer (SBC) card (Application Module)
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
62 Chapter 4: Meridian Link/CCR hardware
MVME167-03
This card, one of the Motorola MVME167 family, may be installed in place
of the MVME147 card in new modules running Meridian Link and/or CCR.
The MVME167 card consists of the following:
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
MC68040 microprocessor operating at 25 MHz
16 Mbytes of dynamic random access memory (DRAM)
MC68882 floating point coprocessor
shared dynamic random access memory (DRAM), with parity
time-of-day clock and calendar with battery backup
128 kbytes of static random access memory (SRAM)
The SBC card provides the following interfaces:
¥
¥
¥
¥
SCSI bus interface with DMA channel to control the disk/tape unit
four serial I/O ports with EIA-232-D buffers
one parallel I/O port with an EIA-232-D buffer
Ethernet transceiver interface
The SBC card also provides the following functions:
¥
¥
¥
¥
VME bus interrupter
VME bus system controller functions
VME bus master interface
VME bus requester
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4: Meridian Link/CCR hardware 63
There are eight light-emitting diodes (LEDs) and two switches on the
faceplate of the SBC card, as illustrated in Figure 17.
The LEDs show the following conditions:
¥
Fail indicator This red LED is continuously lit when a hardware or
software failure occurs on the SBC. It is normal for this indicator to
flash while diagnostics are being run (after power-on or during
rebooting).
¥
¥
Status indicator This yellow LED is lit when the MC68040 Status
signal goes low. When steadily lit, the LED indicates that the processor
has stopped.
Run indicator This green LED is lit when the microprocessor executes
a bus cycle. When applications are running, the LED is lit almost
continuously but flickers every few seconds.
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
SCON indicator This green LED is always steadily lit to indicate that
the SBC card is the VME bus system controller.
LAN indicator This green LED is lit when the LAN chip is the local
bus master.
+12 V indicator This green LED is lit when power is available to the
transceiver interface.
SCSI indicator This green LED is lit when the SCSI chip is the local
bus master.
VME indicator This green LED is lit when the board is using the VME
bus, or when the board is accessed by the VME bus.
The switches perform the following functions:
¥
ABORT switch This switch, when pressed, stops program execution
and returns control to the debugger. Do not press this switch. If you
accidentally press it, all software operations will stop and you will be in
the firmware debugger. In this case, press the red RESET switch
immediately to reboot the system. Software diagnostics during system
boot will attempt to repair possible file system damage caused by the
nonstandard shutdown.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
64 Chapter 4: Meridian Link/CCR hardware
RESET switch This switch invokes a cold restart. The system
¥
performs a self-test and then reboots. Do not press the switch while
applications are running. Exit all applications and prepare the system
for powering down before pressing the RESET switch. If the SBC card
is the system controller, this switch also generates a VME bus system
reset. The software power-down procedure is provided in Chapter 14,
ÒSoftware installation, upgrade, and update procedures.Ó
CAUTION
Risk of data loss
Do not press both the ABORT and the RESET switches at
the same timeÑyou risk losing device configuration
information.
!
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4: Meridian Link/CCR hardware 65
Figure 17
MVME167-03 single board computer (SBC) card (Application Module)
MVME
167
FAIL STAT
RUN SCON
LAN +12V
SCSI VE
ABORT
RESET
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66 Chapter 4: Meridian Link/CCR hardware
MVME333-2 X.25 communication controller (XCC) card
The MVME333-2 X.25 communication controller (XCC) card occupies the
second card slot in the front of the Application Module. This card supports
the synchronous data links to the Meridian 1. The XCC card contains the
following:
¥
¥
¥
¥
an MC68010 microprocessor
an MC68450 DMA controller
512 kbytes RAM
up to 128 kbytes of ROM
There is a single red LED (Fail indicator) on the faceplate, as illustrated in
Figure 18. The LED lights when a hardware or LAPB/X.25 communication
software error occurs.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4: Meridian Link/CCR hardware 67
Figure 18
MVME333-2 X.25 communication controller (XCC) card (Application Module)
MVME
333-2
FAIL
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
68 Chapter 4: Meridian Link/CCR hardware
MVME332XT or MVME332XTS asynchronous communication
controller (ACC) card
The MVME332XT or MVME332XTS asynchronous communication
(ACC) card is used to provide extra terminal/printer ports. The card
provides an RS-232 interface between the VME system and the
asynchronous serial I/O peripheral devices like the RS-232 modems,
printers, and terminals. The ACC card is located in the third card slot in the
front of the Application Module.
There are three LEDs on the faceplate of the MVME332XT card and two on
the MVME332XTS card (Figure 19). The LEDs show the following
conditions:
¥
¥
¥
Fail indicator This red LED is lit when a hardware failure occurs on
the ACC card.
Halt indicator This red LED is lit steadily when the on-board
processor halts, indicating an ACC card malfunction.
Run indicator The Run indicator LED is found on the MVME332XT
card only. This green LED indicates the activity level of the ACC card
by lighting dimly, brightly, or in pulsing mode. A dimly lit LED
indicates that the system is idle, meaning that no terminal activities are
occurring. A brightly lit or pulsing LED indicates data transfer
activities such as keyboard input or display updates.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4: Meridian Link/CCR hardware 69
Figure 19
MVME332XTS asynchronous communication controller (ACC) card
MVME
332XTS
FAIL
HALT
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
70 Chapter 4: Meridian Link/CCR hardware
Transition cards
The MVME system serial I/O uses various transition cards to route signals
to standard external connectors such as DB25, DB9, and RJ11 (teledapt).
The transition cards available are the MVME712M, MVME712A,
MVME712AM, MVME705B and NT6D51AA. These cards have specific
capabilities and hardware configurations. The descriptions and illustrations
of these cards follow.
MVME712M transition card
This new transition card (shown in Figure 20) provides an interface between
the SBC card and peripheral devices such as the system console. It connects
to the J2 connector of the SBC card through the P2 adapter board.
The MVME712M card faceplate provides four 25-pin connectors.
Connectors SP1-3 are for asynchronous serial ports 1Ð3; connector SP4 is
for synchronous/asynchronous serial port 4. The MVME712M card does
not contain an internal modem.
This transition card also provides an Ethernet connection.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4: Meridian Link/CCR hardware 71
Figure 20
MVME712M transition card (Application Module)
MVME 712
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
72 Chapter 4: Meridian Link/CCR hardware
MVME712A and MVME712AM transition cards
The MVME712A and MVME712AM cards provide four 9-pin connectors
(asynchronous serial ports 1Ð4) and a printer port connector. Additionally,
the MVME712AM card provides an RJ11 port.
The MVME712AM card (shown in Figure 21) has a built-in modem and is
used in countries in which that modem type is approved. The MVME712A
transition card, which does not provide a built-in modem, uses a locally
approved external modem for remote maintenance.
The built-in modem in the MVME712AM card provides full duplex
operation over two-wire Public Switch Telephone Networks (PSTNs). It
operates in asynchronous mode at data rates of 300, 600, 1200, or 2400 bps.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4: Meridian Link/CCR hardware 73
Figure 21
MVME712AM transition card (Application Module)
MVME
712AM
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
74 Chapter 4: Meridian Link/CCR hardware
MVME705B transition card
This transition card (shown in Figure 22) provides the transceivers that
convert the I/O signals from the XCC card to the RS-232 and/or RS-422
standard for serial data communications. A 64-conductor flat ribbon cable
connects the transition card to the XCC card.
The MVME705B transition card provides three serial ports. The ports SP1
and SP3 are synchronous ports. Each of these ports can be configured
independently to support DCE or DTE. Port SP5 is the debug port used only
by Nortel support personnel; it is not used in the field.
Note: The MVME705B transition card that is shipped with the
Application Module has port SP1 (ESDI) configured for DTE and port
SP3 (host) configured for DCE. When the card is shipped by itself as a
replacement card, all ports are configured for DTE (original factory
default configuration).
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4: Meridian Link/CCR hardware 75
Figure 22
MVME705B transition card (Application Module)
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
76 Chapter 4: Meridian Link/CCR hardware
NT6D51AA transition card
This custom transition card (shown in Figure 23) provides extra
terminal/printer ports for CCR and Co-resident Modules. The card routes
signals among the ACC card, the asynchronous user terminals, and the
outside world. This card has no optional settings. The NT6D51AA card has
a DIN 96-pin connector for a cable that goes to the J2 connector on the
VME bus backplane. The card also has three DB25 (SP1, SP2, and SP3)
subminiature connectors for cables that go to the I/O panel. Each port
requires only eight pins per port, so serial ports 1, 2, and 3 are brought out
through SP1. Serial ports 4, 5, and 6 come through SP2, and serial ports 7
and 8 come through SP3. Serial port 9 is not used. Three NT7D95AA cables
are required to connect SP1, SP2, and SP3 to the I/O panel.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4: Meridian Link/CCR hardware 77
Figure 23
NT6D51AA transition card (Application Module)
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
78 Chapter 4: Meridian Link/CCR hardware
P2 adapter board
The P2 adapter board (shown in Figure 24) mounts directly behind the SBC
card slot, and connects to the SBC card through the J2 connector on the
VME bus backplane. The adapter board provides the following:
¥
¥
a 50-pin connector for SCSI cable connection to the disk/tape unit
a 64-pin connector, which interfaces I/O port and printer port signals to
the MVME712 transition card through a 64-conductor ribbon cable
Figure 24
P2 adapter board
2
1
64
63
J2
2
1
J1
C4
1
R1
C1
R2
C2
R3
C3
1
1
CR1
3
1
3
1
1
J5
8
J3
J4
C1
B1
A1
C32
B32
A32
P2
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4: Meridian Link/CCR hardware 79
Power supply
The slide-in power supply (shown in Figure 25) is available in two versions:
¥
¥
NT7D64AA for AC-powered systems
NT7D64DC for DC-powered systems
The power supply converts incoming 220 V AC, or Ð48 V DC, to +5 V and
±12 V DC voltages, then distributes these voltages throughout the
Application Module.
Figure 25
Power supply (Application Module)
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
80 Chapter 4: Meridian Link/CCR hardware
Disk/tape unit
The disk/tape unit (shown in Figure 26) is a slide-in assembly with both a
hard disk drive and a cassette tape drive and is used for software installation
and backup. A 50-conductor ribbon cable is an integral part of the disk/tape
unit, extending the SCSI bus from the SBC card by the P2 adapter board. In
the middle of this ribbon cable is an external SCSI connector.
The following disk/tape units are available:
¥
NT7D62AA a 104-Mbyte hard disk drive and a 155-Mbyte tape drive
(found in older systems; this unit is no longer available)
¥
NT7D62AB a 172-Mbyte or a 180-Mbyte hard disk drive and a
155-Mbyte tape drive (found in older systems; this unit is no longer
available)
¥
NT7D62AC a 240-Mbyte hard disk drive and a 155-Mbyte tape drive
The following tapes are supplied with the Application Module:
¥
¥
¥
one that provides the operating system for the Application Module
one that provides the application software
at least one blank tape for backups
Note: As shown in Table 10, an Application Module with a
155-Mbyte tape drive (NT7D62) cannot use a 600-Mbyte tape.
(You cannot see through the sprocket holes of a 600-Mbyte tape.)
Table 10
Tape usage
Module
600-Mbyte tape
155-Mbyte tape
IPE Module
Read and write operations
(backup and program load)
Read operation only
(program load only)
Application Module with
155-Mbyte tape drive
(NT7D62)
Not compatible
Read and write operations
(backup and program load)
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4: Meridian Link/CCR hardware 81
Figure 26
Disk/tape unit (Application Module)
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
82 Chapter 4: Meridian Link/CCR hardware
VME bus backplane (Application Module)
The six-slot VME bus backplane provides connections (at J1 and J2) for
circuit cards installed in the front of the Application Module. The upper
connector, J1, provides access to the VME bus for data signals. The J2
connector at the rear of the backplane provides connections for the
transition cards. These are not the J1 and J2 connectors on the I/O subpanel.
Power sense card (Application Module)
The power sense card monitors over-voltage and under-voltage conditions
for each output of the power supply. The power sense card is cabled to a
power monitor on the I/O subpanel or, in newer systems, to a central bracket
in the bottom of the AEM. Signals from the power monitor are extended to
the system monitor in the pedestal of the column. The system monitor
checks the status of all power- and cooling-related components in the
column.
Alarm cables must be extended from a stand-alone AEM column to the
Meridian 1 as described in ÒAlarm connectionsÓ in the Application
Equipment Module Installation Guide (NTP 553-3201-200).
I/O connectors (Application Module)
The I/O connectors are 9-pin and 25-pin subminiature D-type connectors.
External cables connect to the I/O panel on the AEM. All connectors are
shielded from RF and are integral parts of the external cables.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4: Meridian Link/CCR hardware 83
Input/output panel
Three versions of the I/O panel are currently used with the Application
Module. Many existing installations have application-specific I/O
subpanels, as shown in Figure 27. Some installations have a universal I/O
panel, as shown in Figure 28. All new installations have a generic I/O panel,
shown in Figure 29.
The I/O subpanel has nine connectors: J1 through J6 are 25-pin (DB25)
connectors; J7 through J9 are 9-pin (DB9) connectors. The removable I/O
subpanel is connected to the Application Module by cables from transition
cards in the Application Module. All connectors on the I/O subpanel are
shielded from RF.
The universal I/O panel has 20 connectors, as shown in Figure 28. The
Serial I/O (labeled from 1 through 32), Spare, Host, and ESDI Link ports
are 25-pin (DB25) connectors; the Ethernet port is a coaxial cable
connector; and the INT MODEM, SDI LINK, EXT MODEM, and SYS
CONS ports are 9-pin (DB9) connectors. All connectors on the universal
I/O panel are filtered.
The generic I/O panel (Figure 29) is similar to the universal I/O panel but
all connectors, except one, are labeled by card and connector. For example,
the connectors in the top row are labeled (from left to right) card 5 conn 3
through card 2 conn 3. The exception to this labeling convention is a 15-pin
connector labeled Ethernet.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
84 Chapter 4: Meridian Link/CCR hardware
Figure 27
I/O subpanel (Application Module)
Meridian Link I/O subpanel
J3
J2
J1
¥
Meridian Mail connection
(Link 2)
¥
Meridian 1 connection
(Link 0)
Host
connection
(Link 1)
¥
¥
J6
J5
J4
J9
J8
J7
¥
SDI
port
External
modem
Console
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4: Meridian Link/CCR hardware 85
Figure 28
Universal I/O panel (Application Module)
Serial I/O Serial I/O Serial I/O Serial I/O
31 - 32 23 - 24 15 - 16 7 - 8
Serial I/O Serial I/O Serial I/O Serial I/O
28 - 30 20 - 22 12 - 14 4 - 6
Serial I/O Serial I/O Serial I/O Serial I/O
25 - 27
17 - 19
9 - 11
1 - 3
ESDI
Link
Spare
Host
Meridian Mail
connection
(Link 2)
¥
¥
Meridian 1
connection (link 0)
ETHER-
NET
¥
¥
Host connection
(Link 1)
Internal modem if
MVME712AM card
is installed
INT
SDI
EXT
SYS
MODEM LINK MODEM CONS
¥
¥
Meridian 1 SDI*
(conshare)
Console
External modem
*To QSDI, DCH, or MSDL card of the Meridian 1
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
86 Chapter 4: Meridian Link/CCR hardware
Figure 29
Generic I/O panel (Application Module)
CARD 5 CARD 4 CARD 3 CARD 2
CONN 3 CONN 3 CONN 3 CONN 3
CARD 5
CONN 2
CARD 4 CARD 3 CARD 2
CONN 2 CONN 2 CONN 2
X.25 host
connection
(Link 1)
CARD 5
CONN 1 CONN 1 CONN 1
CARD 4
CARD 3
CARD 2
CONN 1
Meridian 1
connection
(Link 0)
CARD 6 CARD 6
CONN 3 CONN 2
CARD 6
CONN 1
ETHERNET
TCP/IP host
connection
(Link 1) or
CARD 1
CARD 1
CARD 1
CONN 4 CONN 3 CONN 2 CONN 1
CARD 1
LAN-based PC
Meridian Mail
connection
(Link 2)
Console
MODEM SYS CONS
Meridian 1
OA&M (Conshare)
External Modem
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
87
Chapter 5: Hardware installation
overview
Preparing for installation
As soon as the IPE Module or Application Module is delivered, make sure
that all deliverable items are present by checking them against the packing
slips. Move the equipment to its permanent location before beginning the
installation.
Ensure that you have the following tools available:
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
antistatic wrist strap
BIX connector tool (NT product number GYBIX16)
carpenterÕs level
extraction tool (P0741489)
hammer
Phillips screwdriver (small, medium)
slotted screwdriver (small, large)
socket
wrenches (1/4, 5/16, and 9/16 in.)
volt meter
wire cutters
wire strippers
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
88 Chapter 5: Hardware installation overview
Installing an IPE Module or an Application Module
This section summarizes the steps required to install an IPE Module and an
Application Module.
It is important to follow the list of procedures in the order in which they
appear below. When you have completed each procedure, return to this list
for the next procedure.
Table 11
Installing an IPE Module
Procedure
Reference
Page 91
1. Go through Chapter 6, ÒSite survey/installation checklist.Ó
2. Go through Chapter 7, ÒUnpack and inspect hardware.Ó
Page 115
3. Install an SDI/DCH, ESDI, or MSDL card (if required).
See Chapter 8, ÒHardware installation procedures.Ó
Page 142 (SDI/DCH)
Page 145 (ESDI or MSDL)
4. Install the IPE Module. See Chapter 8, ÒHardware
installation procedures.Ó
Page 119
5. Cable to external equipment. See Chapter 9, ÒMeridian
Link/CCR interface cabling.Ó
Page 177 (Option 11)
Page 209 (Options 21Ð81)
6. Install the peripheral devices. See Chapter 10, ÒInstalling
peripheral devices.Ó
Page 261
Page 293
7. Configure the Meridian 1. See Chapter 12, ÒMeridian 1
configuration for Meridian Link/CCR.Ó
8. Configure the links. See Chapter 15, ÒLink configuration.Ó
Page 479
Page 371
9. Install the base operating system and the applications. See
Chapter 14, ÒSoftware installation, upgrade, and update
procedures.Ó
10. Configure the applications. See Chapter 16, ÒAdditional
application configuration.Ó
Page 503
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5: Hardware installation overview 89
IPE or Application Module software may or may not be pre-loaded:
¥
If the Module is shipped to the United States, Europe, or Japan, the
software is likely to be already loaded.
¥
If the Module is shipped to a Caribbean or Latin American location, to
Canada, or to the Asia Pacific region, the software may not be loaded.
Note: Once the IPE or Application Module is installed, cabled to
external equipment, and powered up, there should be a Console Login:
prompt on the system console screen. The absence of the Console
Login: prompt indicates that the software is not already loaded.
If the software is not already installed, follow the instructions ÒTo install or
reinstall the software from tapeÓ in Chapter 14, ÒSoftware installation,
upgrade, and update procedures.Ó
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
90 Chapter 5: Hardware installation overview
Table 12
Installing an Application Module
Procedure
Reference
Page 91
1. Go through Chapter 6, ÒSite survey/installation checklist.Ó
2. Go through Chapter 7, ÒUnpack and inspect hardware.Ó
Page 115
3. Install an ESDI or MSDL card (if required). See Chapter 8,
ÒHardware installation procedures.Ó
Page 142 (SDI/DCH)
Page 145 (ESDI or MSDL)
4. Install the AEM (Application Equipment Module), if
required.
Refer to the Application
Equipment Module
Installation Guide
(NTP 553-3201-200).
5. Check the transition card option settings (if necessary).
See Chapter 8, ÒHardware installation procedures.Ó
Page 119
Page 125
Page 227
Page 261
Page 293
6. Install the Application Module. See Chapter 8, ÒHardware
installation procedures.Ó
7. Cable to external equipment. See Chapter 9, ÒMeridian
Link/CCR interface cabling.Ó
8. Install the peripheral devices. See Chapter 10, ÒInstalling
peripheral devices.Ó
9. Configure the Meridian 1. See Chapter 12, ÒMeridian 1
configuration for Meridian Link/CCR.Ó
10. Configure the links. See Chapter 15, ÒLink configuration.Ó
Page 479
Page 371
11. Install the base operating system and the applications. See
Chapter 14, ÒSoftware installation, upgrade, and update
procedures.Ó
12. Configure the applications. See Chapter 16, ÒAdditional
application configuration.Ó
Page 503
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
91
Chapter 6: Site survey/installation
checklist
The purpose of this chapter is to provide a checklist to ensure, when
installing new hardware and software for Auxiliary Processors, that all
hardware, software, documentation, and cable connection requirements are
met to successfully complete a new installation. This document helps you
find the current status of Auxiliary Processors, and list possible changes to
the current status in determining what hardware, software, and
documentation needs to be ordered. This checklist should be used as a guide
only and does not override any regulatory procedures for ordering new
hardware, software, and documentation.
General information
Provide the following general information for future use by other people.
End user
Name: _______________________________________________________
Address: _____________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
Country:______________________________________________________
Telephone number: _____________________________________________
Primary contact: _______________________________________________
Secondary contact: _____________________________________________
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
92 Chapter 6: Site survey/installation checklist
Distributor
Name: _______________________________________________________
Address: _____________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
Country:______________________________________________________
Telephone number: _____________________________________________
Primary contact: _______________________________________________
Secondary contact: _____________________________________________
Nortel support representative
Name: _______________________________________________________
Address: _____________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
Country:______________________________________________________
Telephone number: _____________________________________________
Primary contact: _______________________________________________
Secondary contact: _____________________________________________
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6: Site survey/installation checklist 93
Delivery information
Provide data for authorized personnel to ensure proper delivery of new
hardware, software, and documentation.
Customer site
Address: _____________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
Country:______________________________________________________
Telephone number: _____________________________________________
Primary contact: _______________________________________________
Secondary contact: _____________________________________________
Vehicle restrictions: ____________________________________________
Permit(s) required: _____________________________________________
Hours of delivery: ______________________________________________
Security clearance: _____________________________________________
Freight company
Pre-delivery notification: ________________________________________
Telephone number: _____________________________________________
Primary contact: _______________________________________________
Secondary contact: _____________________________________________
Hours to delivery: ______________________________________________
Unloading/Unpacking: __________________________________________
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
94 Chapter 6: Site survey/installation checklist
Loading equipment required
Responsible party: _____________________________________________
Delivery constraints: ____________________________________________
Elevator capacity: ______________________________________________
Equipment delivery route to the equipment room: _____________________
_____________________________________________________________
Meridian 1 software checklists
To check the Meridian 1 software, use the Meridian 1 Overlay program 22
(LD 22) and obtain a printout of:
¥
the current software issue (ISS) and package list (PKG) as outlined in
the Generic X11 Input/output Guide (NTP 553-001-400). Compare the
printout with the following requirements and checklists.
¥
¥
the ADAN information which will be required when setting physical
card address switches on the ESDI (QPC513G) or MSDL card.
the tape ID (TID) which will be required when installing the Meridian
Link/CCR application. Use this information when prompted to enter
your Meridian 1 ID.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6: Site survey/installation checklist 95
Requirements for Meridian Link
Chapter 2, ÒOverview of Meridian LinkÓ describes the Meridian 1 software
requirements in general. To take advantage of the latest Meridian Link
Release 5 features, X11 Release 22 must be installed. Full support for
Release 5 features in international markets requires global X11 Release 22.
Release 5C features require X11 Release 24. All Option 11 systems also
require X11 Release 22.
Meridian 1 software conversion/upgrade required: Yes ( ) No ( )
If required, from Release: __________ to Release: __________
Table 13
Meridian LinkÑMeridian 1 software package requirements
Meridian 1 software package
IMS 35 (Integrated Message System)
CSL 77 (Command Status Link)
Yes
No
IAP3P 153 (ISDN/AP for Third
Parties)
MLM 209 (Meridian Link Module)
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
96 Chapter 6: Site survey/installation checklist
Table 14
Meridian LinkÑOptional Meridian 1 software packages
Meridian 1 software package Yes
No
BACD 40 (Basic Automatic Call
Distribution)
DNIS 98 (Dialled Number
Identification Service)
ACDB 41 (ACD Package B)
ACD 42 (ACD Usage Reports)
ACD 43 (ACD Load Management)
ACDA 45 (ACD Package A)
ACDD 50 (ACD MAX applications)
EAR 214 (Enhanced ACD Routing)
CCR 215 (Customer Controlled
Routing)
ISDN 145 (Integrated Services Digital
Network)
PRA 146 (Primary Rate Access)
ISL 147 (ISDN Signalling Link)
STA 228 (Single Terminal Access)
MSDL 222 (Multi-Purpose Serial Data
Link)
MSDL SDI 227 (MSDL Serial Data
Interface)
Call ID 247 (Call ID)
Contact your Nortel support personnel if there are any discrepancies.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6: Site survey/installation checklist 97
Requirements for CCR
Chapter 3, ÒOverview of Customer Controlled RoutingÓ describes the
Meridian 1 software requirements in general. To use CCR Release 3
features, X11 Release 19 must be installed. Full support for Release 3
features in international markets requires global X11 Release 20. With CCR
Release 3C, the DNIS digits supported have been expanded from seven
digits to a maximum of 31 digits. Note that X11 Release 24 is required to
support the expanded DNIS feature. All Option 11 systems require X11
Release 20.
Meridian 1 software conversion/upgrade required: Yes ( ) No ( )
If required, from Release: __________ to Release: __________
CCR requires the Meridian 1 to have the following additional packages.
Table 15
CCRÑMeridian 1 software package requirements
Meridian 1 software package
Yes
No
Basic Automatic Call Distribution
(BACD 40)
ACD Package B (ACDB 41)
ACD Package A (ACDA 45)
Command Status Link (CSL 77)
Enhanced ACD Routing (EAR 214)
Customer Controlled Routing
(CCR 215)
Hold In Queue for IVR (IVR 218)
Call ID 247
Single Terminal Access (STA 228)
Multi-Purpose Serial Data Link
(MSDL 222)
MSDL Serial Data Interface
(MSDL SDI 227)
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
98 Chapter 6: Site survey/installation checklist
Contact your Nortel support personnel if there are any discrepancies.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6: Site survey/installation checklist 99
Requirements for Meridian Mail to support Meridian Link
The following information is for a Meridian Mail system working with
Meridian Link. The requirements for a stand-alone Meridian Mail system
may be different.
¥
¥
Meridian 1 Generic X11 Release 17 or later
Meridian 1 Generic X11 Release 19 or later (required for Integrated
Mailbox Administration and Single Terminal Access)
Meridian 1 software conversion/upgrade required: Yes ( ) No ( )
If required, from Release: __________ to Release: __________
To support Meridian Link, Meridian Mail also requires the Meridian 1
system to have the following additional packages.
Table 16
Meridian MailÑMeridian 1 software package requirements
Meridian 1 software package
Make Set Busy (MSB 17)
Yes
No
End-to-End Signalling (EES 10 )
Message Center (MWC 46)
Network Message Services
(NMS 175)
Advanced Network Services
(NTWK 148)
Single Terminal Access (STA 228)
Multi-Purpose Serial Data Link
(MSDL 222)
MSDL Serial Data Interface
(MSDL/SDI 227) (STA only)
Call Party Name Display (CPND 95)
Console Presentation Group (CPGS 172)
Multi-Tenant Service (TENS 86)
Contact your Nortel support personnel if there are any discrepancies.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
100 Chapter 6: Site survey/installation checklist
Meridian Mail hardware checklist to support Meridian Link
Use the following checklists to check the Meridian Mail hardware.
Refer to Meridian Mail System Administration (NTP 555-70XX-301) and
System Administration Tools (NTP 555-7001-305) on how to obtain
information about Meridian Mail current status.
Meridian Mail serial number: _____________________________________
Current Meridian Mail software release: ____________________________
Current number of Meridian Mail channels:___________________________
Basic service ports: __________________________________________
Full service ports: ___________________________________________
Multimedia ports: ___________________________________________
Current hours of storage: _________________________________________
Number of Meridian Mail channels required: _________________________
Basic service ports: __________________________________________
Full service ports: ___________________________________________
Multimedia ports: ___________________________________________
Hours of voice storage required: ___________________________________
Meridian Mail Access and an RSM port are required on the Meridian Mail
system to implement voice enhanced processing.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6: Site survey/installation checklist 101
IPE Module and Application Module: Meridian Link/CCR
software
Use the following checklists to check the software and documentation.
IPE Module and Application Module: Meridian Link/CCR
software current status
Use the showid and version commands to obtain the following information:
¥
¥
Meridian Link serial number: _________________________________
Current IPE Module and Application Module software release:
_________________________________________________________
¥
Current IPE Module and Application Module software options:
_________________________________________________________
Changes to IPE Module and Application Module
Compare the ordering documents to the shipping documents to ensure
complete shipment of software. Some software options require specific
hardware; refer to Chapter 4, ÒMeridian Link/CCR hardwareÓ to make
certain that the proper hardware was ordered and delivered with the
software.
IPE Module and Application Module software conversion/upgrade
required: Yes ( ) No ( )
If required, from Release: __________ to Release: __________
Will Ethernet be enabled? Yes ( ) No ( )
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
102 Chapter 6: Site survey/installation checklist
Table 17
IPE Module and Application Module software options
IPE Module and Application Module
software
Yes
No
Service 1: OA&M
Service 95: Obsolete
Service 96: Obsolete
Service 97: Inbound Call Management
Service 98: Outbound Call Management
Service 99: Enhanced Call Processing
Service 100: Host Enhanced Routing
Service 101: Host Enhanced Voice
Processing
Note: The software options are listed in the packing slip.
Meridian Link/CCR tapes and keycode
Verify that the proper tapes have been received and are on site.
Table 18
Meridian Link and CCR tapes
Tape
Yes
No
Meridian Link/CCR Co-Residency R5.21
Operating System Tape
Meridian Link/CCR Co-Residency 5.21
Application Tape
Backup Tape(s)
A keycode is enclosed with the software tapes, enabling activation of the
correct application(s). The keycode also defines the features and hardware
configuration purchased by the customer.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6: Site survey/installation checklist 103
Documentation
Verify that proper documentation was shipped. Information about Meridian
Link Release 4 operation and configuration can be found in the following
guides:
¥
Application Module and Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Module
Diagnostic and Maintenance Guide (NTP 553-3211-510)
¥
Application Module and Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Module
Advanced Maintenance Guide (NTP 553-3211-512)
¥
¥
Customer Controlled Routing User Guide (P0747008)
Meridian Link/Customer Controlled Routing Engineering Guide
(NTP 553-3211-520)
Information about the Access option of the Meridian Mail that provides the
voice service interface for the Application Module can be found in the
following:
¥
¥
¥
Meridian ACCESS Configuration Guide (NTP 555-7001-315)
Meridian ACCESS DeveloperÕs Guide (NTP 555-7001-316)
Meridian ACCESS Application Programming Interface
(NTP 553-7001-317)
¥
Meridian ACCESS Voice Prompt Editor Users Guide
(NTP 553-7001-318)
The NTPs referenced above are continually revised to reflect product
improvements and documentation enhancements.
List of documentation available:
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
_____________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
104 Chapter 6: Site survey/installation checklist
Hardware
Use the following checklists to check the hardware.
Table 19
Equipment cabinets
Equipment cabinet
Quantity
Type
Table 20
Meridian 1 CPU compatibility
Upgrade required
CPU ROM
Yes
No
Memory
Table 21
Input/Output devices
Input/Output device
Space available for ESDI/MSDL card
Space available for additional ENET card
AML requirements needed
Yes
No
Number of AML ports required:
NMS requirements needed
ISDN/PRI hardware
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6: Site survey/installation checklist 105
Table 22
Hard disk and tape drive type
Equipment
Hard disk
Manufacturer and Part Number/Size
Tape drive
Equipment room information
To ensure that you avoid problems caused by locating equipment in the
wrong place, you should obtain a floor plan that has been updated to show
your new equipment.
Existing floor plan: Yes ( ) No ( )
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
106 Chapter 6: Site survey/installation checklist
Power and ground considerations
Your moduleÕs power source is either 110 V AC or 208 V DC. In each case,
refer to the following NTPs to ensure that proper power and grounding
requirements are met.
¥
¥
Application Equipment Module Installation Guide (NTP 553-3201-200)
MPP600 Modular Power Plant: Description, installation, operation,
and maintenance manual (NTP 167-9021-105)
¥
Meridian 1 Applications System 600/48 Description, Installation,
Operation and Maintenance Manual (NTP 167-9021-111)
Use the following checklist to check the condition of the power source at
your site.
Table 23
Power and ground considerations for AC-powered modules
Power and ground considerations
Yes
No
Is there a separately grounded 110 V AC
outlet for power equipment?
Is an approved ground system in place?
Has the approved power and ground been
measured?
Does the approved power and ground system
meet the requirements outlined in Power
Engineering (NTP 553-3001-151)?
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6: Site survey/installation checklist 107
Equipment cabling
The following tables provide checklists and references for checking the
cabling.
Input/output device cabling
Measure the cable distance for the input/output devices listed in Table 24.
For information on the proper cables and connections, refer to the
appropriate NTP.
Table 24
Input/Output devices cable distance
Input/Output devices
NTP
IPE Module or Application
Module to Meridian 1
(Link cable)
This guide
This guide
IPE Module or Application
Module to Meridian Mail
(Link cable)
PBX to Meridian Mail
(Link cable)
Options Installation Guide
(NTP 555-7011-210)
Options Maintenance Guide
(NTP 555-7011-500)
Meridian Mail Modular Option
Installation and Maintenance Guide
(NTP 555-7041-250)
Meridian Mail Modular Option GP
Installation and Maintenance Guide
(NTP 555-7051-250)
Meridian Mail Modular Option EC
Installation and Maintenance Guide
(NTP 555-7061-250)
Card Option Installation and
Maintenance Guide
(NTP 555-7071-210)
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
108 Chapter 6: Site survey/installation checklist
Peripheral device cabling
Measure the cable distance for the peripheral devices listed in Table 25. For
information on the proper cables and connections, refer to the appropriate
NTP.
Table 25
Peripheral devices cable distance
Peripheral devices
NTP
Meridian Mail to A/B
switchbox
Options Installation Guide
(NTP 555-7011-210)
Options Maintenance Guide
(NTP 555-7011-500)
Meridian Mail Modular Option
Installation and Maintenance Guide
(NTP 555-7041-250)
Meridian Mail Modular Option GP
Installation and Maintenance Guide
(NTP 555-7051-250)
Meridian Mail Modular Option EC
Installation and Maintenance Guide
(NTP 555-7061-250)
Card Option Installation and
Maintenance Guide
(NTP 555-7071-210)
Ñ continued Ñ
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6: Site survey/installation checklist 109
Table 25
Peripheral devices cable distance (continued)
Peripheral devices
NTP
A/B switchbox to
administration terminal
Options Installation Guide
(NTP 555-7011-210)
Options Maintenance Guide
(NTP 555-7011-500)
Meridian Mail Modular Option
Installation and Maintenance Guide
(NTP 555-7041-250)
Meridian Mail Modular Option GP
Installation and Maintenance Guide
(NTP 555-7051-250)
Meridian Mail Modular Option EC
Installation and Maintenance Guide
(NTP 555-7061-250)
Card Option Installation and
Maintenance Guide
(NTP 555-7071-210)
Application Module to
administration terminal
This guide
A/B switchbox to modem
Options Installation Guide
(NTP 555-7011-210)
Options Maintenance Guide
(NTP 555-7011-500)
Meridian Mail Modular Option
Installation and Maintenance Guide
(NTP 555-7041-250)
Meridian Mail Modular Option GP
Installation and Maintenance Guide
(NTP 555-7051-250)
Ñ continued Ñ
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
110 Chapter 6: Site survey/installation checklist
Table 25
Peripheral devices cable distance (continued)
Peripheral devices
NTP
A/B switchbox to modem
(continued)
Meridian Mail Modular Option EC
Installation and Maintenance Guide
(NTP 555-7061-250)
Card Option Installation and
Maintenance Guide
(NTP 555-7071-210)
Printer to administration
terminal
This guide
Options Installation Guide
(NTP 555-7011-210)
Options Maintenance Guide
(NTP 555-7011-500)
Meridian Mail Modular Option
Installation and Maintenance Guide
(NTP 555-7041-250)
Meridian Mail Modular Option GP
Installation and Maintenance Guide
(NTP 555-7051-250)
Meridian Mail Modular Option EC
Installation and Maintenance Guide
(NTP 555-7061-250)
Card Option Installation and
Maintenance Guide
(NTP 555-7071-210)
Ethernet connection
This guide
Ñ end Ñ
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6: Site survey/installation checklist 111
Telephony connections
Measure the cable distance for the devices listed in Table 26. For
information on the proper cables and connections, refer to the appropriate
NTP.
Table 26
Telephony connections cable distance
Telephony devices
Modem to phone jack
NTP
This guide
PBX to Meridian Mail (network
loop)
Options Installation Guide
(NTP 555-7011-210)
Options Maintenance Guide
(NTP 555-7011-500)
Meridian Mail Modular Option
Installation and Maintenance
Guide (NTP 555-7041-250)
Meridian Mail Modular Option GP
Installation and Maintenance
Guide (NTP 555-7051-250)
Meridian Mail Modular Option EC
Installation and Maintenance
Guide (NTP 555-7061-250)
Card Option Installation and
Maintenance Guide
(NTP 555-7071-210)
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
112 Chapter 6: Site survey/installation checklist
Equipment room cooling conditions
Use this list to note the conditions in the equipment room.
¥
¥
¥
¥
Type: ____________________________________________________
Ambient temperature: _______________________________________
Humidifier/air conditioner: ___________________________________
Customer restrictions: _______________________________________
__________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________
¥
Notes on current environmental conditions: _______________________
__________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________
Additional considerations
Use the following checklist to check for additional considerations.
Table 27
Additional considerations
Additional considerations
Yes
No
Does the existing PBX installation conform to
NTP and Product Bulletins?
Does the end user have any complaints with
existing PBX?
Does the end user have any complaints with
existing Meridian Mail system?
Does the end user have any complaints with
existing Auxiliary system?
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6: Site survey/installation checklist 113
Comments and recommendations
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
Note: Return to Chapter 5, ÒHardware installation overviewÓ for the
next procedure.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
115
Chapter 7: Unpack and inspect hardware
You should use this chapter in conjunction with Chapter 5, ÒHardware
installation overview,Ó which links hardware installation procedures in
easily understood tables (Tables 11 and 12).
This chapter provides information on receiving, unpacking, and inspecting
the IPE Module and Application Module hardware components.
When handling the equipment during receiving, unpacking, and inspection,
use the following precautions:
¥
¥
Do not drop circuit packs.
Do not remove circuit packs from their shipping container until they are
ready to be inserted.
¥
¥
¥
Handle circuit packs by their edges or faceplate.
Do not touch the components on the printed circuit board.
Set static-sensitive circuit packs down only on the antistatic bag
supplied in the shipping container.
¥
¥
¥
¥
Do not stack circuit packs on top of each other.
Do not insert or remove circuit packs unnecessarily.
Do not attempt field repairs of circuit packs.
Store circuit packs in a spare shelf or side-by-side in their shipping
containers.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
116 Chapter 7: Unpack and inspect hardware
¥
¥
Store circuit packs in a clean, dry area.
When tape cartridges have been subjected to temperature extremes,
allow them to stabilize to room temperature before unpacking. This
prevents the accumulation of condensation on the tapes.
CAUTION
Risk of equipment damage
Wear an antistatic wrist strap when handling
!
components. As an additional safety measure, handle
components by their edges and, whenever possible, with
the loosened packing material still around them.
Receiving the IPE Module and Application Module
components
Use the following procedure to check all items received against the order
form and shipper attached to each carton.
1
2
Remove each item from the carton.
Compare each itemÕs part number against the part number listed on
the shipper.
3
4
Verify that the shipped quantity and the quantity received match.
Verify that the order quantity on the shipper matches the shipped
quantity.
5
Report all discrepancies to your Nortel support personnel. Use the
NTI number in the top right corner of the shipper as a reference.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7: Unpack and inspect hardware 117
Unpacking the IPE Module and Application Module
components
After you have received and checked the IPE Module or Application
Module components, use the following procedure to unpack them.
The IPE Module and Application Module are carefully packaged for
maximum protection against physical damage during shipment. Retain the
packaging material in case any equipment needs to be returned.
1
2
Move the equipment (on its shipping pallet, if it was received on a
pallet) as close as possible to its final location.
If the equipment is mounted on a pallet, do the following:
¥
Remove any shipping bolts from the underside of the pallet.
¥
Gently move the equipment from the pallet and place it as close
as possible to the final location .
3
4
Cut any remaining strapping and tape. Remove the transport
protection devices and loosen the stretch wrap film (if provided) from
the equipment. This stretch wrap film can be removed at your own
discretion; however, it is advisable to keep the wrapping loosely
around the equipment during handling.
Remove any miscellaneous equipment (such as the disk unit, power
supplies, and tape unit for the Application Module) from the carton
and check for any obvious missing parts or breakages.
5
6
Check printed circuit packs for any loose parts, broken edges, and
other obvious damage that may have occurred during transport.
Inspect the equipment for the following:
¥
damaged connectors or connectors containing foreign material
defects in the molded plastic covers
¥
¥
any loose items remaining in the shipping cartons
7
8
Using a flashlight, check that there are no broken pins or shrouds on
the backplane connectors.
Check tape cartridges to ensure that they are not broken. If a tape
appears to be resting against the front (plastic) surface of the
cartridge, give the cartridge a gentle tap to relieve the tape. You do
not need to center the tape.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
118 Chapter 7: Unpack and inspect hardware
If all the hardware components appear to be in order, repack them
9
and store them in a safe place until you are ready to install them.
Return any defective items to the manufacturer with a description of
the defects. You should use the original containers if possible. If an
original container is not available, wrap the item several times in air-
cap cushion material, place it in a suitable cardboard container, and
surround it with paper packing material. Ensure that the cardboard
container is sufficiently strong to handle the weight of the item.
Note: Return to Chapter 5, ÒHardware installation overviewÓ for the
next procedure.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
119
Chapter 8: Hardware installation
procedures
CAUTION
Risk of data loss
Ensure that the breaker switch on the AEM is in the Off
position before following the procedures for installing an
Application Module.
!
You should use this chapter in conjunction with Chapter 5, ÒHardware
installation overview,Ó which links hardware installation procedures in
easily understood tables (Tables 11 and 12).
This chapter provides information on the installation of the IPE Module
(Option 11 and Options 21Ð81) and the Application Module hardware
components. High-level installation procedures for all three hardware
options are followed by procedures for installing components.
ATTENTION
Before proceeding with any hardware installation, upgrade, or update,
ensure that all discrepancies found in Chapter 6, ÒSite survey/
installation checklistÓ have been corrected.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
120 Chapter 8: Hardware installation procedures
Installing the IPE Module
The following procedure for installing the actual IPE Module is only one of
a series of procedures you should perform to install an IPE Module. The
series is shown in Table 11 in Chapter 5, ÒHardware installation overview.Ó
Before you start the following procedure, ensure that you have
¥
¥
read Chapter 4, ÒMeridian Link/CCR hardwareÓ
completed steps 1 through 3 in Table 11
If you have an older CE/PE or IPE shelf, you may need to reroute some
backplane cables before you install the IPE Module. If you have an older
CE/PE or IPE shelf, or if you are not sure whether you have an older shelf,
refer to ÒBackplane cable rerouting for Options 21Ð81 CE/PE and IPE
backplanesÓ in Chapter 9, ÒMeridian Link/CCR cabling interfaceÓ.
CAUTION
Risk of potential data loss
When installing the IPE Module, you do not need to
!
power down or stop the Meridian 1 system prior to
installation, however the IPE Module must be gracefully
powered down before removal or insertion.
1
Configure the IPE Module ports as DCE or DTE.
IPE Modules are shipped with the following default configuration. If
you are using the standard configuration described in the following
table, you should not need to change the settings. Figure 30 shows
the jumper settings for the default configuration.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8: Hardware installation procedures 121
Table 28
Default DCE/DTE settings
Port
Setting
Use
1
2
3
4
5
6
DCE
DCE
DTE
DTE
DTE
DCE
Console
Modem
Conshare
Meridian Mail Link
AML
Terminal/printer (CCR)
X.25 Host Link (Meridian Link)
7
8
DCE
DCE
Terminal/printer
Terminal/printer
Refer to Figure 30 (Part 2) for a diagram of the correct jumper
settings. To change the configuration of a port after you have
installed an IPE Module, you must remove the IPE Module from the
Meridian 1 IPE Shelf or Option 11 cabinet. For more information on
DCE and DTE, refer to Chapter 11, ÒPeripheral device cabling
interface.Ó
CAUTION
Risk of data loss
Do not install the IPE Module if the IPE Module power
push button is in the On position.
!
2
Choose where you want to install the IPE Module. An Option 11
IPE Module occupies three consecutive slots in an Option 11
cabinet. An Options 21Ð81 IPE Module occupies four consecutive
slots on an IPE shelf. For more information, refer to Chapter 4,
ÒMeridian Link/CCR hardware.Ó
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
122 Chapter 8: Hardware installation procedures
3
Slowly slide the module along the slots into the shelf or cabinet,
making sure the latches at the top and bottom of the module are
unlatched. Press the faceplate to ensure that the module is firmly in
place. Make sure the latches at the top and bottom of the module
are secured.
4
For information on cabling the IPE Module to external equipment,
refer to the ÒMeridian Link/CCR cabling interfaceÓ chapter.
Note: Return to Chapter 5, ÒHardware installation overviewÓ for the
next procedure.
Figure 30 shows the port configuration settings on the CPU adapter card.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8: Hardware installation procedures 123
Figure 30
Port configuration settings (Part 1)
Top
Back
CPU adapter
card
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
TP
IPE Module
Bottom
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
124 Chapter 8: Hardware installation procedures
Figure 30
Port configuration settings (Part 2)
J6
J7
Console
Port 1
(DCE)
Port 5
(DTE)
AML
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
J15
J17
J16
13
1
14 13
14
2
13
1
14 13
14
2
2
1
5
J8
J9
J18
Port 2
(DCE)
Modem
(Use cable
NT1R03HF)
2
1
6
7
1
8
2
Port 6
(DCE)
Host for
X.25 (Link)
1
2
13
1
14 13
14
2
J10
J11
J19
J21
J20
J22
Conshare
Port 3
(DTE)
2
1
13
1
14 13
14
2
2
1
5
6
7
1
8
2
13
1
14 13
14
2
J12
J13
Port 7
(DCE)
Terminal/
Printer
(CCR)
1
2
Port 4
(DTE)
Meridian
Mail
(HEVP)
2
1
J23
J25
J24
J26
13
1
14 13
14
2
13
14 13
14
2
1
5
6
7
1
8
2
Port 8
(DTE)
Terminal/
Printer
(CCR)
1
2
Note: These are the correct
jumper settings for the ports.
Refer to Figure 30 (Part 1)
for the locations of the port
jumpers on the board.
J27
J29
J28
J30
13
1
14 13
14
2
2
1
5
6
7
8
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8: Hardware installation procedures 125
Installing the Application Module
The following procedure for installing the Application Module is only one
of a series of procedures you should perform to install an Application
Module. The series is shown in Table 12 in Chapter 5, ÒHardware
installation overview.Ó Ensure that you have completed steps 1 through 5 in
Table 12 before you start the following procedure.
CAUTION
Risk of personal injury
Ensure that the circuit breaker of the Application Module
is in the off position.
!
Be careful when installing an Application Module
because it is heavy. This is usually a two-person job.
You can install an Application Module in either side of an AEM
(Application Equipment Module). Follow these steps:
1
Hold the Application Module by the bar on the top and align the
module with the guides at the top and bottom of the cage. Slowly
slide the unit into the AEM.
2
3
Tighten the four screws on the front of the module.
Position the subpanel, universal I/O panel, or generic I/O panel (as
supplied) at the rear of the module. Tighten or reinstall the screws
that secure the panel.
4
5
Attach the orange logic-return ground wire to the screw on the
terminal block at the bottom of the AEM.
Connect the yellow and gray cable from the power sense card to the
appropriate plug on the power monitor. If the module is on the right
side of the AEM (from the rear view), the cable connects to P1 on
the power monitor. If the module is on the left side, the cable
connects to P2.
Note: A connector housing surrounds the pins on the P1 and P2
connectors. Make sure you center the cable connector on the pins
within the housing.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
126 Chapter 8: Hardware installation procedures
6
Plug the power harness into the connector on the MPDU (P3 if the
module is installed next to the MPDU, P4 if the module is on the
other side of the AEM).
Note: Make sure you connect all the cables securely.
7
Install the power supply and the disk/tape unit (refer to ÒInstalling the
power supply and disk/tape unit (Application Module)Ó in the next
section.
Note: Make sure you connect all the cables securely.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8: Hardware installation procedures 127
Installing the power supply and disk/tape unit
(Application Module)
The Application Module power supply and disk/tape units are packaged
separately for protection during shipping. Both units should be installed in
the Application Module after it has been installed in the AEM and before
external equipment is cabled to the Application Module.
1
Install the power supply and the disk tape unit in the Application
Module as follows:
¥
Make sure the associated circuit breaker on the Module Power
Distribution Unit (MPDU) is set to OFF (the down position). As
illustrated in Figure 31, the top breaker powers the module next
to the MPDU (on the left side as you face the AEM), and the
bottom breaker powers the module on the right-side.
¥
Gripping the handle at the front of the power supply faceplate,
line up the power supply with the guides at the top and bottom of
the module.
¥
¥
Slowly slide the power supply into the module until the faceplate
is flush with the front of the module.
Tighten the two screws at the top and bottom of the power
supply faceplate.
Figure 31
Module Power Distribution Unit breakers
Module Power
Distribution Unit
(MPDU)
¥
Breaker for
left-side
Application Module
¥
¥
Breaker for
right-side
Application Module
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
128 Chapter 8: Hardware installation procedures
Figure 32
Disk/tape unit
M
V
M
E
1
M
V
M
E
3
M
V
M
E
3
4
3
3
7
or
1
3
-
2
2
X
T
S
6
7
Disk/tape unit: top Ð tape drive
bottom Ð hard disk drive
2
Slide the disk/tape unit into the slot at the far right of the Application
Module (facing the AEM).
Push the unit in hard and make sure the tabs at the top and bottom
of the unit lock into position. Tighten the two screws on the front of
the unit.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8: Hardware installation procedures 129
Checking the card option settings (Application Module)
The cards are shipped with the settings preset at the factory, and they need
to be checked only if you suspect a problem, or if you need to configure the
host computer port (on the MVME705B card) for DTE operation. If you
want to check the settings during installation, do so before installing the
Application Module.
The following procedure for checking the transition card option settings is
one of a series of procedures you perform to install an Application Module.
The series is shown in Table 12 in Chapter 5, ÒHardware installation
overview.Ó
To check the option settings on the MVME712A, MVME712AM,
MVME712M, and MVME705B transition cards, you must remove the cards
from the rear of the Application Module. If the Application Module is
installed on the right side of the AEM (when viewed from the front of the
AEM), it must temporarily be removed to access the transition cards. You
do not need to remove the cards in the front of the Application Module to
remove the module.
Note: If the Application Module is installed on the left side of the
AEM (facing the AEM), you can check the transition cards without
removing the Application Module.
CAUTION
Risk of personal injury
Be careful when installing an Application Module
because it is heavy. This is usually a two-person job.
!
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
130 Chapter 8: Hardware installation procedures
If your Application Module does not have CCR activated, the
MVME332XT(S) card may not be present. If so, skip steps 1Ð3 and begin at
step 4.
1
2
Remove the screws at the top and bottom of the MVME332XT(S)
card faceplate.
Pull the MVME332XT(S) card out of the Application Module.
Check the switches as indicated in Tables 29 and 30.
Table 29
MVME332XT ACC card switch settings
Position
5
Switch
S1
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
on off
off off
off
on
off
on
off
on
on
on
S2
Table 30
MVME332XT ACC card jumper settings
Block
J1
Jumper setting
1Ð2, 5Ð6, 7Ð9, 8Ð10, 11Ð12, 15Ð17
1Ð2
J4
3
4
5
Replace the MVME332XT(S) card and replace the screws at the top
and bottom of the faceplate.
Remove the screws at the top and bottom of the MVME333-2 XCC
card faceplate.
Pull the MVME333-2 XCC card out of the Application Module.
Check the switches as indicated in Table 31 and Figure 34.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8: Hardware installation procedures 131
Table 31
MVME333-2 XCC card jumper settings
Block
K1
Jumper setting
2 and 4, 6 and 8, 10 and 12, 13Ð14, 15Ð16, 23Ð24
K2
none
K3
1Ð2, 5Ð6, 7Ð8, 9Ð10
K4
none
1Ð2, 3Ð4
5Ð6
K5
K6
K7
5Ð6
K8
none
1Ð2
K9
6
7
Replace the MVME333-2 XCC card and replace the screws at the
top and bottom of the faceplate.
If you are checking the option settings for an Application Module
installed on the left side of the AEM, go to step 5. If the Application
Module is preinstalled on the right side of the AEM, remove it as
follows:
¥
If you have an I/O subpanel, loosen the five spring-loaded
screws that hold the I/O subpanel to the I/O assembly of the
AEM. Gently set the panel in the back of the Application Module
so the cables do not come in contact with the edges of the AEM.
¥
If you have a universal I/O panel or a generic I/O panel, remove
the screws at the edges of the I/O panel. Gently set the panel in
the back of the Application Module.
¥
¥
Detach the orange logic-return ground wire that is screwed to
the terminal block at the bottom of the AEM.
Unplug the yellow and gray cable (NT7D52AA) that connects the
power sense card to the power monitor.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
132 Chapter 8: Hardware installation procedures
¥
Unplug the power harness from the connector (P3 or P4) on the
MPDU. (The power harness has seven wires: two red, two black,
one green, one blue, and one brown.)
¥
¥
Loosen the four screws on the front of the Application Module.
Hold the Application Module by the handles on each side and
pull it out of the AEM. Before the Application Module is
completely out, take hold of the bar on the top of the Application
Module to lift it out and down.
8
9
Remove the screws at the top and bottom of the transition card
faceplates.
Pull the MVME705B and MVME712 transition cards out of the
Application Module as follows:
¥
Disconnect the ribbon cable from each transition card.
¥
Check the jumpers on the MVME705B transition card as
indicated in Tables 32 and 33, and Figure 35. Change them if
the host computer port on the card is to be set for DTE.
Table 32
Default DCE/DTE settings for MVME705B transition card
Serial Port
SP1
Setting
DTE
Use
AML Link
SP2
DCE
X.25 Host Link (Meridian Link only)
Not used
SP3
DTE
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8: Hardware installation procedures 133
Table 33
MVME705B jumper settings and cable connections
Serial port
DCE mode
DTE mode
SP1
On header K6, place jumpers over
pins 3Ð4, 7Ð8, 9Ð10
On header K6, place jumpers over
pins 1Ð2, 5Ð6
Plug the I/O cable into P14
Plug the I/O cable into P13
SP3
On header K5, place jumpers over
pins 3Ð4, 7Ð8, 9Ð10
On header K5, place jumpers over
pins 1Ð2, 5Ð6
Plug the I/O cable into P12
Plug the I/O cable into P11
¥
Check the jumpers on the MVME712 transition card as indicated
in Figure 36 (for MVME712AM), Figure 37 (for MVME712A) or
Figure 38 (for MVME712M). Tables 34 through 36 show the
default setups for the transition cards.
Table 34
Default DCE/DTE settings for MVME712AM transition card
Serial Port
SP1
Setting
DCE
Ñ
Use
Console
SP2
Internal Modem
Conshare
SP3
DCE
DCE
SP4
Meridian Mail Link (Meridian Link only)
Table 35
Default DCE/DTE settings for MVME712A transition card
Serial Port
SP1
Setting
DCE
Use
Console
SP2
DCE
External Modem
Conshare
SP3
DCE
SP4
DCE
Meridian Mail Link (Meridian Link only)
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
134 Chapter 8: Hardware installation procedures
Table 36
Default DCE/DTE settings for MVME712M transition card
Serial Port
SP1
Setting
DCE
DTE
Use
Console
SP2
External Modem
Conshare
SP3
DTE
SP4
DTE
Meridian Mail Link (Meridian Link only)
¥
The NT6D51AA card, if present, has no option settings.
10
Reconnect the ribbon cables to the transition cards as follows:
¥
Connect the cable from the MVME333-2 XCC card to the
MVME705B transition card.
¥
Connect the cable from the P2 adapter board to the MVME712
transition card.
11
12
13
Reinstall the transition cards in the Application Module. Push the
cards in until the faceplates are flush with the front of the module.
Install the screws at the top and bottom of the transition card
faceplates.
Reinstall the Application Module (if necessary) as follows:
¥
Hold the Application Module by the bar on the top and position it
in the AEM. Slide the unit into the AEM.
¥
¥
Tighten the four screws on the front of the Application Module.
Position the I/O subpanel, universal I/O panel, or generic I/O
panel at the rear of the Application Module. Tighten or reinstall
the screws that secure the panel.
¥
¥
Attach the orange logic-return ground wire to the screw on the
terminal block at the bottom of the AEM.
Connect the yellow and gray cable from the power sense card to
the appropriate plug on the power monitor.
If the Application Module is on the right side of the AEM (from
the rear view), the cable connects to P1 on the power monitor. If
the Application Module is on the left side of the AEM, the cable
connects to P2.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8: Hardware installation procedures 135
Note: A connector housing surrounds the pins on the P1 and P2
connectors. Make sure you center the cable connector on the pins
within the housing.
¥
Plug the power harness into the connector on the MPDU (P3 if
the Application Module is installed next to the MPDU, P4 if the
Application Module is on the other side of the AEM).
Note: Make sure you connect all the cables securely.
Note: Return to Chapter 5, ÒHardware installation overviewÓ for
the next procedure (Table 12).
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
136 Chapter 8: Hardware installation procedures
Figure 33
MVME332XTS transition card serial port configuration
J1
S2
O N
1 2 3 4
S1
J4
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8: Hardware installation procedures 137
Figure 34
MVME333-2 transition card serial port configuration
K1
K2
K5
K3
K6
16
15
K7
K8
K4
K4
K9
K9
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
138 Chapter 8: Hardware installation procedures
Figure 35
MVME705B transition card serial port configuration
SP5
P10 P9
1
9
K4
Connector for DTE
1
Jumpers for DTE
9
K5
SP3
Connector for DCE
1
P12
P11
K5
Jumpers for DCE
1
9
K5
9
Connector for DTE
Jumpers for DTE
1
9
K6
SP1
Connector for DCE
Jumpers for DCE
1
9
P13
K6
P14
P2
1
K6
9
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8: Hardware installation procedures 139
Figure 36
MVME712AM transition card configuration
1
+5 VDC
+12VDC
-12VDC
GND
SP1
Console
¥
J21
6
Modem power
¥
SP2
¥
(for external modem)
19 20
SP3
¥
(to SDI, for conshare)
J7
Modem interconnect
¥
SP4
(unused)
¥
¥
J8
DCE
J9
DCE
DTE DCE
1
2
3
J6
Phone hookup
(unused)
J14
2
1
DTE
DTE
4
DTE DCE
¥
J8
¥
J9
J13
DCE
1
3
DCE
DTE
1
3
1
J14
¥
3
13
25
Printer
(unused)
¥
J13
DCE
1
DTE
¥
3
DTE
To P2 adapter board
¥
J17
J16
14
1
1
9
1
2
2
9
10
10
Serial
Modem
Port
Port
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
140 Chapter 8: Hardware installation procedures
Figure 37
MVME712A transition card configuration
+5 VDC
+12 VDC
-12 VDC
GND
1
SP1
Console
J21
6
Modem power
19 20
SP2
(for external modem)
MVME732 Modem board
(non-component side)
SP3
(to SDI, for conshare)
1
2
3
4
J6
SP4
(unused)
1
2
1
2
DTE
DCE
1
3
J9
J8
J14
1
3
DCE
DTE
1
3
Phone hookup
(unused)
J13
DCE
DTE
1
3
Printer
(unused)
To P2 adapter board
1
2
1
9
2
9
10
Modem
Port
10
Serial
Port
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8: Hardware installation procedures 141
Figure 38
MVME712M card with jumpers
Jumpers
for DCE
J1
Jumpers
for DTE
J11
R1 R2 1 2 1 2
1
3
2
1
2
4
13
25
25 13
4
3
Jumpers
for SP1
5
7
6
8
5
7
6
8
J1
J11
J7
J9
13 14
13 14
9
10
9
10
12
14
SP1, 3
1 2 1 2
11
13
12
14
11
13
R3
14
1
1
14
J13
J14
J13
J14
1
3
2
1
3
2
4
13 14 13 14
1
2
1 2
1 2
4
Jumpers
for SP3
5
7
9
5
7
9
6
8
6
8
13
25 R4
25 13
10
10
J8J10
J16
SP2, 4
11
13
12
14
11
13
12
14
13 14 13 14
J17
1 2 1 2
19 20
14
1
J16
J17
R5
1
14
1
3
2
4
1
3
2
4
Jumpers
for SP2
J18
DS1
DS2
5
7
9
5
7
6
6
8
13 14
J19
Ethernet port
(LAN-based
PC and/or
13 14
A1
8
15
1
8
10
C1
10
9
J6
2
1
R6 R7
11
11
13
12
14
12
14
9
J4
host computer)
13
1
2
1
C1
C2
J18
J19
R8
J2
J3
1
3
2
4
1
3
2
8
1
36 1
4
Jumpers
for SP4
R9
5
7
9
5
7
6
8
6
8
Printer port
(not used)
8
1
C3
9
10
12
14
10
R10
19 1
8
11
13
11
13
12
14
49 50
C32
49 50
A32
J5
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
142 Chapter 8: Hardware installation procedures
Installing an NTAK02 SDI/DCH card
On an Option 11 system, if there is no port available on the CPU/Conf or
TDS/DTR cards, you can obtain additional SDI or ESDI ports by installing
an NTAK02 SDI/DCH card before the IPE Module is configured.
This card provides the communication connection for the AML link from
the Option 11 to the IPE Module. The Option 11 port used for the AML link
connection must be configured for DCE and RS-232, and the switches set
for ESDI.
This card also provides a connection for the conshare feature. The port used
for conshare must be configured for DCE and the switches set for SDI.
1
2
Unpack and inspect the card.
Set the switches as shown in Table 37. Set the jumpers as shown in
Table 38.
3
Insert the card into a common equipment slot and lock it into position.
Table 37
NTAK02 SDI/DCH card switch settings
Switch 1-1
Switch 1-2
Port 0
SDI
SDI
Ñ
Port 1
DCH
Off
Off
Off
On
DPNSS
ESDI
On
On
Switch 1-3
Off
Switch 1-4
Off
Port 2
SDI
SDI
Ñ
Port 3
DCH
Off
On
DPNSS
ESDI
On
On
Note: For AML link, port must be set for ESDI.
Note: SDI ports are 0 and 2. ESDI ports are 1 and 3.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8: Hardware installation procedures 143
Table 38
NTAK02 SDI/DCH card jumper settings
Port
Jumper
Location
Strap for
DTE
Strap for
DCE
Jumper
Location
Strap for
RS-422
Strap for
RS-232
0
1
J10
C to B
B to A
J7
J6
C to B
C to B
B to A
B to A
J9
J8
C to B
C to B
B to A
B to A
2
3
J5
C to B
B to A
J4
J3
C to B
C to B
B to A
B to A
J2
J1
C to B
C to B
B to A
B to A
Note: For AML link, strap for DCE RS-232.
For cabling, refer to ÒSDI and ESDI/MSDL cabling (Option 11
IPE Module only)Ó in Chapter 9, ÒMeridian Link/CCR interface cabling.Ó
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
144 Chapter 8: Hardware installation procedures
Figure 39
NTAK02 SDI/DCH card jumper and switch locations
Unit 0
Unit 1
J10
J9
SW1
J8
J7
Unit 1
J6
J5
Unit 2
J2
Unit 3
J4
J3
J1
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8: Hardware installation procedures 145
Installing an ESDI or MSDL card
On the Meridian 1, a QPC513 ESDI card (vintage G or later) or NT6D80
MSDL card must have an available port. If there is no ESDI/MSDL port
available, install a QPC513 ESDI or NT6D80 MSDL card before the IPE
Module or the Application Module is configured.
Note: If using a redundant Meridian Link, an additional port is
required for the AML to connect the redundant Meridian Link Module
to the Meridian 1.
1
2
3
Unpack and inspect the card.
ESDI card onlyÑset the faceplate switch to DIS.
ESDI card onlyÑset the jumpers and switches as follows:
¥
Set the jumpers for the appropriate port to reflect DCE and
RS-232 operation, as shown in Figure 40.
¥
Set the port address switch S2 to indicate the device number, as
shown in Table 40.
The location of the switch is shown in Figure 41. The device
number should match the value configured in LD 17 (either the
ADAN prompt in X11 Release 17 or X11 International Phase 7,
or DNUM prompt in X11 Release 18 or later software). Use
LD 22 to obtain a printout of the ADAN information. See
Chapter 12, ÒMeridian 1 configuration for Meridian Link/CCRÓ for
LD 17 configuration.
4
MSDL card onlyÑset the switches as follows:
¥
Set the switches to reflect RS-232 operation, as shown in
Figure 40 and Table 39. (DCE operation is configured in
software for RS-232.)
¥
Set the physical card address switches (ÒTensÓ and ÒOnesÓ) to
indicate the device number. The physical card address is critical
and should match the value configured for the device number
(DNUM) in LD 17. Use LD 22 to obtain a printout of the ADAN
information.
The location of the switches is shown in Figure 40. The device
number should match the value configured in LD 17 (DNUM
prompt). See Chapter 12, ÒMeridian 1 configuration for
Meridian Link/CCRÓ for LD 17 configuration.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
146 Chapter 8: Hardware installation procedures
Note: If the Single Terminal Access (STA) feature is present, port 0
is reserved for the STA administration terminal.
5
6
Insert the card into a common equipment slot and lock it into
position.
ESDI card onlyÑset the faceplate switch to ENB.
Table 39
NT6D80 MSDL card switch settings
Port 0ÑSW4
all off
Port 0ÑSW8
all off
RS-232-D DTE or DCE*
RS-232-D DTE or DCE*
RS-232-D DTE or DCE*
RS-232-D DTE or DCE*
Port 1ÑSW3
all off
Port 1ÑSW7
all off
Port 2ÑSW2
all off
Port 2ÑSW6
all off
Port 3ÑSW1
all off
Port 3ÑSW5
all off
* RS-232-D DTE and DCE modes are software configured.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8: Hardware installation procedures 147
Figure 40
NT6D80 MSDL card jumper and switch locations
Tens
Ones
Card
address
switches
2
3
2
3
1
0
9
4
5
6
1
0
9
4
5
6
¥
8
7
8
7
DTE
DCE
422
422
232
Port 0
Port 1
¥
232
SW4
DCE
SW8
DTE
422
232
422
232
¥
SW3
DCE
SW7
DTE
422
232
422
232
Port 2
Port 3
¥
¥
SW2
DCE
SW6
DTE
422
232
422
232
SW1
SW5
Note: This figure shows switches for all ports.
Configure only the port you are going to use.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
148 Chapter 8: Hardware installation procedures
Table 40 (Part 1)
Program socket selection
Option
Port no.
Socket number
DTE (terminal)
1
2
UA10
UA17
UA12
UA19
DCE (modem)
1
2
UA9
UA16
UA11
UA18
RS-232-C interface
High-speed interface
1
2
UB9
UB16
UB11
UB18
1
2
UB10
UB17
UB12
UB19
Set as DCE to emulate modem.
Table 40 (Part 2)
Switch S2ÑAddress selection
Device no.
Style A
Style B
1
2
3
4
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
1
2
3
4
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
0-1
2-3
off
on
off
on
off
on
off
on
off
off
on
on
off
off
on
on
off
off
off
off
on
on
on
on
off
off
off
off
on
on
on
on
off
off
on
on
off
off
on
on
off
on
off
on
off
on
off
on
4-5
6-7
8-9
10-11
12-13
14-15
ON = synchronous mode; OFF = asynchronous mode.
Asynchronous mode is not supported. However, in releases prior to X11 Release 18,
asynchronous mode may work in some applications. With Release 18 and later, asynchronous
mode will not work.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8: Hardware installation procedures 149
Figure 41
QPC513 ESDI card jumper and switch locations
QPC513G Style B
1234
Port address switch S2
¥
ON
Jumper
¥
RS-232
DCE
Jumpers for port J1.
The port is always the
lower, even number.
DTE
HS (RS-422)
RS-232
DCE
DTE
HS (RS-422)
DCE
RS-232
Jumpers for port J2.
The port is always the
higher, odd number.
HS (RS-422)
RS-232
DTE
DCE
HS (RS-422)
DTE
Note 1: Place jumper plugs in sockets as shown. This selects the DCE and RS-232 options.
Note 2: This figure shows both high and low ports. Configure only the port you are going to use.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
150 Chapter 8: Hardware installation procedures
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
151
Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface
cabling
The cable requirements for the IPE Module and the Application Module are
completely different. For example, the Application Module uses power
harness cables, but IPE Modules receive power from the IPE backplane and
have no power cabling.
This chapter describes cabling required for the IPE Module and the
Application Module, and also provides procedures for connecting the
IPE Module and Application Module to external equipment.
IPE Module cabling
The IPE Module has two types of cable:
¥
¥
IPE Module cables
external cables (connect the IPE Module cables to the Meridian 1
system, the system console, the host computer, and Meridian Mail as
required)
IPE Module cables
IPE Module cables connect the connector ports on the connector panel (for
an Option 11 system) or on an I/O panel (for an Options 21Ð81 system) to
the external cables. IPE Module cables also provide port connectors for the
IPE Module. Figure 42 shows an illustration of the IPE Module octopus
cables NT1R03AA and NT1R03BA. Table 41 lists the IPE Module cables.
The Option 11 IPE Module requires extension cables to connect the
recessed connector panel to the IPE Module octopus cables.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
152 Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling
Figure 42
NT1R03AA and NT1R03BA IPE Module cables
Port 7
25-pin
NT1R03AA
Port 5
25-pin
Port 1
Port 3
25-pin
25-pin
Ethernet
15-pin
Port 2
25-pin
NT1R03BA
Port 4
25-pin
Port 6
Port 8
25-pin
25-pin
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling 153
Table 41
IPE Module cables
Part number
Cable description and application
NT1R03AA
(A0400295)
Shielded 4-port octopus cable: has a 50-pin connector for the connector
panel or I/O panel, four 25-pin port connectors; and a 15-pin Ethernet
connector; connects the I/O panel to external cables
NT1R03BA
(A0400297)
Shielded 4-port octopus cable: has a 50-pin connector for the connector
panel or I/O panel, and four 25-pin port connectors; connects the I/O panel
to external cables
NT1R03CA
(A0401483)
Option 11 extension cable: 50-pin connector cable; connects the connector
panel to the NT1R03AA and BA cables
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
154 Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling
External I/O cables
Table 42 lists external I/O cables that connect ports on the IPE Module
cable to an SDI port, the ESDI/MSDL port, and consoles.
Table 42
Cables from the IPE Module ports to external equipment
Part number
Length
Cable description and application
NT1R03HF (A0402669)
3 m (10 ft.)
Modem cable: connects port 2 of the
NT1R03BA cable to the external modem
NT8D93AJ (A0357270)
(Options 21Ð81 only)
5 m (16 ft.)
15 m (48 ft.)
1.8 m (6 ft.)
25-pin SDI cable: connects port 3 of the
NT1R03AA cable to the SDI Paddle Board
NT8D93AW (A0357271)
(Options 21Ð81 only)
NTAK19AA (A0372718)
(Option 11 only, except
Option 11E)
2-port SDI cable: connects port 3 of the
NT1R03AA cable to the NTAK03AA TDS/DTR
card
NTAK19BA (A0372719)
(Option 11 only)
1.8 m (6 ft.)
4-port SDI cable: connects port 3 of the
NT1R03AA cable to the NTAK02AA SDI/DCH
card
NT1R03DB (A0402335)
NT1R03DC (A0402336)
NT1R03DF (A0402337)
NT1R03DP (A0402338)
NT1R03DV (A0402339)
NT1R03EB (A0402330)
NT1R03EC (A0402331)
NT1R03EF (A0402332)
NT1R03EP (A0402333)
NT1R03EV (A0402334)
60 cm (2 ft.)
1.2 m (4 ft.)
3 m (10 ft.)
8 m (25 ft.)
14 m (45 ft.)
60 cm (2 ft.)
1.2 m (4 ft.)
3 m (10 ft.)
8 m (25 ft.)
14 m (45 ft.)
25-pin extension cable: connects ports of
cables NT1R03AA and NT1R03BA to external
equipment
Note: This cable is also used for MSDL and
AML on Options 21Ð81.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling 155
External I/O cable pinouts (IPE Module)
This section provides pinouts for the following cables:
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
NT1R03D
NT1R03E
NT1R03HF
NT1R03AA
NT1R03BA
NT1R03CA
NT8D82
NT8D93A
NTND27AB
NTAK19AA
NTAK19BA
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
156 Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling
Table 43
NT1R03D cable pinouts (IPE Module)
External
equipment pin
Port pin
Signal
TD
2
3
2
3
RD
4
RTS
CTS
DSR
GND
CD
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
15
17
20
24
SCT
SCR
DTR
SCTE
15
17
20
24
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling 157
Table 44
NT1R03E cable pinouts (IPE Module)
External
equipment pin
Port pin
Signal
TD
2
3
2
3
RD
4
RTS
CTS
DSR
GND
CD
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
15
17
20
24
SCT
SCR
DTR
SCTE
15
17
20
24
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
158 Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling
Table 45
NT1R03HF cable pinouts (IPE Module)
External
equipment pin
Port pin
Signal
1
2
Shield
RD
1
3
3
TD
2
4
CTS
RTS
DSR
GND
DTR
DCD
5
5
4
6
6
7
7
8
20
8
20
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling 159
Table 46
NT1R03AA 50-pin four-port cable pinout (IPE Module)
From
DB-50
To
DB-25
Port
Signal
name
From
DB-50
To
DB-25
Port
Signal
name
1
2
7
2
1
1
GND1
TXD1
RTS1
DSR1
GND3
TXD3
RTS3
DSR3
GND5
TXD5
RTS5
DSR5
TXCI5
RI5
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
8
3
1
1
DCD1
RXD1
CTS1
DTR1
DCD3
RXD3
CTS3
DTR3
DCD5
RXD5
CTS5
DTR5
RXCI5
TXCO5
DCD7
RXD7
CTS7
DTR7
RXCI7
TXCO7
3
4
1
5
1
4
6
1
20
8
1
5
7
3
3
6
2
3
3
3
7
4
3
5
3
8
6
3
20
8
3
9
7
5
5
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
2
5
3
5
4
5
5
5
6
5
20
17
24
8
5
15
22
7
5
5
5
5
7
GND7
TXD7
RTS7
DSR7
TXCI7
RI7
7
2
7
3
7
4
7
5
7
6
7
20
17
24
7
15
22
7
7
7
7
From
DB-50
To
DB-15
Port
Signal
name
From
DB-50
To
DB-15
Port
Signal
name
21
22
23
24
25
2
3
5
6
Ethernet
Ethernet
Ethernet
Ethernet
FGND
C+
46
47
48
49
50
9
Ethernet
Ethernet
Ethernet
Ethernet
FGND
C-
T+
10
12
13
T-
R+
R-
SG
+12VF
FGND
FGND
Note: Pins 21Ð24 and 46Ð49 of the NT1R03AA cable connect to pins 2, 3, 5, 6, 9, 10, 12,
and 13 of the DB-15 Ethernet connector.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
160 Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling
Table 47
NT1R03BA 50-pin four-port cable pinout (IPE Module)
From
DB-50
To
DB-25
Port
Signal
name
From
DB-50
To
DB-25
Port
Signal
name
1
2
7
2
2
2
2
2
4
4
4
4
6
6
6
6
6
6
8
8
8
8
8
8
GND2
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
8
3
2
2
2
2
4
4
4
4
6
6
6
6
6
6
8
8
8
8
8
8
DCD2
TXD2
RTS2
DSR2
GND4
TXD4
RTS4
DSR4
GND6
TXD6
RTS6
DSR6
TXCI6
RI6
RXD2
CTS2
DTR2
DCD4
RXD4
CTS4
DTR4
DCD6
RXD6
CTS6
DTR6
RXCI6
TXCO6
DCD8
RXD8
CTS8
DTR8
RXCI8
TXCO8
NC
3
4
5
4
6
20
8
5
7
6
2
3
7
4
5
8
6
20
8
9
7
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
2
3
4
5
6
20
17
24
8
15
22
7
GND8
TXD8
RTS8
DSR8
TXCI8
RI8
2
3
4
5
6
20
17
24
15
22
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
FGND
FGND
FGND
FGND
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling 161
Table 48
NT1R03CA 50-pin four-port cable pinout (IPE Module)
From
DB-50
(male)
To port
DB-50
(female)
Port*
Signal
name
From
DB-50
(male)
To port
DB-50
(female)
Port*
Signal
name
1
2
25
2
1 or 2
1 or 2
1 or 2
1 or 2
3 or 4
3 or 4
3 or 4
3 or 4
5 or 6
5 or 6
5 or 6
5 or 6
5 or 6
5 or 6
7 or 8
7 or 8
7 or 8
7 or 8
7 or 8
7 or 8
Ethernet
Ethernet
Ethernet
Ethernet
FGND
GND2
TXD2
RTS2
DSR2
GND4
TXD4
RTS4
DSR4
GND6
TXD6
RTS6
DSR6
TXCI6
RI6
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
1 or 2
1 or 2
1 or 2
1 or 2
3 or 4
3 or 4
3 or 4
3 or 4
5 or 6
5 or 6
5 or 6
5 or 6
5 or 6
5 or 6
7 or 8
7 or 8
7 or 8
7 or 8
7 or 8
7 or 8
Ethernet
Ethernet
Ethernet
Ethernet
FGND
DCD2
RXD2
CTS2
DTR2
DCD4
RXD4
CTS4
DTR4
DCD6
RXD6
CTS6
DTR6
RXCI6
TXCO6
DCD8
RXD8
CTS8
DTR8
RXCI8
TXCO8
C-
3
3
4
4
5
25
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
50
10
11
12
13
14
50
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
GND8
TXD8
RTS8
DSR8
TXCI8
RI8
C+
T+
T-
R+
R-
SG
+12VF
FGND
FGND
* One NT1R03CA cable connects to ports 1, 3, 5, 7, and the Ethernet port. The other
NT1R03CA cable connects to ports 2, 4, 6, and 8.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
162 Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling
Table 49
NT8D93A cable pinout (IPE Module)
25-pin
connector
Signal
9-pin
connector
2
3
TD
RD
2
8
4
9
8
3
1
7
4
RTS
CTS
DSR
GRD
CD
5
6
7
8
20
DTR
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling 163
Table 50
NT8D82 cable pinout (IPE Module)
25-pin connector
25-pin connector
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
ÑcontinuedÑ
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
164 Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling
Table 50
NT8D82 cable pinout (IPE Module) (continued)
25-pin connector
25-pin connector
21
22
23
24
25
21
22
23
24
25
Ñ endÑ
Table 51
NT8D93A cable pinout (IPE Module)
25-pin
connector
Signal
9-pin
connector
2
3
TD
RD
2
8
4
9
8
3
1
7
4
RTS
CTS
DSR
GRD
CD
5
6
7
8
20
DTR
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling 165
Table 52
NTND27AB cable pinout (IPE Module)
26-pin
connector
Signal
DB-25
connector
1
2
GND
TXD
RXD
RTS
CTS
DSR
LTRN
DCD
DTR
1
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
20
20
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
166 Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling
Table 53
NTAK19AA cable pinout (IPE Module)
Meridian 1
Signal
TDCD0
DSR0
RTS0
RXD0
DTR0
CTS0
TXD0
SG
Port 0 pin
1
2
8
20
3
5
4
2
26
28
29
30
6
4
3
7
Port 1 pin
7
DSR1
RTS1
RXD1
TDCD1
DTR1
CTS1
TXD1
SG
20
5
8
11
13
31
33
36
42
2
8
6
4
8
7
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling 167
Table 54
NTAK19BA cable pinout (IPE Module)
Meridian 1
Signal
DSR0
RTS0
RXD0
DTR0
DCD0
CTS0
TXD0
SG0
Port 0 pin
2
3
6
4
4
3
26
27
28
29
30
20
8
5
2
7
Port 1 pin
5
6
SCTEA1
SCTEB1
DSR1
24
23
6
7
8
RTS1
4
9
SCRA1
SCRB1
RXDA1
RXDB1
SG1
17
12
3
10
11
12
25
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
16
7
DTR1
20
8
DCD1
CTS1
5
SCTA1
SCTB1
TXDA1
TXDB1
Ñ continued Ñ
15
14
2
13
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
168 Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling
Table 54
NTAK19BA cable pinout (IPE Module) (continued)
Meridian 1
Signal
DSR2
RTS2
RXD2
DTR2
DCD2
CTS2
TXD2
SG2
Port 2 pin
14
15
16
38
39
40
41
42
6
4
3
20
8
5
2
7
Port 3 pin
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
SCTEA3
SCTEB3
DSR3
24
23
6
RTS3
4
SCRA3
SCRB3
RXDA3
RXDB3
DTR3
17
12
3
16
20
8
DCD3
CTS3
5
SCTA3
SCTB3
TXDA3
TXDB3
SG3
15
14
2
13
7
Ñ end Ñ
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling 169
SDI and ESDI/MSDL cabling (Option 11 IPE Module only)
On an IPE Module Option 11 system, you can obtain one or two additional
SDI or ESDI ports by adding an NTAK02 SDI/DCH card. The NTAK19BA
cable plugs into the same port on the I/O panel as the card slot used for the
SDI card. For example, if the SDI card is inserted in slot 5, the NTAK19BA
cable plugs into port 5. Use a four-port SDI cable (NTAK19BA) with the
NTAK02 SDI/DCH card. For more information about Option 11 SDI ports,
refer to Option 11 Technical Reference GuideÑBook 1
(NTP 553-3011-100).
Figure 43 shows three methods of connecting an Option 11 system to port 3
(conshare) (SDI) or port 5 (AML) (ESDI) of the IPE Module cable
NT1R03AA (which connects into the IPE Module connector panel through
extension cable NT1R03CA). Refer to ÒExternal I/O cable pinoutsÓ in this
chapter for pinouts of these cables.
¥
The first method shows how to connect port 0 of the NTAK01
CPU/Conf card to IPE Module port 3 for conshare.
¥
The second method shows how to connect either port 0 or port 1 of the
NTAK03 TDS/DTR card to IPE Module port 5 for AML. This method
uses the NTAK19AA 2-port cable. Refer to ÒExternal I/O cable
pinoutsÓ in this chapter for a pinout of this cable.
¥
The third method shows how to connect any of ports 0Ð3 of the
optional NTAK02 SDI/DCH card to an IPE Module port. Ports 0 and 2
of the NTAK02 SDI/DCH card can be configured as SDI ports and
connected to IPE Module port 3 (conshare). Ports 1 and 3 of the
NTAK02 SDI/DCH card can be configured as ESDI ports and
connected to IPE Module port 5 (AML). This method uses the
NTAK19BA 4-port cable. Refer to ÒExternal I/O cable pinoutsÓ in this
chapter for a pinout of this cable.
Note: To add length to the cabling, you may need to use a straight-
through extension cable (NT1R03D) between the port on the octopus
cable and the Meridian 1 port.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
170 Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling
Figure 43
IPE Module Option 11 connections (Part 1)
IPE
Module
Meridian 1 Option 11
Method 1
Internal
Connector
Panel
NTAK01
bus
1
3
5
CPU/Conf
A0368901
SDI
port 0
NT1R03CA
(extension
cable)
NT1R03AA
(octopus
cable)
Note 4
7
IPE
Module
Method 2
Connector
Panel
J1 (Note 1)
1
NTAK03
TDS/DTR
(Note 3)
Internal
bus
Note 4
3
5
7
NTAK19AA
NT1R03AA
(octopus
cable)
NT1R03CA
(extension
cable)
port 0
(2-port
cable)
port 1
Note 1: It is recommended that the TDS/DTR card be
installed in position 1. The SDI/DCH card may be
installed in any other position except position 0
(for the CPU/Conf card).
Note 2: Refer to the Meridian 1 Option 11 Installation
Guide (NTP 553-3011-210) for cross connections.
Note 3: The NTAK03 TDS/DTR card is not available for Option
11E.
Note 4: Use an NT1R03D extension cable if you need
additional length.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling 171
Figure 43
IPE Module Option 11 connections (Part 2)
IPE
Module
Meridian 1 Option 11
Method 3
NTAK02
SDI/DCH
Internal
bus
port 0
port 0
port 2
Connector
Panel
1
3
5
7
NTAK19BA
port 1
port 2
port 3
(4-port
cable)
NT1R03AA
(octopus
cable)
NT1R03CA
(extension
cable)
port 1
port 3
J2-9
(Note 1)
Connect an SDI port to port 3 for
conshare and an ESDI port to
port 5 for AML (link 0) (Note 3)
Note 1: It is recommended that the TDS/DTR card be
installed in position 1. The SDI/DCH card may be
installed in any other position except position 0
(for the CPU/Conf card).
Note 2: Refer to the Meridian 1 Option 11 Installation
Guide (NTP 553-3011-210) for cross connections.
Note 3: Use an NT1R03D extension cable if you need
additional length.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
172 Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling
Meridian Mail cabling (IPE Module)
The Meridian Link application can have voice-processing capability by
connecting the IPE Module to a Meridian Mail system through a link called
the Meridian Mail Link (MML).
The MML connects to the IPE Module at port 4. The MML connects to the
Meridian Mail system at a data port of Meridian Mail via an NT1R03HF
25-pin male to a 25-pin male cable (10 ft.) with a null modem adapter. For a
pinout of the NT1R03HF cable, refer to ÒExternal I/O cable pinoutsÓ in this
chapter.
Figure 44
Meridian Mail cabling (IPE Module)
Meridian
MailSystem
To IPE Module
connector panel
(Option 11) orI/O
panel (Options
21Ð81)
2
4
Meridian
Mail
NT1R03BA
octopus cable
data port
6
8
For more information on defining MML parameters, refer to Procedure 15:
Changing Meridian Mail Link (link 2) parameters (Meridian Link only). For
information on Meridian Mail, refer to Chapter 13, ÒMeridian Mail
configuration.Ó
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling 173
ESDI/MSDL cabling (Options 21Ð81 IPE Module)
As shown in Figure 45, port 5 of the NT1R03AA cable connects to the
NT6D80 MSDL card through an NTND27AB cable and, if additional
length is needed, through an NT1R03D extension cable. For pinouts of the
NT1R03AA, NT8D82, NT1R03D, and NTND27 cables, refer to ÒExternal
I/O cable pinoutsÓ in this chapter. From the Meridian 1 I/O panel or the
ESDI/MSDL on the Meridian 1, an NT7D58 cable connects to the IPE
Module. Refer to Table 55.
As shown in Figures 45 and 46, port 5 of the NT1R03AA cable connects to
the QPC513 ESDI card through an NT8D82 cable and, if additional length
is needed, through an NT1R03D extension cable. The NT6D80 MSDL card
connects to the Meridian 1 I/O panel using an NTND27 SCSI II cable. From
the Meridian 1 I/O panel or the ESDI/MSDL on the Meridian 1, an NT7D58
cable connects to the IPE Module at
¥
¥
¥
J2 on the I/O subpanel
ESDI Link port on the universal I/O panel
card 2 conn 1 on the generic I/O panel
SDI cabling (Options 21Ð81 IPE Module)
As shown in Figures 45 and 46, port 3 of the NT1R03AA cable connects to
SDI cards (except the NT8D41 SDI Paddle Board) through an NT8D82
cable, and if additional length is needed, through an NT1R03D cable. (See
Table 42 for lengths and specific codes.) For pinouts of the NT1R03AA,
NT8D82, and NT1R03D cables, refer to ÒExternal I/O cable pinoutsÓ in this
chapter. The NT6D80 MSDL card connects to the Meridian 1 I/O panel
using an NTND27 SCSI II cable. From the Meridian 1 I/O panel, an
NT7D58 cable connects to the IPE Module.
For more information about Option 11 SDI ports, refer to Option 11
Technical Reference GuideÑBook 1 (NTP 553-3011-100).
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
174 Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling
SDI Paddle Board cabling (Options 21Ð81 IPE Module only)
Port 3 of the NT1R03AA cable connects to the NT8D41 SDI Paddle Board
through an NT8D93A cable and, if additional length is needed, through an
NT1R03D extension cable. For pinout of the NT8D93A cable, refer to
ÒExternal I/O cable pinoutsÓ in this chapter.
As shown in Figures 45 and 46, the NT6D80 MSDL card connects to the
Meridian 1 I/O panel using an NTND27 SCSI II cable. From the Meridian 1
I/O panel, an NT7D58 cable connects to the IPE Module.
The NT7D58 cable has 25-pin male connectors at both ends. Table 55 lists
the pin assignments required for the cable.
Table 55
NT7D58 cable pinout
Meridian 1
Signal
AM (J2)
1
2
Shield
TXD
1
2
3
4
RXD
RTS
3
4
5
CTS
5
6
7
8
15
17
20
24
DSR
LRTN
DCD
STC
SCR
DTR
SCTE
6
7
8
15
17
20
24
For more information about the NT8D41 SDI Paddle Board, refer to NT8D4
SDI Paddle Board (NTP 553-3001-181).
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling 175
Figure 45
I/O cabling to Meridian 1 (SDI and MSDL) (Options 21Ð81 IPE Module)
Part of IPE shelf
I/O panel
Ethernet
port 1
NT1R03AA
port 3
port 5
port 7
NT7D58 to
SDI/MSDL
Meridian 1
SDI card
NT8D82
NT8D82
(see Note)
QPC513
ESDI card
NTND27AB
NT6D80
MSDL card
I/O panels
Note: Use the NT8D82 cable with all SDI cards except
the NT8D41 SDI Paddle Board. With the Paddle Board,
use an NT8D93A cable.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
176 Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling
Figure 46
I/O cabling to Meridian 1 (SDI and ESDI) (Options 21Ð81 IPE Module)
Part of IPE shelf
I/O panel
Ethernet
port 1
NT1R03AA
port 3
port 5
port 7
NT7D58 to
SDI/ESDI
Meridian 1
SDI card
NT8D82
NT8D82
(see Note)
QPC513
ESDI card
NTND27AB
NT6D80
MSDL card
I/O panels
Note: Use the NT8D82 cable with all SDI cards except
the NT8D41 SDI Paddle Board. With the Paddle Board,
use an NT8D93A cable.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling 177
Cabling the Option 11 IPE Module to external equipment
The following procedure to cable the Option 11 IPE Module to external
equipment is only one of a series of procedures to install an IPE Module.
The series is shown in Table 11 in Chapter 5, ÒHardware installation
overview.Ó Ensure that you have completed steps 1 through 4 in Table 11
before you start the following procedure.
Cabling to external equipment
After installing the IPE Module in the main cabinet or expansion cabinet,
connect the cables to external equipment.
Figure 47 shows the cabling from the Option 11 IPE Module to external
equipment. The NT1R03AA and NT1R03BA octopus cables connect to the
Option 11 cabinetÕs connector panel through NT1R03CA extension cables.
Octopus cable ports (called IPE Module ports) connect to external
equipment as shown in Figure 47. NT1R03D extension cables attached to
the IPE Module ports can provide additional length if needed.
Figure 48 shows the connector panel for the main cabinet, which is at the
bottom of the cabinet and recessed to the rear. The connector panel for the
expansion cabinet is similar except for the connector port numbering.
For pinouts of the NT1R03AA, NT1R03BA, NT1R03CA, and NT1R03D
cables, refer to ÒExternal I/O cable pinoutsÓ in this chapter.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
178 Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling
Figure 47
Option 11 system IPE Module connections
Meridian 1 cabinet
IPE
Module
See
Note 3
Ethernet port (to TCP/IP host link)
(See Note 4)
Port 1
NT1R03D
to console
Connector
Port 3
to conshare (See Note 1)
to AML (See Note 1)
panel
Port 5
NT1R03CA
(extension cable)
50M
to terminal or printer
(CCR)
Port 7
NT1R03D
NT1R03AA (octopus cable)
NT1R03CA (extension cable)
50M
Port 2
Port 4
NT1R03HF
to external modem
NT1R03BA
(octopus cable)
to MML (Meridian Link and co-residency)
See Note 2
to X.25 host link (Meridian
NT1R03D
Port 6
Port 8
Link and co-residency)
to terminal or printer (CCR)
NT1R03D
to terminal or printer (CCR)
Note 1: For SDI and ESDI cabling, refer to ÒSDI and ESDI/MSDL cabling
(Option 11 IPE Module only).Ó
Note 2: For MML cabling, refer to ÒMeridian Mail cabling (IPE Module).Ó
Note 3: For DCE/DTE configuration, refer to ÒInstalling the IPE Module.Ó
Note 4: For Ethernet LAN cabling, refer to ÒInstalling Ethernet LAN support.Ó
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling 179
Figure 48
Option 11 main cabinet connector panel
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
¥
1
2
Ensure that the power for the IPE Module is turned off.
Connect NT1R03CA extension cables to the NT1R03AA and
NT1R03BA octopus cables using the 50-pin connectors. Using these
cables allows the front panel of the Option 11 to be closed without
interference from dangling cables.
3
Connect the NT1R03CA extension cable that is connected to the
NT1R03AA octopus cable to the appropriate connector cable as
shown in Tables 56 and 57. For example, if the IPE Module is
located in slots 2, 3, and 4, connect the extension cable to connector
J4.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
180 Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling
Table 56
Option 11 IPE ModuleÑNT1R03AA/NT1R03CA cable connections
(main cabinet)
Slots occupied by the
IPE Module
Connect NT1R03AA/NT1R03CA
cables to connector port
2, 3, 4
J4
J5
J6
J7
J8
J9
3, 4, 5
4, 5, 6
5, 6, 7
6, 7, 8
7, 8, 9
Table 57
Option 11 IPE ModuleÑNT1R03AA/NT1R03CA cable connections
(expansion cabinet)
Slots occupied by the
IPE Module
Connect NT1R03AA/NT1R03CA
cables to connector port
11, 12, 13
12, 13, 14
13, 14, 15
14, 15, 16
15, 16, 17
16, 17, 18
17, 18, 19
18, 19, 20
J13
J14
J15
J16
J17
J18
J19
J20
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling 181
4
Connect the NT1R03CA extension cable that is connected to the
NT1R03BA octopus cable to the appropriate connector as shown in
Tables 58 and 59. For example, if the IPE module is located in slots
2, 3, and 4, connect the extension cable to connector J2.
Table 58
Option 11 IPE ModuleÑNTIR03BA/NT1R03CA cable connection
(main cabinet)
Slots occupied by the
IPE Module
Connect NT1R03BA/NT1R03CA
cables to connector port
2, 3, 4
3, 4, 5
4, 5, 6
5, 6, 7
6, 7, 8
7, 8, 9
J2
J3
J4
J5
J6
J7
Table 59
Option 11 IPE ModuleÑNT1R03BA/NT1R03CA cable connections
(expansion cabinet)
Slots occupied by the
IPE Module
Connect NT1R03BA/NT1R03CA
cables to connector port
11, 12, 13
12, 13, 14
13, 14, 15
14, 15, 16
15, 16, 17
16, 17, 18
17, 18, 19
18, 19, 20
J11
J12
J13
J14
J15
J16
J17
J18
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
182 Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling
Connect the ports of octopus cable NT1R03AA to external
5
equipment as described in Table 60 and shown in Figure 47. For
example, connect port 1 of the NT1R03AA octopus cable to the
console using a customer-supplied cable.
Table 60
Option 11 IPE Module external connections (NT1R03AA cable)
NT1R03AA External equipment
port
External cable or reference
1
console
Customer-supplied cable. See
Table 62 for pinout.
3
conshare
See ÒSDI and ESDI/MSDL
cabling (Option 11 IPE Module
only).Ó
5
AML
See ÒSDI and ESDI/MSDL
cabling (Option 11 IPE Module
only).Ó
7
terminal/printer
Ethernet LAN
NT1R03D
Ethernet
See ÒInstalling Ethernet LAN
support.Ó
6
Connect the ports of cable NT1R03BA to external equipment using
extension cables, as described in Table 61 and shown in Figure 47.
For example, connect port 2 of the NT1R03BA cable to the external
modem using extension cable NT1R03HF.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling 183
Table 61
Option 11 IPE Module external connections (NT1R03BA cable)
NT1R03BA External equipment
port
External cable or reference
2
4
6
external modem
Meridian Mail Link
X.25 Host Link
terminal/printer
NT1R03HF (for pinout, see
ÒExternal I/O cable pinouts.Ó
See ÒMeridian Mail cabling
(IPE Module).Ó
NT1R03D or customer-supplied
cable. See Table 63 for pinout.
8
NT1R03D
Table 62
Console cable pinout (NT1R03D)
Meridian 1
Signal
TXD
IPE Module
2
3
2
3
RXD
RTS
4
4
5
CTS
5
6
DSR
LRTN
DCD
DTR
GND
6
7
7
8
8
20
1
20
1
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
184 Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling
Table 63
X.25 Host Link cable pinout
IPE Module
Signal
TXD
Host Connection
2
3
RXD
TXD
RXD
RTS
4
CTS
5
CTS
RTS
6
DSR
GND
DCD
TXCI
DTR
7
GND
8
+12v
15
TRXC or open
Note: Return to Chapter 5, ÒHardware installation overviewÓ for the
next procedure.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling 185
Backplane cable rerouting for Options 21Ð81 CE/PE and
IPE backplanes
In a standard configuration, an IPE Module can be placed in any four
adjoining peripheral slots on an Options 21Ð81 CE/PE or IPE shelf. This is
possible when the slots are fully cabled to accommodate 24 tip and ring
pairs per slot. However, older CE/PE or IPE shelves (NT8D37 AA or DC
vintage) do not have fully cabled backplanes. In those cases, you must
reroute backplane cables inside the CE/PE or IPE shelf before installing the
IPE Module.
To determine whether you have a fully cabled CE/PE or IPE shelf, check
the back of the CE/PE backplane (NT8D11) or the IPE backplane
(NT8D37). If the backplane has eight cables connected on each side, your
backplane is fully cabled therefore you can install the IPE Module without
rerouting cables. If there are any shrouds on the backplane left unattached,
follow the appropriate procedure in this section to modify the CE/PE or IPE
shelf.
In the standard configuration of the NT8D11 CE/PE backplane and
NT8D37 IPE backplane for a software release prior to Meridian 1 X11
Release 18, some slots on the backplane are fully cabled to accommodate 24
tip and ring pairs (three cable connectors). Most of the backplane slots,
however, accommodate 16 pairs (two cable connectors). By adding and
reconfiguring backplane cabling in the backplane slots, you can ensure that
each backplane slot can accommodate 24 pairs. Once you have finished the
rerouting process, the CE/PE or IPE cabinet can support the IPE Module.
CAUTION
Risk of system interruption
It is important to note that you should reroute only those
cables connected to the segment of the backplane where
the IPE Module is installed.
!
Backplane cables connect each connector port of an I/O panel with the
appropriate slot on the backplane. For example, a backplane cable connects
connector port A to a backplane slot. At the I/O panel, each backplane cable
connects to a 50-pin connector. At the backplane end, each backplane cable
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
186 Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling
has three 20-pin connectors (only 16 pins are used) labelled 1, 2, and 3, and
referred to as X-1, X-2, and X-3, in which X represents the I/O panel
connector port. For example, the backplane cable connected to I/O panel
connector port A has three connectors referred to as A-1, A-2, and A-3.
The location of the cable connectors on the backplane is designated by the
slot number (L0 through L9 for NT8D11, L0 through L15 for NT8D37) and
the shroud row (1, 2, 3). Using these designations, the slot positions in the
first slot are referred to as L0-1, L0-2, and L0-3.
CAUTION
Risk of equipment damage
Wear an antistatic wrist strap when handling components
to avoid equipment damage. The strap will also prevent a
shock due to electrostatic energy buildup.
!
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling 187
Backplane cable rerouting for the NT8D11 CE/PE Module
backplane
In the standard seven-cable configuration for the NT8D11 CE/PE backplane
(Figure 49), cables from connector ports D, G, and L are not used. Those
cables are used in the ten-cable fully expanded configuration.
Figure 49
NT8D11 backplane cable designations (standard configuration)
Peripheral equipment slots
Common equipment slots
C9 C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C0
L9 L8 L7 L6 L5 L4 L3 L2 L1 L0
1
K-2 H-3 H-1 F-2 E-3 E-1 C-2
B-1 A-1
B-3
K-3 K-1 H-2 F-3 F-1 E-2 C-3 C-1 B-2 A-2
A-3
2
3
Shroud Row
Note: The first PE slot is already fully cabled for 24 pairs, so no
change is required for that slot.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
188 Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling
Table 64 lists cable connections before cable expansion. Figure 49 shows
the backplane slots before cable expansion.
Table 64
NT8D11 cable connections (standard configuration)
I/O panel connector
port
Backplane cable
connector
Backplane slot
position
A
B
C
E
F
A-1
A-2
A-3
B-1
B-2
B-3
C-1
C-2
C-3
E-1
E-2
E-3
F-1
F-2
F-3
H-1
H-2
H-3
K-1
K-2
K-3
L0-1
L0-2
L0-3
L1-1
L1-2
L2-1
L2-2
L3-1
L3-2
L4-1
L4-2
L5-1
L5-2
L6-1
L6-2
L7-1
L7-2
L8-1
L8-2
L9-1
L9-2
H
K
Note: Connector ports D, G, and L are not used in this configuration.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling 189
Cabling for the first four PE slots can be expanded using one NT8D81AA
cable/filter assembly. Cabling for all of the PE slots can be expanded using
three NT8D81AA cable/filter assemblies.
If you do not have additional NT8D81AA cable/filter assemblies available,
you can reroute the existing cables to accommodate the Meridian Link/CCR
IPE Module in certain PE slots. For more information on this, refer to
ÒNT8D11 backplane cabling reroutingÑto accommodate the IPE Module in
PE slots 0Ð3Ó later in this section.
NT8D11 backplane cable expansionÑfirst four PE slots only
With the cables located as shown in Table 64:
1
2
3
Leave cable A in slot position L0.
Move cable end B-3 from slot position L2-1 to slot position L1-3.
Remove cable C from the backplane and connect cable ends C-1,
C-2, and C-3 to slot positions L2-1, L2-2, and L2-3.
4
Add cable D to the I/O panel by connecting cable ends D-1, D-2, and
D-3 to slot positions L3-1, L3-2, and L3-3.
Cables E, G, H, and K remain the same. Cable positions G and L
are open for further expansion.
Slots 0Ð3 are now ready to receive an IPE Module.
NT8D11 backplane cable expansionÑall PE slots
With the cables located as shown in Table 64:
1
2
3
Leave cable A in slot position L0.
Move cable end B-3 from slot position L2-1 to slot position L1-3.
Remove cable C from the backplane and connect cable ends C-1,
C-2, and C-3 to slot positions L2-1, L2-2, and L2-3.
4
Add cable D to the I/O panel by connecting cable ends D-1, D-2, and
D-3 to slot positions L3-1, L3-2, and L3-3.
5
6
Move cable end E-3 from slot position L5-1 to slot position L4-3.
Remove cable F from the backplane and connect cable ends F-1,
F-2, and F-3 to slot positions L5-1, L5-2, and L5-3.
7
Add cable G to the I/O panel by connecting cable ends G-1, G-2,
and G-3 to slot positions L6-1, L6-2, and L6-3.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
190 Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling
8
9
Move cable end H-3 from slot position L8-1 to slot position L7-3.
Remove cable K from the backplane and connect cable ends K-1,
K-2, and K-3 to slot positions L8-1, L8-2, and L8-3.
10
Add cable L to the I/O panel by connecting cable ends L-1, L-2, and
L-3 to slot positions L9-1, L9-2, and L9-3.
The backplane cabling should now be as shown in Table 65 and Figure 50.
All slots are now ready to receive an IPE Module.
Table 65 lists cable connections for a fully expanded configuration.
Figure 50 shows the backplane slots in a fully expanded configuration.
Table 65
NT8D11 cable connections (fully expanded configuration)
I/O panel connector
port
Backplane cable
connector
Backplane slot
position
A
A-1
A-2
A-3
L0-1
L0-2
L0-3
B
B-1
B-2
B-3
L1-1
L1-2
L1-3
C
C-1
C-2
C-3
L2-1
L2-2
L2-3
D (new cable)
D-1
D-2
D-3
L3-1
L3-2
L3-3
E
F
E-1
E-2
E-3
L4-1
L4-2
L4-3
F-1
F-2
F-3
L5-1
L5-2
L5-3
Ñ continued Ñ
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling 191
Table 65
NT8D11 cable connections (fully expanded configuration) (continued)
I/O panel connector
port
Backplane cable
connector
Backplane slot
position
G (new cable)
G-1
G-2
G-3
L6-1
L6-2
L6-3
H
K
H-1
H-2
H-3
L7-1
L7-2
L7-3
K-1
K-2
K-3
L8-1
L8-2
L8-3
L (new cable)
L-1
L-2
L-3
L9-1
L9-2
L9-3
Ñ end Ñ
Figure 50
NT8D11 backplane cable designations (fully expanded configuration)
Peripheral equipment slots
Common equipment slots
L9 L8 L7 L6 L5 L4 L3 L2 L1 L0 C9 C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C0
1
L-1 K-1 H-1 G-1 F-1 E-1 D-1 C-1 B-1 A-1
K-2 H-2 G-2 F-2 E-2 D-2 C-2 B-2 A-2
L-2
2
3
K-3 H-3 G-3 F-3 E-3 D-3 C-3 B-3 A-3
L-3
Shroud row
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
192 Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling
NT8D11 backplane cable reroutingÑto accommodate the IPE
Module in PE slots 0Ð3
With the cables located as shown in Table 64, use the following procedure
to reroute the backplane cables. Note that an IPE Module located in slots
0Ð3 uses I/O connector ports A and D.
1
2
Leave cable A in slot position L0.
Remove cable C from the backplane and connect cable ends C-1,
C-2, and C-3 to slot positions L3-1, L3-2, and L3-3.
3
Move the C connector on the I/O panel to position D. Now the cable
designation is changed from C to D.
CAUTION
Risk of hardware damage
With this cable rerouting, the IPE Module can be used
only in PE slots 0Ð3. Also, when the IPE Module is not
in PE slots 0Ð3, PE slot 2 should not be used at all.
!
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling 193
Table 66 lists cable connections for a rerouted IPE shelf. Figure 51 shows
the backplane slots in a rerouted IPE shelf.
Table 66
NT8D11 cable connections (rerouted for slots 0Ð3)
I/O panel connector
port
Backplane cable
connector
Backplane slot
position
A
B
D
E
F
A-1
A-2
A-3
B-1
B-2
B-3
D-1
D-2
D-3
E-1
E-2
E-3
F-1
F-2
F-3
H-1
H-2
H-3
K-1
K-2
K-3
L0-1
L0-2
L0-3
L1-1
L1-2
L2-1
L3-1
L3-2
L3-3
L4-1
L4-2
L5-1
L5-2
L6-1
L6-2
L7-1
L7-2
L8-1
L8-2
L9-1
L9-2
H
K
Note: Connector ports C, G, and L are not used in this configuration.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
194 Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling
Figure 51
NT8D11 backplane cable designations (rerouted for slots 0Ð3)
Peripheral equipment slots
Common equipment slots
C9 C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C0
L9 L8 L7 L6 L5 L4 L3 L2 L1 L0
1
K-2 H-3 H-1 F-2 E-3 E-1 D-1 B-3 B-1 A-1
K-3 K-1 H-2 F-3 F-1 E-2 D-2
D-3
B-2 A-2
A-3
2
3
Shroud Row
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling 195
Backplane cable rerouting for NT8D37 IPE Module
In the standard 12-cable configuration for the backplane in the NT8D37 IPE
Module, cables D, H, N, and U are not used. Those cables are used in the
16-cable fully expanded configuration.
Note: Backplane slots 0, 4, 8, and 12 (for cables A, E, K, and R) are
already fully cabled for 24 pairs, so no change is required for those
slots.
Table 67 lists cable connections before cable expansion. Figure 52 shows
the backplane slots before cable expansion.
Table 67
NT8D37 cable connections (standard configuration)
I/O panel connector
port
Backplane cable
connector
Backplane slot
position
A
B
C
E
F
A-1
A-2
A-3
B-1
B-2
B-3
C-1
C-2
C-3
E-1
E-2
E-3
F-1
F-2
F-3
L0-1
L0-2
L0-3
L1-1
L1-2
L2-1
L2-2
L3-1
L3-2
L4-1
L4-2
L4-3
L5-1
L5-2
L6-1
ÑcontinuedÑ
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
196 Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling
Table 67
NT8D37 cable connections (standard configuration) (continued)
I/O panel connector
port
Backplane cable
connector
Backplane slot
position
G
K
L
H-1
H-2
H-3
K-1
K-2
K-3
L--1
L-2
L6-2
L7-1
L7-2
L8-1
L8-2
L8-3
L9-1
L9-2
L-3
L10-1
L10-2
L11-1
L11-2
L12-1
L12-2
L12-3
L13-1
L13-2
L14-1
L14-2
L15-1
L15-2
M
R
S
T
M-1
M-2
M-3
R-1
R-2
R-3
S-1
S-2
S-3
T-1
T-2
T-3
Note: Connector ports D, H, N, and V are not used in this configuration.
Ñ end Ñ
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling 197
Figure 52
NT8D37 backplane cable designations (standard configuration)
Segment 3
Segment 2
Segment 1
Segment 0
L11 L10 L9 L8
L7 L6 L5 L4
L0
L3 L2 L1
L16 L15 L14 L13L12
S-3 S-1R-1 M-2 L-3 L-1 K-1
G-2 F-3 F-1 E-1 C-2 B-3 B-1 A-1
1
T-2
T-3 T-1 S-2 R-2 M-3
R-3
L-2 K-2
K-3
G-3 G-1 F-2 E-2 C-3 C-1 B-2 A-2
E-3 A-3
2
3
M-1
Shroud Row
Cabling for each segment can be expanded using one NT8D81AA
cable/filter assembly. Cabling for the entire backplane can be expanded
using four NT8D81AA cable/filter assemblies.
If you do not have additional NT8D81AA cable/filter assemblies available,
you can reroute the existing cables to accommodate the Meridian Link/CCR
IPE Module in specific PE slots. For more information on this, refer to the
NT8D37 backplane cable rerouting procedures (such as ÒNT8D37
backplane cable rerouting for segment 0Ñto accommodate the IPE Module
in PE slots 0Ð3Ó) later in this section.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
198 Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling
NT8D37 backplane cable expansionÑsegment 0
With the cables located as shown in Table 67:
1
2
3
Leave cable A as is in slot position L0.
Move cable end B-3 from slot position L2-1 to slot position L1-3.
Remove cable C from the backplane and connect cable ends C-1,
C-2 and C-3 to slot positions L2-1, L2-2, and L2-3.
4
Add cable D to the I/O panel by connecting cable ends D-1, D-2, and
D-3 to slot positions L3-1, L3-2, and L3-3.
The IPE shelf is now ready to receive an IPE Module in slots 0Ð3.
NT8D37 backplane cable expansionÑsegment 1
1
2
3
Leave cable E in slot position L4.
Move cable end F-3 from slot position L6-1 to slot position L5-3.
Remove cable G from the backplane and connect cable ends G-1,
G-2, and G-3 to slot positions L6-1, L6-2, and L6-3.
4
Add cable H to the I/O panel by connecting cable ends H-1, H-2, and
H-3 to slot positions L7-1, L7-2, and L7-3.
The IPE shelf is now ready to receive an IPE Module in slots 4Ð7.
NT8D37 backplane cable expansionÑsegment 2
1
2
3
Leave cable K in slot position L8.
Move cable end L-3 from slot position L10-1 to slot position L9-3.
Remove cable M from the backplane and connect cable ends M-1,
M-2, and M-3 to slot positions L10-1, L10-2, and L10-3.
4
Add cable N to the I/O panel by connecting cable ends N-1, N-2, and
N-3 to slot positions L11-1, L11-2, and L11-3.
The IPE shelf is now ready to receive an IPE Module in slots 8Ð11.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling 199
NT8D37 backplane cable expansionÑsegment 3
1
2
3
Leave cable R in slot position L12.
Move cable end S-3 from slot position L14-1 to slot position L13-3.
Remove cable T from the backplane and connect cable ends T-1,
T-2, and T-3 to slot positions L14-1, L14-2, and L14-3.
4
Add cable U to the I/O panel by connecting cable ends U-1, U-2, and
U-3 to slot positions L15-1, L15-2, L15-3.
The IPE shelf is now ready to receive an IPE Module in slots 12Ð15.
Table 68 lists cable connections for a fully expanded configuration.
Figure 53 shows the backplane slots in a fully expanded configuration.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
200 Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling
Table 68
NT8D37 cable connections (fully expanded configuration)
I/O panel connector
port
Backplane cable
connector
Backplane slot
location
A
A-1
A-2
A-3
B-1
B-2
B-3
C-1
C-2
C-3
D-1
D-2
D-3
E-1
E-2
E-3
F-1
F-2
F-3
G-1
G-2
G-3
L0-1
L0-2
L0-3
L1-1
L1-2
L1-3
L2-1
L2-2
L2-3
L3-1
L3-2
L3-3
L4-1
L4-2
L4-3
L5-1
L5-2
L5-3
L6-1
L6-2
L6-3
B
C
D (new cable)
E
F
G
ÑcontinuedÑ
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling 201
Table 68
NT8D37 cable connections (fully expanded configuration) (continued)
I/O panel connector
port
Backplane cable
connector
Backplane slot
location
H (new cable)
H-1
H-2
H-3
K-1
K-2
K-3
L--1
L-2
L7-1
L7-2
L7-3
K
L8-1
L8-2
L8-3
L
L9-1
L9-2
L-3
L9-3
M
M-1
M-2
M-3
N-1
N-2
N-3
R-1
R-2
R-3
S-1
S-2
S-3
L10-1
L10-2
L10-3
L11-1
L11-2
L11-3
L12-1
L12-2
L12-3
L13-1
L13-2
L13-3
N (new cable)
R
S
ÑcontinuedÑ
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
202 Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling
Table 68
NT8D37 cable connections (fully expanded configuration) (continued)
I/O panel connector
port
Backplane cable
connector
Backplane slot
position
T
T-1
T-2
L14-1
L14-2
L14-3
L15-1
L15-2
L15-3
T-3
U (new cable)
U-1
U-2
U-3
Ñ end Ñ
Figure 53
NT8D37 backplane cable designations (fully expanded configuration)
Segment 3
Segment 2
Segment 1
Segment 0
L11 L10 L9 L8
L7 L6 L5 L4
L0
L3 L2 L1
L16 L15 L14 L13L12
1
U-1 T-1 S-1 R-1 N-1 M-1 L-1 K-1
H-1 G-1 F-1 E-1
C-1 B-1 A-1
D-1
U-2 T-2 R-2 N-2
S-2
M-2 L-2 K-2
M-3 L-3 K-3
H-2 G-2 F-2 E-2 D-2 C-2 B-2 A-2
H-3 G-3 E-3
D-3 C-3 B-3 A-3
2
3
U-3 T-3 S-3 R-3 N-3
F-3
Shroud Row
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling 203
NT8D37 backplane cable rerouting for segment 0Ñto
accommodate the IPE Module in PE slots 0Ð3
With the cables located as shown in Table 67:
1
2
Leave cable A in slot position L0.
Remove cable C from the backplane and connect cable ends C-1,
C-2, and C-3 to slot position L3-1, L3-2, and L3-3.
3
Move the C connector on the I/O panel to position D. Now the cable
designation is changed from C to D.
CAUTION
Risk of hardware damage
With this cable rerouting, the IPE Module can be used
only in PE slots 0Ð3. Also, when the IPE Module is not
in PE slots 0Ð3, PE slot 2 should not be used at all.
!
Note: Reroute the cable only in the segment where the IPE Module is
going to be installed. Do not reroute the cable in other segments.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
204 Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling
Table 69 lists cable connections for an IPE shelf with segment 0 rerouted.
Figure 54 shows the backplane slots in that IPE shelf.
Table 69
NT8D37 cable connections (segment 0 has been rerouted)
I/O panel connector
port
Backplane cable
connector
Backplane slot
position
A
B
D
E
F
A-1
A-2
A-3
B-1
B-2
B-3
D-1
D-2
D-3
E-1
E-2
E-3
F-1
F-2
F-3
G-1
G-2
G-3
K-1
K-2
K-3
L0-1
L0-2
L0-3
L1-1
L1-2
L2-1
L3-1
L3-2
L3-3
L4-1
L4-2
L4-3
L5-1
L5-2
L6-1
L6-2
L7-1
L7-2
L8-1
L8-2
L8-3
G
K
ÑcontinuedÑ
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling 205
Table 69
NT8D37 cable connections (segment 0 has been rerouted) (continued)
I/O panel connector
port
Backplane cable
connector
Backplane slot
location
L
M
R
S
T
L-1
L-2
L-3
M-1
M-2
M-3
R-1
R-2
R-3
S-1
S-2
S-3
T-1
T-2
T-3
L9-1
L9-2
L10-1
L10-2
L11-1
L11-2
L12-1
L12-2
L12-3
L13-1
L13-2
L14-1
L14-2
L15-1
L15-2
Note: Connector ports C, H, N, and U are not used in this configuration.
Ñ end Ñ
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
206 Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling
Figure 54
NT8D11 backplane cable designations (segment 0 has been rerouted)
Segment 3
Segment 2
Segment 1
Segment 0
L16 L15 L14 L13L12 L11 L10 L9 L8
L7 L6 L5 L4 L3 L2 L1 L0
T-2 S-3 S-1 R-1 M-2 L-3 L-1 K-1
F-1
1
G-2 F-3
D-1
B-1
B-3
A-1
E-1
S-2 R-2 M-3 M-1 L-2
T-3 T-1
G-1 F-2
D-2
E-3 D-3
B-2 A-2
A-3
K-2
K-3
G-3
E-2
2
3
R-3
Shroud Row
NT8D37 backplane cable rerouting for segment 1Ñto
accommodate the IPE Module in PE slots 4Ð7
1
2
Leave cable E as is in slot position L4.
Remove cable G from the backplane and connect cable ends G-1,
G-2, and G-3 to slot positions L7-1, L7-2, and L7-3.
3
Move the G connector on the I/O panel to position H. Now the cable
designation is changed from G to H.
CAUTION
Risk of hardware damage
With this cable rerouting, the IPE Module can only be
used in PE slots 4Ð7. Also, when the IPE Module is not
in PE slots 4Ð7, PE slot 6 should not be used at all.
!
Note: Reroute the cable only in the segment where the IPE Module is
going to be installed. Do not reroute the cable in other segments.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling 207
NT8D37 backplane cable rerouting for segment 2Ñto
accommodate the IPE Module in PE slots 8Ð11
With the cables located as shown in Table 67:
1
2
Leave cable K as is in slot position L8.
Remove cable M from the backplane and connect cable ends M-1,
M-2, and M-3 to slot positions L11-1, L11-2, and L11-3.
3
Move the M connector on the I/O panel to position N. Now the cable
designation is changed from M to N.
CAUTION
Risk of hardware damage
With this rerouting, the IPE Module can be used only in
PE slots 8Ð11. Also, when the IPE Module is not in PE
slots 8Ð11, PE slot 10 should not be used at all.
!
Note: Reroute the cable only in the segment where the IPE Module is
going to be installed. Do not reroute the cable in other segments.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
208 Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling
NT8D37 backplane cable rerouting for segment 3Ñto
accommodate the IPE Module in PE slots 12Ð15
With the cables located as shown in Table 67:
1
2
Leave cable R as is in slot position L12.
Remove cable T from the backplane and connect cable ends T-1,
T-2, and T-3 to slot positions L15-1, L15-2, and L15-3.
3
Move the T connector on the I/O panel to position U. Now the cable
designation is changed from T to U.
CAUTION
Risk of hardware damage
With this cable rerouting, the IPE Module can be used
only in PE slots 12Ð15. Also, when the IPE Module is not
in PE slots 12Ð15, PE slot 14 should not be used at all.
!
Note: Reroute the cable only in the segment where the IPE Module is
going to be installed. Do not reroute the cable in other segments.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling 209
Cabling the Options 21Ð81 IPE Module to external
equipment
The following procedure to cable an Options 21Ð81 IPE Module to external
equipment is only one of a series of procedures to install an IPE Module.
The series is shown in Table 11 in Chapter 5, ÒHardware installation
overview.Ó Ensure that you have completed steps 1 through 4 in Table 11
before you start the following procedure.
After installing the IPE Module in the IPE shelf, connect the cables to
external equipment.
Figure 55 shows the cabling from the Options 21Ð81 IPE Module to
external equipment. The NT1R03AA and NT1R03BA octopus cables
connect to the IPE shelf I/O panels (shown in Figure 55). Octopus cable
ports (called IPE Module ports) connect to external equipment. The
NT1R03D extension cable attached to the IPE Module ports can provide
additional length if needed.
IPE Module connections are made to the IPE shelf I/O panels. Figure 56
illustrates the I/O panels.
For pinouts for the NT1R03AA, NT1R03BA, and NT1R03D cables, refer to
ÒExternal I/O cable pinoutsÓ in this chapter.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
210 Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling
Figure 55
Options 21Ð81 system IPE Module connections
Part of
IPE Shelf
I/O panel
Ethernet port (to TCP/IP host link)
See Note 3
See Note 5
Port 1
Port 3
NT1R03D
to console
NT1R03AA
(octopus cable
to conshare
See Note 1
to AML
See Note 2
Port 5
Port 7
NT1R03D
to terminal or printer
(CCR)
Port 2
Port 4
NT1R03HF
to external modem
NT1R03BA
(octopus cable)
to MML (Meridian Link and co-residency)
See Note 4
to X.25 host link
(Meridian Link and
Port 6
Port 8
co-residency)
to terminal or printer (CCR)
to terminal or printer (CCR)
Note 1: For SDI cabling, refer to ÒSDI cabling (Options 21Ð81 IPE Module).Ó
Note 2: For ESDI cabling, refer to ÒESDI/MSDL cabling (Options 21Ð81 IPE Module).Ó
Note 3: For DCE/DTE configuration, refer to ÒInstalling the IPE Module.Ó
Note 4: For MML cabling, refer to ÒMeridian Mail cabling (IPE Module).Ó
Note 5: For Ethernet LAN cabling, refer to ÒInstalling Ethernet LAN support.Ó
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling 211
Use the following procedure to cable to external equipment.
Figure 56
IPE shelf I/O panels (Options 21Ð81)
L
K
B
A
J4
J2
S
R
N
M
F
E
D
C
U
J5
T
J3
H
G
Left I/O panel
Right I/O panel
1
2
Ensure that the power for the IPE Module is turned off.
Connect the NT1R03AA and NT1R03BA octopus cables to the I/O
panel; the specific connectors depend on the location of the IPE
Module. Tables 70 and 71 list the connectors to use for various
locations of the IPE Module. For example, if the IPE Module is in
slots 0 through 3, connect the NT1R03AA cable to connector D, and
the NT1R03BA cable to connector A.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
212 Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling
Table 70
Option 21 CE/PE cabinet connectors
Slots occupied by
the IPE Module
Connect
NT1R03AA to
connector port
Connect
NT1R03BA to
connector port
0Ð3
1Ð4
2Ð5
3Ð6
4Ð7
5Ð8
6Ð9
D
E
F
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
K
L
G
Table 71
Options 51Ð81 IPE cabinet connectors
Slots occupied by the
IPE Module
Connect
NT1R03AA to
connector port
Connect
NT1R03BA to
connector port
0Ð3
1Ð4
D
E
F
A
B
C
D
E
K
L
2Ð5
3Ð6
G
H
N
R
S
T
4Ð7
8Ð11
9Ð12
10Ð13
11Ð14
12Ð15
M
N
R
U
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling 213
3
Connect the ports of cable NT1R03AA to external equipment, as
described in Table 72 and shown in Figure 55. For example, connect
port 1 of the NT1R03AA cable to the console, using a customer-
supplied cable.
Table 72
Options 21Ð81 IPE Module external connections (NT1R03AA cable)
NT1R03AA
port
External equipment
External cable or reference
1
console
NT1R03D or customer-supplied
cable. See Table 74 for pinout.
3
5
conshare
AML
See ÒSDI cabling (Options 21Ð81
IPE Module).Ó
See ÒESDI/MSDL cabling
(Options 21Ð81 IPE Module).Ó
7
terminal
NT1R03D
Ethernet
Ethernet LAN
See ÒInstalling Ethernet LAN
support.Ó
4
Connect the ports of cable NT1R03BA to external equipment, as
described in Table 73 and shown in Figure 55. For example, connect
port 2 of the NT1R03BA cable to the external modem, using
extension cable NT1R03HF.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
214 Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling
Table 73
Options 21Ð81 IPE Module external connections (NT1R03BA cable)
NT1R03BA
port
External equipment
external modem
External cable or reference
2
4
NT1R03HF
Meridian Mail Link
See ÒMeridian Mail cabling (IPE
Module).Ó
6
8
X.25 Host Link
terminal
NT1R03D or customer-supplied
cable. See Table 75 for pinouts.
NT1R03D
Table 74
Console cable pinout (NT1R03D)
Meridian 1
Signal
IPE Module
2
3
TXD
RXD
RTS
CTS
DSR
LRTN
DCD
DTR
GND
2
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
20
1
20
1
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling 215
Table 75
X.25 Host Link cable pinout
IPE Module
Signal
Host Connection
2
3
TXD
RXD
RTS
CTS
DSR
GND
DCD
TXCI
RXD
TXD
4
CTS
5
RTS
6
DTR
7
GND
8
+12 V
15
TRXC or open
Note: Return to Chapter 5, ÒHardware installation overviewÓ for the
next procedure.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
216 Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling
Application Module cabling
Two types of cables interconnect Application Module components. These
include
¥
¥
power harness cables
I/O cables
CAUTION
Risk of system interruption
Be careful when running cables in the AEM. Ensure that
cables are not looped or kinked. Try to route cables
parallel to each other as much as possible. By doing so,
you can avoid consequent hardware failures.
!
Power cables
Power to the AEM is fed to the MPDU. Power harnesses conduct power
from the MPDU to the power supply in the Application Module. To cable
an Application Module to the proper circuit breaker on the MPDU, connect
the input power harness (NT7D55AC or NT7D55AD) as follows:
¥
If the Application Module is on the left-hand side of the AEM (next to
the MPDU), connect the power harness to connector P3 on the back of
the MPDU.
¥
If the Application Module is on the right-hand side of the AEM,
connect the power harness to connector P4 on the back of the MPDU.
If the Application Module is installed in the AEM before it is shipped, the
power harness to the MPDU is already connected. Check to make sure the
connection has remained firmly mated during shipping and installation.
Table 76 lists Application Module power harnesses and their applications.
Figure 57 is a power harness wiring diagram for the Application Module.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling 217
Table 76
Power harness cables (Application Module)
Part number
Application
NT7D52AA (A0372656)
Power monitor cable: carries signals from the power
sense card to the power monitor
NT7D55AA (AC) (A0372722)
NT7D55AB (DC) (A0372723)
MPDU power harness (located inside the MPDU):
connects the circuit breakers to the output connectors
NT7D55AD (AC/DC)
(A0372725)
MPDU to power supply harness: connects the MPDU to
the Application Module
NT7D55AE (A0372726)
NT7D55AF (A0372727)
NT7D55AG (A0372728)
Power supply to VME bus backplane power harness:
carries power from the output connectors to the VME bus
backplane
VME bus backplane to disk/tape power harness: carries
power from the VME bus backplane to the disk/tape
connector
VME bus backplane to auxiliary/sense power harness:
carries power from the VME bus backplane to the power
sense card (and the MVME712AM transition card, if
installed)
NT7D55AJ (A0372904)
Disk/tape internal power harness: connects power from
the floating connectors to the disk/tape drives
NT7D55AK (AC) (A0372905)
NT7D55AL (DC) (A0372906)
Power supply input harness: carries the input power from
floating connectors on the power supply to the power
supply input terminals
NT7D55BM (AC/DC)
(A0372907)
Power supply output harness: carries the output from the
terminal block (inside the power supply) to the floating
connectors
NT7D55BG (A0375140)
VME logic return harness: connects logic return on the
VME bus to the system logic return for signaling
compatibility
NT8D40AM (AC) (A0350327)
NT7D11AE (DC) (A0364644)
Module-to-module power harness
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
218 Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling
Figure 57
Power harness wiring diagram (Application Module)
Module-to-module
power harness
NT8D40AM (AC)
NT7D11AE (DC)
MPDU to power
supply harness
NT7D55AD (AC/DC)
VME backplane to
disk/tape power harness
NT7D55AF
Power monitor
cable
NT7D52AA
Power supply
input harness
NT7D55AK (AC)
NT7D55AL (DC)
MPDU power
VME bus backplane
harness
NT7D55AA (AC)
NT7D55AB (DC)
to auxiliary/sense
power harness
NT7D55AG
Power
Power
monitor
¥
sense
card
Built-in
¥
¥
¥
modem*
Tape
¥
drive
¥
¥
¥
¥
Disk
drive
Power
supply
VME bus
backplane
¥
¥
¥
Application Module
MPDU
One side of AEM
¥
Power supply output harness
NT7D55BM (AC/DC)
VME logic
return
Disk/tape internal
power harness
NT7D55AJ
harness
NT7D55BG
Power supply to VME bus backplane
power harness NT7D55AE
* MVME712AM only
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling 219
Input/output cables
The Application Module has two types of I/O cable. These include
¥
¥
internal cables that connect circuit cards to disk and tape drives within
the Application Module
external cables that connect the Application Module to the
Meridian 1, the system console, and application terminals (if
applicable)
Internal I/O cables
Internal cables interconnect components that are not connected through the
VME bus backplane. Table 77 lists the Application Module internal cables.
Figure 58 shows the internal cabling scheme.
Table 77
Internal I/O cables (Application Module)
Part number
Cable description and application
NT7D52AA
(A0372656)
Power monitor cableÑ3-pin connector, yellow and gray twisted wire cable:
carries signals from the power sense card (P1) to the power monitor (P1 for
a left-hand Application Module, P2 for a right-hand Application Module)
NT7D53AA
(A0372657)
SCSI cableÑ50-pin connector cable: carries the SCSI interface from the
floating connectors (J3) to the disk/tape drives (J1)
NT7D56AC
(A0404311)
SCSI extension cableÑ50-pin connector cable: carries the SCSI interface
from the adapter board (J3) to the external SCSI I/O port (via the
MVME712M card) and the disk/tape unit (P3)
NT7D57AA
(A0372913)
J2 output cableÑ64-pin connector, flat ribbon cable: carries I/O from the
MVME333-2 XCC card to the MVME705B transition card, from the P2
adapter board (J2) to the MVME712M transition card (J2), and from the
MVME332XTS ACC card to the NT6D51AA transition card
NT7D76AA
(MVME712A/AM
only)
Adapter board to transition card cableÑ64-pin connector, flat ribbon cable:
carries I/O from the adapter board (J2) to the MVME712 transition card
(J11)
NT8D46AA
(A0356972)
System monitor cableÑ40-pin connector cable: carries signals from the
power monitor (J1, J2) to the system monitor in the column
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
220 Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling
Figure 58
Internal I/O cabling (Application Module)
NT7D57AA
J2 output cable (NT7D76AA
on MVME712A/AM)
NT7D52AA
Power monitor cable
I/O panel
NT7D1802
Power monitor
J1
J2
P1
P2
P2
¥
¥
Rear of Application Module
NT7D1901
Power sense
card
MVME712M MVME705B NT6D51AA
transition
card
transition
card
transition
card**
P1 P1
J2*
P5
P2
P5
P2
P5
NT7D95AA
(to system
monitor)
¥
**
¥
¥
P4
J2
¥
J1
P2 adapter
board
P3
J3
P4
P2
P4
P2
P3
Power
supply
MVME147/167
SBC card
MVME333-2
XCC card
MVME332XTS
ACC card**
P2
J1
P1
J1
¥
Disk
drive
Tape
drive
Front of Application Module
NT7D56AC
SCSI
extension
cable
NT7D53AA
SCSI cable
NT7D57AA
J2 output cable
* J11 (MVME712A/AM only)
** Present only on CCR Application Modules
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling 221
External I/O cables (Application Module)
Tables 78, 79, and 80 list external I/O cables that connect ports on the
transition cards to connectors on either the I/O subpanel or the universal I/O
panel. Table 78 lists external I/O cables that connect the I/O panel
connectors to an SDI port, the ESDI/MSDL port, the main distribution
frame (MDF), and consoles. Figure 60 shows the cables used between the
transition cards, the I/O subpanel, and external equipment. Figure 61 shows
the cables used between the transition cards, the universal I/O panel, and
external equipment. Figure 63 shows the cables used between the transition
cards, the generic I/O panel and external equipment. Figure 73 shows the
cables going to the Meridian 1 or Meridian 1 I/O panel.
Table 78
Cables from transition cards to I/O subpanel (Application Module)
Part number
Length
Cable description and application
NT7D46AA
(A0372653)
35 cm
(14 in.)
9-pin (DB9) round subminiature D-style cable: connects port
3 (J4) on the MVME712A or AM transition card to the J8
port
NT7D48AA
(A0372655)
35 cm
(14 in.)
25-pin (DB25) round subminiature D-style cable: connects
ports SP1 (ESDI port) and SP3 (host port) on
the MVME705B transition card to J2 and J3
NT7D60AA*
(A0373962)
(MVME712AM)
35 cm
(14 in.)
4-pin RJ11 to 9-pin subminiature D-style cable: connects the
built-in modem (teledapt connector) on the MVME712AM
transition card to J9
NT7D61DA
35 cm
(14 in.)
9-pin to 25-pin subminiature D-style cable: connects port
SP4 on the MVME712A/AM card to J1
NT7D79AA
(A0387839)
35 cm
(14 in.)
9-pin round subminiature D-style cable: connects port J1 on
the MVME712A or AM transition card to J7
NT7D95AA**
22 cm
(9 in.)
25-pin flat subminiature D-style cable: connects SP1, SP2,
and SP3 on the NT6D51AA transition card to J4, J5, and J6
* When the MVME712A card is used, the NT7D60AA cable is replaced by an NT7D46AA
cable, which connects port SP2 on the transition card to J9.
** Used only when NT6D51AA card is present (CCR Application Module).
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
222 Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling
Table 79
Cables from transition cards to the universal I/O panel (Application Module)
Part number
Length
Cable description and application
NT7D46AA
(A0372653)
(MVME712A/AM)
35 cm
(14 in.)
9-pin (DB9) round subminiature D-style cable: connects port
SP1 on the MVME712A or AM transition card to the SDI link
port
NT7D48AA
(A0372655)
(replaced by
NT7D95AA on
newer systems)
35 cm
(14 in.)
25-pin (DB25) round subminiature D-style cable: connects
ports SP1 (ESDI port) and SP3 (host port) on
the MVME705B transition card to the ESDI link and Host
ports
22 cm
(9 in.)
NT7D60AA*
(A0373962)
(MVME712AM)
35 cm
(14 in.)
4-pin RJ11 to 9-pin subminiature D-style cable: connects the
built-in modem (teledapt connector) on the MVME712AM
transition card to the Int Modem port
NT7D61DA
35 cm
(14 in.)
9-pin to 25-pin subminiature D-style cable: connects port
SP4 on the MVME712A/AM card to the Spare port
NT7D79AA
(A0387839)
(MVME712A/AM)
35 cm
(14 in.)
9-pin round subminiature D-style cable: connects port SP1
on the MVME712A or AM transition card to the SYS CONS
port
NT7D95AA**
22 cm
(9 in.)
25-pin flat subminiature D-style cable: connects SP1, SP2,
and SP3 of the NT6D51AA transition card to serial I/O ports
1Ð3, 4Ð6, and 7Ð8
* When the MVME712A card is used, the NT7D60AA cable is replaced by an NT7D46AA
cable, which connects port SP2 on the transition card to the AML.
** Used only when NT6D51AA card is present (CCR Application Module).
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling 223
Table 80
Cables from transition cards to generic I/O panel (Application Module)
Part number
Length
Cable description and application
NT7D47DA
35 cm
(14 in.)
15-pin cable: connects the Ethernet port of the MVME712M
transition card to the Ethernet port (this cable is not shipped
with the Application Module)
NT7D58CA
(A0403488)
35 cm
(14 in.)
15-pin to 25-pin subminiature D-style cable: connects port
SP4 on the MVME712M transition card to card 1 conn 4
NT7D79BA
(A0403432)
35 cm
(14 in.)
9-pin to 25-pin subminiature D-style cable: connects ports
SP1, SP2, and SP3 on the MVME712M transition card to
card 1 conn 1Ð3
NT7D95AA
22 cm
(9 in.)
25-pin flat subminiature D-style cable: connects SP1, SP3,
and SP5 on the MVME705B transition card to card 2 conn
1-3 and also connects SP1, SP2, and SP3 of the
NT6D51AA transition card (if present) to card 3 conn 1Ð3
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
224 Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling
Table 81
Cables to external equipment (Application Module)
Part number
Length
Cable description and application
NT7D46AB (A0373932)
NT7D46AD (A0373933) 1.8 m (6 ft.)
0.6 m (2 ft.)
9-pin round subminiature D-style cable: for an
SDI Paddle Board, connects
NT7D46AF (A0373934)
NT7D46AL (A0373935)
NT7D46AT (A0373936)
NT7D46AV (A0373937)
3 m (10 ft.)
6 m (20 ft.)
10.6 m (35 ft.)
13.7 m (45 ft.)
¥ J8 on the I/O subpanel
¥ SDI link on the universal I/O panel
¥ card 1 conn 3 on the generic I/O panel
to the SDI port connection at the Meridian 1
NT7D47EA
3 m (10 ft.)
15-pin drop cable: connects the Ethernet port
of the generic I/O panel to an Ethernet
transceiver (not shipped with the Application
Module)
NT7D58AB (A0373938)
NT7D58AD (A0373939) 1.8 m (6 ft.)
0.6 m (2 ft.)
25-pin round subminiature D-style cable:
connects
NT7D58AF (A0373940)
NT7D58AL (A0373941)
NT7D58AT (A0373942)
NT7D58AV (A0373943
3 m (10 ft.)
6 m (20 ft.)
10.6 m (35 ft.)
13.7 m (45 ft.)
¥ J2 on the I/O subpanel
¥ ESDI link on the universal I/O panel
¥ card 2 conn 1 on the generic I/O panel
to the ESDI/MSDL port connection at the
Meridian 1
NT7D61AB (A0374031)
NT7D61AD (A0374070) 1.8 m (6 ft.)
0.6 m (2 ft.)
25-pin round subminiature D-style cable: for an
SDI card, connects
NT7D61AF (A0374071)
NT7D61AL (A0374072)
NT7D61AT (A0374073)
NT7D61AV (A0374074)
3 m (10 ft.)
6 m (20 ft.)
10.6 m (35 ft.)
13.7 m (45 ft.)
¥ J8 on the I/O subpanel
¥ SDI link on the universal I/O panel
¥ card 1 conn 3 on the generic I/O panel
to the SDI port connection at the Meridian 1.
This cable may also be used
¥ to connect the modem port on the universal
I/O panel or card 1 conn 2 on the generic I/O
panel to the external modem
¥ with a gender changer, to connect the system
console to port J7 on the I/O subpanel, the
SYS CONS port on the universal I/O panel, or
card 1 conn 1 on the generic I/O panel
Ñ continued Ñ
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling 225
Table 81
Cables to external equipment (Application Module) (continued)
Part number
Length
Cable description and application
NT7D61AB (A0374031)
NT7D61AD (A0374070) 1.8 m (6 ft.)
0.6 m (2 ft.)
25-pin round subminiature D-style cable: for an
SDI card, connects
NT7D61AF (A0374071)
NT7D61AL (A0374072)
NT7D61AT (A0374073)
NT7D61AV (A0374074)
3 m (10 ft.)
6 m (20 ft.)
10.6 m (35 ft.)
13.7 m (45 ft.)
¥ J8 on the I/O subpanel
¥ SDI link on the universal I/O panel
¥ card 1 conn 3 on the generic I/O panel
to the SDI port connection at the Meridian 1.
This cable may also be used
¥ to connect the modem port on the universal
I/O panel or card 1 conn 2 on the generic I/O
panel to the external modem
¥ with a gender changer, to connect the
system console to port J7 on the I/O
subpanel, the SYS CONS port on the
universal I/O panel, or card 1 conn 1 on the
generic I/O panel
NT7D71BA (A0394776)
(MVME712AM)
2.1 m (7 ft.)
(same length
revised)
9-pin subminiature D-style to 4-pin RJ11 cable
connects
¥ J9 on the I/O subpanel
¥ Int Modem on the universal I/O panel
to the MDF through in-house distribution (only
used with the MVME712AM card)
NT8D82AC
NT8D82AD
1.2 m (4 ft.)
1.8 m (6 ft.)
25-pin round subminiature D-style cable:
connects the ESDI card and SDI card (all types
except the NT8D41 SDI Paddle Board) to the
Meridian 1 I/O panel
NTND27AB
1.8 m (6 ft.)
26-pin SCSI II cable: connects the MSDL card
to the Meridian 1 I/O panel
Ñ continued Ñ
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
226 Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling
Table 81
Cables to external equipment (Application Module) (continued)
Part number
NTND82AA
Length
Cable description and application
1.2 m (4 ft.)
25-pin round subminiature D-style cable
connects
¥ J1 on the I/O subpanel
¥ Spare port on the universal I/O panel
to a data port interface cable of Meridian Mail
systems via a 25-pin extension cable (NT1R03).
NT7D58BB
0.6 m (2 ft.)
15-pin to 25-pin straight-through cable:
connects to a data port interface cable of
Meridian Mail systems via a 25-pin extension
cable (NT1R03).
NT8D93AJ (A0357270) 4.8 m (16 ft.)
NT8D93AW (A0357271) 14.4 m (48 ft.)
SDI cable for NT8D41
NT8D96AE
2.4 m (8 ft.)
DB25 to 3-DB25 multi-port cable that acts as
the cable converter for the I/O
NTAK19AA (A0372718)
NTAK19BA (A0372719)
Two-port SDI cable for SDI/TDS, Option 11
Four-port SDI cable for Quad I/O, Option 11
NT1R03DB (A0402335) 0.6 m (2 ft.)
NT1R03DC (A0402336) 1.2 m (4 ft.)
25-pin round subminiature D-style extension
cable (male to male)
NT1R03DF (A0402337)
3 m (10 ft.)
NT1R03DP (A0402338) 7.5 m (25 ft.)
NT1R03DV (A0402339) 13.7 m (45 ft.)
NT1R03EB (A0402330)
NT1R03EC (A0402331) 1.2 m (4 ft.)
0.6 m (2 ft.)
25-pin round subminiature D-style extension
cable (male to female)
NT1R03EF (A0402332)
NT1R03EP (A0402333)
NT1R03EV (A0402334)
3 m (10 ft.)
7.5 m (25 ft.)
13.7 m (45 ft.)
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling 227
Cabling the Application Module to external equipment
The following procedure to cable the Application Module to external
equipment is only one of a series of procedures to install an Application
Module. The series is shown in Table 12 in Chapter 5, ÒHardware
installation overview.Ó Ensure that you have completed steps 1 through 6 in
Table 12 before you start the following procedure.
Complete the Application Module hardware installation by connecting the
external cables. Figures 59 and 60 show the I/O subpanel connectors.
Figures 61 and 62 show the universal I/O panel connectors. Figures 63 and
64 show generic I/O panel connectors. Figures 65Ð74 show the cabling.
Refer to the ÒApplication Module cablingÓ section for more information on
cabling.
1
If you are using an MVME712M or MVME712A transition card, go to
step 2. To connect the built-in modem on the MVME712AM
transition card, connect an NT7D71BA cable from the Application
Module connection
¥
¥
¥
J9 on the I/O subpanel
INT MODEM on the universal I/O panel
card 1 conn 4 on the generic I/O panel
to the building wiring and terminate at the MDF. For more
information, refer to ÒInternal modem cabling (MVME712AM card
only)Ó in this chapter.
If the modem connection is through the Meridian 1, connect to a
500/2500 line card. If the modem is not to be connected through the
Meridian 1, connect to a central office (CO) line.
Note: This connection is required for technical support for your
system.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
228 Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling
2
If you are using an MVME712AM transition card, skip this step. To
connect an external modem to the Application Module, connect a
9-pin to 25-pin null modem cable from the Application Module
connector
¥
¥
¥
J9 on the I/O subpanel
EXT MODEM on the universal I/O panel
card 1 conn 2 on the generic I/O panel
to the external modem.
Connect the modem to a central office (CO) line or 500/2500 line
card, and to a power source.
3
To connect the system console to the Application Module, connect a
9-pin-to-25-pin cable (or an extra NT7D61 cable) from the
Application Module connector
¥
¥
¥
J7 on the I/O subpanel
SYS CONS on the universal I/O panel
card 1 conn 1 on the generic I/O panel
to the console. For more information, refer to ÒSystem console
cabling (Application Module)Ó in this chapter.
See Chapter 10, ÒInstalling peripheral devicesÓ in this guide for
information on configuring your terminal correctly. See Chapter 11,
ÒPeripheral device cabling interfaceÓ in this guide if you are using an
A/B switchbox with the system console.
4
To connect an SDI port to the Application Module for optional
conshare capability:
¥
For SDI cards other than the NT8D41 SDI Paddle Board,
connect an NT7D61 cable from the Application Module
connector (J8 on the I/O subpanel, SDI LINK on the universal
I/O panel, or card 1 conn 3 on the generic I/O panel) to the SDI
port connector on the Meridian 1. For more information, refer to
ÒSDI cabling (Application Module)Ó in this chapter.
¥
For an NT8D41 SDI Paddle Board, connect an NT7D46 cable
from the Application Module connector (J8 on the I/O subpanel,
SDI LINK on the universal I/O panel, or card 1 conn 3 on the
generic I/O panel) to the SDI port connector on the Meridian 1.
For more information, refer to ÒSDI Paddle Board cabling
(Application Module)Ó in this chapter.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling 229
5
To connect the MSDL port to the Meridian 1 I/O panel, connect an
NTND27 cable (if DCE) or an NTND26 (if DTE) cable from the MSDL
port to
¥
J2 on the I/O subpanel
¥
¥
ESDI Link port on the universal I/O panel
card 2 conn 1 on the generic I/O panel
6
To connect an ESDI/MSDL port to the Application Module, connect
an NT7D58 cable from the Application Module connector to
¥
J2 on the I/O subpanel
¥
¥
ESDI LINK on the universal I/O panel
card 2 conn 1 on the generic I/O panel
to the ESDI/MSDL port connection on the Meridian 1. For more
information, refer to ÒESDI/MSDL cabling (Application Module)Ó later
in this chapter.
7
To connect the Application Module to the Meridian Mail system:
¥
If your Application Module has an MVME712M transition card,
connect an NT7D58CA cable from SP4 of the MVME712M card
to card 1 conn 4 of the generic I/O panel, and connect an
NT7D58BB cable from card 1 conn 4 of the generic I/O panel to
the NT1R03 cable that connects to Meridian Mail. See Table 82
for pinouts of the NT7D58 cable.
¥
¥
If your Application Module has an I/O subpanel, connect an
NT7D61DA cable from SP4 of the MVME712A or AM card to
port J1 of the I/O subpanel, and connect an NTND82AA cable
from port J1 to the NT1R03 cable that connects to Meridian Mail.
If your Application Module has a universal I/O panel, connect an
NT7D61DA cable from SP4 of the MVME712A or AM card to the
spare port of the universal I/O panel, and connect an
NTND81AA cable from the spare port of the universal I/O panel
to the NT1R03 cable that connects to Meridian Mail.
For more information, refer to ÒMeridian Mail cabling (Application
Module)Ó later in this chapter.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
230 Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling
8
For the X.25 host link, connect a customer-supplied cable from the
Application Module connector:
¥
J3 on the I/O sub-panel
¥
¥
Host on the universal I/O panel
card 2 conn 2 on the generic I/O panel
to the host computer. For more information, refer to ÒHost computer
cabling (Application Module)Ó in this chapter.
9
To connect the terminals and/or printers to the Application Module,
connect an RS-232 cable to one of the three connectors on the VME
multi-port cables that are connected to one of the following:
¥
J4, J5, and J6 on the I/O subpanel
¥
¥
Serial I/O 1Ð3, 4Ð6, or 7Ð8 on the universal I/O panel
card 3 conn 1Ð3 on the generic I/O panel
Note: For connection to J6, Serial I/O 7Ð8, or card 3 conn 3, the
C connector is not used.
See Chapter 10, ÒInstalling peripheral devicesÓ for information on
configuring your terminals and printers correctly. See Chapter 11,
ÒPeripheral device cabling interfaceÓ for information on using limited-
distance or dial-up modems for any terminals or printers located
more than 15 m (50 ft.) from the Application Module.
10
Make sure the breaker or switch on the blower unit is set to ON (up).
It is located in the front of the pedestal in the AEM column.
11
12
13
Set all circuit breakers located in the rear of the pedestal to ON (up).
Power up any external modems and the system console.
Set the circuit breaker associated with the Application Module to ON
(up). It is located at the front of the AEM. The top breaker powers the
module on the left side of the AEM; the bottom breaker powers the
right-side module.
14
Install all covers and grills on the AEM column.
Note: Return to Chapter 5, ÒHardware installation overviewÓ for the
next procedure. Refer to ÒInstalling Ethernet LAN supportÓ in this
chapter for more information about Ethernet LAN cabling.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling 231
Figure 59
I/O subpanel connectors (Meridian Link)
Meridian Link I/O subpanel
J3
J2
J1
¥
Meridian Mail connection
(Link 2)
¥
Meridian 1 connection
(Link 0)
Host
connection
(Link 1)
¥
¥
J6
J5
J4
J9
J8
J7
¥
SDI
port
External
modem
Console
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
232 Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling
Figure 60
I/O subpanel connectors (CCR)
J3
J2
J1
Meridian 1 connection
(Link 0)
¥
J6
J5
J4
To terminals and/or printers
(NT8D96AE octopus cable)
External modem
SDI port
J9
J8
J7
Console
Note: Connectors J1 and J3 are not used.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling 233
Figure 61
Universal I/O panel (Meridian Link and co-residency)
Serial I/O Serial I/O Serial I/O Serial I/O
31 - 32
23 - 24
15 - 16
7 - 8
Serial I/O Serial I/O Serial I/O Serial I/O
28 - 30 20 - 22 12 - 14 4 - 6
Serial I/O Serial I/O Serial I/O Serial I/O
25 - 27
17 - 19
9 - 11
1 - 3
ESDI
Link
Spare
Host
Meridian Mail
connection
(Link 2)
¥
¥
Meridian 1
connection (link 0)
ETHER-
NET
¥
¥
Host connection
(Link 1)
Internal modem if
MVME712AM card
is installed
INT
SDI
EXT
SYS
MODEM LINK MODEM CONS
¥
¥
Meridian 1 SDI*
(conshare)
Console
External modem
*To QSDI, DCH, or MSDL card of the Meridian 1
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
234 Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling
Figure 62
Universal I/O panel (CCR)
Serial I/O
Serial I/O
31 - 32
Serial I/O Serial I/O
23 - 24
15 - 16
7 - 8
Serial I/O
28 - 30
Serial I/O
12 - 14
Serial I/O
20 - 22
Serial I/O
4 - 6
Serial I/O Serial I/O Serial I/O Serial I/O
25 - 27
17 - 19
9 - 11
1 - 3
ESDI
Link
Spare
Host
¥
ETHER
NET
Meridian 1
¥
¥
connection (link 0)
INT
SDI
EXT
SYS
MODEM LINK MODEM CONS
Meridian 1 SDI
(conshare)
¥
Console
External modem
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling 235
Figure 63
Generic I/O panel (Meridian Link and co-residency)
CARD 5 CARD 4 CARD 3 CARD 2
CONN 3 CONN 3 CONN 3 CONN 3
CARD 5
CONN 2
CARD 4 CARD 3 CARD 2
CONN 2 CONN 2 CONN 2
X.25 host
connection
(Link 1)
CARD 5
CONN 1 CONN 1 CONN 1
CARD 4
CARD 3
CARD 2
CONN 1
Meridian 1
connection
(Link 0)
CARD 6 CARD 6
CONN 3 CONN 2
CARD 6
CONN 1
ETHERNET
TCP/IP host
connection
(Link 1) or
CARD 1
CARD 1
CARD 1
CONN 4 CONN 3 CONN 2 CONN 1
CARD 1
LAN-based PC
Meridian Mail
connection
(Link 2)
Console
MODEM SYS CONS
Meridian 1
OA&M (Conshare)
External Modem
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
236 Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling
Figure 64
Generic I/O panel (CCR)
CARD 5
CONN 3 CONN 3 CONN 3
CARD 4
CARD 3
CARD 2
CONN 3
CARD 5
CONN 2 CONN 2 CONN 2 CONN 2
CARD 4 CARD 3
CARD 2
CARD 5
CONN 1 CONN 1 CONN 1
CARD 4
CARD 3
CARD 2
CONN 1
Meridian 1
connection
(link 0)
CARD 6 CARD 6
CONN 3 CONN 2
CARD 6
CONN 1
ETHERNET
CARD 1
CARD 1
CARD 1
CARD 1
CONN 4 CONN 3 CONN 2 CONN 1
Console
MODEM SYS CONS
Meridian 1
(Conshare)
External Modem
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling 237
Figure 65
Application Module MVME712A and MVME705B I/O cablingÑ/O subpanel (Meridian Link)
Application Module
(INTERNAL CABLING)
(EXTERNAL CABLING)
MVME712A Transition card
I/O subpanel
Customer-supplied
(or NT7D61 cable)
to system console
DB9
NT7D79AA
J7
SP1, Console
DB9
SP2, TTY
DB9
SP3
NT7D46AA J8
NT7D46AA
NT7D61 to SDI
(NT7D46 to SDI Paddle Board)
J9
Customer-supplied cable to
external modem
Teledapt
SP4
J1
NT7D61DA
MVME705B Transition card
NTND82AA to Meridian Mail
SP5
DB25
SP3
NT7D48AA J3
NT7D48AA J2
Customer-supplied cable to
host computer
DB25
SP1
NT7D58 to ESDI or MSDL
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
238 Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling
Figure 66
Application Module MVME712AM and MVME705B I/O cablingÑI/O subpanel (Meridian Link)
Application Module
(INTERNAL CABLING)
(EXTERNAL CABLING)
MVME712AM Transition card
I/O subpanel
Customer-supplied
(or NT7D61 cable)
to system console
DB9
NT7D79AA
J7
SP1, Console
DB9
DB9
SP2, TTY
SP3
NT7D61 to SDI
(NT7D46 to SDI Paddle Board)
NT7D46AA J8
RJ11
NT7D60AA
NT7D61DA
Teledapt
SP4
NT7D71BA to MDF or RJ11
NTND82AA to Meridian Mail
J1
MVME705B Transition card
SP5
DB25
SP3
NT7D48AA J3
NT7D48AA J2
Customer-supplied cable to
host computer
DB25
SP1
NT7D58 to ESDI or MSDL
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling 239
Figure 67
Application Module MVME712A, MVME705B, NT6D51AA cablingÑI/O subpanel (CCR)
Application Module
(INTERNAL CABLING)
(EXTERNAL CABLING)
MVME712A Transition card
I/O sub-panel
Customer-supplied
(or NT7D61 cable)
to system console
DB9
NT7D79AA
J7
SP1, Console
DB9
SP2, TTY
NT7D61 to SDI
(NT7D46 to SDI Paddle Board)
DB9
SP3
NT7D46AA J8
¥
SP4
Teledapt
Printer
NT7D46AA
Undefined port
J9
Customer-supplied cable to
external modem
Not used with AM
MVME705B Transition card
SP5
DB25
SP3
NT7D48AA
NT7D48AA
J3
J2
DB25
SP1
NT7D58 to ESDI or MSDL
NT6D51AA Transition card
A (Port 7)
DB25
SP3
NT7D95AA
NT7D95AA
NT7D95AA
J6
J5
J4
NT8D96AE
B (Port 8)
(Not used)
A (Port 4)
To terminals
DB25
SP2
NT8D96AE
NT8D96AE
B (Port 5) and/or
printers
C (Port 6)
A (Port 1)
B (Port 2)
C (Port 3)
DB25
SP1
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
240 Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling
Figure 68
Application Module MVME712AM, MVME705B, NT6D51AA cablingÑI/O subpanel (CCR)
Application Module
(INTERNAL CABLING)
(EXTERNAL CABLING)
MVME712AM Transition card
I/O sub-panel
Customer-supplied
(or NT7D61 cable)
to system console
DB9
NT7D79AA
J7
SP1, Console
SP2, TTY
NT7D61 to SDI
(NT7D46 to SDI Paddle Board)
DB9
SP3
NT7D46AA J8
SP4
Undefined port
RJ11
NT7D60AA
Teledapt
Printer
(MVME712AM)
Not used with AM
NT7D71BA to MDF or RJ11
MVME705B Transition card
SP5
DB25
SP3
NT7D48AA
NT7D48AA
J3
J2
DB25
SP1
NT7D58 to ESDI or MSDL
NT6D51AA Transition card
A (Port 7)
B (Port 8)
(Not used)
DB25
SP3
NT7D95AA
NT7D95AA
NT7D95AA
J6
J5
J4
NT8D96AE
NT8D96AE
NT8D96AE
A (Port 4)
B (Port 5) and/or
C (Port 6)
A (Port 1)
B (Port 2)
C (Port 3)
DB25
SP2
To terminals
printers
DB25
SP1
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling 241
Figure 69
Application Module external I/O cabling to and from universal I/O panel (Meridian Link)
Application Module
(INTERNAL CABLING)
MVME712A Transition card
(EXTERNAL CABLING)
Universal I/O panel
Customer-supplied (or NT7D61
cable) to system console
DB9 NT7D79AA
SYS CONS
SP1, Console
SP2, TTY
SP3
Customer-supplied cable to
external modem (MVME712A)
DB9 NT7D46AA EXT MODEM
DB9 NT7D46AA
DB9 NT7D61DA
SDI LINK
NT7D61 to SDI
(NT7D46 to SDI Paddle Board)
Spare
DB25
SP4
NTND82AA to Meridian Mail
MVME705B Transition card
DB25 NT7D95AA
SP5
SP3
SP1
Customer-supplied
cable to host computer
DB25 NT7D95AA
DB25 NT7D95AA
Host
ESDI Link
NT7D58 to ESDI or MSDL
(see Figure 67)
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
242 Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling
Figure 70
Application Module external I/O cabling to and from universal I/O panel (CCR)
Application Module
(INTERNAL CABLING)
(EXTERNAL CABLING)
Universal I/O panel
MVME712A/AM Transition card
Customer-supplied
(or NT7D61 cable)
to system console
NT7D79AA
SYS CONS
SP1, Console
Customer-supplied cable
to external modem
NT7D46AA
SP2, TTY
(MVME712A)
EXT MODEM
SDI LINK
NT7D46AA
SP3
SP4
NT7D61 to SDI
(NT7D46 to SDI Paddle Board)
Undefined port
RJ11
NT7D60AA INT MODEM
Teledapt
NT7D71BA to MDF or RJ11
(MVME712AM)
Unused with AM
Printer
MVME705B Transition card
SP5
NT7D48AA
SP3
SP1
NT7D48AA
ESDI Link
NT7D58 to ESDI or MSDL
(see Figure 67)
NT6D51AA Transition card
NT7D95AA
Serial I/O 7-8
Serial I/O 4-6
Serial I/O 1-3
NT8D96AE
NT8D96AE
NT8D96AE
A (Port 7)
B (Port 8)
(Not used)
SP3
SP2
SP1
NT7D95AA
NT7D95AA
A (Port 4) To terminals
and/or
printers
B (Port 5)
C (Port 6)
A (Port 1)
B (Port 2)
C (Port 3)
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling 243
Figure 71
Application Module external cabling to and from generic I/O panel (Meridian Link)
Application Module
(INTERNAL CABLING)
MVME712M Transition card
(EXTERNAL CABLING)
Generic I/O panel
card 1 conn 1
SP1
Customer-supplied (or NT7D61
cable) to system console
NT7D79BA
SP2
NT7D79BA
card 1 conn 2
card 1 conn 3
Customer-supplied cable to
external modem
SP3
NT7D61 to SDI
(NT7D46 to SDI Paddle Board)
NT7D79BA
SP4
NT7D58CA
card 1 conn 4
DB15 f
NT7D58BB
NT7D47EA
Meridian Mail
DB25 f
SCSI
A0379673 SCSI Terminator
NT7D47DA*
Ethernet
Ethernet to TCP/IP host
computer or LAN-based PC
Ethernet
MVME705B Transition card
SP5
NT7D95AA
Spare
SP3
Customer-supplied
cable to host computer
(X.25 host link)
NT7D95AA
card 2 conn 2
card 2 conn 1
SP1
NT7D95AA
NT7D58 to ESDI or MSDL
(see Figure 67)
* Not shipped with the Application Module.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
244 Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling
Figure 72
Application Module external cabling to and from generic I/O panel (CCR)
Application Module (INTERNAL CABLING)
(EXTERNAL CABLING)
MVME712M Transition card
Generic I/O panel
card 1 conn 1
Customer-supplied
(or NT7D61 cable)
to system console
NT7D79BA
SP1
card 1 conn 2
card 1 conn 3
NT7D79BA
SP2
Customer-supplied cable to
external modem (MVME712A)
NT7D79BA
SP3
NT7D61 to SDI
(NT7D46 to SDI Paddleboard)
card 1 conn 4
DB15 f
NT7D58CA
SP4
(Not used by CCR)
NT7D47EA
NT7D47DA*
Ethernet
Ethernet
Ethernet to LAN-based PC
SCSI
A0379673 SCSI Terminator
MVME705B Transition card
NT7D95AA card 2 conn 3
SP5
SP3
SP1
(Not used by CCR)
(Not used by CCR)
NT7D95AA card 2 conn 2
NT7D95AA card 2 conn 1
NT7D58 to ESDI or MSDL
(see Figure 67)
NT6D51AA Transition card
A (Port 7)
B (Port 8)
(Not used)
NT7D95AA card 3 conn 3
NT8D96AE
NT8D96AE
NT8D96AE
SP3
SP2
A (Port 4) To terminals
NT7D95AA card 3 conn 2
NT7D95AA card 3 conn 1
and/or
printers
B (Port 5)
C (Port 6)
A (Port 1)
B (Port 2)
C (Port 3)
SP1
* Not shipped with the Application Module.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling 245
Figure 73
I/O cabling to Meridian 1 (SDI and ESDI) (Application Module)
Application Module
J8 on I/O sub-panel
SDI LINK on universal I/O panel
card 1 conn 3 on generic I/O panel
MVME712
transition card
DB25** DB9
(NT7D46AA*)
SP3
NT7D79BA
J2 on I/O sub-panel
ESDI Link on universal I/O panel
card 2 conn 1 on generic I/O panel
MVME705B
transition card
DB25
NT7D48AA
SP1
(NT7D95AA
on newer
systems)
I/O panel
NT7D61 to SDI
(NT7D46 to
SDI Paddle Board)
Meridian 1
¥
SDI card
(see Note)
NT8D82*
NT8D82
NT7D58
to ESDI or MSDL
¥
QPC513
ESDI card
NTND27
NT6D80
MSDL card
I/O panels
Note: Use the NT8D82 cable with all SDI cards except
the NT8D41 SDI Paddle Board. With the Paddle Board,
use an NT8D84AA cable.
* MVME712A/AM only
** DB9 (MVME712A/AM only)
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
246 Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling
Figure 74
I/O cabling to Meridian 1 (SDI and MSDL) (Application Module)
Application Module
J8 on I/O sub-panel
SDI LINK on universal I/O panel
card 1 conn 3 on generic I/O panel
MVME712
transition card
DB25** DB9
(NT7D46AA*)
SP3
NT7D79BA
J2 on I/O sub-panel
ESDI Link on universal I/O panel
card 2 conn 1 on generic I/O panel
MVME705B
transition card
DB25
NT7D48AA
SP1
(NT7D95AA
on newer
systems)
I/O panel
NT7D61 to SDI
(NT7D46 to
SDI Paddle Board)
Meridian 1
¥
SDI card
(see Note)
NT8D82*
NT8D82
NTND27
QPC513
ESDI card
¥
NT7D58
to ESDI or MSDL
NT6D80
MSDL card
I/O panels
Note: Use the NT8D82 cable with all SDI cards except
the NT8D41 SDI Paddle Board. With the Paddle Board,
use an NT8D84AA cable.
* MVME712A/AM only
** DB9 (MVME712A/AM only)
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling 247
ESDI/MSDL cabling (Application Module)
As shown in Figure 73, the QPC513 ESDI card in the Meridian 1 connects
to the I/O panel in the Meridian 1 through an NT8D82 RS-232 straight-
through cable.
As shown in Figure 74, the NT6D80 MSDL card connects to the Meridian 1
I/O panel using an NTND27 SCSI II cable. From the Meridian 1 I/O panel
or the ESDI/MSDL on the Meridian 1, an NT7D58 cable connects to the
Application Module at
¥
¥
¥
J2 on the I/O subpanel
ESDI Link port on the universal I/O panel
card 2 conn 1 on the generic I/O panel
The NT7D58 cable has 25-pin male connectors at both ends. Table 82 lists
the pin assignments required for the cable.
Table 82
NT7D58 cable pinout
Meridian 1
Signal
AM (J2)
1
2
Shield
TXD
1
2
3
4
RXD
RTS
3
4
5
CTS
5
6
7
8
15
17
20
24
DSR
LRTN
DCD
STC
SCR
DTR
SCTE
6
7
8
15
17
20
24
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
248 Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling
System console cabling (Application Module)
As shown in Figures 65Ð74, the system console connects to the MVME712
transition card at
¥
¥
¥
J7 on the I/O subpanel
SYS CONS port on the universal I/O panel
card 1 conn 1 on the generic I/O panel
Use a customer-supplied cable (or an extra NT7D61) with a 9-pin female
and 25-pin male connector from the console to the Application Module.
Table 83 lists the pin assignments required for the cable.
Table 83
System console cable pinout
Meridian 1
Signal
AM (J7) 9-pin connector
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
20
1
TXD
RXD
RTS
CTS
DSR
LRTN
DCD
DTR
GND
3
2
7
8
6
5
1
4
9
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling 249
Host computer cabling (Application Module)
X.25 cabling:
As shown in Figures 65Ð74, a customer-supplied cable connects
¥
¥
¥
J3 on the I/O subpanel
Host on the universal I/O panel
card 2 conn 2 on the generic I/O panel
to the host computer.
Table 84 describes the pin assignments for this cable.
Table 84
Host port pinout
Pin
Signal
Direction
Connection
P2 RXD
P2 TXD
P2 CTS*
P2 RTS*
P2 DTR*
P2 GND
+12 V
P2 TRXC* or open
P2 TRXC* or open
P2 DSR*
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
15
17
20
24
TXD
RXD
RTS
CTS
DSR
GND
DCD
TXCI
RXCI
DTR
TXCO
Input
Output
Input
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Input
Input
P2 RTXC*
TCP/IP cabling:
As shown in Figure 71, an NT7D47EA drop cable connects the Ethernet
connector on the generic I/O panel to an Ethernet transceiver. For pinout
information of the NT7D47EA cable, refer to Table 94.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
250 Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling
SDI cabling (Application Module)
As shown in Figures 73 and 74, SDI cards (other than the NT8D41 SDI
Paddle Board) connect to the I/O panel in the Meridian 1 through an
NT8D82 RS-232 straight-through cable. From the Meridian 1 I/O panel or
SDI card on the Meridian 1 I/O panel or SDI card on the Meridian 1, an
NT7D61 cable (see Table 81 for lengths and specific codes) connects to the
Application Module at
¥
¥
¥
J8 on the I/O subpanel
SDI LINK port on the universal I/O panel
card 1 conn 3 on the generic I/O panel
The NT7D61 cable has a 25-pin male connector for the Meridian 1 and a
9-pin female connector for the Application Module. Table 85 lists the pin
assignments required for the cable.
Table 85
NT7D61 cable pinout
Meridian 1
Signal
AM (J8)
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
20
1
TXD
RXD
RTS
CTS
DSR
LRTN
DCD
DTR
GND
3
2
7
8
6
5
1
4
9
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling 251
SDI Paddle Board cabling (Application Module)
The NT8D41 SDI Paddle Board connects to the I/O panel in the Meridian 1
through an NT8D84AA cable (see Table 88). From the Meridian 1 I/O
panel or SDI Paddle Board on the Meridian 1, an NT7D46 cable (see Table
81 for lengths and specific codes) connects to the Application Module at
¥
¥
¥
J8 on the I/O subpanel
SDI LINK port on the universal I/O panel
card 1 conn 3 on the generic I/O panel
The NT7D46 cable has a 9-pin male connector for the Meridian 1 and a 9-pin
female connector for the Application Module. Table 86 lists the pin
assignments required for the cable.
Table 86
NT7D46 cable pinouts
Meridian 1
Signal
AM (J8)
2
6
4
9
8
3
1
7
TXD
RXD
RTS
CTS
DSR
LRTN
DCD
DTR
3
2
7
8
6
5
1
4
Table 87
NT8D84AA cable pinout
10-pin connector
Signal
DB9 connector
2
6
4
9
8
3
1
7
TXD
RXD
RTS
CTS
DSR
LRTN
DCD
DTR
2
6
4
9
8
3
1
7
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
252 Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling
Table 88
Pinout of SDI Paddle Board J1 connector
Pin Number
Signal
CD1
Connector
Port
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
J1
Port 1
RD1
TD1
DTR1
GND
DSR1
RTS1
CTS1
Table 89
Pinout of SDI Paddle Board J2 connector
Pin Number
Signal
CD2
Connector
Port
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
J2
Port 2
RD2
TD2
DTR2
GND
DSR1
RTS2
CTS2
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling 253
Internal modem cabling (MVME712AM card only)
The NT7D71BA cable connects the 9-pin connector at either port J9 on the
I/O subpanel or the INT MODEM port on the universal I/O panel to the 4-pin
connector on the MDF. This cable is used only with the MVME712AM card.
Table 90 shows the pin assignments used by this cable.
Table 90
NT7D71 cable pinout
AM (9-pin)
Signal
MDF (RJ-11)
2
Tip
2
3
3
Ring
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
254 Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling
Meridian Mail cabling (Application Module)
The Meridian Link application can have voice-processing capability by
connecting the Application Module to a Meridian Mail system through a
link called the Meridian Mail Link (MML).
The MML (Figure 75) connects to the Application Module at MVME712
serial port SP4. The MML connects to the Meridian Mail system at a data
port of Meridian Mail.
Figure 75
Meridian Mail cabling (Application Module)
Application Module
Meridian Mail
System
MVME712
transition card
I/O panel
Meridian
Mail
cable 1
cable 2
SP4
data port
Table 91 shows the different cables that can be used for cable 1 and cable 2
for various combinations of MVME712 transition cards and types of I/O
panel.
Table 91
Meridian Mail cabling
Transition card
I/O panel type
I/O panel
Cable 1
Cable 2
connector
(see Figure 75)
(see Figure 75)
MVME712M
generic I/O
card 1 conn 4
Spare
NT7D58CA
NT7D61DA
NT7D61DA
NT7D58BB
NTND82AA
NTND82AA
MVME712A/AM
MVME712A/AM
universal I/O
I/O subpanel
J1
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling 255
Meridian Mail Modular Option EC provides data port connections via a
utility card. The interface is provided by an NT6P0109 5-port RS-232 or an
NT6P0110 4-port RS-232 break-out cable. Each port on these cables has a
null modem arrangement, therefore a straight-through cable will be needed
to provide a null arrangement interface required by Meridian Link.
Adding a connection to Meridian Mail
The following procedure provides a brief description on how to add voice
processing capability to an installed Application Module. Nortel provides
kits to enable you to add this capability, and a detailed description will be
provided in these kits.
1
2
Power down the Application Module.
Determine the type of MVME712 transition card installed in your
Application Module. Refer to the description of the transition cards
earlier in this guide. Briefly, the MVME712M card has four 25-pin
connectors, while the MVME712A and AM cards have 9-pin
connectors. The MVME712AM card also has an RJ11 connector.
3
4
Determine the type of I/O panel installed in your Application Module.
Refer to Figures 27, 28, and 29 for illustrations of the types of I/O
panel.
Using Table 91, determine which cable you will use for cables 1 and
2. For example, if your Application Module has an MVME712AM
card and an I/O subpanel, use an NT7D61DA cable as cable 1 and
an NTND82AA cable as cable 2.
5
6
Connect cable 1 between serial port SP4 of the MVME712 transition
card and the appropriate connector of the I/O panel (refer to Figure
75 and Table 91). For example, if your Application Module has an
MVME712AM card and an I/O subpanel, connect an NT7D61DA
cable between SP4 and port J1 of the I/O subpanel.
Connect cable 2 between the connector on the I/O panel and the
NT1R03 Meridian Mail cable (the cable that connects to Meridian
Mail). For example, if your Application Module has an MVME712AM
card and an I/O subpanel, you would connect an NTND82AA cable
between port J1 of the I/O subpanel and the NT1R03 cable.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
256 Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling
7
8
Power up the Application Module.
Define the Meridian Mail Link parameters using Procedure 15 in
Chapter 15, ÒLink configurationÓ in this guide.
Note: Return to Chapter 5, ÒHardware installation overviewÓ for the
next procedure. For more information on Meridian Mail, refer to
Chapter 13, ÒMeridian Mail configuration.Ó
Installing Ethernet LAN support
Hardware and software requirements for installing Ethernet LAN support
are discussed in the ÒEthernet LAN-based PCÓ section in the Chapter 1,
ÒMeridian Link/CCR co-residencyÓ. However, you should be aware of the
following:
¥
¥
All IPE Modules can provide Ethernet LAN support
Application Modules can provide Ethernet LAN support only if they
have the following:
Ñ an MVME167-02 SBC card
Ñ an MVME712M transition card
Ñ a generic I/O panel
Ñ an NT7D47DA cable connected between the MVME712M card
and the Ethernet port of the generic I/O panel (refer to Table 93 for
the pinout of this cable)
Ñ an NT7D47EA drop cable connected between the Ethernet port of
the generic I/O panel and the Ethernet transceiver (refer to
Table 94 for the pinout of this cable)
For more information about the NT7D47DA and the NT7D47EA
cables, refer to Procedure 28: Installing the cables for Ethernet LAN
support (Application Module) in Chapter 17, ÒHardware upgrade.Ó
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling 257
Before you install Ethernet LAN support on your IPE Module or
Application Module, you must ensure that you have the following customer-
supplied equipment installed (see Figure 76):
¥
an Ethernet backbone cable that connects all nodes together (a
LAN-attached PC and a LAN-attached host computer are examples of
nodes)
¥
¥
two or more taps attached to the backbone for connecting nodes
at least one Ethernet transceiver for connecting a node to a tap
(multiport transceivers, also called fan-out boxes, connect two or more
nodes to a tap)
¥
¥
two or more nodes, each of which must have an Ethernet transceiver
interface in its CPU
two or more drop cables for connecting nodes to transceivers (or
multiport transceivers to taps)
Note: IPE Modules and Application Modules have built-in Ethernet
interfaces.
Figure 76
Ethernet backbone terminology (example)
Ethernet backbone
tap
tap
transceiver box
transceiver box
drop cable
node (PC)
(with an Ethernet
interface card)
node (IPE Module
or Application Module)
T
* An Application Module must be equipped with an MVME167 SBC card
and an MVME712M transition card.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
258 Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling
To set up an Ethernet connection, use the following procedure:
1
Ensure that an Ethernet drop cable is connected to the IPE Module
or Application Module. Refer to Table 92 for the connection.
Table 92
Ethernet connections to IPE Module and Application Module
Module
Ethernet connection
NT1R03AA cable (Ethernet port)
Ethernet port on the generic I/O panel
IPE
Application
2
3
Ensure that an Ethernet drop cable is connected to the LAN-based
PC or host computer through the connector on the Ethernet card.
At the console for the IPE Module or Application Module, perform
Procedure 7: Reboot and go through setup in Chapter 14, ÒSoftware
installation, upgrade, and update procedures.Ó
4
At step 20 of Procedure 7, type y and press [Return] to change the
system name.
5
6
At step 21 of Procedure 7, type the new name and press [Return].
When you have completed Procedure 7, perform Procedure 8: Load
the application software from tape.
7
If you are activating Meridian Link and your host computer is not
LAN-based, at step 16 of Procedure 8, type x and press [Return] to
state that the host link will use an X.25 protocol.
If you are activating Meridian Link and your host computer is LAN-
based, at step 16 of Procedure 8, press [Return] to indicate that the
host link will use the TCP/IP protocol.
8
9
At step 19 of Procedure 8, type y and press [Return] to state that
your IPE Module or Application Module is connected to Ethernet.
At step 20 of Procedure 8, type the new module name for the IPE
Module or Application Module (set at step 5 above) and press
[Return].
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling 259
10
11
At step 21 of Procedure 8, type the module address of the IPE
Module or Application Module and press [Return]. There are specific
requirements for the address. For more information, consult your
network administrator.
If you are activating support for an Ethernet LAN-based PC, continue
with steps 11-13.
When you have completed Procedure 8, ensure that the Ethernet
software has been installed on the LAN-based PC. The software
must be installed with VT220 emulation. For more information about
Ethernet software, refer to ÒEthernet LAN-based PCÓ in Chapter 1,
ÒMeridian Link/CCR co-residencyÓ.
12
13
At the PC, start a network session to the IPE Module or Application
Module using the host name and address from steps 9 and 10 in this
procedure. Refer to the documentation for the Ethernet software for
the procedure.
After the network session starts, you will receive a prompt to log in.
You can now log in as ccrusr in the usual way to perform CCR user
functions. Refer to the CCR User Guide for more information. Or you
can log in as maint in the usual way to issue Application Module or
link commands. Refer to the Application Module and Intelligent
Peripheral Equipment Module Diagnostic and Maintenance Guide
(NTP 553-3211-510) for more information.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
260 Chapter 9: Meridian Link/CCR interface cabling
Table 93
NT7D47DA cable pinout
P1 end
P2 end
1
2
1
2
3
3
5
5
6
6
9
9
10
12
13
10
12
13
Table 94
NT7D47EA cable pinout
P1 end
P2 end
1
2
1
2
3
3
5
5
6
6
9
9
10
12
13
10
12
13
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
261
Chapter 10: Installing peripheral devices
You should use this chapter in conjunction with Chapter 5, ÒHardware
installation overview,Ó which links hardware installation procedures in
easily understood tables (Tables 11 and 12).
The following procedures describe how to set up the video display terminals
supported by the Meridian Link and CCR applications. If the terminal you
are configuring is different from these (but 100 percent compatible with the
recommended terminal), use the most similar settings available and follow
the instructions in the manual that came with the terminal.
This chapter also contains procedures for configuring personal computers
running Reflection 4+ communication software and setting the switches on
printers supported by Nortel.
VT220, VT320, and VT420 terminals
Table 95 contains the setup values for the VT220 terminal. Table 96
contains the setup values for the VT320 terminal. Table 97 contains the
setup values for VT420 terminals.
CAUTION
Risk of potential data loss
Setup mode can be entered at any time, but it is
recommended that you do not do so while information is
being printed on the screen.
!
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
262 Chapter 10: Installing peripheral devices
The setup procedure is the same for all three terminals and is as follows:
1
Turn on the terminal.
Press the [Set-Up] key to enter setup mode.
2
The current setup values are displayed on a series of screens.
3
Using the following procedures, change the values on each screen
to match the values in the appropriate table.
To move to a particular screen from the main setup screen, use the
arrow keys to move through the menu of setup screens, and press
[Enter].
To move to the next setup screen, use the arrow keys to move to
To Next SetUp and press [Enter].
To change the value in a field:
¥
Use the arrow keys to move to that field.
¥
Press [Enter] to move through the available values for that field.
4
When youÕve finished, press the [Set-Up] key again.
Note: Different versions of the VT220, VT320, and VT420 are
indicated by the version number at the top right corner of the setup
screen. The wording on the setup screens varies slightly from one
version to another. Use the values that are closest to the ones shown
in the tables.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10: Installing peripheral devices 263
Table 95
VT220 Setup values
Set-Up Directory
On Line
Display Set-Up
80 Columns
Interpret Controls
No Auto Wrap
Jump Scroll
Light Text, Dark Screen
Cursor
Block Cursor Style
General Set-Up
VT200 Mode, 8 Bit Controls
User Defined Keys Unlocked
User Features Unlocked
Multinational
Application Keypad
Normal Cursor Keys
No New Line
Communications Set-Up
Transmit=9600
Receive=Transmit
Xoff at 128
8 bits, No Parity
1 Stop Bit
No Local Echo
EIA Port, Data Leads Only
Disconnect, 2 s Delay
Limited Transmit
Printer Set-Up
Set up according to your printer requirements (if any).
Keyboard Set-Up
Typewriter Keys
Caps Lock
Warning Bell
Break
Auto Repeat
No Keyclick
No Margin Bell
No Auto Answerback
Answerback=
Not Concealed
Tab Set-Up
Leave this screen at the default values.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
264 Chapter 10: Installing peripheral devices
Table 96
VT320 Setup values
Set-Up Directory
On Line
Display Set-Up
80 Columns
Interpret Controls
No Auto Wrap
Jump Scroll
Light Text, Dark Screen
Cursor
Block Cursor Style
No Status Display
General Set-Up
VT300 Mode, 8 Bit Controls
VT220 ID
User Defined Keys Unlocked
User Features Unlocked
Application Keypad
Normal Cursor Keys
No New Line
UPSS DEC Supplemental
Communications Set-Up
Transmit=9600
No Local Echo
DEC-423, Data Leads Only
Limited Transmit
No Auto Answerback
Answerback=
Receive=Transmit
Xoff at 128
8 bits, No Parity
1 Stop Bit
Not Concealed
Printer Set-Up
Set up according to your printer requirements (if any).
Keyboard Set-Up
Caps Lock
Break
Auto Repeat
No Keyclick
No Margin Bell
Warning Bell
Compose
<X] Delete
,, and .. Keys
<> Key
Ô~Key
Tab Set-Up Screen
Leave this screen at the default values.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10: Installing peripheral devices 265
Table 97
VT420 Setup values
Global Set-Up
On Line
Sessions on Comm1
CRT Saver
Comm1=RS-232
70 Hz
Printer Shared
Display Set-Up
80 Columns
Interpret Controls
No Auto Wrap
Jump Scroll
Dark Screen
Cursor
Block Cursor Style
No Status Display
Cursor Steady
6x24 pages
24 Lines/Screen
Vertical Coupling
Page Coupling
Auto Resize Screen
General Set-Up
VT400 Mode, 8 Bit Controls
User Defined Keys Unlocked
User Features Unlocked
8-bit Characters
Normal Cursor Keys
No New Line
UPSS DEC Supplemental
VT220 ID
When Available Update
Application Keypad
Communications Set-Up
Transmit=9600
Receive=Transmit
Xoff at 128
8 bits, No Parity
1 Stop Bit
Disconnect, 2 s Delay
Limited Transmit
No Auto Answerback
Answerback=
Not Concealed
No Local Echo
Data Leads Only
Modem High Speed = ignore
Modem Low Speed = ignore
Printer Set-Up
Set up according to your printer requirements (if any).
Keyboard Set-Up
Typewriter Keys
Caps Lock
Auto Repeat
Ignore Alt
F1 = Hold
F2 = Print
F3 = Set-Up
F4 = Session
F5 = Break
,< and .> Keys
<> Key
Keyclick Off
Margin Bell Off
Warning Bell High
Character Mode
<X] Delete
Local Compose
Ô~Key
Tab Set-Up
Leave this screen at the default values.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
266 Chapter 10: Installing peripheral devices
Personal computer running Reflection 4+
Reflection 4+ is a customer-supplied communications software package that
runs on a personal computer, which can then be used as a terminal for
accessing the Meridian Link and CCR applications.
To use Reflection 4+ on a PC, you must first download a configuration file.
You need to perform this procedure only once, unless the configuration file
is lost or becomes damaged. This procedure assumes that Reflection 4+
software is installed on your PC, and that the PC is connected to the
appropriate port on the IPE Module or Application Module.
1
2
Go to the PC directory you wish to use for all future access to the
application (for example, the Reflection 4+ software directory).
Type r4 and press [Enter] to start up the Reflection 4+ application.
The default Reflection 4+ configuration file starts up.
3
Correct the port, baud rate, and data format information as
appropriate for your PC, and press [Enter].
The Òlogin:Ó prompt appears.
4
5
Type trmcnfg and press [Enter] to log in to the terminal
configuration account.
Type the trmcnfg password (the default password is trmcnfg) and
press [Enter].
The menu shown in Figure 77 appears.
Figure 77
Downloading the Reflection 4+ configuration file
Choose a ÒReflectionsÓ configuration to install:
1. Enhanced keyboard, black background.
2. Enhanced keyboard, blue background.
3. AT keyboard, black background.
4. AT keyboard, blue background.
5. Quit configuration installation.
6
Type the number for the appropriate menu option and press [Enter].
The file is downloaded into the directory on your PC.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10: Installing peripheral devices 267
7
8
If you need to quit Reflection 4+ (after logging out of the system),
press [Alt]+[Ctrl]+[m] to see the Reflection 4+ menu bar. Press <F8>
twice.
To use the configuration file at any time, go to the appropriate
directory, type r4 meridian.cfg, and press [Enter].
Meridian Terminal Emulator (MTE 8)
Meridian Terminal Emulator Release 8 allows you to connect to your CCR
application from your PC using Microsoft Windows NT or Windows 95.
1
Double-click the MTE8 icon.
The MTE8 window appears.
2
3
4
On the Settings menu, click Edit Options.
Select a connection type (COM1, COM2, or LAN)>
If you are connecting to CCR though a serial port (COM1 or COM2),
click either 2400 Baud or 9600 Baud for the connection speed.
5
6
Click CCR.
If you want to use these values for only the current session, click
OK. If you want to save these values and defaults for all future
sessions, click Save Options, then click OK.
7
8
9
Wait until you are connected to CCR.
If you are prompted for a display type, select VT220.
Log in to CCR.
For more information on MTE7, refer to the Meridian Terminal Emulator
User Guide, Product Release 8.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
268 Chapter 10: Installing peripheral devices
Dot-matrix printer switch settings
The HP Rugged Writer is a dot-matrix printer. This printer can be
configured in HP PCL mode, which provides ISO Latin-1 international
support as well as higher-quality graphics, or in Epson mode, which
provides faster printing of reports. Table 98 shows the correct DIP switch
settings for use with the CCR application.
CAUTION
Risk of hardware damage
Never use pencils or other graphite tools when changing
the position of the DIP switches. Flakes of graphite can
enter the switch and short-circuit the printer.
!
Table 98
Rugged Writer printer switch settings
Function
Setting
Switch
Switch position
Bank A switches:
Pitch
Default
Character set
10 cpi
Ð8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Down
Down
Down
Down
Down
Down
Down
Down
Paper path
Page length
Print quality
z-fold
11 in.
draft
Bank B switches:
Command set
EPSON
HP PCL
Buffer
Disabled
Xon/Xoff
None
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Up
Down
Down
Down
Down
Down
Down
Down
Down
RAM allocation
Perforation skip
Handshaking
Parity
Baud
9600
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10: Installing peripheral devices 269
LaserJet series II printer switch settings
Use the [Menu] key on the front panel to check and set the options. Press
the Menu key to access the first group of settings. Hold the [Menu] key
down for about five seconds (the printer is offline) to access the second
group of settings. Press the + or Ð (minus) key until the correct setting
appears to change an option. Press [Enter]/[Reset Menu] to save a selection.
Press the [Menu] key to continue. Press the [Online] key to exit from the
menu.
Table 99 shows the correct option settings for use with CCR.
Table 99
LaserJet series II printer switch settings
Press [Menu] key to see the
following function
Hold [Menu] key five seconds to
see the following setting
COPIES
MANUAL FEED
FONT SOURCE =
FONT NUMBER = 00
FORM 066 LINES
=
=
01
OFF
1
SYM SET
AUTO CONT
I/O
BAUD RATE
ROBUST XON
=
=
=
=
=
IBM - US
OFF
SERIAL
9600
ON
=
DTR POLARITY = HI
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
270 Chapter 10: Installing peripheral devices
LaserJet series III printer switch settings
Use the [Menu] key on the front panel to check and set the options. Press
the [Menu] key to access the first group of settings. Hold the [Menu] key
down for about five seconds (the printer is offline) to access the second
group of settings. Press the + or Ð (minus) key until the correct setting
appears to change an option. Press [Enter]/[Reset Menu] to save a selection.
Press the [Menu] key to continue. Press the [Online] key to exit from the
menu.
Table 100 shows the correct option settings for use with CCR.
Table 100
LaserJet series III printer switch settings
Press [Menu] key to see the
following function
Hold [Menu] key five seconds to
see the following setting
COPIES
FONT SOURCE =
FONT NUMBER = 00
=
01
1
AUTO CONT
I/O
SERIAL
BAUD RATE
ROBUST XON
DTR POLARITY = HI
RET = DARK
PAGEPROTECT = OFF
= OFF
= SERIAL
= RS-232
= 9600
= ON
PAPER
ORIENTATION
FORM
MANUAL FEED
SYM SET
=
=
=
=
=
LETTER
P
066 LINES
OFF
ROMAN 8
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10: Installing peripheral devices 271
LaserJet series IV printer switch settings
Use the [Menu] key on the front panel to check and set the options. Press
the [Menu] key to access the first group of settings. Hold the [Menu] key
down for about five seconds (the printer is offline) to access the second
group of settings. Press the + or Ð (minus) key until the correct setting
appears to change an option. Press [Enter]/[Reset Menu] to save a selection.
Press the [Menu] key to continue. Press the [Online] key to exit from the
menu.
Table 101 shows the correct option settings for use with CCR.
Table 101
LaserJet series IV printer switch settings
Press [Menu] key to see the
Printing Menu
Press [Menu] key once to see
the PCL Menu
COPIES
PAPER
ORIENTATION
FORM
MANUAL FEED
RET
=
=
=
=
=
=
01
FONT SOURCE = 1
FONT NUMBER = 45
SYM SET = ISO L1
PAGEPROTECT = OFF
LETTER
P
66
OFF
DARK
RESOLUTION
TIMEOUT
= 300
= 15
Press [Menu] key twice to see
the Configuration Menu
Press [Menu] key three times to
see the Printing Menu
MP TRAY
LOCK
CLR WARN
AUTO CONT
DENSITY
=
=
=
=
=
=
CLASS
NONE
ON
ON
3
ON
SERIAL
PACING
BAUD RATE
ROBUST XON
DTR POLARITY = HI
= RS-232
= XON/XOFF
= 9600
= ON
LOW TONER
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
272 Chapter 10: Installing peripheral devices
DeskJet and DeskJet 500 printer switch settings
The DeskJet and DeskJet 500 are inkjet printers. Figure 78 shows each
printerÕs correct switch settings for use with CCR (the arrows point in the
direction you should move the switch handle).
Figure 78
DeskJet and DeskJet 500 printer switch settings
BANK A
BANK B
UP
DOWN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
273
Chapter 11: Peripheral device cabling
interface
You should use this chapter in conjunction with Chapter 5, ÒHardware
installation overview,Ó which links hardware installation procedures in
easily understood tables (Tables 11 and 12).
This chapter provides information pertaining to special installing and
configuration requirements.
DCE and DTE connections
The RS-232C protocol is widely used as a physical interface between
external devices. An RS-232 link will safely carry data signals up to 15 m
(50 ft.) with no special equipment installedÑif it is set up correctly for the
device at each end. Each device is designated as either Data Terminal
Equipment (DTE; usually a terminal or host computer) or Data
Communications Equipment (DCE; often a modem). Normally, to establish
communications between two devices, one device must be DCE and the
other device must be DTE, with an RS-232 cable between them.
The RS-232 cable has as many as 25 pins, each carrying a specific type of
data signal. A straight RS-232 link connects a DTE device to a DCE device.
However, some connections link devices of the same typeÑfor example, a
printer could be attached to a terminal (DTE-to-DTE). There are two
approaches to handling such non-standard connections. They include
¥
reconfiguring the device at one end of the link Many devices can be
configured to resemble a DTE or DCE device, usually by setting
switches or jumpers on the equipment or by changing the software
configuration. A straight cable can then be used, as shown in Figure 79.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
274 Chapter 11: Peripheral device cabling interface
¥
using a null-modem cable A null-modem cable (a special cable, or a
cable with an adapter) crosses certain RS-232 data signals so that a
DTE-to-DTE or DCE-to-DCE connection behaves like a standard
DCE-to-DTE connection. A null-modem cable is shown in Figure 80.
Note that null-modem cables and connectors are commonly used in
asynchronous connections (to terminals or modems, for example) but
cannot always be used in synchronous connections (to the Host or AML). In
particular, DTE-to-DTE synchronous connections cannot normally be used
because the DCE side supplies the clock signal, so that in a DTE-to-DTE
connection, no clock signal would be available. Likewise, DCE-to-DCE
connections may or may not work in synchronous mode because each side
thinks it controls the clock signal. Also, the port hardware implementation
may not allow a DTE-to-DCE crossover connection.
Figure 79
Straight RS-232 cable
Pin
1
Pin
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
DTE
DCE
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
20
8
20
15
17
15
17
Note 1: Equipment at either end may require special configuration to
look like DTE or DCE so that a straight cable can be used.
Note 2: Pins 15 and 17 are used for some configurations.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11: Peripheral device cabling interface 275
Figure 80
Null modem RS-232 cable
Pin
1
Pin
1
2
2
3
3
4
5
7
4
5
7
DTE
DTE
6
6
8
20
8
20
15
17
15
17
Note 1: This cable applies equally to a configuration with a
DCE device at each end.
Note 2: Pins 15 and 17 are used for some configurations.
The ports on the IPE Module can be configured as DCE or DTE using
connectors on the CPU adapter card. (For more information, refer to
ÒInstalling the IPE ModuleÓ in Chapter 8, ÒHardware installation
procedures.Ó)
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
276 Chapter 11: Peripheral device cabling interface
Using an A/B switchbox to share system consoles
You can use a single terminal as a system console for more than one
application if you use an A/B switchbox. Follow the installation procedure
below to install the NT3M50AD (A0345353) and similar A/B switchboxes.
Note: Using an A/B switchbox to switch a console from one module
(either an IPE Module or an Application Module) to another may cause
system error messages to be lost. If the console is switched to one
module, any system error messages sent to the console from the other
module will be lost. For example, if Module A were to report SCSI
failure as a system console message while the A/B switch was set to
Module B, Module AÕs messages would be lost.
Connecting the A/B switchbox
1
Place the A/B switchbox in a suitable location near the IPE Module
or Application Module.
2
For the IPE Module: Plug one end of an NT1R03DB cable into the
port 1 connector of the NT1R03AA cable.
For the Application Module: Plug one end of the 9-pin-to-25-pin
cable (or extra NT7D61 cable) into the Application Module (J7 on the
I/O subpanel, SYS CONS on the universal I/O panel or card 1 conn
1 of the generic I/O panel) for your application.
3
4
5
6
Plug the other end of the cable into the connector marked ÒAÓ on the
rear of the A/B switchbox and secure it.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the second application, using the ÒBÓ
connector on the A/B switchbox.
Label the front of the A/B switchbox to indicate which application is
connected to each port.
Install a straight RS-232 cable between the ÒCÓ connector on the
rear of the A/B switchbox and the terminal.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11: Peripheral device cabling interface 277
Using the A/B switchbox to switch applications
1
Log out of any administration, maintenance, or application function
on the system console.
The ÒConsole Login:Ó prompt appears.
2
Use the switch at the front of the A/B switchbox to select the other
application.
3
4
Press [Return] to see the ÒConsole Login:Ó prompt.
If your terminal is a PC running Reflection 4+, download the
keyboard mapping file.
See Chapter 10, ÒInstalling peripheral devicesÓ in this guide for
further information on downloading this file.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
278 Chapter 11: Peripheral device cabling interface
Modems
Modems are used to connect peripheral devices (terminals and printers) to
the IPE Module or the Application Module over long distances. Modems
are always DCE.
Limited-distance modem
If a peripheral device is to be installed more than 15 m (50 ft) away from
the IPE Module or the Application Module, you will need to use a self-
powered limited-distance modem. The added range depends on the modem
you obtain. Limited-distance modems are recommended for use inside
buildings only. Nortel neither supplies nor recommends a particular make or
model of modem for this purpose. If diagnostic activities indicate that
problems exist with the modem, Nortel support personnel will recommend
that the customer call in service representatives for the modem equipment.
The following standards should be used when selecting a limited-distance
modem:
¥
¥
9600 bps
8 bits, no parity, 1 stop bit
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11: Peripheral device cabling interface 279
USRobotics Sportster modem
The USRobotics Sportster (14.4) modem allows you to extend the distance
between the IPE Module or the Application Module and any connected
peripheral equipment.
The switch settings are shown in the following table.
Table 102
USRobotics Sportster switch settings
Switch setting
Position
Up
Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
DTR Normal
Up
Verbal result codes
Display result codes
Echo offline commands
Auto answer
Down
Up
Up
Up
Carrier detect normal
Load factory defaults
Smart mode
Down
Down
Note: When dialing up the system, you may need to send several
<BREAK> commands from your remote end to the system in order to
bring up the login prompt. The systemÕs baud rate may be different
from the modem baud rate therefore sending the <BREAK> command
causes the system to cycle through various baud rates. When the
system reaches the correct baud rate, you will see the login prompt on
your remote screen.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
280 Chapter 11: Peripheral device cabling interface
Gandalf LDS 120E limited-distance modem
The Gandalf LDS 120E limited-distance modem allows you to extend the
distance between the IPE Module or the Application Module and any
connected peripheral up to a nominal distance of 8 km (5 miles). Figure 81
illustrates the hardware configuration required to use the Gandalf LDS 120E
modem.
Ensure that the jumper options match the settings shown in Figure 82. The
switch on the back of the modem should be set to the ÒnormalÓ position.
Connecting the Gandalf LDS 120E modem to the IPE Module or
the Application Module
1
2
3
Connect the DB25 connector from the IPE Module or the Application
Module port to a null-modem adapter.
Connect the null-modem adapter to the female DB25 socket on the
first Gandalf LDS 120E modem.
Connect the first Gandalf LDS 120E modem to the second modem
with 2-pair twisted cable (24 AWG). This cable cannot exceed 8 km
(5 miles).
4
5
Connect the second Gandalf LDS 120E modem to the peripheral
device using a straight DB25 cable.
Once the modems are connected, turn on the power and ensure that
the DCD lamp on each modem comes on.
This lamp indicates that each Gandalf LDS 120E modem is active.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11: Peripheral device cabling interface 281
Figure 81
Hardware configuration using a Gandalf LDS 120E limited-distance
modem
VME
Peripheral
multi-port
device
cable
DB25 straight cable
¥
¥
Null modem
adapter
DCE
Gandalf LDS 120E
DCE
Gandalf LDS 120E
Tx
Rx
Tx
Rx
1
4
2
3
1
2
3
4
Twisted pairs
Figure 82
Gandalf LDS 120E limited-distance modemÑjumper option settings
TERM
PHASE
T
T
A
B
2W
4W
CST
-dB
+8dB
+13dB
CTR
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
282 Chapter 11: Peripheral device cabling interface
Dial-up modem
If you want to dial up to ports on the IPE Module or the Application
Module, you can use any one of five modems: Universal Data Systems
(UDS) 2440 A/D modem, EC224 A/D modem, Ven-Tel 2400 baud modem,
Ven-Tel 2400 Plus II baud modem, and Ven-Tel 9600 plus baud modem.
The following pages show the locations and settings of the switches on
these modems.
It is important to note that regardless of which modem you select, the
identical model of modem must exist at both ends for dial-up capability to
work properly. For example, if the remote terminal or printer has a UDS
EC224 A/D modem, the modem at the IPE Module or Application Module
site must also be a UDS EC224 A/D modem.
All of these modems (at the Application Module site) are connected to a
VME multi-port cable. Attach one VME multi-port receptacle, or (at the
IPE Module site) the appropriate port on the NT1R03AA or NT1R03BA
cable, to a null-modem adapter, then connect the adapter to the DB25 socket
on the modem. At the device end, connect the terminal or printer to the
modem using a straight DB25 cable.
Figure 83
Universal Data Systems (UDS) 2440 A/D modemÑfront and rear view
YES
NO
TALK/DATA
MR/RI TR HS MC RD TD
2440
WARNING Ð FOR CONTINUED
ON
PROTECTION AGAINST FIRE
HAZARD, REPLACE WITH
SAME TYPE & RATING OF FUSE
POWER
TELSET TELCO
OFF
DTE
115 VAC
1/4 AMP 60 HZ
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11: Peripheral device cabling interface 283
Configuring the UDS 2440 modem for remote diagnostics
There are two ways to configure the UDS 2440 modem for remote
diagnostics: one procedure uses the modemÕs front panel buttons, while the
alternative procedure allows for configuration via a workstation. Both
procedures are outlined below.
The following procedure explains how to configure the UDS 2440 modem
via the front panel buttons on the modem.
1
2
Connect the modem to a power source next to the system.
Position the power switch on the rear panel of the modem to ON.
The LCD on the front panel will display the following: ####-## (for
example, 3050-5C, appears for two seconds).
3
Answer the prompts by pressing either the YES or the NO button on
the front of the modem panel. Each response will appear in the LCD
window. Table 103 lists the prompts and responses.
Note: If you press the wrong button, press the TALK/DATA button
followed by the NO button. This returns you to step 2.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
284 Chapter 11: Peripheral device cabling interface
Table 103
UDS 2440 modem configuration (front panel buttons)
Prompt
Response
NO
OFFLINE
DIAL?
NO
TEST
NO
AUTO ANS?
NO
DATA OPTS?
OPTIONS?
NO
YES
YES
RESET?
LOADING (appears for one second)
RESET?
NO
FACTORY?
YES
YES
FACTORY 0?
LOADING (appears for one second)
FACTORY?
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
SPKR OPTS?
TELE OPTS?
PIN OPTS?
MSG OPTS?
SECURITY?
DISC OPTS?
SREGS?
OPTIONS?
PROTOCOL?
If SAVE? appears
SAVING (appears for two seconds)
Ñ continued Ñ
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11: Peripheral device cabling interface 285
Table 103
UDS 2440 modem configuration (front panel buttons) (continued)
Prompt
Response
NO
OFFLINE?
DIAL?
NO
TEST?
NO
AUTO ANS?
AUTO ANS E?
RINGS?
YES
YES
YES
YES
NO
RING = 001?
AUTO ANS?
DATA OPTS?
OPTIONS?
RESET?
NO
YES
NO
FACTORY?
SPKR OPTS?
TELE OPTS
PIN OPTS?
DTR OPTS?
DTR OPTS 0?
dtr opt 1
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
NO
NO
dtr opt 2
NO
dtr opt 3
YES
NO
DTR OPTS?
DSR OPTS?
DSR FORCED?
DSR normal
YES
NO
YES
Ñ continued Ñ
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
286 Chapter 11: Peripheral device cabling interface
Table 103
UDS 2440 modem configuration (front panel buttons) (continued)
Prompt
Response
NO
DSR OPTS?
CD OPTS?
YES
NO
CD FORCED?
lo at disc
NO
cd normal
YES
NO
CD OPTS?
CTS OPTS?
P 21 OPTS?
P 23 OPTS?
P 25 OPTS?
PIN OPTS?
MSG OPTS?
SECURITY?
DISC OPTS?
SREGS?
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
OPTIONS?
NO
PROTOCOL?
SAVE?
NO
YES
SAVING (appears for two seconds)
OFFLINE
Ñ end Ñ
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11: Peripheral device cabling interface 287
4
Connect the modem directly to the IPE Module or Application
Module, as described in Chapter 9, ÒMeridian Link/CCR interface
cabling.Ó
If the modem installation is successful, the LED labelled ÒTRÓ on the
front panel of the modem lights up.
The following procedure explains how to configure the UDS 2440 modem
using a workstation.
1
2
Connect the modem to a workstation and apply power to both.
Enter each entry shown under the ÒInputÓ column in Table 104 and
press [Enter]. The system response to each entry should be ÒOK.Ó
Table 104
UDS 2440 modem configuration (workstation)
Input
atz
System response
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
at&f
ats0=1
at&d3
at&s1
at&c1
at&w
3
4
5
Power down the workstation and the modem.
Disconnect the modem from the workstation.
Connect the modem to the IPE Module using an NT1R03HF cable,
or to an Application Module using an NT7D99AA cable.
If the modem installation is successful, the LED labelled ÒTRÓ on the
front panel of the modem lights up.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
288 Chapter 11: Peripheral device cabling interface
Figure 84
Universal Data Systems (UDS) EC224A/D modemÑswitch locations
and settings
Switch 1
ON
OFF
Switch 1
Switch 2
ON
OFF
Switch 2
Switch 3
Switch 3
ON
Left
Front
OFF
Figure 85
Ven-Tel 2400 modemÑopening the modem
Top
Modem Computer Board
Bottom
¥
¥
Grooves
Figure 86
Ven-Tel 2400 modem SW2 switch settings
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
OFF
ON
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11: Peripheral device cabling interface 289
Figure 87
Ven-Tel 2400 modemÑswitch locations
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
SW1 Power switch
RS232/EIA socket
SW2 switch (red)
¥
Power cable socket
Line out
Line in
The Reset button
connected to the
faceplate plugs into
this connector
¥
White and red
indicator lights
¥
Reset button
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
290 Chapter 11: Peripheral device cabling interface
Figure 88
Ven-Tel 2400 Plus II modemÑopening the modem
Top
Modem Computer Board
Bottom
¥
¥
Grooves
Figure 89
Ven-Tel 2400 Plus II modem switch settings
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
OFF
ON
The indicators on the front panel of the Ven-Tel 2400 and 2400 Plus II
modems are labelled. The meanings of the labels are as follows:
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
HS Ñ High speed
AA Ñ Auto answer mode
CD Ñ Carrier detect
OH Ñ Off hook
RD Ñ Receive data
SD Ñ Send data
TR Ñ Terminal ready
MR/EC Ñ Modem ready/error corrected
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11: Peripheral device cabling interface 291
Figure 90
Ven-Tel 2400 Plus II modemÑswitch locations
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
Power switch
RS-232/EIA socket
¥
SW1 switch (red)
SW2 switch (red)
Power cable socket
¥
Line out
Line in
The Reset button
connected to the
faceplate plugs into
this connector
¥
White and red
indicator lights
¥
Figure 91
Ven-Tel 9600 Plus modemÑopening the modem
Top
Modem Computer Board
Bottom
¥
¥
Grooves
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
292 Chapter 11: Peripheral device cabling interface
Figure 92
Ven-Tel 9600 Plus modemÑswitch locations and settings
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
Power switch
RS-232/EIA socket
SW2 switch (red)
¥
Power cable socket
Line out
Line in
EPROM U14-O
EPROM U12-E
¥
¥
White and red
indicator lights
¥
Figure 93
Dial-up modemÑVen-Tel 9600 Plus modem SW2 switch settings
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
OFF
ON
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
293
Chapter 12: Meridian 1 configuration for
Meridian Link/CCR
You should use this chapter in conjunction with Chapter 5, ÒHardware
installation overview,Ó which links hardware installation procedures in
easily understood tables (Tables 11 and 12).
This chapter shows how to use various software programs to configure the
Meridian 1 to support Meridian Link and CCR. See the X11 Input/
Output Guide (NTP 553-3001-400) for more information on these
programs.
Note: The information in this chapter is based on X11 Release 17 and
later software on Meridian 1. X81 International Phase 7 is supported,
but some prompts may look a little different.
Conventional notation
This chapter contains the following conventional notations:
¥
Default values are shown in parentheses and are defined using the
carriage return, noted as Ò<cr>.Ó
Example:
K
1Ð(7)
<cr>
Maximum number of outstanding frames
LTHR
¥
¥
Input/output (I/O) information is shown in uppercase.
Variables are shown in lowercase, or as a range of variables.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
294 Chapter 12: Meridian 1 configuration for Meridian Link/CCR
Table 105 presents some of these conventions.
Table 105
Standard notation for X11 software administration
Notation
aaa
Explanation
Text string
loop
Network loop number (0Ð159)
l s c u
<cr>
Loop, shelf, card, unit for a terminal number (TN)
Carriage return
xxx
Numeric value, like a directory number (DN) or device identifier
Numeric value, a large number
Numeric value, a range with a default value in parentheses
xxx . . . x
x-(xx)-xxx
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12: Meridian 1 configuration for Meridian Link/CCR 295
Configuration overview
Install or upgrade the Meridian 1 to the appropriate software release (see
Chapter 2, ÒOverview of Meridian LinkÓ or Chapter 3, ÒOverview of
Customer Controlled RoutingÓ). To upgrade an existing system, refer to
Software Conversion Procedures (NTP 553-2001-320).
Summary of Meridian 1 configuration
1
Define the ESDI/MSDL, STA, and SDI ports in the Configuration
Record (LD 17).
Ensure that you refer to the prompts for your release of X11 software
(either Release 17 or later).
2
3
Identify VASID and define the status message groups in LD 15.
Define ACD groups and agents in Automatic Call Distribution
(LD 23) if required for the application.
4
Configure single-line telephones with the Associated Set (AST) and
Unsolicited Status Messages (USM) features in Single-Line
Telephone Administration (LD 10).
5
6
Configure multi-line telephones with the AST and USM features in
Multi-Line Telephone Administration (LD 11).
Configure Control DNs (CDNs) in LD 23 if required for Host
Enhanced Routing.
7
8
Enable the ESDI/MSDL port in Link Diagnostic (LD 48).
Enable the SDI port for console sharing in Input/Output Diagnostic
(LD 37).
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
296 Chapter 12: Meridian 1 configuration for Meridian Link/CCR
Configuring the VSID, HSID, and AML prompts
When you are configuring the Meridian 1, you will encounter the VSID,
HSID, and AML prompts in LD17, LD15 and LD23. If you are adding
Meridian Link or CCR to an IPE Module or an Application Module to
create a co-resident system, you should understand what these prompts
mean to avoid confusion.
A Value-Added Service Identifier (VAS ID) is a number ranging from 0
through 15 that identifies a link as an Application Module Link (AML). A
Meridian 1 system with a single IPE Module or Application Module, used
for Meridian Link or CCR or both, has only one AML and so requires only
one VAS ID. A Meridian 1 system with two modules (two Application
Modules, two IPE Modules, or one of each), with Meridian Link activated
in one module and CCR activated in another, requires two AMLs, and so
requires two different VAS IDs. The system with two modules requires the
Host Service Identifier (HSID) to identify the AML that is connected to the
module that has Meridian Link activated.
The following four examples describe how the prompts are used.
¥
A Meridian 1 with a single IPE Module or Application Module with
either Meridian Link or CCR (but not both) activated:
Ñ VSID prompt (LD17) Enter a value to define the VAS ID to be
associated with the AML.
Ñ AML prompt (LD17) Enter the ESDI or MSDL port number to be
associated with the VAS ID.
Ñ VSID prompt (LD15) Enter the value from the VSID prompt in
LD17.
Ñ VSID prompt (LD23) Enter the value from the VSID prompt in
LD17.
Ñ HSID prompt (LD23) Do not enter a value.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12: Meridian 1 configuration for Meridian Link/CCR 297
¥
A Meridian 1 with two modules (two Application Modules, or two IPE
Modules, or one of each), one module with Meridian Link but not CCR
activated, one module with CCR but not Meridian Link activated:
Ñ VSID prompts (LD17) Use two VSID prompts to enter values to
define two different VAS IDs to be associated with the two AMLs.
Ñ AML prompts (LD17) Use two AML prompts to enter two ESDI
or MSDL port numbers to be associated with the two VAS IDs.
Ñ VSID prompt (LD15) Enter the value from the VSID prompt in
LD17 associated with the AML connected to the module with
Meridian Link activated.
Ñ VSID prompt (LD23) Enter the value from the VSID prompt in
LD17 associated with the AML connected to the module with CCR
activated.
Ñ HSID prompt (LD23) Enter the value from the VSID prompt in
LD17 associated with the AML connected to the module with
Meridian Link activated.
¥
A Meridian 1 with a single IPE Module or Application Module with
both Meridian Link and CCR activated:
Ñ VSID prompt (LD17) Enter a value to define the VAS ID to be
associated with the AML.
Ñ AML prompt (LD17) Enter the ESDI or MSDL port number to be
associated with the VAS ID.
Ñ VSID prompt (LD15) Enter the value from the VSID prompt in
LD17.
Ñ VSID prompt (LD23) Enter the value from the VSID prompt in
LD17.
Ñ HSID prompt (LD23) Do not enter a value.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
298 Chapter 12: Meridian 1 configuration for Meridian Link/CCR
¥
A Meridian 1 with a single IPE Module or Application Module active
and a redundant Meridian Link (another IPE Module or Application
Module on warm standby mode):
Ñ VSID prompt (LD17) Enter a value to define the VAS ID to be
associated with the AML.
Ñ AML prompt (LD17) Enter the first ESDI or MSDL port number
to be associated with the VAS ID.
Ñ AML prompt (LD17) Enter the second ESDI or MSDL port
number to be associated with the VAS ID.
Ñ VSID prompt (LD15) Enter the value from the VSID prompt in
LD17.
Ñ VSID prompt (LD23) Enter the value from the VSID prompt in
LD17.
Ñ HSID prompt (LD23) Do not enter a value.
If you have a system with a single IPE Module or Application Module and
you want to add either Meridian Link or CCR to create a co-resident
system, you do not need to change the values entered at the VSID, HSID, or
AML prompts.
If you have a system with two modules, one of which has Meridian Link
(but not CCR) activated, the other of which has CCR (but not Meridian
Link) activated, and you want to create a co-resident system by removing
one module and activating both applications on the remaining module, you
must make changes to the values entered at the VSID, HSID, and AML
prompts. You should choose a configuration that requires the fewest
changes.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12: Meridian 1 configuration for Meridian Link/CCR 299
Configure ESDI port (X11 Release 17)
The IPE Module or Application Module is connected to the Meridian 1
through a port on a QPC513 ESDI card (vintage G or later) or an NTAK02
SDI/DCH card (Option 11, IPE Module only). The port must have the AML
identified (VSID 0Ð15). Define the ESDI port and its characteristics by
responding to the following prompts in
LD 17.
Options 21Ð81 ESDI configuration
Table 106
LD 17ÑConfigure ESDI port (Options 21Ð81)
Prompt
Response
Comment
REQ
CHG
Create or change information in the
database
TYPE
PWD2
ISDN
PARM
NCR
CFN
<cr>
<cr>
YES
Configuration record data block
Change a parameter
26Ð2047,
5000
Increment the current value by the value
used for CSQI and CSQO. See those
prompts described later in this table.
Note: The Meridian 1 must be reinitialized if
NCR is changed.
CEQU
OVLY
IOTB
<cr>
<cr>
YES
Change I/O terminals or devices
HIST
<cr>
ADAN
ESDI
NEW TTY x
YES
Add ESDI on port x
Port is on an ESDI card
Synchronous mode
ÑcontinuedÑ
SYNC
YES
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
300 Chapter 12: Meridian 1 configuration for Meridian Link/CCR
Table 106
LD 17ÑConfigure ESDI port (Options 21Ð81) (continued)
Prompt Response Comment
DUPX FULL Full duplex mode
BPS
19200
19,200 bps baud rate (19.2 kbps). (The
baud rate for link 0 of the Application Module
must also be set to 19,200 bps.)
CLOK
IADR
RADR
LCTL
T1
INT
3
Internal clock
Internal address for AML LAPB
Remote address for AML LAPB
Modify link control parameters
1
YES
4
Layer 2 retransmission timer in units of 0.5
seconds
T2
T3
0
Layer 2 acknowledge timer in units of 0.5
seconds
10
Layer 2 link set-up timer in units of 0.5
seconds (only for ESDI)
N1
N2
K
128
8
Maximum I frame length in octet
Maximum number of Layer 2 retransmission
Maximum number of outstanding frames
1Ð(7)
Note: This number must match the value
set for Link 0 on the Meridian Link.
LTHR
USER
ADAN
VAS
<cr>
CMS
<cr>
NEW
0Ð15
<cr>
ESDI port is a Command and Status link
Value Added Server Identifier (VAS ID)
VAS (AML) identifier
VSID
DLOP
ÑcontinuedÑ
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12: Meridian 1 configuration for Meridian Link/CCR 301
Table 106
LD 17ÑConfigure ESDI port (Options 21Ð81) (continued)
Prompt
Response
Comment
CMS
x
ESDI port number for this AML. This must
be the same as the port number defined at
the ADAN prompt.
SECU
INTL
YES
4
Security for AML. Must be set to Yes.
Time interval (five-second increments) used
to determine overload conditions
MCNT
400
Message count threshold for number of
messages per time interval (from INTL)
CONF
CMS
VSID
VAS
DIR
Direct link for this AML configuration
ESDI port number for CSL (0Ð15)
<cr>
<cr>
<cr>
CSQI
(20)Ð255
Maximum call registers for AML input
queues
CSQO
(20)Ð255
Maximum call registers for AML output
queues
Set CSQI and CSQO equal to the number of
ACD agents or AST sets, or 50 whichever is
larger, but not more than 25 percent of the
total number of call registers (NCR prompt).
¥
¥
¥
Press [Return] until the REQ prompt
appears
REQ
END
Either change more configuration data or
exit the overlay, saving changes to the
configuration record.
Ñ end Ñ
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
302 Chapter 12: Meridian 1 configuration for Meridian Link/CCR
Enable ESDI port (X81 phase 7 or X11 Release 17)
Commands in LD 48 require a port or link parameter, which is indicated in
the prompts as xx. Substitute the appropriate port or link number when
using the prompts listed below.
Table 107
LD 48ÑLink Diagnostic
Command
Comment
ACMS xx
Enable and start the ESDI link on port xx
The following commands may be used for diagnostic purposes:
CON ESDI xx
Configure link layer for ESDI port xx using HDLC
protocol
DIS ESDI xx
DIS MSGI xx
Disable ESDI on port xx
Turn off link monitoring for incoming messages on
link xx
DIS MSGO xx
Turn off link monitoring for outgoing messages on
link xx
DSC ESDI xx
ENL ESDI xx
ENL MSGI xx
Disconnect the link to ESDI on port xx
Enable ESDI on port xx
Turn on link monitoring for incoming messages on
link xx
ENL MSGO xx
Turn on link monitoring for outgoing messages on
link xx
ENXP MSGO xx
yy
Exclude polling on link xx for outgoing messages
with priority levels yy
ENXP MSGI xx yy
Exclude polling on link xx for incoming messages
with priority levels yy
ENL MSGI/MSGO
xx
Enable message input/output monitoring (xx=link)
ÑcontinuedÑ
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12: Meridian 1 configuration for Meridian Link/CCR 303
Table 107
LD 48ÑLink Diagnostic (continued)
Command
Comment
DIS MSGI/MSGO
xx yy
Disable message input/output monitoring (xx=link,
yy=priority)
FLSH
Disable monitor and trash buffers
STAT MON
ENL PACI/PACO
Get status of message monitoring
Enable packet input/output monitoring (xx=link)
Disable packet input/output monitoring (xx=link)
DIS PACI/PACO
xx
ENXM
MSGI/MSGO xx
<msg> <msg>
Enable message input/output monitoring
excluding those messages specified (xx=link)
DSXM
MSGI/MSGO xx
Disable exclusive message monitoring (xx=link)
ENIM
MSGI/MSGO xx
<msg> <msg>
Enable inclusive message input/output monitoring
of only those messages specified
(xx=link)
DSIM
MSGI/MSGO xx
Disable inclusive message monitoring (xx=link)
DSXP
MSGI/MSGO xx
Disable exclusive priority message monitoring
(xx=link)
ENIP
MSGI/MSGO xx
yy
Enable inclusive message input/output monitoring
of only those messages with specified priorities
(xx=link, yy=priority)
DSIP
MSGI/MSGO xx
Disable inclusive priority message monitoring on
link xx
ENXT
MSGI/MSGO xx
<l> <s> <c> <u>
Enable message input/output monitoring
excluding messages with specified TN on link xx
ÑcontinuedÑ
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
304 Chapter 12: Meridian 1 configuration for Meridian Link/CCR
Table 107
LD 48ÑLink Diagnostic (continued)
Command
Comment
DSXT
MSGI/MSGO xx
Disable exclusive TN message monitoring on link
xx
ENIT
MSGI/MSGO xx
<l> <s> <c> <u>
Enable inclusive message input/output monitoring
of only those messages with specified TN
(xx=link)
DSIT
MSGI/MSGO xx
Disable inclusive TN message monitoring on link
xx
SLFT ESDI xx
STAT CMS xx
STAT ESDI xx
Self-test ESDI on port xx
Get status of Command and Status Link (CSL) xx
Display status for ESDI on port xx
Ñ end Ñ
Note: These are not recommended for systems with heavy traffic.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12: Meridian 1 configuration for Meridian Link/CCR 305
Configure ESDI or MSDL port (X11 Release 18 or later)
The IPE Module or the Application Module is connected to the Meridian 1
through a port on a QPC513 ESDI card (vintage G or later), NTAK02
SDI/DCH card (Option 11, IPE Module only), or NT6D80 MSDL card.
The port must have the Application Module Link (AML) identified
(VSID 0Ð15). Define the port and its characteristics by responding to the
following prompts in LD 17.
Option 11 ESDI configuration
Table 108
LD 17ÑConfigure ESDI port (Option 11)
Prompt
Response
Comment
REQ
CHG
Create or change information in the
database
TYPE
ADAN
CDNO
PORT
DES
CFN
Configuration record data block
Add AML on port x (VASID 0Ð15)
Serial Data Interface Card Number
Port number on SDI/DCH card
NEW AML x
0Ð15
0Ð3
LINK/CCR
AML port designation (such as
ÒMeridian LinkÓ)
BPS
19200
19,200 bps baud rate (19.2 kbps). The
AML (connection from SDI/DCH card
to the IPE Module) rate must match
the baud rate of link 0 on the IPE
Module.
CLOK
IADR
INT
3
Internal clock (this prompt only
appears for ESDI)
Individual address for the data-link
level-HDLC protocol
RADR
1
Remote address for the data-link level
HDLC protocol
ÐcontinuedÐ
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
306 Chapter 12: Meridian 1 configuration for Meridian Link/CCR
Table 108
LD 17ÑConfigure ESDI or MSDL port (Option 11) (continued)
Prompt Response Comment
LCTL YES Modify link control parameters
T1
T2
T3
4
Layer 2 retransmission timer in units of
0.5 seconds
0
Layer 2 acknowledge timer in units of
0.5 seconds
10
Layer 2 link set-up timer in units of 0.5
seconds (only for ESDI)
N1
N2
128
8
Maximum I frame length in octet
Maximum number of Layer 2
retransmission
K
7
Maximum number of outstanding
frames.
Note: The response to this prompt
should be set to correspond to the
Meridian Link Module's display link 0 K
value parameter.
LTHR
ENL
<cr>
<cr>
<cr>
<cr>
<cr>
ADAN
PWD
PARM
Go to next prompt
Interface and transmission mode
(MSDL port only)
CEQU
OVLY
VAS
<cr>
<cr>
NEW
0Ð15
<cr>
Add a value added server
VSID
DLOP
VAS (host computer) identifier
ÐcontinuedÐ
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12: Meridian 1 configuration for Meridian Link/CCR 307
Table 108
LD 17ÑConfigure ESDI or MSDL port (Option 11) (continued)
Prompt
Response
Comment
AML
0Ð15
AML associated with this VAS ID. This
number should match the AML port
entered at the ADAN.
SECU
INTL
YES
<cr>
<cr>
DIR
Security for AML. Must be set to Yes.
MCNT
CONF
AML
Direct link for this AML configuration
<cr>
If another AML port is not required,
press [Return].
Enter another AML port if you want
more than one AML associated with this
VASID; usually not more than one AML
is associated with one VASID.
VSID
<cr>
<cr>
<cr>
<cr>
VAS (host computer) identifier
Add a value added server
VAS
ATRN
ALARM
¥
¥
¥
Press [Return] until the REQ prompt
appears
REQ
CHG, END
Either change more data or exit the
overlay, saving changes to the
configuration record
Ñ end Ñ
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
308 Chapter 12: Meridian 1 configuration for Meridian Link/CCR
Option 21Ð81 ESDI or MSDL configuration
Table 109
LD 17ÑConfigure ESDI or MSDL port (Options 21Ð81)
Prompt
Response
Comment
REQ
CHG
Create or change information in the
database
TYPE
ADAN
CTYP
DNUM
CFN
Configuration record data block
Add AML on port x (VASID 0Ð15)
Card type is MSDL or ESDI
NEW AML x
MSDL, ESDI
0Ð15
Device number; physical port for
AML on ESDI, physical card address
for MSDL
PORT
DES
0Ð3
Port number on MSDL card (this
prompt only appears for MSDL)
aaa....a
19200
AML port designation (such as
ÒMeridian LinkÓ)
BPS
19,200 bps baud rate (19.2 kbps).
The AML (connection from ESDI to
the IPE Module or the Application
Module) rate must match the baud
rate of link 0 on the IPE Module or
the Application Module.
PARM
CLOK
IADR
R232 DCE
Interface and transmission mode
(MSDL port only)
INT
3
Internal clock (this prompt only
appears for ESDI)
Individual address for the data-link
level HDLC protocol
ÐcontinuedÐ
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12: Meridian 1 configuration for Meridian Link/CCR 309
Table 109
LD 17ÑConfigure ESDI or MSDL port (Options 21Ð81) (continued)
Prompt
Response
Comment
RADR
1
Remote address for the data-link
level HDLC protocol
LCTL
T1
YES
4
Modify link control parameters
Layer 2 retransmission timer in units
of 0.5 seconds
T2
T3
0
Layer 2 acknowledge timer in units
of 0.5 seconds
10
Layer 2 link set-up timer in units of
0.5 seconds (only for ESDI)
N1
N2
128
8
Maximum I frame length in octet
Maximum number of Layer 2
retransmission
K
7
Maximum number of outstanding
frames.
Note: The response to this prompt
should be set to correspond to the
Meridian Link Module's display link 0
K value parameter.
LTHR
NO
Modify link performance thresholds
(ESDI only)
RXMT*
CRC*
1Ð(5)Ð20
1Ð(10)Ð20
1Ð(5)Ð255
Percentage of retransmissions
before out-of-service threshold
Percentage of CRC errors before
out-of-service threshold
ORUR*
Number of overrun/underruns before
out-of-service thresholds
*
Unless there are exceptional reasons to use other values, use the
default values for the four out-of-service parameters: RXMT 5,
CRC 10, ORUR 5, and ABOR 5.
ÐcontinuedÐ
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
310 Chapter 12: Meridian 1 configuration for Meridian Link/CCR
Table 109
LD 17ÑConfigure ESDI or MSDL port (Options 21Ð81) (continued)
Prompt
Response
Comment
ABOR*
1Ð(5)Ð255
Number of aborts before an out-of-
service threshold
ADAN
VAS
<cr>
NEW
0Ð15
0Ð15
Go to next prompt or exit overlay
Add a value added server
VSID
AML
VAS (host computer) identifier
AML associated with this VAS ID.
This number should match the AML
port entered at the first ADAN
prompt.
SECU
INTL
YES
4
Security for AML. Must be set to
Yes.
Time interval, in five-second
increments
MCNT
400
Message count threshold for number
of messages per time interval (from
INTL)
CONF
AML
DIR
Direct link for this AML configuration
0Ð15
Enter another AML port if user wants
more than one AML associated with
this VASID; usually not more than
one AML is associated with one
VASID
VSID
CSQI
<cr>
(20)Ð255
Maximum call registers for AML
input queues
*
Unless there are exceptional reasons to use other values, use the
default values for the four out-of-service parameters: RXMT 5,
CRC 10, ORUR 5, and ABOR 5.
ÐcontinuedÐ
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12: Meridian 1 configuration for Meridian Link/CCR 311
Table 109
LD 17ÑConfigure ESDI or MSDL port (Options 21Ð81) (continued)
Prompt
Response
Comment
CSQO
(20)Ð255
Maximum call registers for AML
output queues
Set CSQI and CSQO equal to the
number of ACD agents or AST sets
to be controlled by the host
computer, or 50, whichever is larger,
but not more than 25 percent of the
total number of call registers (NCR
prompt)
¥
¥
¥
Press [Return] until the REQ prompt
appears
REQ
CHG, END
Either change the configuration
record or exit the overlay, saving
changes to the configuration record
Ñ end Ñ
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
312 Chapter 12: Meridian 1 configuration for Meridian Link/CCR
Enable ESDI or MSDL port (X11 Release 18 or later)
Commands in LD 48 require a port or link parameter, which is indicated in
the prompts as xx. Substitute the appropriate port or link number when
using the prompts listed below.
Table 110
LD 48ÑLink Diagnostic
Command
Comment
ENL AML xx ACMS Enable the AML on port xx (ESDI only)
ENL AML xx Enable the AML on port xx (MSDL only)
The following commands may be used for diagnostic purposes:
STAT AML xx
Show the status of the AML link.
ENL AML xx aaa
Enable link xx or option aaa. Options include
(none) - no additional option
LYR2 - enable link layer 2
(MSDL must be enabled first)
FDL
- forced download of AML software
(MSDL must be enabled and all AML
I/O ports disabled first)
AUTO - enable auto recovery of AML
(MSDL only)
LYR7 - enable application layer (7)
(AML must be established first)
MDL - enable MDL error reporting (MSDL only)
(AML must be enabled first)
MON - enable debug monitoring (MSDL only)
(AML must be enabled first)
ACMS - enable and start the AML on port xx
(ESDI only)
ENL MSGI/MSGO
xx
Enable message input/output monitoring (xx=link)
DIS MSGI/MSGO
xx yy
Disable message input/output monitoring (xx=link,
yy=priority)
Ñ continued Ñ
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12: Meridian 1 configuration for Meridian Link/CCR 313
Table 110
LD 48ÑLink Diagnostic (continued)
Command
FLSH
Comment
Disable monitor and trash buffers
Get status of message monitoring
Enable packet input/output monitoring (xx=link)
STAT MON
ENL PACI/PACO
xx
DIS PACI/PACO xx Disable packet input/output monitoring (xx=link)
ENXM
MSGI/MSGO xx
<msg> <msg>
Enable message input/output monitoring
excluding those messages specified (xx=link)
DSXM
MSGI/MSGO xx
Disable exclusive message monitoring (xx=link)
ENIM
MSGI/MSGO xx
<msg> <msg>
Enable inclusive message input/output monitoring
of only those messages specified (xx=link)
DSIM
MSGI/MSGO xx
Disable inclusive message monitoring (xx=link)
DSXP
MSGI/MSGO xx
Disable exclusive priority message monitoring
(xx=link)
ENIP
MSGI/MSGO xx
yy
Enable inclusive message input/output monitoring
of only those messages with specified priorities yy
on link xx
DSIP
MSGI/MSGO xx
Disable inclusive priority message monitoring on
link xx
ENXT
MSGI/MSGO xx
<l> <s> <c> <u>
Enable message input/output monitoring
excluding messages with specified TN on
link xx
DSXT
MSGI/MSGO xx
Disable exclusive TN message monitoring on link
xx
Ñ continued Ñ
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
314 Chapter 12: Meridian 1 configuration for Meridian Link/CCR
Table 110
LD 48ÑLink Diagnostic (continued)
Command
Comment
ENIT
MSGI/MSGO xx
<l> <s> <c> <u>
Enable inclusive message input/output monitoring
of only those messages with specified TN
(xx=link)
DSIT
MSGI/MSGO xx
Disable inclusive TN message monitoring on link
xx
DIS AML xx aaa
EST AML xx
RLS AML xx
STAT AML
Disable link xx or option xxx. See options above.
Connect link xx
Disconnect link xx
Query status of all ESDI/MSDL links
Query status of link xx
STAT AML xx
SLFT AML xx
SWCH AML i j
MAP AML xx
Perform self-test on link xx
Switch the active link i over to standby link j
Display mapping of AML to card and port numbers
UPLD AML xx
TBL1
Display maintenance error log table for link xx
(link must be enabled)
UPLD AML xx
TBL2
Display download parameters for link xx (link must
be enabled)
UPLD AML xx
TBL3
Display protocol error table for link xx (link must
be enabled)
UPLD AML xx
TBL4
Display traffic log table for link xx (link must be
enabled)
Ñ end Ñ
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12: Meridian 1 configuration for Meridian Link/CCR 315
Configure SDI port for conshare (X11 Release 17)
The SDI port is used for the optional console sharing feature, which allows
the IPE Module or the Application Module console to access Meridian 1
administration and maintenance programs. Port settings on the card should
reflect TTY mode at 2400 baud. Define the SDI port and its characteristics
by responding to the following prompts in LD 17.
Table 111
LD 17ÑConfigure SDI port (X11 Release 17)
Prompt
REQ
Response
CHG
CFN
Comment
Create or change information in the database
Configuration record data block
TYPE
PWD2
ISDN
<cr>
<cr>
PARM
CEQU
OVLY
IOTB
<cr>
<cr>
<cr>
Yes
Change I/O terminals or devices
HIST
<cr>
ADAN
ESDI
NEW TTY x Add SDI on port x (0Ð15) for console sharing
<cr>
USER
MTC SCH
Use this port for service change and
maintenance
VAS
<cr>
<cr>
<cr>
<cr>
<cr>
<cr>
VSID
DLOP
CMS
SECU
ATRN
ÑcontinuedÑ
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
316 Chapter 12: Meridian 1 configuration for Meridian Link/CCR
Table 111
LD 17ÑConfigure SDI port (X11 Release 17) (continued)
Prompt
MSCL
Response
<cr>
Comment
¥
¥
¥
Press [Return] until the REQ prompt appears
REQ
CHG, END
Either change more configuration data or exit
the overlay, saving changes to the
configuration record
Ñ end Ñ
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12: Meridian 1 configuration for Meridian Link/CCR 317
Configure SDI port for conshare (X11 Release 18 or later)
The SDI port is used for the optional console sharing feature, which allows
the IPE Module or the Application Module console to access Meridian 1
administration and maintenance programs. Port settings on the card should
reflect TTY mode at 2400 baud. Define the SDI port and its characteristics
by responding to the following prompts in LD 17.
Table 112
LD 17ÑConfigure SDI port (X11 Release 18 or later)
Prompt
REQ
Response
CHG
Comment
Create or change information in the database
Configuration record data block
TYPE
ADAN
CTYP
CFN
NEW TTY x Add SDI on port x (0Ð15) for console sharing
SDI
Single port SDI card
Dual port SDI card
Four port SDI card
SDI Paddle Board
SDI2
SDI4
XSDI
DNUM
USER
0Ð15
Device number (same as ADAN number)
aaa aaa
Enter one or more of the following terminal
functions:
CDR
BUG
CSC
CDR data link
BUG error messages on this port
Automatic Set Relocation and Attendant
Administration messages
CTY
CDR TTY port
MTC
Allow maintenance overlays
No overlay allowed
NOO
SCH
Allow service change overlays
Traffic reports
TRF
XSM
YES, (NO)
<cr>
SDI port for the System Monitor
Go to next prompt
ADAN
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
318 Chapter 12: Meridian 1 configuration for Meridian Link/CCR
Enable SDI port
Some commands in LD 37 require a port number, indicated in the prompts
as x. Substitute the appropriate port number in the prompts listed below.
Table 113
LD 37ÑInput/output diagnostic
Command
DIS TTY x
END
Comment
Disable TTY x
Clear all test activity
Enable TTY x
ENL TTY x
STAT
Provide status of all input/output devices for this
system
STAT TTY
STAT TTY x
TTY x
Provide status for all TTY devices in this system
Provide status for TTY on port x
Test TTY x
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12: Meridian 1 configuration for Meridian Link/CCR 319
Configuring DNIS to use auto-terminating trunks
Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS) is an optional feature that
provides the last digits of the dialed number. DNIS is defined by responding
to specific prompts in LD 15, LD 16, and LD 14. This section describes
how you can configure DNIS to use auto-terminating trunks. You can
alternatively configure DNIS to use Incoming Digit Conversion (IDC); refer
to ÒConfiguring DNIS to use Incoming Digit ConversionÓ later in this
chapter.
Note: Meridian Link 5C and CCR Release 3C support up to 31 DNIS
digits. X11 Release 24 is required for this feature. Prior to X11 Release
24, only seven digits were supported.
LD 15ÑCustomer data block
The DNIS option must be enabled in LD 15.
Table 114
LD 15ÑEnable DNIS
Prompt
REQ
Response
CHG
Comment
Create or change data in the database
Change Application Module Link options
Customer number
TYPE
CUST
OPT
AML_DATA
0Ð99
DNI
DNIS for this customer
¥
¥
¥
Press [Return] until the REQ prompt
appears
REQ
CHG, END
Either change more customer data or exit
the overlay
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
320 Chapter 12: Meridian 1 configuration for Meridian Link/CCR
LD 16ÑRoute data block
LD 16 defines the route (Table 115). The routes used for DNIS must auto-
terminate. All incoming calls on a DNIS route, regardless of the number
dialed, will terminate on a pre-specified DN. This DN is defined for each
trunk in LD 14 (Table 116).
Table 115
LD 16ÑTrunk route administration
Prompt
REQ
Response
NEW, CHG
RDB
Comment
Create or change data in the database
Route data block
Customer number
Route number
TYPE
CUST
ROUT
TKTP
0Ð99
0Ð511
XXX
Trunk type.
Note: The only auto-terminating trunk types
are DID and TIE.
ESN
<cr>
<cr>
<cr>
<cr>
XXX
XXX
<cr>
<cr>
YES
CNYT
SAT
RCLS
DTRK
DGTP
ISDN
PTYP
AUTO
Digital Trunk route
Digital Trunk type
Auto-terminating trunks
Ñcontinued Ñ
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12: Meridian 1 configuration for Meridian Link/CCR 321
Table 115
LD 16ÑTrunk route administration (continued)
Prompt
Response
Comment
DNIS
YES
ACD-Dialed Number Identification Service
(DNIS) route. The route must be configured
as one that provides DNIS digits. Only the
following types of routes can be configured
for DNIS: TIE/DID/WATS auto-terminating
or IDC routes, FEX IDC routes, and FGDT
routes.
NDGT
1-(4)-31
Number of DNIS digits expected.
X11 Release 20 through 22: 1-(4)-7
X11 Release 23: 7, to program the feature
of a seven-digit DNIS
X11 Release 24: up to 31
ICOG
xxx
Incoming and Outgoing trunk
IAO = In and out
ICT = Incoming trunk
OGT = Outgoing trunk
ACOD
xxxx
END
Access code for the trunk route
¥
¥
¥
Press [Return] until the REQ prompt
appears
REQ
Exit the overlay, saving changes
Ñ end Ñ
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
322 Chapter 12: Meridian 1 configuration for Meridian Link/CCR
LD 14ÑTrunk data block
The pre-specified DN (auto-terminate DN) where all incoming calls on a
DNIS route auto-terminate is defined in this program.
Note: The ATDN must be defined prior to configuration.
Table 116
LD 14ÑConfigure auto-terminating DN
Prompt
REQ
Response
NEW, CHG
aaa
Comment
Create or change data in the database
Approved trunk types for this action
Terminal number for the trunk
Extended trunk
TYPE
TN
l s c u
XTRK
EXUT, XCOT,
XDID, XEM, XUT,
XFEM
CUST
xx
Customer number associated with this
trunk, as defined in LD 15.
NCOS
RTMB
<cr>
0Ð511
0Ð254
Route and member number
ATDN
xxxx
Auto-terminating DN. Must be ACD DN
or CDN.
Note: The only auto-terminating trunk
types are DID and TIE.
SIGL
DX2, DX4, EAM,
EM4, GRD, LDR,
LOP, OAD
Trunk signaling
STRO
STRI
DDL, IMM, OWK,
WNK
Start Arrangement Outgoing
Start Arrangement Incoming
DDL, IMM, OWK,
WNK
Ñ continued Ñ
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12: Meridian 1 configuration for Meridian Link/CCR 323
Table 116
LD 14ÑConfigure auto-terminating DN
Prompt
Response
Comment
SUPN
(NO), YES
Answer and disconnect supervision
required
TKID
Trunk identifier
¥
¥
¥
Press [Return] until the REQ prompt
appears
REQ
END
Exit the overlay, saving changes
Ñ end Ñ
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
324 Chapter 12: Meridian 1 configuration for Meridian Link/CCR
Configuring DNIS to use Incoming Digit Conversion
The Incoming Digit Conversion (IDC) feature can optionally be used to
provide routing by DNIS number as an alternative to using auto-terminating
trunks (see ÒConfiguring DNIS to use auto-terminating trunksÓ earlier in
this chapter). The DNIS number can be translated into an ACD DN number
and the DNIS number used as information.
Note: X11 Release 23 allows configuration of a seven-digit DNIS.
Although X11 Release 24 supports up to a 31-digit DNIS, only a
maximum of 16 digits are allowed when used with the IDC feature.
Table 117
LD 15ÑACD routing by DNIS number
Prompt
REQ
Response
NEW, CHG
CDB
Comment
Create or change data in the database
TYPE
OPT
DNI
¥
¥
¥
Press [Return] until the NFCR prompt
appears
NFCR
MAXT*
IDCA
YES
New flexible code restriction
Maximum number of NFCR trees
Incoming Digit Conversion
1Ð255
YES
DCMX*
1Ð255
Maximum number of conversion tables
prompted only if answer YES to IDCA
prompt. No default.
¥
¥
¥
Press [Return] until the REQ prompt
appears
REQ
CHG, END
Either change more customer data or exit
the overlay
* The total combined value of MAXT and DCMX cannot be greater than
255 (MAXT + DCMX £ 255). That is, if MAXT = 5, DCMX cannot be
greater than 250.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12: Meridian 1 configuration for Meridian Link/CCR 325
In order for DNIS to be used on Incoming Digit Conversion trunks, the
trunk route must be configured to allow DNIS and IDC (Incoming Digit
Conversion).
Table 118
LD 16ÑTrunk route administration
Prompt
REQ
Response
NEW, CHG
RDB
Comment
Add or change data
Route data block
TYPE
¥
¥
¥
Press [Return] until the DNIS prompt
appears
DNIS
YES
Allow Directory Number Identification
System (DNIS) services
NDGT
1-(4)-31
Number of DNIS digits expected.
X11 Release 20 through 22: 1-(4)-7
X11 Release 23: 7, to program the feature
of a seven-digit DNIS
X11 Release 24: up to 31
¥
¥
¥
Press [Return] until the IDC prompt appears
IDC
YES
END
Allow Incoming Digit Conversion (IDC)
¥
¥
¥
Press [Return] until the REQ prompt
appears
REQ
Exit the overlay, saving changes to the route
data block
The translation tables define which DNIS numbers are routed to which
ACD DNs. Any range of numbers defined (indicated by Ò*Ó) must be
contiguous. The beginning DNIS number and the last DNIS number in a
range must have the same number of digits.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
326 Chapter 12: Meridian 1 configuration for Meridian Link/CCR
X11 Release 23 allows 7 full digits of DNIS information to be sent across
the link. X22 Release 24 supports up to a 31-digit DNIS.
Both DNIS and ACD DN ranges can be expressed explicitly or implicitly.
For example:
¥
¥
¥
2000Ð2010 defines all DNIS numbers 2000, 2001, 2002, ... 2010 (see
response to IDGT prompt in Table 119)
55 defines all DNIS numbers 5500 through 5599 (see response to IDGT
prompt in Table 121)
77 defines all ACD DNs 7700 through 7799 (see response to 55 prompt
in Table 121)
Tables 114 through 116 illustrate how to assign a single DNIS number to a
single ACD DN, and how to assign a block of DNIS numbers to either a
single ACD DN or a block of ACD DNs.
Table 119
LD 49ÑDefining IDC translation tables
Prompt
REQ
Response
NEW, CHG
IDC
Comment
Create or change data in the database
Incoming Digit Conversion
Translation table number
TYPE
DCNO
IDGT
0Ð254
3000
Incoming digits (the DNIS number). The
DNIS number can be from 0 to 9999.
3000
8555
The DNIS number entered in the IDGT
prompt is reprompted and the response is
the internal ACD DN where this DNIS
number is routed
IDGT
2000 2010
Defines a contiguous range of DNIS
numbers. Both DNIS numbers must contain
the same number of digits.
ÑcontinuedÑ
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12: Meridian 1 configuration for Meridian Link/CCR 327
Table 119
LD 49ÑDefining IDC translation tables (continued)
Prompt
Response
Comment
2000
8900
When the starting DNIS number (for
example, 2000) is prompted, enter the ACD
DN (for example, 8900) where it is to be
routed
2001
2003
2004
8900
8989
X
When the next DNIS number is prompted,
enter the ACD DN where it is to be routed
When the next DNIS number is prompted,
enter the ACD DN where it is to be routed
To remove a DNIS number from the
translation table, type x.
¥
¥
¥
Continue to assign DNIS numbers to ACD
DNs until all have been assigned or deleted
2010
IDGT
REQ
8907
<cr>
END
Last DNIS number of the range
End of modifying for this translation table
Either create a new translation table or exit
the overlay, saving the new translation table
Ñ end Ñ
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
328 Chapter 12: Meridian 1 configuration for Meridian Link/CCR
If, in a block of DNIS numbers, all numbers start with the same two or three
digits, and if all numbers are to be translated to the same ACD DN, the
program does not need translation entries for all numbers in the block. For
example, if DNIS numbers 4400 through 4499 all go to ACD DN 8900, the
following can be used.
Table 120
LD 49ÑDefining a block of DNIS numbers
Prompt
REQ
Response
NEW
Comment
Create data in the database
Incoming Digit Conversion
TYPE
IDC
¥
¥
¥
Press [Return] until the DCNO prompt
appears
DCNO
IDGT
44
0Ð254
44
Translation table number
Incoming digits (the DNIS number)
8900
All DNIS numbers starting with 44 will go to
ACD DN 8900
IDGT
REQ
<cr>
End of modifying for this translation table
NEW, END
Either create a new translation table or exit
the overlay, saving the new translation table
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12: Meridian 1 configuration for Meridian Link/CCR 329
If the last digits of the DNIS number and the ACD DN are identical, the
program allows a simpler definition.
Table 121
LD 49ÑPartial digit conversion
Prompt
REQ
Response
NEW
Comment
Create data in the database
Incoming Digit Conversion
TYPE
IDC
¥
¥
¥
Press [Return] until the DCNO prompt
appears
DCNO
IDGT
49
0Ð254
49
Translation table number
Incoming digits (the DNIS number)
86
DNIS number 49XX will go to ACD DN
86XX (that is, 4925 will go to 8625)
IDGT
55
55
77
DNIS number 55XX will go to ACD DN
77XX
IDGT
3
3
2
DNIS number 3XX will go to ACD DN 2XX
IDGT
6
6
88
DNIS number 6XX will go to ACD DN 88XX
End of modifying for this translation table
IDGT
REQ
<cr>
NEW, END
Either create a new translation table or exit
the overlay, saving the new translation table
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
330 Chapter 12: Meridian 1 configuration for Meridian Link/CCR
Configure devices for status change host notification
An optional feature, Unsolicited Status Events are provided in status change
messages, allowing 12 types of unsolicited status events to be sent to a host
application. The types of status change events are as follows:
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
Ringing indicates that an incoming call is ringing on a DN. The status
change message contains the DNs of both the calling (where available)
and called parties.
Answered indicates that a party has established a connection to another
party. The status change message contains the DNs of both parties
(where available).
Off-hook indicates that a telephone is busy while it places a call or
answers an incoming call. The status change message contains the DN
of the telephone that is unavailable, and, if applicable, the far end DN.
On-hook indicates that a telephone is available. The status change
message contains the DN of the telephone that is available and, if
applicable, the far end DN.
Disconnected indicates that a telephone set has disconnected from a
call. The StatusChange disconnect message is enhanced for specific
scenarios. The Call Type IE is added to this message to indicate when a
set is disconnecting due to a complete transfer. The Call Type IE will
have a new value, H.A. - transfer complete, in the StatusChange
disconnect message. This value is passed to the application.
Note: The Disconnected event is available only with X11 Release 17
and later software. X11 International Phase 7 software offers only four
status change events.
¥
Unringing indicates when a set stops ringing without having answered
a call. Situations that would trigger a Status Change message with the
unringing status include a caller that abandons after listening to the
ringing tone; a call forwarded to another DN after having rung a
specified number of times (Call Forward No Answer); Call Pickup (call
is picked up by another party); or if an attendant goes off night service
while the night service DN is in a ringing state.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12: Meridian 1 configuration for Meridian Link/CCR 331
Note: The Unringing event is available only with X11 Release 19 and
later software. X11 International Phase 7 software offers only four
status change events.
¥
¥
¥
¥
Transfer completed to notifies the application when a DN has
completed a transfer to another DN. This message is sent on behalf of
the destination DN of the transfer, the party which had just received the
transferred call. This message is supported for both analog and digital
sets.
Conference completed to notifies the application when a DN has
completed a conference to another DN. This message is sent on behalf
of the destination DN of the conference, the party which is being
conferenced into the call. This message is supported for both analog
and digital sets.
Conference to simple notifies the application when a conference call
reverts from a 3-party to a 2-party call. This message is sent on behalf
of DNs that are monitored by the application. This message includes
the DN and TN information of the two parties left in the conference
call.
Hold notifies the application of when a DN has just put the active call
on hold. The StatusChange hold notification message is sent to
applications on behalf of digital and 500/2500 sets.
The StatusChange hold message is a notification of a set invoking hold.
The ML Hold message to invoke the hold feature for digital and
500/2500 sets is developed in X11 Release 22.
The StatusChange hold message is sent when a call is put on hold. The
automatic hold feature, an X81 feature, puts an active call on hold when
another DN key is pressed on the set where an active call already exists.
A StatusChange hold message is sent in this scenario.
¥
¥
Transfer initiation notifies the application when a transfer is initiated
by or on behalf of a set. This feature is supported for digital sets only. If
a 500/2500 set performs a switch-hook flash to initiate a transfer, the
application receives a StatusChange hold message.
Conference Initiation notifies the application when a conference is
initiated by or on behalf of a set. Conference initiation is supported for
digital sets only. If a 500/2500 set performs a switch-hook flash to
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
332 Chapter 12: Meridian 1 configuration for Meridian Link/CCR
initiate a conference, the application receives a StatusChange hold
message.
¥
Retrieve also known as Restore, notifies the application when the set
that had invoked Hold retrieves the original call and becomes active
again.
The status change messages sent from Meridian 1 are defined in groups.
Group 0 is predefined to contain no messages, and group 1 is predefined to
contain all messages; the remaining groups are defined by the user. Status
events are assigned to status message groups on a per customer basis in
LD 15.
The status change messages on non-ACD DNs are reported to the server
defined at the VSID prompt in LD 15. For ACD DNs, these messages are
reported to the server defined at the VSID prompt in LD 23. However, for
most applications, the server defined in LD 15 is the same as the server
defined in LD 23.
Any individual telephone that is designated as an associated set (AST) can
be assigned to one of the status message groups in LD 10 (single-line
telephones) or LD 11 (multi-line telephones) by responding to the IAPG
prompt. Each telephone belongs to only one group. Only the status change
events defined in the group assigned to a telephone are reported. The status
change events can be reported for all DNs defined as associated sets.
An AST can be controlled by a host application over the Meridian Link. A
telephone must be configured as AST in LD 10 or LD 11 before a host
application can issue call processing requests (such as transfer, conference,
answer) or receive event reports on behalf of the telephone (such as status
change). For multi-line telephones, up to two DNs can be configured as
AST. For multiple appearance DNs (MADNs), the first DN to be configured
is identified as the associated set.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12: Meridian 1 configuration for Meridian Link/CCR 333
Define status message groups
Use LD 15 to define the status message groups.
Table 122
LD 15ÑDefine status message groups
Prompt
REQ
Response
Comment
CHG
Create or change data in the database
Customer data block.
TYPE
AML_DATA or
CDB
X11 Release 22: Enter AML_DATA.
X11 Release 21 and prior: Enter CDB.
Customer number
CUST
0Ð99
0Ð15
¥
¥
Press [Return] until the VSID prompt
appears
VSID
Value Added Server Identifier ID. This
must be identical to the VSID defined in
LD17.
Examples are
GRP2
GRP3
GRP4
GRP5
GRP6
GRP7
GRP8
GRP9
GRP10
GRP11
GRP12
GRP13
GRP14
GRP15
1 2 3 6
1 3 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
2 4 5 6
Assign status events 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8,
9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14 to groups 2 to 15,
where
1 = on-hook, 2 = off-hook,
3 = ringing, 4 = active,
5 = set disconnected, 6 = unringing
7 = retrieve (X11 Release 21),
8 = ID change, 9 = transfer completed to,
10 = conference completed to
11 = conference to simple
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
12 = hold, 13 = transfer initiation,
14 = conference initiation
Note: Status events 8 through 14 are
available only for X11 Release 22 and
later, with Meridian Link 5 and later.
ÑcontinuedÑ
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
334 Chapter 12: Meridian 1 configuration for Meridian Link/CCR
Table 122
LD 15ÑDefine status message groups (continued)
Prompt
Response
Comment
Default values are in group 0 and
group 1:
Group 0 = sends no messages
Group 1 = sends all messages
Groups 0 and 1 may be used in LD 10
and LD 11 in response to the IAPG
prompt.
Precede with ÒXÓ to remove a status
event from a group.
Note: Groups 10 through 15 are
available only in X11 Release 17 or later
software.
¥
¥
¥
Press [Return] until the REQ prompt
appears
REQ
END
Exit the overlay, saving changes
Ñ end Ñ
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12: Meridian 1 configuration for Meridian Link/CCR 335
Assign telephones to status message groups (Meridian Link)
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) or non-ACD telephones can be assigned
to status message groups if they are configured as AST (associated set).
Define ACD groups and agents
To configure an ACD group that uses Meridian Link, type yes at the ISAP
prompt (and the AST prompt, for X81 software and X11 International Phase
7 software prior to Release 17). Any telephone can be designated as AST.
Table 123
LD 23ÑBuild ACD groups
Prompt Response Comment
REQ
NEW, CHG Create or change data in the database
TYPE
CUST
ACDN
MWC
AST
ACD
0Ð99
xxxx
<cr>
YES
Automatic Call Distribution data block
Customer number
AC Directory Number
Associated set (X81 software, X11 International
Phase 7 software prior to Release 17 only)
DSAC
MAXP
<cr>
xx
Maximum number of agent positions for this
ACD DN
SDNB
BSCW
ISAP
<cr>
<cr>
YES
0Ð15
Meridian Link messages sent across the link
VSID
Value Added Server (host computer)
Identification as defined in LD 17.
Note: Enter VAS ID assigned to Meridian Link.
ÑcontinuedÑ
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
336 Chapter 12: Meridian 1 configuration for Meridian Link/CCR
Table 123
LD 23ÑBuild ACD groups (continued)
Prompt Response Comment
¥
¥
¥
Press [Return] until the REQ prompt appears
REQ
NEW, Either build another ACD group or exit the
CHG, END overlay, saving changes
Ñ end Ñ
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12: Meridian 1 configuration for Meridian Link/CCR 337
Define ACD telephones as AST
After defining ACD groups, configure ACD agent telephones designated as
AST for those groups; in LD 10 for single-line telephones and LD 11 for
multi-line telephones.
Table 124
LD 10ÑDefine single-line ACD telephones as AST
Prompt
REQ
TYPE
TN
Response
NEW
Comment
Add new telephone
Single-line type of telephone
Terminal number
500
l s c u
CDEN
DES
CUST
DIG
0Ð99
Customer number
DN
xxxx
DN for the telephone
AST
YES
IAPG
(0)Ð15*
Application Module Link (AML) status
message group, defined in LD 15. Since
Group 0 sends no messages, the default
value is not normally used. Group 1 (all
messages) or a customer-defined group
(2Ð15) would normally be used here.
CLS
AGTA
Class of serviceÑACD agent assignment
Switchhook flash allowed
THFA
UNR
Unrestricted access
WTD, (WTA)
xxxx
Warning Tone Denied (Allowed)
Supervisor position ID
SPID
*Groups 10 through 15 are only available in X11 Release 17 or later
software.
ÑcontinuedÑ
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
338 Chapter 12: Meridian 1 configuration for Meridian Link/CCR
Table 124
LD 10ÑDefine single-line ACD telephones as AST (continued)
Prompt Response Comment
PRI Priority level for ACD agent
(1)Ð48
YES
AACD
Associated set for ACD agent (X11
Release 17 or later software)
FTR
ACD xxxx yyyy ACD feature allowed, where
xxxx = the ACD DN
yyyy = the ACD Position (POS-ID)
¥
¥
¥
Press [Return] until the REQ prompt
appears
REQ
NEW, END
Either define another single-line ACD
telephone as AST or exit the overlay,
saving changes
Ñ end Ñ
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12: Meridian 1 configuration for Meridian Link/CCR 339
Table 125
LD 11ÑDefine multi-line ACD telephones as AST
Prompt
Response
Comment
REQ
TYPE
TN
NEW
aaa
Add new telephones
Enter telephone type as appropriate
Terminal number
l s c u
ACD
0Ð99
1Ð7
DES
CUST
KLS
Customer number
Number of key/lamp strips attached
¥
¥
¥
Press [Return] until the AST prompt
appears
AST
00 07
DN key(s) with AST telephone
assignment (host controllable);
Release 17 or later software. This
example shows keys 0 and 7
configured as AST.
IAPG
(0)Ð15*
AML link status message group,
defined in LD 15. Since Group 0
sends no messages, the default
value is not normally used. Group 1
(all messages) or a customer-
designated group (2Ð15) would
normally be used here.
¥
¥
¥
Press [Return] until the KEY prompt
appears
*Groups 10 through 15 are only available in X11 Release 17 or later
software.
Ñ continued Ñ
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
340 Chapter 12: Meridian 1 configuration for Meridian Link/CCR
Table 125
LD 11ÑDefine multi-line ACD telephones as AST (continued)
Prompt
Response
Comment
KEY 0
ACD XXXXXXX
YYYY
XXXXXXX = ACD DN
YYYY = Agent position ID
Note: If using CLID, type 0 (????)
between ACDDN and POS ID.
KEY 1
KEY 2
KEY 3
KEY 4
KEY 7
KEY 9
MSB
Make set busy
Not ready
NRD
TRN
Transfer
AO6
6 Party conference
XXXX = IDN
SCR XXXX
RLS
Release if type = SL1
¥
¥
¥
Press [Return] until the REQ prompt
appears
REQ
NEW, END
Either define another multi-line ACD
telephone as AST or exit the
overlay, saving changes
Ñ end Ñ
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12: Meridian 1 configuration for Meridian Link/CCR 341
Define non-ACD telephones as AST
To configure a DN as an AST telephone, make changes to telephone data in
LD 10 for single-line telephones or LD 11 for multi-line telephones.
Table 126
LD 10ÑDefine single-line telephones as AST
Prompt
REQ
TYPE
TN
Response
NEW
Comment
Add new telephones
Single-line type of telephones
Terminal number
500
l s c u
CDEN
DES
CUST
DN
0Ð99
xxxx
YES
Customer number
Directory number of the telephone
AST
Telephone is designated as
associated set
IAPG
(0)Ð15*
AML link status message group,
defined in LD 15. Since Group 0
sends no messages, the default
value is not normally used. Group 1
(all messages) or a customer-
designated group (2Ð15) would
normally be used here.
¥
¥
¥
Press [Return] until the REQ prompt
appears
REQ
NEW, END
Either define another single-line non-
ACD telephone as AST or exit the
overlay, saving changes
*Groups 10 through 15 are available only in X11 Release 17 or later
software.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
342 Chapter 12: Meridian 1 configuration for Meridian Link/CCR
Table 127
LD 11ÑDefine multi-line telephones as AST
Prompt
Response
Comment
REQ
NEW
aaa
Add new telephones
TYPE
Enter the telephone type as
appropriate
TN
l s c u
Terminal number
CDEN
CUST
KLS
SD, (DD), 4D
0Ð99
Card density
Customer number
1Ð7
Number of key/lamp strips attached
¥
¥
Press [Return] until the AST prompt
appears
AST
00
DN key with AST telephone
assignment (host controllable; up to
two DN keys can be assigned as
AST). This example shows that key
0 is an AST DN.
IAPG
(0)Ð15*
AML link status message group,
defined in LD 15. Since Group 0
sends no messages, the default
value is not normally used. Group 1
(all messages) or a customer-
designated group (2Ð15) would
normally be used here.
¥
¥
¥
Press [Return] until the KEY prompt
appears
*Groups 10 through 15 are only available in X11 Release 17 or later
software.
ÑcontinuedÑ
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12: Meridian 1 configuration for Meridian Link/CCR 343
Table 127
LD 11ÑDefine multi-line telephones as AST (continued)
Prompt
KEY 0
KEY 1
KEY 2
KEY 9
Response
SCR XXXX
TRN
Comment
XXXX = AST DN
Transfer
AO6
6 Party conference
Release if type = SL1
RLS
¥
¥
¥
Press [Return] until the REQ prompt
appears
REQ
NEW, END
Either define another multi-line non-
ACD telephone as AST or exit the
overlay, saving changes
Ñ end Ñ
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
344 Chapter 12: Meridian 1 configuration for Meridian Link/CCR
Configure ACD DNs
Two types of ACD DNs are described here: the default ACD DN and the
ACD DN that handles IVR calls. See the X11 Input/Output Guide
(NTP 553-3001-400) for information on configuring regular ACD DNs.
Note: ACD DNs must be created on the Meridian 1 before variables
can be created for them. Refer to Table 123.
Table 128
LD 23ÑDefine the default ACD DN
Prompt
Response
Comment
REQ
NEW, CHG
Create or change data in the
database
TYPE
ACD
Automatic Call Distribution data
block
CUST
ACDN
MWC
AST
0Ð99
xxxx
<cr>
Yes
<cr>
xx
Customer number
ACD Directory Number
DSAC
MAXP
Maximum number of agent
positions for this ACD DN
SDNB
BSCW
ISAP
<cr>
<cr>
Yes (Meridian Link) or
<cr> (CCR)
ACD messages sent (not sent) in
Meridian Link application
VSID
REQ
0Ð15
VAS ID. Must be identical to VSID
defined in LD17.
END
Exit the overlay
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12: Meridian 1 configuration for Meridian Link/CCR 345
Note: Systems with two modules (two Application Modules, two IPE
Modules, or one of each), with Meridian Link activated in one and
CCR activated in the other, will require two AMLs and hence two VAS
IDs. In that case, you must define two VSID numbers in Table 109 and
assign two status message groups in one of Tables 124Ð127.
Table 129
LD 23ÑDefine an ACD DN with IVR handling (if applicable)
Prompt
REQ
Response
NEW
ACD
0Ð99
xxxx
Comment
Create or change data in the database
Automatic Call Distribution data block
Customer number
TYPE
CUST
ACDN
MWC
DSAC
MAXP
ACD Directory Number
<cr>
<cr>
xx
Maximum number of agent positions for
this ACD DN
SDNB
BSCW
ISAP
<cr>
<cr>
<cr>
0Ð15
CCR messages sent across the link
VSID
Value Added Server Identification as
defined in LD 17; only required if the
IVR/VRU unit is connected to Meridian 1
by an AML/CSL
IVR
YES
xxxx
This ACD DN handles IVR routing
TRDN
Treatment DN for IVR calls (used by CCR
if IVR treatment is not specified in the
script)
This DN refers to treatment within an
IVR/VRU unit connected by an AML/CSL
REQ
NEW, END
Either define another ACD DN or exit the
overlay, saving changes
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
346 Chapter 12: Meridian 1 configuration for Meridian Link/CCR
Configure Control DNs (CCR)
A Control DN (CDN) is a specialized ACD queue that has no agents. One
CDN is required for each CCR script.
A CDN in controlled mode offers control of calls to applications. A CDN
when not in controlled mode is essentially the same as a CDN used in
Enhanced ACD Routing (EAR), so the CDN/EAR parameters should be
programmed in the same way other EAR CDNs are programmed at that site.
The CDN/EAR parameters are the following prompts: FRRT, FRT, SPRT,
SRT, FROA, MURT, DFDN, CEIL, RPRT, CWTH, BYTH, and OVTH.
IMPORTANT
CDNs must be configured on the Meridian 1 before you start scripting
in CCR. If they do not exist, any variables or associations you set up in
CCR will be lost.
Table 130
LD 23ÑDefine CDNs
Prompt
Response
Comment
REQ
NEW, CHG
CDN
New or change
TYPE
Control DN for Enhanced ACD Routing
(EAR) calls
CUST
CDN
FRRT
FRT
0Ð99
Customer number
nnnn
Control DN number
0Ð511
0Ð2044
First RAN route number for EAR
Seconds before unanswered EAR calls are
connected to first RAN
SRRT
SRT
0Ð511
Second RAN route number for EAR
0Ð2044
Seconds before unanswered calls are
connected to second RAN
ÑcontinuedÑ
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12: Meridian 1 configuration for Meridian Link/CCR 347
Table 130
LD 23ÑDefine CDNs (continued)
Prompt
Response
Comment
FROA
YES, (NO)
First RAN to be given to incoming calls
immediately
MURT
DFDN
CEIL
0Ð511
Music route number
Local default ACD DN
CDN ceiling value
nnnn
0Ð(2047)
(NO), YES
OVFL
Force overflow tone to the call when the
ceiling threshold has been exceeded.
TDNS
RPRT
CNTL
(NO), YES
(YES), NO
YES
Is DNIS number an original called party?
Report Control option
Controlled mode should be set to Yes for
application use. If set to Yes, when the
application acquires control of the CDN after
registration, RouteRequest and other
messages will be sent from the CDN to the
application. When no application is
registered, the default ACD DN specified at
the DFDN prompt will receive the call and
the EAR treatments specified here will be
applied to the call.
VSID
0Ð15
Value Added Server (VAS) ID as defined in
LD 17
HSID
0Ð15
Host Link ID
CWTH
0Ð(1)Ð2047
Call Waiting Threshold indicates the number
of calls waiting unanswered in the CDN
before a monitoring supervisor or agentÕs
DWC key would light.
Ñ continued Ñ
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
348 Chapter 12: Meridian 1 configuration for Meridian Link/CCR
Table 130
LD 23ÑDefine CDNs (continued)
Prompt
Response
Comment
BYTH
(0)Ð2047
Busy Threshold indicates the number of
calls waiting in a controlled CDN before a
monitoring supervisor or agentÕs DWC key
would begin flashing to indicate that the
CDN was busy. Note that calls would be
handled normally; only the DWC key lamp is
affected by the CWTH, BYTH, and OVTH
values.
OVTH
0Ð(2047)
Overflow Threshold indicates the number of
calls waiting in a control CDN before a
monitoring supervisorÕs or agentÕs DWC light
would wink to indicate that the CDN was in
ÒoverflowÓ state. Note that the calls will be
handled normally; only the DWC key lamp is
affected by the CWTH, BYTH, and OVTH
values.
ACNT
REQ
xxxx
Account default activity code
NEW, CHG,
END
Either define another CDN or exit the
overlay, saving changes
Ñ end Ñ
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12: Meridian 1 configuration for Meridian Link/CCR 349
Configuring a Phantom Loop
A phantom loop is configured the same way as a normal loop with the
exception of a ÒCÓ preceeding the loop number. It is important that a
physical loop card be installed. A phantom DN can then be configured as
part of a specific device group. After configuration changes to the loop card,
the system must be reinitialized for the new settings to take effect. Phantom
loops are only supported as local terminal loops. For more information,
refer to X11 Software Features Guide (NTP 553-3001-305).
Note: The phantom terminal number of type ÒNÓ must not be used in
place of ÒCÓ.
Table 131
LD 17ÑSet up Phantom Loops
Prompt
Response
Comment
REQ
CHG
Change
TYPE
CEQU
Common equipment
¥
¥
¥
Press [Return] until the TERM prompt
appears.
TERM
TERD
TERQ
0-159
(X) 0-159
(C) 0-159
Single density local terminal loops.
Precede loop number with X to remove.
Precede loop number with C to create a
phantom loop.
0-159
(X) 0-159
(C) 0-159
Double density local terminal loops.
Precede loop number with X to remove.
Precede loop number with C to create a
phantom loop.
0-159
(X) 0-159
(C) 0-159
Quad density local terminal loops.
Precede loop number with X to remove.
Precede loop number with C to create a
phantom loop.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
350 Chapter 12: Meridian 1 configuration for Meridian Link/CCR
Configuring a Phantom Superloop
A phantom superloop is configured the same way as a normal loop with the
exception of a ÒCÓ preceeding the loop number.
Table 132
LD 97ÑConfiguring a Phantom Superloop
Prompt
Response
Comment
REQ
CHG
Change
TYPE
SUPL
SUPL
Superloop parameters
0-156
(X) 0-156
(C) 0-156
Superloop number in multiples of four.
Precede loop number with X to remove.
Precede loop number with C to create a
phantom loop.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12: Meridian 1 configuration for Meridian Link/CCR 351
Creating a Phantom Set
After configuring the phantom loop, an AST Meridian 1 proprietary set can
be designated to a specific device group which can be controlled by
applications. Therefore, when an application wants to originate a call on
behalf of an idle TN, it can use a phantom TN. This idle TN is an AST
Meridian 1 proprietary set which is defined on a phantom loop. There is no
upper limit on the number of devices per group defined by a Phantom DN.
The upper limit is the limit of the number of TNs that can be defined for the
loop card. This number is dependent on the density of the loop card. The
ITNA and DGRP prompts need to be configured as shown in Table 133.
Note: A phantom set cannot be created for an ACD agent.
Table 133
LD 10ÑCreating a Phantom Set
Prompt
Response
Comment
REQ
NEW
aaaa
New
TYPE
Telephone type, where:
aaaa = SL1, 2006, 2008, 2009,
2016, 2018, 2112, 2216, 2317,
2616, or 3000.
TN
l s c u
c u
Terminal number
Terminal number for the Option 11
¥
¥
¥
Press [Return] until the CDEN
prompt appears.
CDEN
SD, DD, 4D
phanDN
Card density
SD = Single density
DD = Double density
4D = Quad density
DES
One-to-six character Office Data
Administration System (ODAS)
Station Designator
Ñ continued Ñ
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
352 Chapter 12: Meridian 1 configuration for Meridian Link/CCR
Table 133
LD 10ÑCreating a Phantom Set (continued)
Prompt
Response
Comment
CUST
0-99
Customer number
¥
¥
¥
Press [Return] until the CLS prompt
appears.
CLS
NDD
No digit display is recommended if
configuring phantom devices.
CLS
(DNDD)
Dialed Name Display denied is
recommended if configuring
phantom devices.
¥
¥
¥
Press [Return] until the AST prompt
appears.
AST
00
Key 0 is AST.
IAPG
(0)Ð15
Meridian Link Unsolicited Status
Message (USM) group. These
groups determine which status
messages are sent for an AST set.
The default 0 sends no messages,
whereas Group 1 sends all
messages.
ITNA
(NO), YES
(1)Ð5
Idle TN for third-party application.
Select YES for Phantom TN.
DGRP
Device group with which phantom
TNs are associated.
¥
¥
¥
Press [Return] until the KEY
prompt appears.
KEY
xx SCR yyyy
xx RLS
Key number, Single Call Ringing,
DN
CLS
Key number, Releases.
Ñ end Ñ
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12: Meridian 1 configuration for Meridian Link/CCR 353
Configuring Dual VAS ID
Overlay 23 is modified to prompt for ISAP and VASID for Meridian Link
even if the DN type is Meridian Mail ACD-DN. To configure an ACD-DN
as Meridian Mail DN, type YES in response to prompts MWC, IMS, CMS,
IMA and IVMS.
Table 135
LD 23ÑConfiguring Dual VAS ID
Prompt
REQ
Response
NEW
Comment
New
TYPE
CUST
ACDN
MWC
IMS
ACD
Automatic Call Distribution data block
Customer number
AC Directory Number
0-99
xxxx
YES, NO
YES, NO
YES, NO
YES, NO
YES, NO
YES, NO
0-15
CMS
IMA
IVMS
EES
VSID
Value Added Server Identifier ID; must
be identical to the VSID defined in LD17.
¥
¥
¥
Press [Return] until the ISAP prompt
appears.
ISAP
YES, NO
0-15
Type YES to send AML messages to
Meridian Link.
VSID
Value Added Server Identifier ID; must
be identical to the VSID defined in LD17.
¥
¥
¥
Press [Return] until the REQ prompt
appears.
REQ
END
Exit the overlay
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
354 Chapter 12: Meridian 1 configuration for Meridian Link/CCR
Traffic statistics
LD 2 is used to set and schedule traffic statistics for the Application Module
Link (AML). A count is kept (in traffic report 8) of all incoming and
outgoing messages, and these counts can be scheduled to print periodically.
For more details on traffic, see Traffic Measurement (NTP 553-2001-450).
Table 134
LD 2ÑTraffic statistics
Command Comment
SOPS 8
TOPS
Set report 8 (for AML traffic collection)
Query report types set
SSHS
Set system reports schedule
Prompts similar to the following appear:
Prompt
01 01 31 12 - -
Response
SD SM ED EM
Where:
SD = start date, SM = start month,
ED = end date, EM = end month
00 23 3 - -
SH EH SO
Where:
SH = start hour, EH = end hour,
SO = schedule options (0=no traffic
scheduled, 1=hourly, on the hour,
2=hourly, on the half hour, 3=half hourly)
NIL - -
D; where D = day of week:
1 = Sunday, 2 = Monday,
3 = Tuesday, 4 = Wednesday,
5 = Thursday, 6 = Friday
7 = Saturday
TSHS
Query current system reports schedule. Output is similar to
that in the SSHS command (above).
Type **** to exit overlay.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
355
Chapter 13: Meridian Mail configuration
Host Enhanced Voice Processing (HEVP) provides basic voice-processing
capabilities, via a Meridian Mail voice port, to applications based on
Meridian Link. The HEVP feature (Meridian Link Service 101) requires
dedicated Meridian Mail voice channels for use by Meridian Link-based
applications. The number of channels required depends on the traffic
expected for the application; each channel can hold only one call at a time.
The channel numbers assigned in the Meridian Mail system must be
acquired by the HEVP application, so the same numbers must be defined
both in the application and on the Meridian Mail system.
To use the HEVP feature, you must have Meridian Mail 8 (or later)
software with the Access Enable option. In addition, the Meridian 1 system,
the Meridian Mail system and the Meridian Link-based application must be
configured. This configuration involves the following tasks:
¥
¥
¥
defining a separate ACD queue on the Meridian 1 and assigning it to
the Meridian Mail, to direct calls to the dedicated voice channels
creating one virtual agent position for each channel and assigning it to
the ACD queue
defining the ACD DN in the Meridian Mail Voice Service DN Table
(VSDN Table), to allow access to voice channels
¥
¥
dedicating each voice channel into the Channel Allocation Table (CAT)
creating a new mailbox for the application, to hold the applicationÕs
pre-recorded prompts in voice segment file(s)
¥
increasing the amount of storage space in the mailboxÑif the
application needs a large number of prompts, or if the prompts are long
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
356 Chapter 13: Meridian Mail configuration
This chapter provides
¥
a brief overview of how the Meridian 1 system, the Meridian Mail
system, and the Meridian Link-based application configuration
parameters are used as Meridian Mail calls are routed to the application
¥
¥
information required to configure the Meridian 1 for Meridian Mail
information required to configure Meridian Mail for Host Enhanced
Voice Processing (HEVP)
¥
an overview of using the Edit Voice feature to create voice segment
files
Throughout this chapter, figures and tables use the following examples as
parameters:
¥
¥
The primary ACD DN 7650 is defined as the mail queue.
The mail queue uses four voice channels, and thus has four virtual
agent positions assigned to the mail queue, so that the Meridian 1 can
identify each channel by its position ID. These position IDs uniquely
identify channels in the Meridian 1 configuration. The examples used
for mail queue 7650 are as follows:
Table 135
Examples of Meridian Mail configuration parameters
Voice channel
Individual DN
7550
Position ID
7651
1
2
3
4
7551
7652
7552
7653
7553
7654
¥
The DN 7660 is defined as the mailbox assigned to the mail queue for
the purpose of holding recorded voice prompts.
Figure 94 gives a visual overview of how mail queue, position ID, channel
class, and mailbox ID relate to one another.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 13: Meridian Mail configuration 357
Meridian Mail call processing
Figure 94 shows the relationship between the Meridian 1 and Meridian Mail
DNs and voice channels. The Meridian Link-based application separately
acquires each channel, identifying it by its channel class. The Meridian Mail
system messages also identify calls by the channel class.
Figure 94
Meridian Mail call processing
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
Meridian 1
Meridian Mail
Channel 1
Pos. ID 7651
Pos. ID 7652
Pos. ID 7653
7650
Messages
to/from
Channel 2
Incoming
calls
7660
Channel 3
Channel 4
Meridian
Link-based
application
ACD-DN
Pos. ID 7654
(Mail queue)
Voice channels
(virtual agents
of the mail queue)
Meridian Mail
voice channels
(identified by
class number)
Mailbox assigned to
Meridian Link-based
application (holds
voice prompts)
This is how incoming calls are processed:
¥
¥
¥
An incoming call enters the Meridian Mail ACD DN assigned for use
by a Meridian Link-based application, and is held in the mail queue.
When a voice channel is free, a call held in the mail queue is presented
to the channel.
The Meridian Mail system sends a Call Offered message to the
Meridian Link-based application, which must answer the call within 15
seconds.
¥
Once the call is answered, the application plays voice prompts, collects
DTMF digits, and transfers the call to its destination (for example, an
ACD DN or CDN).
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
358 Chapter 13: Meridian Mail configuration
Configuring Meridian 1 for Meridian Mail
To configure the Meridian 1 for Meridian Mail, perform the following
tasks:
1
2
Create a Meridian Mail ACD queue in Overlay 23.
Create virtual agents in Overlay 11, assigning them to the Meridian
Mail queue.
Creating a Meridian Mail ACD queue
Reserving an ACD queue for the sole purpose of directing calls to voice
channels dedicated to a Meridian Link-based application ensures that all
HEVP channels are in their own queue. If the application uses Host
Enhanced Routing to direct calls to Meridian Mail, it must do so by routing
calls to this ACD DN. The ACD DN number assigned here will also be
added to the Meridian Mail VSDN Table.
Table 136 describes how to use Overlay 23 (LD 23) to create a new ACD
queue for Meridian Mail. To configure the new ACD queue for Meridian
Mail, respond YES to the MWC, IMS, CMS, IMA, and IVMS prompts; and
at the VSID prompt, specify the link ID of the Command and Status Link
(CSL) to the mail system.
Table 136
LD 23ÑCreating an ACD queue for voice channels
Prompt
REQ
Response
NEW
Comment
Create a new ACD DN
ACD data block
TYPE
CUST
ACD
xxxx
Customer that the Meridian Link-based
application will be serving
ACDN
MWC
xxxxxxx
YES
An unused DN in the customerÕs dialing plan.
For the example shown in Figure 94, you
would enter 7650.
ÑcontinuedÑ
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 13: Meridian Mail configuration 359
Table 136
LD 23ÑCreating an ACD queue for voice channels (continued)
Prompt
IMS
Response
Comment
YES
YES
YES
YES
0Ð15
CMS
IMA
IVMS
VSID
Link ID of the CSL to Meridian Mail (defined
in Overlay 17)
MAXP
xx
Number of agent positions (one more than
the number of channels to be assigned). For
the example in Figure 94, you would enter 5.
ALOG
SDNB
BSCW
RGAI
YES
<cr>
<cr>
<cr>
¥
¥
¥
FCTH
CRQS
<cr>
<cr>
Ñ end Ñ
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
360 Chapter 13: Meridian Mail configuration
Defining virtual agent DNs for voice channels
For each voice channel to be used by a Meridian Link-based application,
you must create a virtual ACD agent and assign it to the Meridian Mail
ACD queue.
By being defined with Voice Messaging Allowed (VMA) class of service,
each ACD agent functions as a Meridian Mail queue. The Key 0 definition
specifies the mail queue. These agent positions are ÒvirtualÓÑthat is, no
physical equipment is required for the sets defined.
Use Overlay 11 to assign TNs as virtual agents of the mail queue you just
defined in Overlay 23, and to assign each to a different voice channel. If the
voice channel already existsÑand is being reassigned to Meridian 1
AccessÑlocate the Channel DN in the Meridian Mail Channel Allocation
Table (CAT) and use that value for the individual DN (IDN) when defining
the SCN key. Table 139, in the ÒDefining voice channels in the Channel
Allocation Table (CAT)Ó section of this chapter, illustrates the CAT.
Table 137 describes how to use Overlay 11 (LD 11) to create and assign
Meridian Mail virtual agent positions and relates the parameters configured
to the examples used elsewhere in this chapter. Note the following:
¥
¥
¥
The TN defined for each virtual agent position ID must be the Routing
Address assigned to its channel in the CAT.
The IDN assigned to this channel in Overlay 11 will also be used for
the Channel DN in the CAT.
As for any ACD agent, each virtual agentÕs ACD DN and position ID
must be defined on key 0. Assign the set to your new mail ACD DN,
and give it a unique (with respect to other DNs) position ID.
¥
You must also define Make Set Busy, Not Ready, Transfer,
Conference, SCN, and Release keys on the set.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 13: Meridian Mail configuration 361
Table 137
LD 11ÑDefining virtual agent DNs for voice channels
Prompt
REQ
Response
NEW
Comment
Create a new ACD agent
New SL-1 set
TYPE
TN
SL1
l s c u
The virtual agentÕs routing address on the
Meridian 1. If the channel already exists, this
value is found in the Channel Allocation Table
(CAT). Table 139 uses 10-1-2-3 through
10-1-2-6 as routing addresses for channel
DNs assigned to mail queue 7650.
CDEN
DES
<cr>
Meridian Mail voice channels
xxxxx
Set description ("Voice Channel 1," for
example)
CUST
KLS
x
Customer that the Meridian Link-based
application will be serving
1
For virtual agents, the number of key lamp
strips is always 1.
FDN
<cr>
<cr>
<cr>
<cr>
<cr>
<cr>
<cr>
VMA
TGAR
LDN
NCOS
RNPG
SSU
XLST
CLS
Voice Messaging Allowed (VMA) defines this
TN as a virtual agent
HUNT
<cr>
Ñ continued Ñ
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
362 Chapter 13: Meridian Mail configuration
Table 137
LD 11ÑDefining virtual agent DNs for voice channels (continued)
Prompt
LHK
Response
<cr>
Comment
TEN
<cr>
SPID
AST
<cr>
<cr>
IAPG
PRI
<cr>
<cr>
LANG
KEY
<cr>
0 ACD
Identifies set as agent a Meridian Mail queue
xxxxxxx yyyy Key 0 must be the ACD DN position ID of the
virtual agent (as for any ACD agent), where
xxxxxxx = ACD DN
(the example in Figure 94 and
Table 138 is 7650)
yyyy = position ID
(the examples in Figure 94 are
7651Ð7654)
KEY
1 SCN
Assign the secondary (SCN) DN key, where
1 = key number
xxxxxxx
xxxxxxx = Channel DN assigned to this key
KEY
KEY
KEY
2 MSB
3 NRD
6 TRN
Assign an MSB (Make Set Busy) key where
2 = key number
Assign an NRD (Not Ready) key where
3 = key number
Assign a TRN (Transfer) key where
6 = key number
Ñ continued Ñ
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 13: Meridian Mail configuration 363
Table 137
LD 11ÑDefining virtual agent DNs for voice channels (continued)
Prompt
Response
Comment
KEY
7 A06
Assign an A06 (6-party conference) key where
7 = key number
KEY
KEY
9 RLS
<cr>
Key 9 should be RLS (Release)
An empty carriage return at the last KEY
prompt ends key definition input
Ñ end Ñ
Configuring Meridian Mail for Host Enhanced Voice
Processing (HEVP)
To configure the Meridian Mail system for the Host Enhanced Voice
Processing (HEVP) feature of Meridian Link, perform the following tasks:
1. Add the Meridian Mail ACD DN for HEVP applications to the
Meridian Mail VSDN Table.
2. Create and dedicate voice channels for HEVP applications in the
Channel Allocation Table (CAT).
3. Define a new mailbox to store voice prompts for the HEVP application.
Adding the Meridian Mail ACD DN to the Voice Service DN
(VSDN) Table
The procedure that follows describes how to add the ACD DN you defined
in LD 23 on the Meridian 1 (see ÒCreating a Meridian Mail ACD queueÓ
earlier in this chapter) to the list of DNs in the Meridian Mail Voice Service
DN (VSDN) Table. Table 138 shows examples of entries for each service
type (Voice Messaging, Voice Menu, and Meridian 1 Access).
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
364 Chapter 13: Meridian Mail configuration
When adding an ACD DN for Meridian Link-based HEVP applications in
the VSDN Table, observe the following:
¥
¥
The service class must be ACC.
A class number must be entered, but actual linkage between channel
class and channel is made in the Channel Allocation Table (CAT), not
in the VSDN Table.
Note: The VSDN Class field indicates which application will be
started, but applications based on Meridian Link use only the CAT
linkage. Therefore, the choice of VSDN class number is not important.
Procedure to add the Meridian Mail ACD DN to the VSDN Table
1
2
3
4
5
Log in to Meridian Mail Administration.
Choose Voice System Administration.
Choose Voice System Configuration.
Choose Voice Service DN Table.
Add a new entry, setting the DN to the ACD DN you created in
LD 23 on the Meridian 1.
In Table 138, 7650 is used as an example of the DN. The service is ACC
(for ACCess). The class should be set to the lowest channel class you will
assign to the Meridian Link-based application. The example mail queue in
this chapter uses channel class values 1Ð4, so the example in Table 138 uses
a value of 1.
Note: The class number used here has no impact on Meridian Mail
call processing, since the association of the call to the Meridian Link-
based application is done in the CAT, but using the lowest channel
class assigned to the Meridian Link-based application avoids any
possible future conflict.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 13: Meridian Mail configuration 365
Table 138
Example of Meridian Mail Voice Service DN (VSDN) Table
DN
Service
VM
Class
4567
4568
7650
MS
ACC
1
VM = service type Voice Messaging
MS = service type Voice Menu
ACC = service type Meridian 1 Access
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
366 Chapter 13: Meridian Mail configuration
Defining voice channels in the Channel Allocation Table
(CAT)
The Channel Allocation Table (CAT) contains entries for each Meridian
Mail voice channel. As shown in Table 139, the CAT stores the following
voice channel attributes:
¥
¥
¥
Channel Location is the card location, in the Meridian Mail system, of
the voice channel.
Routing Address is the TN defined for the virtual agent set in
Overlay 11 on the Meridian 1 (see Table 137).
Link Location is card location, in the Meridian Mail system, of the
Command and Status Link (CSL).
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
Link Type is always CSL.
Primary DN specifies the Meridian Mail ACD DN created in LD 23.
Channel DN is the IDN defined for the channel in LD 11.
Service is always ACC, for Meridian 1 Access.
Class is the lowest unused class number known to Meridian Link.
To assign dedicated channels to the Meridian Link-based application, you
must either change existing channel entries or add new ones, such that
¥
the primary DN for the voice channel is the Meridian Mail ACD queue
created in Overlay 23 (see Table 136)
¥
¥
the service type is ACC (for Meridian 1 Access)
each dedicated channel has a unique class, which identifies the channel
to your application (for shared channels, Class = ALL)
Note: If a voice channel is not assigned a class number recognized by
an HEVP application, it cannot be acquired during Meridian Mail call
processing, and thus receives the default treatment for unacquired
Meridian Mail calls.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 13: Meridian Mail configuration 367
Table 139
Example of Meridian Mail Channel Allocation Table (CAT)
Channel Routing
Location Address
Link
Link
Primary
DN
Channel Service Class
DN
Location
Type
01-5-1
01-5-2
01-5-3
01-5-4
10-1-2-3
10-1-2-4
10-1-2-5
10-1-2-6
01-1-02
01-1-02
01-1-02
01-1-02
CSL
CSL
CSL
CSL
7650
7650
7650
7650
7550
7551
7552
7553
ACC
ACC
ACC
ACC
1
2
3
4
Procedure to add channels to Meridian Mail
1
Log in to Meridian Mail Administration.
¥
¥
If the channel is not already defined, go directly to step 6.
If the channel is already defined, first perform steps 2 through 5
to disable the channel.
2
3
4
5
6
7
Choose System and Status Maintenance from the Main Menu.
Choose DSP Port Status.
Disable the channel.
Return to the Main Menu.
Choose Voice System Administration.
Choose Voice System Configuration/Voice Menu Application
Administration.
8
Choose Channel Allocation Table.
9
If the channel is not defined, add a new channel.
10
Set the Primary DN to the ACD DN you created for the Meridian Mail
ACD queue in Overlay 23 on the Meridian 1.
11
12
Set the Channel DN to the IDN you assigned to the virtual agent in
Overlay 11 on the Meridian 1.
Set the Channel Location to its board location in the Meridian Mail
system.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
368 Chapter 13: Meridian Mail configuration
13
14
Set the Service to ACC.
Set the Channel class to an unused class number.
Class numbers should start with 1 and be used in sequence,
because the application must use the class numbers both to obtain
access to the voice port and to identify activity on it.
Defining a new mailbox for the application
To create a mailbox, you must define a new Meridian Mail user. The
Meridian Link-based application must know the mailbox number and
password in order to log in to the mailbox. The operator using the Meridian
Link Edit Voice feature to create and edit voice segment files must also
know the mailbox number and password.
When adding a new mailbox, note that the mailbox number must not
conflict with a DN existing on the Meridian 1.
Note: Although a Meridian 1 DN may be assigned to the mailbox,
sharing a mailbox between an HEVP application and normal voice mail
users does not absolutely ensure that processing conflicts are avoided.
For example, if the DN assigned to the mailbox is unique with respect
to other DNs, it can never be used as anyoneÕs personal extension.
Procedure to add a new mailbox to the Meridian Mail system
1
2
3
4
Log in to Meridian Mail Administration.
Choose User Administration.
Choose Add New User.
Press the [Add Local Voice User] softkey to display the required
screen.
Figure 95 shows the Add Local Voice User screen. Note that the
Location Prefix field is present only in networked Meridian Mail
systems.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 13: Meridian Mail configuration 369
Figure 95
Meridian Mail Add Local Voice User screen
User Administration
Add Local Voice User
Mailbox Number:
*Location Prefix:
Last Name:
7660
Volume ID: 2
Location Name: Yourtown, USA
LinkMailBox
First Name:
Meridian
Department:
for voice processing application
Extension DNs:
Revert DN:
7660
0
User Model:
Standard
Executive
No
Secretary
Personal Verification Recorded (Voice):
5
Fill in the mailbox number and put descriptive comments in the First
Name and Last Name fields. Take the default values for everything
else. You can use the Mailbox Number as the Extension DN, since it
will not be used (it must not conflict with an existing DN).
6
7
Press the [Change User password] softkey and set the mailbox
password.
If necessary, use the [Change Defaults] softkey to allocate additional
storage space on disk for the applicationÕs voice file(s).
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
370 Chapter 13: Meridian Mail configuration
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
371
Chapter 14: Software installation,
upgrade, and update procedures
This chapter describes how to
¥
initially configure a new IPE Module or the Application Module
Note: If a redundant Meridian Link is required, a second module must
be installed and configured separately.
¥
¥
¥
properly power down
upgrade from one release to another
update from one issue of a release to another issue of the same release
ATTENTION
Before proceeding with any software installation, upgrade, or update,
ensure that all discrepancies found in Chapter 6, ÒSite survey/
installation checklistÓ have been corrected.
The operating system and application software on the IPE Module or the
Application Module are installed at the factory. When the module is
installed at your site
¥
¥
¥
enter a keycode to activate the correct application or applications
configure the new module
change some link parameters, if necessary
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
372 Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures
The keycode is provided as part of the software package and is tailored to
your siteÕs requirements. The keycode consists of five groups of four
hexadecimal characters.
You will have received the following tapes with your IPE Module or
Application Module:
¥
¥
Tape 1 contains the base operating system (BOS)
Tape 2 contains all application software
Once your link configuration and other setup are correct, you should use a
blank tape and execute the backdata command to make a backup tape of
your system configuration.
Note: Use a 600-Mbyte tape with the IPE Module and a 155-Mbyte
tape with the Application Module.
If you need to power down the IPE Module or the Application Module, you
must power down the application or applications correctly to allow the
software to shut down and the disk and file system to reach a safe state. If
you do not power down the system correctly, automatic diagnostic software
will be invoked when the system reboots in an attempt to repair any possible
damage. In general it is recommended strongly that the correct powerdown
procedure be used.
Note: After completing a software installation procedure, proceed to
Chapter 18, ÒAcceptance testing,Ó to ensure that the installation was
successful.
Depending on the tape and release of the software you have currently
installed, you can use one of several ways to upgrade or update your
software. The following table shows where you can find the information
you need to upgrade or update your software.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures 373
Table 140
Software installation and upgrade paths
From
To
Covered in ...
Meridian Link Meridian Link
Release 2 Release 5C
Section 1: To upgrade Meridian Link from Release 2 to
Release 5C or Co-residency using a Release 2 backup
tape
Meridian Link Co-residency
(Meridian Link 5C
and CCR 3C)
Section 1: To upgrade Meridian Link from Release 2 to
Release 5C or Co-residency using a Release 2 backup
tape
Release 2
Meridian Link Meridian Link
Release 3 Release 5C
Section 2: To upgrade Meridian Link from Release 3 to
Release 5C or Co-residency using a Release 3 backup
tape
Meridian Link Co-residency
Release 3
Section 2: To upgrade Meridian Link from Release 3 to
Release 5C or Co-residency using a Release 3 backup
tape
(Meridian Link 5C
and CCR 3C)
Meridian Link Meridian Link
Release 4 Release 5C
Section 3: To upgrade Meridian Link from Release 4 to
Release 5C
Meridian Link Co-residency
Release 4
Section 4: To upgrade Meridian Link from Release 4 to
Co-residency
(Meridian Link 5C
and CCR 3C)
Meridian Link Meridian Link
Release 4B Release 5C
Section 5: To upgrade Meridian Link from Release 4B to
Release 5C
Meridian Link Meridian Link
Release 4B
Section 6: To upgrade Meridian Link from Release 4B to
Release 5C and Co-residency
Release 5C and
Co-residency
(Meridian Link 5C
and CCR 3C)
Meridian Link Meridian Link
Release 5 Release 5C
Section 7: To update Meridian Link from Release 5 to
Release 5C
Meridian Link Co-residency
Release 5
Section 8: To update Meridian Link from Release 5 to
Co-residency
(Meridian Link 5C
and CCR 3C)
Ñ continued Ñ
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
374 Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures
Table 140
Software upgrade paths (continued)
From
To
Covered in section
Upissue of
Meridian Link Release 5C
Release 5
Meridian Link
Section 7: To update Meridian Link from Release 5 to
Release 5C
Upissue of
Meridian Link (Meridian Link 5C
Co-residency
Section 8: To update Meridian Link from Release 5 to
Co-residency
Release 5
and CCR 3C)
CCR
Release 2
CCR
Release 3C
Section 9: To upgrade CCR from Release 2 to Release
3C or Co-residency using a Release 2 backup tape
CCR
Release 2
Co-residency
(Meridian Link 5C
and CCR 3C)
Section 9: To upgrade CCR from Release 2 to Release
3C or Co-residency using a Release 2 backup tape
CCR
Release 3
CCR
Release 3C
Section 10: To update CCR from Release 3 to Release
3C
CCR
Release 3
Co-residency
(Meridian Link 5C
and CCR 3C)
Section 11: To update CCR from Release 3 to
Co-residency
CCR
Release 3B
CCR Release 3B
Section 12: To update CCR Release 3B to Release 3C
CCR
Release 3B
Co-residency
(Meridian Link 5C
and CCR 3C)
Section 13: To update CCR from Release 3B to
Co-residency
Co-residency Up-issue of
Co-residency
Section 14: To update Co-residency from one issue to
another issue of the same release
(Meridian Link 5C
and CCR 3C)
Ñ end Ñ
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures 375
To configure the software after installing a new IPE Module
or Application Module
The UNIX and application software are loaded onto the hard disk at the
factory. Tapes containing the same software are shipped with your module
as a backup. A blank tape is needed to back up configuration data and
scripts.
When power is applied to the IPE Module or the Application Module, the
system boots up from the software loaded on the hard disk. Power also
activates the yellow LED on the SBC card in the IPE Module or the
Application Module. As long as this LED blinks intermittently, the system
is loading properly. If the LED remains dark or steadily lit (for 30 seconds
or more), there is a fault in the installed cards.
To configure the software after installing a new IPE Module or Application
Module
¥
Perform Procedure 1: Application configuration and start-up, in this
chapter.
¥
Check that the values of the default link parameters match the values in
Chapter 15, ÒLink configuration.Ó If you need to change any link
parameters, perform the procedures described in Chapter 15, ÒLink
configuration.Ó
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
376 Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures
Section 1: To upgrade Meridian Link from Release 2 to
Release 5C or Co-residency using a Release 2 backup tape
If you already have Meridian Link Release 2 and want to upgrade to
Meridian Link Release 5C or Co-residency
¥
Ensure that your backup is current so that you will not lose any
configuration and data information when you format the hard disk.
¥
¥
Install the operating system and all applications.
Enter a keycode to activate the appropriate application or applications.
To do this,
¥
Perform Procedure 11: Back up configuration files and data files
Note: At this point, Release 2 is still installed, so you are backing up
Release 2 files. Procedure 11 in this manual, although intended for
Release 5C, can be used to back up Release 2 files. Ignore any
differences between the messages shown in Procedure 11 and the
messages you see.
¥
¥
Perform Procedure 4: Power down the IPE Module or the Application
Module.
Depending on the type of SBC card installed, perform one of the
following:
Ñ Procedure 5: Load the operating system on an Application Module
with an MVME147 card
Ñ Procedure 6: Load the operating system on an IPE Module or an
Application Module with an MVME167 card
¥
¥
¥
Perform Procedure 7: Reboot and go through setup.
Perform Procedure 8: Load the application software from tape.
Perform Procedure 9: Restore configuration files and data files from the
backup tape to customize your system.
¥
¥
Perform Procedure 10: Verify the installation to confirm that the
installation is complete and correct.
Perform Procedure 11: Back up configuration files and data files to
back up the customized new release.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures 377
Section 2: To upgrade Meridian Link from Release 3 to
Release 5C or Co-residency using a Release 3 backup tape
If you already have Meridian Link Release 3 and want to upgrade to
Meridian Link Release 5C or Co-residency:
¥
Ensure that your backup is current so that you will not lose any
configuration and data information when you format the hard disk.
¥
¥
Install the operating system and all applications.
Enter a keycode to activate the appropriate application or applications.
To do this,
¥
Perform Procedure 11: Back up configuration and data files.
Note: At this point, Release 3 is still installed. Procedure 11, although
intended for Release 5C, can be used to back up Release 3 files. Ignore
any differences between the messages shown in Procedure 11 and the
messages you see.
¥
¥
Perform Procedure 4: Power down the IPE Module or the Application
Module.
Depending on the type of SBC card installed, perform one of the
following:
Ñ Procedure 5: Load the operating system on an Application Module
with an MVME147 card
Ñ Procedure 6: Load the operating system tape on an IPE Module or
an Application Module with an MVME167 card
¥
¥
¥
Perform Procedure 7: Reboot and go through setup.
Perform Procedure 8: Load the application software from tape.
Perform Procedure 9: Restore configuration files and data files from the
backup tape to customize your system
¥
¥
Perform Procedure 10: Verify the installation to confirm that the
installation is complete and correct
Perform Procedure 11: Back up configuration files and data files to
back up the customized new release
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
378 Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures
Section 3: To upgrade Meridian Link from Release 4 to
Release 5C
If you have Meridian Link Release 4 and want to update to Release 5C, you
must install the operating system, install the application, and then enter a
keycode to activate it.
To do this:
¥
Perform Procedure 11: Back up configuration and data files.
Note: At this point, Release 4 is still installed. Procedure 11, although
intended for Release 5C, can be used to back up Release 4 files. Ignore
any differences between the messages shown in Procedure 11 and the
messages you see.
¥
¥
Perform Procedure 4: Power down the IPE Module or the Application
Module.
Depending on the type of SBC card installed, perform one of the
following:
Ñ Procedure 5: Load the operating system on an Application Module
with an MVME147 card
Ñ Procedure 6: Load the operating system tape on an IPE Module or
an Application Module with an MVME167 card
¥
¥
Perform Procedure 7: Reboot and go through setup.
Perform Procedure 3: Load the application software from tape.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures 379
Section 4: To upgrade Meridian Link from Release 4 to
Co-residency
If you have Meridian Link Release 4 and want to upgrade to
co-residency, you must install the operating system and install all
applications. Then you must enter a keycode to activate Meridian Link and
CCR. Notice that, in this case, you automatically upgrade Meridian Link to
Release 5C.
To do this,
¥
Perform Procedure 11: Back up configuration and data files.
Note: At this point, Release 4 is still installed. Procedure 11, although
intended for Release 5C, can be used to back up Release 4 files. Ignore
any differences between the messages shown in Procedure 11 and the
messages you see.
¥
¥
Perform Procedure 4: Power down the IPE Module or the Application
Module.
Depending on the type of SBC card installed, perform one of the
following:
Ñ Procedure 5: Load the operating system on an Application Module
with an MVME147 card
Ñ Procedure 6: Load the operating system tape on an IPE Module or
an Application Module with an MVME167 card
¥
¥
Perform Procedure 7: Reboot and go through setup.
Perform Procedure 3: Load application software from tape.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
380 Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures
Section 5: To upgrade Meridian Link from Release 4B to
Release 5C
If you have Meridian Link Release 4 and want to update to Release 5C, you
must install the operating system tape, install the application, and then enter
a keycode to activate it.
To do this:
¥
Perform Procedure 11: Back up configuration and data files.
Note: At this point, Release 4B is still installed. Procedure 11,
although intended for Release 5C, can be used to back up Release 4B
files. Ignore any differences between the messages shown in Procedure
11 and the messages you see.
¥
¥
Perform Procedure 4: Power down the IPE Module or the Application
Module.
Depending on the type of SBC card installed, perform one of the
following:
Ñ Procedure 5: Load the operating system on an Application Module
with an MVME147 card
Ñ Procedure 6: Load the operating system tape on an IPE Module or
an Application Module with an MVME167 card
¥
¥
Perform Procedure 7: Reboot and go through setup.
Perform Procedure 3: Load applicatison software from tape.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures 381
Section 6: To upgrade Meridian Link from Release 4B to
Release 5C and Co-residency
If you have Meridian Link Release 4B and want to upgrade to Release 5C
and co-residency, you must install the operating system, then applications.
Then you must enter a keycode to activate CCR and Meridian Link.
To do this,
¥
Perform Procedure 11: Back up configuration and data files.
Note: At this point, Release 4B is still installed. Procedure 11,
although intended for Release 5C, can be used to back up Release 4B
files. Ignore any differences between the messages shown in Procedure
11 and the messages you see.
¥
¥
Perform Procedure 4: Power down the IPE Module or the Application
Module.
Depending on the type of SBC card installed, perform one of the
following:
Ñ Procedure 5: Load the operating system on an Application Module
with an MVME147 card
Ñ Procedure 6: Load the operating system tape on an IPE Module or
an Application Module with an MVME167 card
¥
¥
Perform Procedure 7: Reboot and go through setup.
Perform Procedure 3: Load application software from tape.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
382 Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures
Section 7: To update Meridian Link from Release 5 to
Release 5C
When you update Meridian Link from Release 5 to Release 5C, the release
or issue of the BOS changes.
¥
¥
Perform Procedure 2: Start the update process.
Depending on the type of SBC card installed, perform one of the
following:
Ñ Procedure 5: Load the operating system tape on an Application
Module with an MVME147 card
Ñ Procedure 6: Load the operating system tape on an IPE Module or
an Application Module with an MVME167 card
¥
¥
¥
Perform Procedure 7: Reboot and go through setup.
Perform Procedure 8: Load the application software from tape.
Perform Procedure 9: Restore configuration files and data files from the
backup tape to customize your system.
¥
¥
Perform Procedure 10: Verify the installation to confirm that the
installation is complete and correct.
Perform Procedure 11: Back up configuration files and data files to
back up the customized new release.
Section 8: To update Meridian Link from Release 5 to
Co-residency
If you have Meridian Link Release 5 and want to upgrade to
co-residency, you must install the application. Then you must enter a
keycode to activate CCR and Meridian Link.
To do this:
¥
¥
Perform Procedure 2: Start the update process.
Perform Procedure 3: Load the application software from tape.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures 383
Section 9: To upgrade CCR from Release 2 to Release 3C or
Co-residency using a Release 2 backup tape
If you already have CCR Release 2 and want to upgrade to CCR Release 3C
or co-residency, do the following
¥
Before upgrading, back up your script files so that you will not lose any
script information when you format the hard disk.
¥
¥
Install the operating system and all applications.
Enter a keycode to activate the appropriate application or applications.
Note: If you upgrade to co-residency, you activate Meridian Link
Release 5C and CCR Release 3C by entering the appropriate keycode.
To do this,
¥
Perform Procedure 4: Power down the IPE Module or the Application
Module.
¥
Depending on the type of SBC card installed, perform one of the
following:
Ñ Procedure 5: Load the operating system tape on an Application
Module with an MVME147 card
Ñ Procedure 6: Load the operating system tape on an IPE Module or
an Application Module with an MVME167 card
¥
¥
¥
Perform Procedure 7: Reboot and go through setup.
Perform Procedure 8: Load the application software from tape.
Perform Procedure 9: Restore configuration files and data files from the
backup tape to customize your system.
¥
¥
Perform Procedure 10: Verify the installation to confirm that the
installation is complete and correct.
Perform Procedure 11: Back up configuration files and data files to
back up the customized new release.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
384 Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures
Section 10: To update CCR from Release 3 to Release 3C
If you already have CCR Release 3 and want to update to Release 3C, you
must install the application and then enter a keycode to activate it.
To do this,
¥
¥
Perform Procedure 2: Start the update process.
Perform Procedure 3: Load application software from tape.
Section 11: To update CCR from Release 3 to Co-residency
If you already have CCR Release 3 and want to upgrade to co-residency,
you must install all applications. Then you must enter a keycode to activate
CCR and Meridian Link. Notice that, in this case, you automatically update
CCR to Release 3C.
To do this,
¥
¥
Perform Procedure 2: Start the update process.
Perform Procedure 3: Load application software from tape.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures 385
Section 12: To update CCR Release 3B to Release 3C
When you update CCR from Release 3B to Release 3C, the release or issue
of the BOS changes.
¥
¥
Perform Procedure 2: Start the update process.
Depending on the type of SBC card installed, perform one of the
following:
Ñ Procedure 5: Load the operating system tape on an Application
Module with an MVME147 card
Ñ Procedure 6: Load the operating system tape on an IPE Module or
an Application Module with an MVME167 card
¥
¥
¥
Perform Procedure 7: Reboot and go through setup.
Perform Procedure 8: Load the application software from tape.
Perform Procedure 9: Restore configuration files and data files from the
backup tape to customize your system.
¥
¥
Perform Procedure 10: Verify the installation to confirm that the
installation is complete and correct.
Perform Procedure 11: Back up configuration files and data files to
back up the customized new release.
Section 13: To update CCR from Release 3B to Co-residency
If you already have CCR Release 3B and want to update to co-residency,
you just enter a new keycode to activate CCR and Meridian Link.
To do this, perform Procedure 1: Application configuration and start-up.
Section 14: To update Co-residency from one issue to
another issue of the same release
When you update Co-residency from one issue of a release to another issue
of the same release (for example, from issue 6.2 to issue 6.4), one of the
following circumstances applies:
¥
¥
The release or issue of the BOS changes
The release or issue of the BOS does not change
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
386 Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures
If the release or issue of BOS changes,
¥
¥
Perform Procedure 2: Start the update process.
Depending on the type of SBC card installed, perform one of the
following:
Ñ Procedure 5: Load the operating system tape on an Application
Module with an MVME147 card
Ñ Procedure 6: Load the operating system tape on an IPE Module or
an Application Module with an MVME167 card
¥
¥
¥
Perform Procedure 7: Reboot and go through setup.
Perform Procedure 8: Load the application software from tape.
Perform Procedure 9: Restore configuration files and data files from the
backup tape to customize your system.
¥
¥
Perform Procedure 10: Verify the installation to confirm that the
installation is complete and correct.
Perform Procedure 11: Back up configuration files and data files to
back up the customized new release.
If the release or issue of BOS does not change,
¥
¥
Perform Procedure 2: Start the update process.
Perform Procedure 3: Load application software from tape.
Section 15: Activating or de-activating a Meridian Link or
CCR feature
If you wish to activate or de-activate a feature (for example, you wish to
activate Ethernet LAN support), perform Procedure 1: Application
configuration and start-up.
Section 16: To install or reinstall the software from tape
If you must install or reinstall the software from tape (for example, after
replacing the hard drive), change the serial number, change the subnet
mask, change the default router address, or activiate or de-activate features
using the keycode, do the following:
¥
Perform Procedure 4: Power down the IPE Module or the Application
Module.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures 387
¥
Depending on the type of SBC card installed, perform one of the
following:
Ñ Procedure 5: Load the operating system tape on an Application
Module with an MVME147 card
Ñ Procedure 6: Load the operating system tape on an IPE Module or
an Application Module with an MVME167 card
¥
¥
¥
Perform Procedure 7: Reboot and go through setup.
Perform Procedure 8: Load the application software from tape.
Perform Procedure 9: Restore configuration files and data files from the
backup tape (if available).
Note: Input at the system console must be in lowercase letters, or
mixed case if necessary. If the system responds in uppercase prompts
preceded by a backslash (Ò\PASSWORD:Ó for example), log out. Reset
caps lock; enter Ctrl-d so that the ÒConsole login:Ó prompt appears.
CAUTION
Risk of potential data loss
In case of hard disk failure, your configuration files and
!
data files will be lost. Therefore, you should back up
these files as soon as you get your Meridian Link system
set up. To do this, perform Procedure 11: Back up
configuration files and data files.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
388 Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures
Procedure 1: Application configuration and start-up
1
Set the Application Module circuit breaker or the IPE Module power
pushbutton to ON (if it is not already on).
Wait for the system to boot UNIX from the hard disk. If the ÒConsole
Login:Ó prompt does not appear, refer to the Application Module and
Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Module Diagnostic and
Maintenance Guide (NTP 553-3211-510).
2
3
4
Type maint and press [Return] at the ÒConsole Login:Ó prompt to log
in as the maintenance user.
You are prompted to enter a password. Type the password for the
maint account and press [Return]. The password for maint is maint.
At the Òmaint>Ó prompt, type install and press [Return].
Figure 96
Tape prompt
You can reconfigure the system using a keycode without a tape or you can use a
tape to upgrade the software and reconfigure. Do you want to use a tape (y/n/q)?
5
You are prompted to use a tape (Figure 96). Type n and press
[Return].
Figure 97
Meridian 1 ID prompt
Please enter the Meridian 1 ID of this site
(or Q or q to quit):
6
You are prompted to enter your Meridian 1 ID (Figure 97). Type your
ID and press [Return].
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures 389
Procedure 1: Application configuration and start-up (continued)
Note: If you make a mistake while typing your Meridian ID or
keycode, do not try to backspace and correct the error. Instead,
continue until step 15, where you will be able to type n, press [Return]
and return to step 6.
Note: Input for the Meridian ID is case sensitive; input for the keycode
is not case sensitive.
Figure 98
Keycode prompt 1
Please enter your key code (5 groups of 4 characters each):
Keycode group 1 (or Q or q to quit):
7
You are prompted to enter your keycode (Figure 98). Type the first
four-character group of your keycode and press [Return].
Figure 99
Keycode prompt 2
Keycode group 2 (or Q or q to quit):
8
You are prompted for the second group of keycode characters. Type
the second group and press [Return].
Figure 100
Keycode prompt 3
Keycode group 3 (or Q or q to quit):
9
You are prompted for the third group of keycode characters. Type
the third group and press [Return].
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
390 Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures
Procedure 1: Application configuration and start-up (continued)
Figure 101
Keycode prompt 4
Keycode group 4 (or Q or q to quit):
10
You are prompted for the fourth group of keycode characters. Type
the fourth group and press [Return].
Figure 102
Keycode prompt 5
Keycode group 5 (or Q or q to quit):
11
You are prompted for the fifth group of keycode characters. Type the
fifth group and press [Return].
A list of configured applications appears.
Note: Optional feature prompts will not appear if the features were not
configured in the keycode. For example, if Meridian Link was not
purchased, the prompts in Figures 103, 104, and 105 will not appear.
Figure 103
Meridian Link protocol prompt
Please enter the Meridian Link protocol, x for X.25, <cr> for TCP/IP):
12
If you are activating the Meridian Link application, you are prompted
to enter the Meridian Link protocol.
If you are using the X.25 protocol, type x, press [Return], then go to
step 15.
If you are using the TCP/IP protocol, press [Return], then go to
step 13.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures 391
Procedure 1: Application configuration and start-up (continued)
Figure 104
IP address prompt
Meridian Link using a TCP/IP connection.
If you would like a default gateway IP address configured or changed, please
enter the IP address in internet dot notation (e.g. 47.82.45.10). For no change
enter <cr>:
13
To configure or change a default gateway IP address, type the IP
address in the proper format and press [Return]. If no modification or
configuration is required, simply press [Return].
Figure 105
Subnet mask prompt
Saving default gateway IP address:
If you would like a default subnet mask configured or changed,
please enter the subnet mask (e.g. 255.255.0.0). For no change enter <cr>:
14
To configure or change a default subnet mask, type the subnet mask
address in decimal format and press [Return]. If no modification or
configuration is required, simply press [Return].
Figure 106
List verification prompt
Saving default subnet mask:
The following applications are configured:
Meridian Link
Large CCR
The following packages are configured:
1
96
97
98
99
100
101
Ethernet NSE software is enabled.
Is this correct (y/n/q)?
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
392 Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures
Procedure 1: Application configuration and start-up (continued)
The system lists the application or applications installed.
Note: Figure 106 only shows applications that have been selected;
they are actually enabled when the system reboots at the end of this
procedure.
15
The system prompts you to verify that the list is correct.
To check that the correct application has, or applications have, been
activated, refer to the checklist (Table 17) you completed in the ÒIPE
Module and Application Module: Meridian Link/CCR softwareÓ
section in Chapter 6, ÒSite survey/installation checklist.Ó
If the list is incorrect, type n and press [Return]. You are returned to
step 6. Rekey your Meridian ID and keycode. If the list of
applications is still incorrect, type q and press [Return]. The
message ÒSoftware not configuredÓ appears. Call your Nortel
support personnel for a new keycode.
If the list is correct, type y and press [Return].
If you did not purchase CCR or NSE, go to step 21.
If you did not purchase CCR but you have enabled NSE, go to step
17. For more information about Ethernet connections, refer to
ÒInstalling Ethernet LAN supportÓ in Chapter 9, ÒMeridian Link/CCR
interface cabling.Ó
If you have purchased CCR, go to step 16.
Figure 107
CCR customer number prompt
Please enter the CCR customer number (0-99):
16
You are prompted to enter your CCR customer number (Figure 138).
Type the number and press [Return].
Note: A two-minute pause occurs at this point before the following
messages appear.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures 393
Procedure 1: Application configuration and start-up (continued)
Figure 108
Ethernet connection prompt
Installing NSE R3V7.1. Please wait.
Is your module connected to the Ethernet (y/n) ?
17
You are asked whether your Application Module or IPE Module is
connected to Ethernet (Figure 108).
For more information about Ethernet connections, refer to Chapter 9,
ÒMeridian Link/CCR interface cablingÓ.
If your module is not connected to Ethernet, type n and press
[Return]. Go to step 21.
If you are connected to Ethernet and you plan to use it in the near
future, type y and press [Return]. You see a message asking you to
wait. Then you see more installation messages (Figure 109). Go to
step 18.
If you are connected to Ethernet but do not plan to use it in the near
future, you may choose to type n and press [Return]. Disabling
Ethernet support increases the processing power available to your
application(s). Go to step 21.
ATTENTION
If you disable Ethernet support, you must perform a complete
reinstallation of the base operating system and application(s) before
you can reenable Ethernet support.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
394 Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures
Procedure 1: Application configuration and start-up (continued)
Figure 109
Software install messages
Configuring your system for NSE. Please wait.
/usr/src/uts/m68k/sysgen/sysgen -l /usr/src/uts/m68k/sysgen -big
make -f io.mk MAKE=make FRC= DASHG= DASHO=-O INCRT=/usr/include
LIBDIR=../cf SYS= CFLAGS= -O -I/usr/include -DLAI -DINKERNE
L -DSTREAMS -DBRIDGE CPU=m68k CC=/bin/pcc/cc
make -f scsi.mk "MAKE=make" "CC=/bin/pcc/cc" "FRC=" "INCRT=/usr/include"
"DASHO=-O" "CFLAGS=-O -I/usr/include -DLAI -DINKER
.
.
.
Warning: ./config.h: 358: NBLK4 redefined
rm -f sysV68 sysV68.nm
ld -o sysV68 ld.VME131 m68kvec.o low.o conf.o lib.io lib.ml lib.os
lib.s5 lib.bpp lib.fpack lib.nosrc lib.fpsp lib.du lib.tc
pip lib.nfs lib.bppv2 lib.c37x lib.kdb lib.lnc lib.nsedebug lib.sbc lib.scsi
lib.wan lib.x25 lib.stub lib.io lib.ml lib.os
lib.s5 lib.bpp lib.fpack lib.nosrc lib.fpsp lib.du lib.tcpip lib.nfs lib.bppv2
lib.c37x lib.kdb lib.lnc lib.nsedebug lib.sbc lib.scs
i lib.wan lib.x25 lib.stub
mcs -da "SYSTEM V/68 - R3V7" sysV68
chmod 755 sysV68
../kdb/kdbnm -q sysV68
../kdb/kdbnm: not enough space for symbol table
../kdb/kdbnm: need total of 145908 bytes at k_symtab
../kdb/kdbnm: 135168 bytes were reserved for symbols, 135168 bytes were used
sysV68 made.
Figure 110
Module name prompt
ADD MODULE NAME AND ADDRESS TO TCPIP TRANSPORT PROVIDER DATABASE
If you are not sure how to answer any prompt, type Ò?Ó for HELP.
Your moduleÕs system is currently the default name. We recommend that you change
it to avoid possible name conflicts.
Enter the MODULE NAME to be added to the tcpip transport provider database
(?, or module name):
18
You are prompted for the name of the Application Module or
IPE Module. (The term Òmodule nameÓ refers to an Ethernet host
computer, which in this case is the Application Module or IPE
Module.) Type the module name and press [Return]. The module
name must not exceed eight alphanumeric characters. For more
information about module names, consult your network
administrator.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures 395
Procedure 1: Application configuration and start-up (continued)
Figure 111
Module address prompt
Enter the MODULE ADDRESS to be added to the tcpip transport provider database
(?, or module address):
19
You are prompted for the address of the Application Module or IPE
Module (Figure 142). Type the module address and press [Return].
The module address must be four numbers separated by periods,
such as Ò12.234.67.89Ó. For more information about module
addresses, consult your network administrator.
Figure 112
Reenter prompt
If you made any mistakes in entering the module name and IP address, you can
correct them. Would you like to re-enter the module name or IP address? [y,n]:
20
You are asked whether you want to reenter the module name or
address (Figure 112).
If you have not made a mistake, type n and press [Return]. Go to
step 21.
If you want to reenter the module name and address, type y and
press [Return]; you will return to step 18.
Figure 113
Reboot prompt
Entry for <module name> with address <address> added to tcpip transport provider
database.
Now your system has been modified. You must reboot the system to have the new
kernel take effect.
Would you like to reboot the system now (y/n) ?
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
396 Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures
Procedure 1: Application configuration and start-up (continued)
21
You are prompted to reboot the system (Figure 144). Type y and
press [Return].
The appearance of the ÒConsole Login:Ó prompt indicates that the
new package is now installed. You may now log in to the system to
perform other commands. You may also restore configuration files
and data files from backup if necessary (Procedure 8: Restore
configuration files and data files from the backup tape).
22
For security, change the maint and other appropriate passwords. To
do this, log in as maint. The default password is maint.
The prompts are shown in Figure 114 with your input in bold.
Substitute your password for the xxxxx.
Figure 114
Change password prompts
maint> chgpasswd
These login IDs may be changed:
maint
mlusr
ccrusr
Enter userÕs login ID [?, q]:
New password: xxxxx
maint
Re-enter new password: xxxxx
Do you want to change the password on
another login? [y, n, q] n
23
If you have just installed a new IPE Module or Application Module,
go to Chapter 15, ÒLink configurationÓ to continue the configuration
and start-up process.
If you have just added Meridian Link Release 5C or CCR
Release 3C, you can now use it.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures 397
Procedure 2: Start the update process
This procedure describes how to begin the update process. If you intend to
back up your configuration files and data files, ensure that you have a blank
write-enabled tape available before you start this procedure. If you do not
intend to back up your configuration files and data files, start at step 4.
1
2
Log in as maint. The default password is maint.
Use the backdata command to back up all configuration files and
data files (see Procedure 11: Back up configuration files and data
files).
3
Type install and press [Return].
Figure 115
Install command prompt
You can reconfigure the system using a keycode without a tape or you can use a
tape to upgrade the software and reconfigure. Do you want to use a tape (y/n/q)?
4
You are prompted to use a tape (Figure 115). Type y and press
[Return].
Figure 116
Drive selection menu
Select which drive to use:
1 ctape
2 diskette1
3 hddiskette1
Enter a number, a name, the initial part of a name, or
? for HELP, q to QUIT:
5
At the drive selection menu, type 1 and press [Return] to select the
cassette tape drive.
The message shown in Figure 117 appears.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
398 Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures
Procedure 2: Start the update process (continued)
Figure 117
Tape insertion message screen
Insert the removable medium for the package you want to install
into the ctape drive.
Press <RETURN> when ready. Type q to quit.
At this point the system is ready to be updated from a tape.
Note: Procedure 3 describes how to load the application software
from tape. Procedures 5 and 6 describe how to load the BOS from
tape, depending on whether your Application Module is equipped with
an MVME147 or an MVME167 SBC card.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures 399
Procedure 3: Load application software from tape
This procedure describes how to insert the tape cartridge and load the
application software. The procedure assumes you have just performed
Procedure 2 to start the update process.
CAUTION
Risk of accidental overwriting of data on tape
The application tape cartridge must be write-protected
before you insert it into the tape drive.
!
Figure 118 shows the write-protect tab position for the software tape
cartridge. If the tape is held upright, the tab is located on the top right.
Figure 118
Write-protecting the cartridge tape
Top view of tape
Write-protected tab position
Front view of tape
(the front is the side with the
Meridian 1 software label)
This side in
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
400 Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures
Procedure 3: Load application software from tape (continued)
1
Insert the tape (marked Tape 2 of 2) into the tape drive as shown in
Figure 119.
Ensure that the tape drive latch (if present) is fully closed after the
tape is inside. Once the tape is inserted correctly and the latch
completely closed, the tape active indicator light will come on briefly,
flicker a few times, then go out again.
Figure 119
Inserting cassette tape in tape drive
IPE Module drive
Application Module drive
Arrow
points in
Application tape
T a p e 2 o f 2
T h i s s i d e i n
Notch
points down
Lock the tape drive latch
after tape is inserted
Eject
button
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures 401
Procedure 3: Load application software from tape (continued)
ATTENTION
Do not attempt to press a keyboard key until the tape active indicator
light goes from on to off and stays off. The tape drive can enter a
nonoperational state if operations are attempted before the drive is
completely ready.
2
3
When the tape indicator light is off, press [Return] to start the
auto-loading of the application software.
After a few moments a message appears, saying ÒInstalling Meridian
Applications. Press <RETURN> to continue, type q to quit.Ó
Press [Return].
Figure 120 shows software install messages. If an error occurs,
contact your Nortel support personnel.
Figure 120
Software install messages 1
170 blocks
Preparing for installation. Please wait.
10 blocks
30 blocks
7780 blocks
1100 blocks
110 blocks
1080 blocks
2080 blocks
430 blocks
11000 blocks
11320 blocks
.
(A series of messages appear on the screen.)
.
Installation Complete.
Host based X.25 is installed.
Setting file permissions and ownerships. Please wait.
Setting file permissions and ownerships completed.
06/01/94 19:56:44 Invoking maint
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
402 Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures
Procedure 3: Load application software from tape (continued)
Figure 121
Meridian 1 ID prompt
Please enter the Meridian 1 ID of this site:
(or Q or q to quit)
4
You are prompted to enter your Meridian 1 ID (Figure 121). Type
your ID and press [Return].
Note: If you make a mistake while typing your Meridian ID or
keycode, do not try to backspace and correct the error. Instead,
continue until step 13, where you will be able to type n, press [Return],
and return to step 4.
Note: Input for the Meridian ID is case sensitive; input for the keycode
is not case sensitive.
Figure 122
Keycode prompt 1
Please enter your key code (5 groups of 4 characters):
Keycode group 1 (or Q or q to quit):
5
You are prompted to enter your keycode (Figure 122). Type the first
fours-character group of your keycode and press [Return].
Figure 123
Keycode prompt 2
Keycode group 2 (or Q or q to quit):
6
You are prompted for the second group of keycode characters
(Figure 123). Type the second group and press [Return].
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures 403
Procedure 3: Load application software from tape (continued)
Figure 124
Keycode prompt 3
Keycode group 3 (or Q or q to quit):
7
You are prompted for the third group of keycode characters
(Figure 124). Type the third group and press [Return].
Figure 125
Keycode prompt 4
Keycode group 4 (or Q or q to quit):
8
You are prompted for the fourth group of keycode characters
(Figure 125). Type the fourth group and press [Return].
Figure 126
Keycode prompt 5
Keycode group 5 (or Q or q to quit):
9
You are prompted for the fifth group of keycode characters
(Figure 126). Type the fifth group and press [Return].
A list of configured applications appears.
Note: Optional feature prompts will not appear if the features were not
configured in the keycode. For example, if Meridian Link was not
purchased, the prompts in Figures 127, 128, and 129 will not appear.
Figure 127
Meridian Link protocol prompt
Please enter the Meridian Link protocol, x for X.25, <cr> for TCP/IP):
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
404 Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures
Procedure 3: Load application software from tape (continued)
10
If you are activating the Meridian Link application, you are prompted
to enter the Meridian Link protocol.
If you are using the X.25 protocol, type x, press [Return], then go to
step 13.
If you are using the TCP/IP protocol, press [Return], then go to
step 11.
Figure 128
IP address prompt
Meridian Link using a TCP/IP connection.
If you would like a default gateway IP address configured or changed, please
enter the IP address in internet dot notation (e.g. 47.82.45.10). For no change
enter <cr>:
11
To configure or change a default gateway IP address, type the IP
address in the proper format and press [Return]. If no modification or
configuration is required, simply press [Return].
Figure 129
Subnet mask prompt
Saving default gateway IP address:
If you would like a default subnet mask configured or changed,
please enter the subnet mask (e.g. 255.255.0.0). For no change enter <cr>:
12
To configure or change a default subnet mask, type the subnet mask
address in decimal format and press [Return]. If no modification or
configuration is required, simply press [Return].
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures 405
Procedure 3: Load application software from tape (continued)
Figure 130
List verification prompt
Saving default subnet mask:
The following applications are configured:
Meridian Link
Large CCR
The following packages are configured:
1
96
97
98
99
100
101
Ethernet NSE software is enabled.
Is this correct (y/n/q)?
The system lists the application or applications installed.
Note: Figure 130 only shows applications that have been selected;
they are actually enabled when the system reboots at the end of this
procedure.
13
The system prompts you to verify that the list is correct.
To check that the correct application has, or applications have, been
activated, refer to the checklist (Table 17) you completed in the ÒIPE
Module and Application Module: Meridian Link/CCR softwareÓ
section in Chapter 6, ÒSite survey/installation checklist.Ó
If the list is incorrect, type n and press [Return]. You are returned to
step 4. Rekey your Meridian ID and keycode. If the list of
applications is still incorrect, type q and press [Return]. The
message ÒSoftware not configuredÓ appears. Call your Nortel
support personnel for a new keycode.
If the list is correct, type y and press [Return].
If you did not purchase CCR or NSE, go to step 20.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
406 Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures
Procedure 3: Load application software from tape (continued)
If you did not purchase CCR but you have enabled NSE, go to step
16. For more information about Ethernet connections, refer to
ÒInstalling Ethernet LAN supportÓ in the ÒMeridian Link/CCR interface
cabling.Ó
If you have purchased CCR, go to step 14.
Figure 131
CCR customer number prompt
Please enter the CCR customer number (0-99):
14
You are prompted to enter your customer number (Figure 131). Type
the customer number and press [Return].
Note: A two-minute pause occurs at this point before the following
messages appear.
Figure 132
Ethernet connection prompt
Installing NSE R3V7.1. Please wait.
Is your module connected to the Ethernet (y/n) ?
15
You are asked whether your Application Module or IPE Module is
connected to Ethernet (Figure 132).
For more information about Ethernet connections, refer to Chapter 9,
ÒMeridian Link/CCR interface cabling.Ó
If your module is not connected to Ethernet, type n and press
[Return]. Go to step 19.
If you are connected to Ethernet and you plan to use it in the near
future, type y and press [Return]. You see a message asking you to
wait. Then you see more installation messages (Figure 133). Go to
step 16.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures 407
Procedure 3: Load application software from tape (continued)
If you are connected to Ethernet but do not plan to use it in the near
future, you may choose to type n and press [Return]. Disabling
Ethernet support increases the processing power available to your
application(s). Go to step 19.
ATTENTION
If you disable Ethernet support, you must perform a complete
reinstallation of the base operating system and application(s) before
you can reenable Ethernet support.
Figure 133
Software install messages 2
Configuring your system for NSE. Please wait.
/usr/src/uts/m68k/sysgen/sysgen -l /usr/src/uts/m68k/sysgen -big
make -f io.mk MAKE=make FRC= DASHG= DASHO=-O INCRT=/usr/include
LIBDIR=../cf SYS= CFLAGS= -O -I/usr/include -DLAI -DINKERNE
L -DSTREAMS -DBRIDGE CPU=m68k CC=/bin/pcc/cc
make -f scsi.mk "MAKE=make" "CC=/bin/pcc/cc" "FRC=" "INCRT=/usr/include"
"DASHO=-O" "CFLAGS=-O -I/usr/include -DLAI -DINKER
.
.
.
Warning: ./config.h: 358: NBLK4 redefined
rm -f sysV68 sysV68.nm
ld -o sysV68 ld.VME131 m68kvec.o low.o conf.o lib.io lib.ml lib.os
lib.s5 lib.bpp lib.fpack lib.nosrc lib.fpsp lib.du lib.tc
pip lib.nfs lib.bppv2 lib.c37x lib.kdb lib.lnc lib.nsedebug lib.sbc lib.scsi
lib.wan lib.x25 lib.stub lib.io lib.ml lib.os
lib.s5 lib.bpp lib.fpack lib.nosrc lib.fpsp lib.du lib.tcpip lib.nfs lib.bppv2
lib.c37x lib.kdb lib.lnc lib.nsedebug lib.sbc lib.scs
i lib.wan lib.x25 lib.stub
mcs -da "SYSTEM V/68 - R3V7" sysV68
chmod 755 sysV68
../kdb/kdbnm -q sysV68
../kdb/kdbnm: not enough space for symbol table
../kdb/kdbnm: need total of 145908 bytes at k_symtab
../kdb/kdbnm: 135168 bytes were reserved for symbols, 135168 bytes were used
sysV68 made.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
408 Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures
Procedure 3: Load application software from tape (continued)
Figure 134
Module name prompt
ADD MODULE NAME AND ADDRESS TO TCPIP TRANSPORT PROVIDER DATABASE
If you are not sure how to answer any prompt, type Ò?Ó for HELP.
Your moduleÕs system is currently the default name. We recommend that you change
it to avoid possible name conflicts.
Enter the MODULE NAME to be added to the tcpip transport provider database
(?, or module name):
16
You are prompted for the name of the Application Module or
IPE Module (Figure 134). (The term Òmodule nameÓ refers to an
Ethernet host computer, which in this case is the Application Module
or IPE Module.) Type the module name and press [Return]. The
module name must not exceed eight alphanumeric characters. For
more information about module names, consult your network
administrator.
Figure 135
Module address prompt
Enter the MODULE ADDRESS to be added to the tcpip transport provider database
(?, or module address):
17
You are prompted for the address of the Application Module or IPE
Module (Figure 135). Type the module address and press [Return].
The module address must be four numbers separated by periods,
such as Ò12.234.67.89Ó. For more information about module
addresses, consult your network administrator.
Figure 136
Reenter prompt
If you made any mistakes in entering the module name and IP address, you can
correct them. Would you like to re-enter the module name or IP address? [y,n]:
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures 409
Procedure 3: Load application software from tape (continued)
18
You are asked whether you want to reenter the module name or
address (Figure 136).
If you have not made a mistake, type n and press [Return]. Go to
step 19.
If you want to reenter the module name and address, type y and
press [Return]; you will return to step 16.
Figure 137
Reboot prompt
Entry for <module name> with address <address> added to tcpip transport provider
database.
Now your system has been modified. You must reboot the system to have the new
kernel take effect.
Would you like to reboot the system now (y/n) ?
19
You are prompted to reboot the system (Figure 137). Type y and
press [Return].
Figure 138
Reboot messages 1
INIT: New run level: 6
The system is coming down. Please wait.
System services are now being stopped.
Terminating Applications
/usr/bin/maint: /dev/tty: cannot create
cron aborted: SIGTERM
The system is down.
NOTICE: System Reboot Requested (0)
The system clears and the following messages appear:
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
410 Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures
Procedure 3: Load application software from tape (continued)
Figure 139
Reboot messages 2
Copyright Motorola Inc. 1988 - 1992, All Rights Reserved
M4120 Debugger/Diagnostics Release Version 1.1 - 09/30/92 (IR01)
COLD Start
Local Memory Found =01000000 (&16777216)
MPU Clock Speed =25Mhz
Autoboot in progress... To abort hit <BREAK>
Booting from: M4120, Controller 0, Drive 0
Loading: Operating System
.
(diagnostic messages)
.
Initializing For Applications
Configure Link 0 : successful
Configure Link 1 : successful
Configure Link 2 : successful
Enable Link 0 : successful
Enable Link 1 : successful
Enable Link 2 : successful
Application release successful
Starting Applications
06/01/94 20:55:53 Starting CCR Application...
Starting Customer Controlled Routing Processes...
Performing modem reset...
Connected
Sending atz
to the device.
Done modem reset.
The system is ready.
Console Login:
20
Remove the application tape from the cassette tape drive.
The appearance of the ÒConsole Login:Ó prompt indicates that the
new package is now installed. You may now log in to the system to
perform other commands. You may also restore configuration files
and data files from backup if necessary (Procedure 8: Restore
configuration files and data files from the backup tape).
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures 411
Procedure 4: Power down the IPE Module or the Application
Module
1
2
3
At the ÒConsole Login:Ó prompt, type maint and press [Return].
At the ÒpasswordÓ prompt, type maint and press [Return].
At the ÒmaintÓ prompt, type powerdown and press [Return].
Figure 140
Powerdown notification message screen 1
maint> powerdown
Would you like to power down or reboot?
Powering down allows you to turn the system off.
Rebooting will automatically restart the system.
Enter p to power down, r to reboot, or q to quit:
4
When prompted to power down, reboot, or quit, type p, and press
[Return] to confirm that you wish to power down.
The information shown in Figure 141 appears on the screen.
Figure 141
Powerdown notification message screen 2
Running subcommand /powerdown/ from menu /machinemgmt/
MACHINE MANAGEMENT
Note: If more than one user is logged into the system, a list of the
logged in users will appear on the screen.
Users currently logged in:
disttech
disttech
Once started, a powerdown CANNOT BE STOPPED.
console
ttya0
Oct
Oct
7 16:48
4 17:10
(telesrvr)
Do you want to start an express powerdown? [y, n, ?, q]
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
412 Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures
Procedure 4: Power down the IPE Module or the Application Module
(continued)
5
If software users are logged in, a list appears. Whether a list appears
or not, you are prompted to start an express powerdown. If no list
appears, or if you do not wish to alert all logged-in users, type y and
press [Return].
If you wish to alert all users currently logged into the system of the
powerdown, type n and press [Return]. If you do, you are prompted
to enter the number of seconds the system should wait after the
warning message. Type the number of seconds that will allow the
users to save their work and log off. Then press [Return].
The information shown in Figure 142 appears on the screen.
Figure 142
Shutdown message screen
Shutdown started.
Broadcast Message from root (console) on sysV68
THE SYSTEM IS BEING SHUTDOWN NOW! ! !
Log off now or risk you files being damaged.
INIT: New run level: 0
The system is coming down. Please wait.
System services are now being stopped.
Terminating applications
Releasing Communication Resources...
The system is down.
NOTICE: System Halt Requested (0)
NOTICE: System secured for powering down.
6
7
When the system confirms that it is secured for powering down, set
the Application Module circuit breaker to OFF or press the power
pushbutton on the IPE Module.
If your system uses an Application Module with an MVME147 card,
go to Procedure 5.
If your system uses an IPE Module or an Application Module with an
MVME167 card, go to Procedure 6.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures 413
Procedure 5: Load the operating system tape on an
Application Module with an MVME147 card
This procedure assumes that you have backed up all files and have powered
down the Application Module (Procedure 4).
ATTENTION
Do not press the [Backspace] or [Delete] key when the operating
system is not installed, or you may drop out of the procedure into a
previous menu or out of the installation procedure altogether. Use #
(hold the [Shift] key and press 3) to backspace.
If you drop out of the procedure (into the Ò#Ó prompt), start the
reinstallation procedure from the beginning.
Note: If you intend to activate CCR and use terminals or printers,
ensure that the MVME332XT or MVME332XTS card is installed
before you start this procedure.
If you are sure that your MVME147 card has been configured (for example,
if you are upgrading software on a working system), skip steps 3Ð13 and go
directly from step 2 to step 14.
1
Set the appropriate breaker on the MPDU to the ON position.
The following messages appear.
Figure 143
System restart messages (MVME147 card)
Copyright Motorola Inc. 1989,1990,1991, All Rights Reserved
VME147 Monitor/Debugger Release 2.42 - 8/1/91
CPU running at 25 MHz
FPC passed test
MMU passed test
COLD Start
Onboard RAM start = $00000000, stop = $007FFFFF
No offboard RAM detected
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
414 Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures
Procedure 5: Load the operating system tape on an Application Module
with an MVME147 card (continued)
2
3
Type h immediately, before the next prompt appears. (You have
about five seconds to do this.)
Write down the firmware release listed on the second message line.
Figure 143, for example, shows Release 2.42. You will need this in
step 12.
Figure 144
Start-up interrupt menu
1) Continue System Start-up
2) Select Alternate Boot Device
3) Go To System Debugger
4) Initiate Service Call
5) Display System Test Errors
6) Dump Memory to Tape
Enter Menu #:
4
5
The menu in Figure 144 appears. Type 3 and press [Return] to enter
the system debugger.
At the Ò147-Diag>Ó prompt, type iot;t and press [Return].
The system performs a scan of disk/tape controllers (Figure 145).
Figure 145
Results of disk/tape controller scan
Scanning system for available disk/tape controllers........
Disk Controllers Available
LUN
0
1
Type
Address
# dev
VME147 $FFFE4000
VME147 $FFFE4000
VME147 $FFFE4000
1
1
*
SCSI Addr = 0 - FUJITSU M2614S
SCSI Addr = 4 - TEAC MT-2ST/N50 RV F
SCSI Addr = 7
M606
Align LUNs to SCSI addresses [Y,N] N?
6
7
Write down the type of disk drive installed in SCSI address 0. This
information is required later in the procedure. (In the example shown
above, the drive is a Fujitsu M2614S.)
You are prompted to align LUNs. Type y and press [Return].
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures 415
Procedure 5: Load the operating system tape on an Application Module
with an MVME147 card (continued)
Figure 146
Disk/tape controller list after aligning LUNs
Disk Controllers Available
LUN
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Type
Address # dev
VME147 $FFFE4000
VME147 $FFFE4000
VME147 $FFFE4000
VME147 $FFFE4000
VME147 $FFFE4000
VME147 $FFFE4000
VME147 $FFFE4000
VME147 $FFFE4000
1 SCSI Addr = 0 - FUJITSU M2614S
1 SCSI Addr = 1
1 SCSI Addr = 2
M606
1 SCSI Addr = 3
1 SCSI Addr = 4 - TEAC MT-2ST/N50 RV F
1 SCSI Addr = 5
1 SCSI Addr = 6
* SCSI Addr = 7
Save map in NVRAM [Y,N] N?
8
9
The LUN results appear (Figure 146). Type y and press [Return] to
save the map in non-volatile memory.
The 147-Diag> prompt reappears. Type ab and press [Return] to set
autoboot enable.
Autoboot enable prompts appear. Answer them as indicated below.
Figure 147
Autoboot enable prompts
Controller LUN = 00? <cr>
Device LUN = 00? <cr>
Default String = ? <cr>
Boot at Power-up only or any board Reset [P,R] = R? <cr>
On any board Reset:
Auto Boot from Controller 0, Device 0
10
At the Ò147-Diag>Ó prompt, type reset and press [Return].
The SCSI bus reset prompts appear. Answer them as indicated in
the following figure.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
416 Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures
Procedure 5: Load the operating system tape on an Application Module
with an MVME147 card (continued)
Figure 148
SCSI bus reset prompts
Reset Local SCSI Bus (Y, N) N? y <cr>
Automatic reset of known SCSI Buses on RESET (Y, N) = Y? <cr>
Cold/Warm Reset flag (C, W) = C? <cr>
Execute Soft Reset (Y, N) N? <cr>
11
12
When the Ò147-Diag>Ó prompt appears, type env and press [Return].
The environment prompts appear.
Answer the prompts as indicated in Figures 149, 150, or 151,
depending on the firmware installed in your system. The firmware
release appeared in the start-up messages shown in step 3.
Figure 149
Environment prompts for firmware revision 2.2
Bug or System environment [B,S] = S? <cr>
SYSTEM V/68 or VERSAdos operating system [S,V] = S? <cr>
Execute/Bypass SST Memory test [E,B] = E? b <cr>
Set VME Chip:
Board ID [0-FF] = $00? <cr>
GCSR base address [0-0F] = $0F? <cr>
Utility Interrupt Mask [0-FE] = $00? <cr>
Utility Interrupt Vector [$20-$30] = $0180? <cr>
Figure 150
Environment prompts for firmware revision 2.3
Bug or System environment [B,S] = S? <cr>
Execute/Bypass System Memory Sizing [E,B] = B? <cr>
Execute/Bypass SST Memory test [E,B] = B? <cr>
Set VME Chip:
Board ID(def is 0) [0-FF] = $00? <cr>
GCSR base address offset(def is 0F) [0-0F] = $0F? <cr>
Utility Interrupt Mask(def is 0) [0-FE] = $00? <cr>
Utility Interrupt Vector number(def is 60) [8-F8] = $60? <cr>
VMEbus Interrupt Mask(def is FE) [0-FE] = $FE? <cr>
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures 417
Procedure 5: Load the operating system tape on an Application Module
with an MVME147 card (continued)
Figure 151
Environment prompts for firmware revision 2.42
Bug or System environment [B,S] = S? <cr>
Execute/Bypass System Memory Sizing [E,B] = B? <cr>
Execute/Bypass SST Memory test [E,B] = B? <cr>
Set VME Chip:
Board ID(def is 0) [0-FF] = $00? <cr>
GCSR base address offset(def is 0F) [0-0F] = $0F? <cr>
Utility Interrupt Mask(def is 0) [0-FE] = $00? <cr>
Utility Interrupt Vector number(def is 60) [8-F8] = $60? <cr>
VMEbus Interrupt Mask(def is FE) [0-FE] = $FE? <cr>
VMEbus Requester Level (def is 0) [0-3] = 00? <cr>
VMEbus Requester Release (def is ROR) [ROR, RWD, NVR] = ROR? <cr>
Depending on the previous configuration, the system will reboot
automatically or display the Ò147-Diag>Ó prompt.
13
14
If the system reboots automatically at this point, type h as soon as
messages begin to appear on the console.
If the system displays the Ò147-Diag>Ó prompt, type menu then
press [Return].
In either case, the start-up interrupt menu appears.
Insert the BOS tape System V/68 BOS R3V7.1 into the tape drive.
The tape indicator light comes on, flashes, and then goes off. Wait
for the tape indicator light to turn off before proceeding to the next
step.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
418 Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures
Procedure 5: Load the operating system tape on an Application Module
with an MVME147 card (continued)
Figure 152
Insert tape into the tape drive
Arrow
points in
Tape drive
BOS installation tape
T a p e 1 o f 2
T h i s s i d e i n
Notch
points down
Lock the tape door
after tape is inserted.
Tape drive latch
Figure 153
Start-up interrupt menu
1) Continue System Start-up
2) Select Alternate Boot Device
3) Go To System Debugger
4) Initiate Service Call
5) Display System Test Errors
6) Dump Memory to Tape
Enter Menu #:
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures 419
Procedure 5: Load the operating system tape on an Application Module
with an MVME147 card (continued)
15
16
When the tape indicator goes off, type 2 and press [Return].
You are prompted to enter the alternate boot device. Type 4, and
press [Return].
17
When the start-up interrupt menu reappears, type 1 and press
[Return] to continue the system start-up.
The system starts up. A series of test messages will appear on one
line across the screen for approximately ten minutes. The system
start-up messages begin to appear as shown in the following figure.
Figure 154
System start-up messages
Testing Complete
Autoboot in progress ... To abort hit <BREAK>
RAM address from VMEbus = $00000000
Booting from: VME147, Controller 4, Device 0
Loading: Operating System
Volume: V/68
IPL loaded at: $001F0000
MVMETAPE IPL Version 1.0
***********************************************************************
System V/68 Release R3V7 M68030 Version 920526
Real mem = 6291456
Avail mem = 4964352
Buffers
= 60
***********************************************************************
Copyright (c) 1984-1992 Motorola Inc. All rights reserved
INIT: SINGLE USER MODE
***
erase = # kill = @ intr = DEL quit = ^|
***
147 SCSI configuration
Device
-------
Disk
Addr Vers Revision Seria Blocks
---- ---- -------- ------- ------- ---- ------------------------
00 0001 M606... ....... 0352175 0512 FUJITSU M2614S
40 0001 RV F... ....... 0000000 0000 TEAC MT-2ST/N50
Size Vendor Description
Tape
Enter the correct date and time EST using one of the following formats
[mmddhhmmyy] or [mmddhhmmyyyy]:
18
Type the date in the form MMDDHHMMYY (month, date, hour in
24-hour clock format, minute, yearÑnote that the time should be in
Eastern Standard Time), or MMDDHHMMYYYY, and press [Return].
Example: 0314163098 or 031416301998
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
420 Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures
Procedure 5: Load the operating system tape on an Application Module
with an MVME147 card (continued)
ATTENTION
During the installation or start-up of BOS, different characters than
usual represent the character delete, line delete, and interrupt functions.
During these operations,
¥ character delete (backspace), usually [Control-h], is [#]
¥ line delete, usually [Control-u], is [@]
¥ interrupt, usually [Control-c], is Delete
If you make a mistake entering the date, use [#] to delete characters.
If you press [Delete], a Ò#Ó prompt appears; press [Control-d] to return
to where you were.
19
You are prompted to confirm the date you entered. Type y and press
[Return] if the date is correct.
If the date is not correct, type n and press [Return]. You are then
prompted to enter each value.
When you enter the date successfully and respond y to the prompt,
the BOS software management menu appears.
Figure 155
BOS software management menu
The BOS (FE03.71) Software Management Menu
1 install
2 upgrade
Install FE03.71 BOS Software
Upgrade To FE03.71 BOS Software
---> Enter a number, a name, the initial part of name, or
? or <number>? for HELP, q to QUIT:
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures 421
Procedure 5: Load the operating system tape on an Application Module
with an MVME147 card (continued)
20
Type 1 and press [Return] to install the software.
The BOS installation procedure begins.
Figure 156
BOS installation, phase 1
BOS INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
Phase 1. Identify Root And Usr File Systems Installation Disk Drive(s)
The BOS product supports root and usr file system installations
on the disk controllers listed below. The first column is the controllerÕs
selection number, the second column is the name of the controller, and,
the third column is a brief description of the controller. Identify
at the prompt the root file systemÕs installation disk controller type.
1 MVME147
2 MVME167
3 MVME323
4 MVME327
5 MVME328
The MVME147 CPU Processor/SCSI Controller
The MVME167 CPU Processor/SCSI Controller
The MVME323 ESDI Disk Controller
The MVME327 SCSI Bus Controller
The MVME328 SCSI Host Adapter
---> Enter a number, a name, the initial part of a name, or
? or <number>? for HELP, or q to QUIT [MVME167]:
21
When prompted to select the SBC card, type 1 and press [Return].
The system response is ÒSelected the ÔMVME147Õ controller type.Ó
Figure 157
Disk drive number prompt
---> Enter the root file systemÕs disk drive number
(00, 10, 20, 30, ?, q) [00]:
22
You are prompted to enter the root file systemÕs disk drive number.
Press [Return] to select the default disk drive number (00).
The disk drive selection list appears.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
422 Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures
Procedure 5: Load the operating system tape on an Application Module
with an MVME147 card (continued)
Figure 158
Disk drive selection list
The MVME147 CPU Processor/SCSI Controller may be used to install
the BOS product on the following disk drive types.
The first column is the selection number, the second is the disk type
name (see the disk types associated with the ddefs(1M) utility), and
the third briefly describes the specific disk drive type:
1 m147cdcIV
2 m147cdcIII
3 m147sea80
4 m147cdcV
5 m147cdcVII
6 m147swift126
7 m147swift201
8 m147fuji2613
9 m147fuji2614
10 m147fuji2624
11 m147fuji2622
12 m147fuji2652
13 m147fuji2694
14 m147micr1578
15 m147micr1588
16 m147micr1598
17 m147sea3283
Seagate/CDC WREN IV 300Mb Disk (94171/MVME875)
Seagate/CDC WREN III 150Mb Disk (94161/MVME874)
Seagate ST-296N 80Mb Disk (ST296N/M MVME873)
Seagate/CDC WREN V 600Mb Disk (94181/MVME876)
Seagate/CDC WREN VII 1.2 GB Disk (94601/MVME877)
Seagate/CDC Swift 104 MB Disk (94351-126/MVME863)
Seagate/CDC Swift 172 MB Disk (94351-200S/MVME864)
Fujitsu Pico Bird 3E 135Mb Disk (2613ESA/MVME863)
Fujitsu Pico Bird 3E 180Mb Disk (2614ESA/MVME864)
Fujitsu Pico Bird 4 500Mb Disk (2624SA/MVME866)
Fujitsu Pico Bird 4 300Mb Disk (2622SA/MVME865)
Fujitsu Super Humming Bird 1.75 Gb Disk (2652SA/MVME878)
Fujitsu Pico Bird 5 1 Gb Disk (2694SA/MVME867)
MICROPOLIS 300Mb Disk (1578)
MICROPOLIS 600Mb Disk (1588)
MICROPOLIS 1Gb Disk (1598)
Seagate 240 Megabyte Disk (ST3283N)
---> Enter a number, a name, the initial part of a name, or
? or <number>? for HELP, or q to QUIT [m147cdcIV]:
You noted the disk type for your system in step 6. (See Figure 145
for an example.) Most of the disk drives shown in the above figure
are not used by Nortel. Some common disk types used by Nortel
and their corresponding selection numbers are listed in the table
below.
Note: If your drive is not listed, but another drive of the same size is
listed, use the option number for the listed drive. If you experience
difficulties, contact your Nortel support personnel.
Disk types used
Select this number
CDC ST1126N 9204 (104 Mbyte)
CDC ST1201N (172 Mbyte)
Fujitsu M2614S (180 Mbyte)
Seagate ST3283N (240 Mbyte)
6
7
9
17
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures 423
Procedure 5: Load the operating system tape on an Application Module
with an MVME147 card (continued)
23
Type the number corresponding to your disk drive, and press
[Return].
The system response is ÒSelected the XXXX disk type,Ó where XXXX
represents the disk type selected.
Figure 159
Format disk drive prompt
If the root file systemÕs disk is new or needs to be formatted,
it can be formatted now. In order for you to take advantage of
dynamic disk slicing capabilities and the use of the
sledit(1M) utility you may have to reformat the disk if it
was formatted with the R3V3 or earlier version of
the BOS disk formatter, dinit(1M).
WARNING - FORMATTING THE DISK WILL DESTROY ALL DATA ON THE DISK.
---> Format the root file systemÕs disk drive (y, n, ?, q) [n]:
24
You are prompted to format the root file systemÕs disk drive. Type y
and press [Return] to indicate that you wish to format the drive.
Figure 160
Same disk drive prompt
The usr file system is often on the same disk drive as
the root file system, but not always. The following
questions determine where to install the usr file system.
---> Will the root and usr file systems be
on the same disk drive? (y, n, ?, q) [y]:
25
You are prompted to indicate whether or not the root and user file
systems will be on the same disk drive. Type y and press [Return] to
indicate yes.
Figure 161
Slice number prompt
The default usr file system slice number for the MVME147
controller is slice number 2, but it may be changed.
Enter below, the slice number where the usr file system is to be installed.
---> Enter the slice number for the usr file system (0-6, ?, q) [2]:
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
424 Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures
Procedure 5: Load the operating system tape on an Application Module
with an MVME147 card (continued)
26
You are prompted to enter the user file system slice number. Press
[Return] to use the default slice number (2).
Phase 2 of the BOS installation begins, and the slice table appears.
Figures 162Ð165 show disk-slicing tables for four different drive
types.
Figure 162
Disk-slicing table for 104-Mbyte disk drive
Phase 2. Configure Root And Usr File-Systems And Swap Area
Check the following slicing information for the root file systemÕs disk
drive; indicate below whether you wish to modify this information:
slice
offset sl size fs size fsname vol-id info
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
648
40648
60648
40000
20000
148484 148484 usr
40000
0
root
R3
1
1h8
1
1h8
1h8
1h8
1h8
1h8
R3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
209132 0
---> Modify any of these parameters? (y, n, ?, q): [n]
Figure 163
Disk-slicing table for 172-Mbyte disk drive
Phase 2. Configure Root And Usr File-Systems And Swap Area
Check the following slicing information for the root file systemÕs disk
drive; indicate below whether you wish to modify this information:
slice
offset
648
60648
100648
280648
0
0
0
0
sl size
60000
40000
180000
54827
0
fs size
60000
0
180000
0
0
0
0
0
fsname
root
vol-id
R3
K
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
usr R3
0
0
335475
---> Modify any of these parameters? (y, n, ?, q): [n]
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures 425
Procedure 5: Load the operating system tape on an Application Module
with an MVME147 card (continued)
Figure 164
Disk-slicing table for 180-Mbyte disk drive
slice
offset sl size fs size fsname vol-id info
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
648
60648
100648 180000 180000 usr
60000
40000
60000
0
root
R3
1
1h8
1
1h8
1h8
1h8
1h8
1h8
R3
280648 71528
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
352176 0
---> Modify any of these parameters? (y, n, ?, q): [n]
Figure 165
Disk-slicing table for 240-Mbyte disk drive
slice
offset sl size fs size fsname vol-id info
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
648
60648
100648 378000 378000 usr
60000
40000
60000
0
root
R3
1
1h8
1
1h8
1h8
1h8
1h8
1h8
R3
478648 142
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
478800 0
---> Modify any of these parameters? (y, n, ?, q): [n]
27
You are prompted to modify the parameters. Type n and press
[Return] to indicate that you donÕt wish to modify any parameters.
Figure 166
Install OLMP prompt
---> Install On-line Manual Pages Object Package (OLMP)? (y, n, ?, q) [n]:
28
You are prompted to indicate whether you wish to install online
manual pages. Type y and press [Return] to indicate yes.
Figure 167
Install TARS prompt
---> Install On-line Problem Descriptions (Tars on Tape)? (y, n, ?, q) [n]:
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
426 Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures
Procedure 5: Load the operating system tape on an Application Module
with an MVME147 card (continued)
29
You are prompted to indicate whether you wish to install online
problem descriptions. Nortel does not use these descriptions. Type n
and press [Return] to indicate no.
Figure 168
Verify installation prompt
---> Do you want to verify correct installation? (y, n, q) [y]:
30
You are prompted to verify correct installation. Press [Return] to
indicate yes.
Confirmation of your selection appears, along with a summary of the
installation information. The summary should look exactly as in
Figure 169, with the possible exception of the disk drive entry
(Ôm147fuj2614Õ).
Figure 169
Software installation summary
Selected to run mkcomply to verify correct installation.
Check the information below. If any part of the information is incorrect,
the previous questions will have to be answered again.
* Format and install the new bootloader on the MVME147,
controller #0, disk drive #00,
using the ddefs(1M) description Ôm147fuj2614Õ.
* Create a root file system using 1 Kbyte logical blocks
on slice 0 on the MVME147, controller #0, disk drive #00.
* Create a swap area in slice 1 on the
MVME147, controller #0, disk drive #00.
* Create a usr file system using 1 Kbyte logical blocks
on slice 2 on the MVME147, controller #0, disk drive #00.
* Install On-line Manual Pages Object Package (OLMP).
* Do Not Install On-line Problem Descriptions (Tars on Tape)
---> Is all of this information correct (y, n, q, ?):
31
If the summary information is correct, type y and press [Return]. If it
is not correct, type n, press [Return], and then enter the information
correctly when prompted.
When the information is correct and you reply y to the above prompt,
phases 3 and 4 of the installation begin.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures 427
Procedure 5: Load the operating system tape on an Application Module
with an MVME147 card (continued)
Note: Phases 3 and 4 may take from 30 to 90 minutes to complete.
Figure 170
BOS installation, phases 3 and 4
***> Checking tape in drive
Phase 3. Prepare Installation Disk Drive(s)
***> Retensioning tape (in background)
***> Formatting root file systemÕs disk drive
***> Writing slice table to /dev/rdsk/m147_00s7
***> Creating the root file system
***> Labeling the root file system
***> Creating the usr file system
***> Labeling the usr file system
***> Installing boot-loader on root file systemÕs disk drive
***> Mounting root file system as /root
***> Making the /tmp directory
***> Making the /usr directory
***> Mounting usr file system as /root/usr
Phase 4. Install BOS Software
***> Waiting for tape to complete retensioning
***> Copying files; this will take from 10-35 minutes
depending upon your system configuration...
70240 blocks
1200 blocks
10960 blocks
40 blocks
***> Making the root file system lost+found directory
Reserving 160 entries
***> Making the usr file system lost+found directory
Reserving 480 entries
***> Installing /etc/badtracks/m147_00 bad spot list
***> Creating sysadm(1M) package information file
***> Setting up the new operating system
***> Creating root and usr file system associated device nodes
***> Setting permissions on installation diskÕs root directory
***> Running mkcomply to confirm correct installation
***> Setting rootÕs password entry
New password:
32
33
At the ÒNew Password:Ó prompt, press [Return].
The system responds with ÒRe-enter new password:.Ó
Press [Return] again.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
428 Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures
Procedure 5: Load the operating system tape on an Application Module
with an MVME147 card (continued)
Figure 171
BOS installation, completion
Re-enter new password:
***> Unmounting all mounted file systems
***> Synchronizing the installation disk
BOS product installation is completed.
You must RESET the system and allow it to autoboot from the hard disk
.
**************************
**** RESET THE SYSTEM ****
**************************
34
Remove the BOS tape from the drive.
Note: Procedure 6 is for the IPE Module or MVME167 card.
Proceed with Procedure 7 and go through the setup.
35
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures 429
Procedure 6: Load the operating system tape on an IPE
Module or an Application Module with an MVME167 card
If you have just installed a new MVME167 card in an Application Module
and you are installing the software for the first time, you need to do steps
2Ð6. Otherwise, skip these five steps.
Note: If you intend to activate CCR and use terminals or printers,
ensure that the MVME332XT or MVME332XTS card is installed
before you start this procedure.
This procedure assumes that you have backed up all files and have powered
down the IPE Module or the Application Module (Procedure 4).
1
Turn on the power. If the Ò167-Diag>Ó or the Ò167-Bug>Ó prompt
appears, go to step 5. If the Ò4120-Diag>Ó or the Ò4120-Bug>Ó prompt
appears, go to step 4. If the following messages appear on the
console, go to step 2.
Figure 172
System restart messages (IPE Module or MVME167 card)
Copyright Motorola Inc. 1988 - 1992, All Rights Reserved
VME167 Debugger/Diagnostics Release Version 1.4 - 07/22/92
COLD Start
Local Memory Found = 00800000 (&8388608)
MPU Clock Speed = 25Mhz
2
3
Type h as soon as messages start to appear. If you are too late,
press either the [F5] or the [Break] key.
The start-up interrupt menu appears.
If you are using an IPE Module, go to step 4.
If you are using a new MVME167 card, go to step 5.
If you are using a previously configured MVME167 card, go to
step 7.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
430 Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures
Procedure 6: Load the operating system tape on an IPE Module or an
Application Module with an MVME167 card (continued)
4
At the Ò4120-Diag>Ó or Ò4120-Bug>Ó prompt, type env and press
[Return].
The environment prompts appear. Answer them as indicated in the
following figure. Then go to step 6.
Figure 173
Environment prompts (IPE Module)
Bug or System environment [B/S] = B? <cr>
Field Service Menu Enable [Y/N] = N? <cr>
Probe System for Supported I/O Controllers [Y/N] = Y? <cr>
Local SCSI Bus Reset on Debugger Startup [Y/N] = Y? <cr>
Ignore CFGA Block on a Hard Disk Boot [Y/N] = Y? <cr>
Auto Boot Enable [Y/N]
Auto Boot at power-up only [Y/N] = N? <cr>
Auto Boot Controller LUN = 00? . <cr>
= Y? <cr>
(Type a period and press
[Return].)
If you make a mistake, quit the process by entering a period (.) at a
prompt and answering n for the last two questions (Update Non-
Volatile RAM/Reset Local System). This brings you back to the Ò167-
Diag>Ó or Ò4120-Diag>Ó prompt. Then type env;d and press [Return]
to undo the mistakes you made and bring back the original default
values.
Note: At the ÒAuto Boot Controller LUN=00?Ó prompt, type a period
and press [Return] to bypass additional prompts that do not need to be
changed.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures 431
Procedure 6: Load the operating system tape on an IPE Module or an
Application Module with an MVME167 card (continued)
Note: If you changed or reentered any values in Figure 173, you will
see two additional prompts, to which you should respond as shown in
the following figure.
Figure 174
Additional prompts (IPE Module)
Update Non-Volatile RAM (Y/N)? y <cr>
Reset Local System (CPU) (Y/N)? y <cr>
5
At the Ò167-Diag>Ó prompt, type env and press [Return].
The environment prompts appear. Answer them as indicated in the
following figures. Then go to step 6.
If you make a mistake, quit the process by entering a period (.) at a
prompt and answering n for the last two questions (Update Non-
Volatile RAM/Reset Local System). This brings you back to the
Ò167-Diag>Ó prompt. Then type env;d and press [Return] to undo the
mistakes you made and bring back the original default values.
Note: At the ÒAuto Boot Controller LUN=00?Ó prompt, type a period
and press [Return] to bypass additional prompts that do not need to be
changed.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
432 Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures
Procedure 6: Load the operating system tape on an IPE Module or an
Application Module with an MVME167 card (continued)
Figure 175
Environment prompts (MVME167 card)
Bug or System environment [B/S] = S? <cr>
Field Service Menu Enable [Y/N] = Y? <cr>
Remote Start Method Switch [G/M/B/N] = B? <cr>
Probe System for Supported I/O Controllers [Y/N] = Y? <cr>
Negate VMEbus SYSFAIL* Always [Y/N] = N? <cr>
Local SCSI Bus Reset on Debugger Start-up [Y/N] = Y? <cr>
Local SCSI Bus Negotiations Type [A/S/N] = A? <cr>
Note: The prompt ÒLocal SCSI Bus Negotiations TypeÓ may not
appear for all MVME167 cards.
Ignore CFGA Block on a Hard Disk Boot [Y/N] = Y? <cr>
Auto Boot Enable [Y/N] = Y? <cr>
Auto Boot at power-up only [Y/N] = N? <cr>
Auto Boot Controller LUN = 00? . <cr> (Type a period and press [Return].)
Note: If you changed or reentered any values in Figure 175, you will
see two additional prompts, to which you should respond as shown in
the following figure.
Figure 176
Additional prompts (MVME167 card)
Update Non-Volatile RAM (Y/N)? y <cr>
Reset Local System (CPU) (Y/N)? y <cr>
6
The system reboots automatically. Messages start to appear on the
console. Type h as soon as messages start appearing on the
console.
The start-up interrupt menu appears.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures 433
Procedure 6: Load the operating system tape on an IPE Module or an
Application Module with an MVME167 card (continued)
Note: If the Ò167-Diag>Ó, Ò4120-Diag>Ó or Ò4120-Bug>Ó prompt
appears, type menu and press [Return].
Figure 177
Start-up interrupt menu
1) Continue System Startup
2) Select Alternate Boot Device
3) Go to System Debugger
4) Initiate Service Call
5) Display System Test Errors
6) Dump Memory to Tape
Enter Menu #:
7
Insert the base operating system tape (tape 1 of 2, System V/68
BOS R3V7.1) into the tape drive.
The tape indicator light comes on, flashes, and then goes off. Wait
for the tape indicator light to turn off before proceeding to the next
step.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
434 Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures
Procedure 6: Load the operating system tape on an IPE Module or an
Application Module with an MVME167 card (continued)
Figure 178
Insert tape into the tape drive
IPE Module drive
Application Module drive
Arrow
points in
BOS installation tape
T a p e 1 o f 2
T h i s s i d e i n
Notch
points down
Lock the tape drive latch
after tape is inserted
Eject
button
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures 435
Procedure 6: Load the operating system tape on an IPE Module or an
Application Module with an MVME167 card (continued)
8
Type 2 and press [Return].
Figure 179
Alternate boot device prompt
Alternate Boot Device (Controller,Drive,File): 0,0,
Change it (Y/N)?
9
You are prompted to change the alternate boot device. Type y and
press [Return].
Figure 180
Controller prompt
Enter Alternate Boot Device:
Controller:
10
You are prompted to enter the controller number. Type 0 and press
[Return].
Figure 181
Drive prompt
Drive
:
11
You are prompted to enter the drive number. Type 40 and press
[Return].
Figure 182
File prompt
File
:
12
You are prompted to enter the file name. Press [Return].
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
436 Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures
Procedure 6: Load the operating system tape on an IPE Module or an
Application Module with an MVME167 card (continued)
Figure 183
Continue start-up prompt
Continue System Start Up (Y/N)?
13
You are prompted to continue start-up. Type y and press [Return].
Note: It is normal for the Fail indicator on the SBC card to flash while
diagnostics are being run (after power-on or during rebooting).
A series of test messages will appear on one line across the screen
for approximately ten minutes. The system start-up messages begin
to appear as shown in the following figure.
Figure 184
System start-up messages
Testing Complete
Autoboot in progress ... To abort hit <BREAK>
Booting from: VME167, Controller 0, Drive 40
Loading: Operating System
Volume: V/68
IPL loaded at: $001F0000
MVMETAPE IPL Version 1.0
***********************************************************************
System V/68 Release R3V7 M68040 Version 920526
Real mem = 6291456
Avail mem = 4956160
Buffers
= 60
***********************************************************************
Copyright (c) 1984-1992 Motorola Inc. All rights reserved
INIT: SINGLE USER MODE
***
erase = # kill = @ intr = DEL quit = ^|
***
167 SCSI configuration
Device
-------
Addr Vers Revision Serial# Blocks Size Vendor Description
---- ---- -------- ------- ------- ---- -------------------
Disk
Tape
00 0002 9324... ....... 0478845 0512 SEAGATE ST3283N
40 0001 RV F... ....... 0000000 0000 TEAC
MT-2ST/N50
Enter the correct date and time EST using one of the following formats
[mmddhhmmyy] or [mmddhhmmyyyy]:
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures 437
Procedure 6: Load the operating system tape on an IPE Module or an
Application Module with an MVME167 card (continued)
14
15
Write down the vendor and description of the disk drive installed in
SCSI address 00. This information is required later in the procedure.
(In the example shown above, the drive is a SEAGATE ST3283N.)
Type the date in the form MMDDHHMMYY (month, date, hour in
24-hour clock format, minute, yearÑnote that the time should be
Eastern Standard Time), or MMDDHHMMYYYY, and press [Return].
Example: 0314163098 or 031416301998
ATTENTION
During the installation or start-up of BOS, different characters than
usual represent the character delete, line delete, and interrupt functions.
During these operations,
¥ character delete (backspace), usually [Control-h], is [#]
¥ line delete, usually [Control-u], is [@]
¥ interrupt, usually [Control-c], is Delete
If you make a mistake entering the date, use [#] to delete characters.
If you press [Delete], a Ò#Ó prompt appears; press [Control-d] to return
to where you were.
16
You are prompted to confirm the date you entered. Type y and press
[Return].
If the date is not correct, type n and press [Return]. You are then
prompted to enter the date, as in step 15.
When you enter the date successfully and respond y to the prompt,
the BOS software management menu appears (Figure 185).
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
438 Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures
Procedure 6: Load the operating system tape on an IPE Module or an
Application Module with an MVME167 card (continued)
Figure 185
BOS software management menu
The BOS (FE03.71) Software Management Menu
1 install
2 upgrade
Install FE03.71 BOS Software
Upgrade To FE03.71 BOS Software
---> Enter a number, a name, the initial part of name, or
? or <number>? for HELP, q to QUIT:
17
At the software management menu, type 1 and press [Return] to
install the software.
The BOS installation procedure begins.
Figure 186
BOS installation, phase 1
Phase 1. Identify Root And Usr File Systems Installation Disk Drive(s)
The BOS product supports root and usr file system installations
on the disk controllers listed below. The first column is the controllerÕs
selection number, the second column is the name of the controller, and,
the third column is a brief description of the controller. Identify
at the prompt the root file systemÕs installation disk controller type.
1 MVME147
2 MVME167
3 MVME323
4 MVME327
5 MVME328
The MVME147 CPU Processor/SCSI Controller
The MVME167 CPU Processor/SCSI Controller
The MVME323 ESDI Disk Controller
The MVME327 SCSI Bus Controller
The MVME328 SCSI Host Adapter
---> Enter a number, a name, the initial part of a name, or
? or <number>? for HELP, or q to QUIT [MVME167]:
18
The system prompts you to select the disk controller. Whether you
have an IPE Module or an Application Module, type 2 and press
[Return] to select the MVME167 SBC card (this option supports both
the IPE Module and the Application Module with an MVME167 card).
The system response is ÒSelected the ÔMVME167Õ controller type.Ó
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures 439
Procedure 6: Load the operating system tape on an IPE Module or an
Application Module with an MVME167 card (continued)
Figure 187
Disk drive number prompt
Selected MVME167 controller number 0.
This is the only controller number for the MVME167 controller
supported by the BOS product.
---> Enter the root file systemÕs disk drive number
(00, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, ?, q) [00]:
19
You are prompted to enter the root file systemÕs disk drive number.
Press [Return] to enter the default disk drive number (00).
The disk drive selection list appears.
Figure 188
List of disk drive types
Selected default disk drive number '00'.
The MVME167 CPU Processor/SCSI Controller may be used to install
the BOS product on the following disk drive types.
The first column is the selection number, the second is the disk type
name (see the disk types associated with the ddefs(1M) utility), and
the third briefly describes the specific disk drive type:
1 mcdcIV
2 mcdcV
3 mcdcVII
4 mcdcIII
Seagate/CDC WREN IV 300Mb Disk (94171/MVME875)
Seagate/CDC WREN V 600Mb Disk (94181/MVME876)
Seagate/CDC WREN VII 1.2 GB Disk (94601/MVME877)
Seagate/CDC WREN III 150Mb Disk (94161/MVME874)
Fujitsu Pico Bird 3E 135Mb Disk (2613ESA/MVME863)
Fujitsu Pico Bird 3E 180Mb Disk (2614ESA/MVME864)
Fujitsu Pico Bird 4 500Mb Disk (2624SA/MVME866)
Seagate/CDC Swift 104 MB Disk (94351-126/MVME863)
Seagate/CDC Swift 172 MB Disk (94351-200S/MVME864)
Fujitsu Super Humming Bird 1.75 Gb Disk (2652SA/MVME878)
Fujitsu Pico Bird 5 1 Gb Disk (2694SA/MVME867)
Fujitsu Pico Bird 4 300Mb Disk (2622SA/MVME865)
MICROPOLIS 300Mb Disk (1578)
5 mfuji2613
6 mfuji2614
7 mfuji2624
8 m147swift126
9 m147swift201
10 mfuji2652
11 mfuji2694
12 mfuji2622
13 mmicr1578
14 mmicr1588
15 mmicr1598
16 m147sea3283
MICROPOLIS 600Mb Disk (1588)
MICROPOLIS 1Gb Disk (1598)
Seagate 240 Megabyte Disk (ST3283N)
---> Enter a number, a name, the initial part of a name, or
? or <number>? for HELP, or q to QUIT [mcdcIV]:
You noted the disk type for your system in step 14. (See Figure 184
for an example.) Most of the disk drives in the above figure are not
used by Nortel. Some common disk types used by Nortel and their
corresponding selection numbers are listed in the table below.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
440 Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures
Procedure 6: Load the operating system tape on an IPE Module or an
Application Module with an MVME167 card (continued)
Note: If your drive does not appear in Figure 184, but another drive of
the same size is listed, use the option number for the listed drive.
Alternatively, choose option 6 for M2614S, or option 16 for ST3283N.
Although options 8, 9, and 16 start with the prefix Òm147,Ó these
options are also applicable to IPE Modules and Application Modules
with MVME167 cards. If you experience difficulties, contact your Nortel
support personnel.
Disk types used
Select this number
CDC ST1126N 9204 (104 Mbyte)
CDC ST1201N (172 Mbyte)
Fujitsu M2614S (180 Mbyte)
Seagate ST3283N (240 Mbyte)
8
9
6
16
20
For this example, the m147sea3283 disk drive is being used. Type
16 and press [Return].
The system response is: ÒSelected the XXXX disk type,Ó where
XXXX represents the disk type selected.
Figure 189
Format disk drive prompt
Selected the Ôm147sea3283Õ disk type.
If the root file systemÕs disk is new or needs to be formatted,
it can be formatted now. In order for you to take advantage of
dynamic disk slicing capabilities and the use of the
sledit(1M) utility you may have to reformat the disk if it
was formatted with the R3V3 or earlier version of
the BOS disk formatter, dinit(1M).
WARNING - FORMATTING THE DISK WILL DESTROY ALL DATA ON THE DISK.
---> Format the root file systemÕs disk drive (y, n, ?, q) [n]:
21
You are prompted to format the root file systemÕs disk drive. Type y
and press [Return] to indicate that you wish to format the drive.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures 441
Procedure 6: Load the operating system tape on an IPE Module or an
Application Module with an MVME167 card (continued)
Figure 190
Same disk drive prompt
The usr file system is often on the same disk drive as
the root file system, but not always. The following
questions determine where to install the usr file system.
---> Will the root and usr file systems be
on the same disk drive? (y, n, ?, q) [y]:
22
You are prompted to indicate whether or not the root and user file
systems will be on the same disk drive. Type y and press [Return] to
indicate yes.
Figure 191
Slice number prompt
The default usr file system slice number for the MVME167
controller is slice number 2, but it may be changed.
Enter below, the slice number where the usr file system is to be installed.
---> Enter the slice number for the usr file system (0-6, ?, q) [2]:
23
You are prompted to enter the user file system slice number. Press
[Return] to use the default slice number (2).
Phase 2 of the BOS installation begins, and the slice table appears.
Figures 192-195 show the slice tables for four different disk drives.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
442 Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures
Procedure 6: Load the operating system tape on an IPE Module or an
Application Module with an MVME167 card (continued)
Figure 192
Disk-slicing table for 104-Mbyte disk drive
Phase 2. Configure Root And Usr File-Systems And Swap Area
Check the following slicing information for the root file systemÕs disk
drive; indicate below whether you wish to modify this information:
slice
offset sl size fs size fsname vol-id info
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
648
40648
60648 148484
40000
20000
40000
0
148484 usr
0
0
0
0
root
R3
1
1h8
1
1h8
1h8
1h8
1h8
1h8
R3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
209132 0
---> Modify any of these parameters? (y, n, ?, q): [n]
Figure 193
Disk-slicing table for 172-Mbyte disk drive
Phase 2. Configure Root And Usr File-Systems And Swap Area
Check the following slicing information for the root file systemÕs disk
drive; indicate below whether you wish to modify this information:
slice
offset
648
60648
100648
280648
0
0
0
0
sl size
60000
40000
180000
54827
0
fs size
60000
0
180000
0
0
0
0
0
fsname
root
vol-id
R3
K
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
usr R3
0
0
335475
---> Modify any of these parameters? (y, n, ?, q): [n]
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures 443
Procedure 6: Load the operating system tape on an IPE Module or an
Application Module with an MVME167 card (continued)
Figure 194
Disk-slicing table for 180-Mbyte disk drive
Phase 2. Configure Root And Usr File-Systems And Swap Area
Check the following slicing information for the root file systemÕs disk
drive; indicate below whether you wish to modify this information:
slice
offset sl size fs size fsname vol-id info
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
648
60648
100648 180000 180000 usr
60000
40000
60000
0
root
R3
1
1h8
1
1h8
1h8
1h8
1h8
1h8
R3
280648 71528
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
352176 0
---> Modify any of these parameters? (y, n, ?, q): [n]
Figure 195
Disk-slicing table for 240-Mbyte disk drive
Phase 2. Configure Root And Usr File-Systems And Swap Area
Check the following slicing information for the root file systemÕs disk
drive; indicate below whether you wish to modify this information:
slice
offset sl size fs size fsname vol-id info
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
648
60648
100648 378000 378000 usr
60000
40000
60000
0
root
R3
1
1h8
1
1h8
1h8
1h8
1h8
1h8
R3
478648 142
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
478800 0
---> Modify any of these parameters? (y, n, ?, q): [n]
24
You are prompted to modify the parameters. Press [Return] to
indicate that you donÕt wish to change any parameters.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
444 Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures
Procedure 6: Load the operating system tape on an IPE Module or an
Application Module with an MVME167 card (continued)
Figure 196
Install OLMP prompt
---> Install On-line Manual Pages Object Package (OLMP)? (y, n, ?, q) [n]:
25
You are prompted to indicate whether you wish to install online
manual pages. Type y and press [Return] to indicate yes.
Figure 197
Install TARS prompt
---> Install On-line Problem Descriptions (Tars on Tape)? (y, n, ?, q) [n]:
26
You are prompted to indicate whether you wish to install online
problem descriptions. Nortel does not use these descriptions. Type n
and press [Return] to indicate no.
Figure 198
Verify installation prompt
---> Do you want to verify correct installation? (y, n, q) [y]:
27
You are prompted to indicate whether you wish to verify correct
installation. Press [Return] to indicate yes.
Confirmation of your selection appears, along with a summary of the
installation information. The summary should look exactly like the
one in Figure 199, with the possible exception of the disk drive entry
(Ôm147sea3283Õ).
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures 445
Procedure 6: Load the operating system tape on an IPE Module or an
Application Module with an MVME167 card (continued)
Figure 199
Software installation summary
Selected to run mkcomply to verify correct installation.
Check the information below. If any part of the information is incorrect,
the previous questions will have to be answered again.
* Format and install the new bootloader on the MVME167,
controller #0, disk drive #00,
using the ddefs(1M) description Ôm147sea3283Õ.
* Create a root file system using 1 Kbyte logical blocks
on slice 0 on the MVME167, controller #0, disk drive #00.
* Create a swap area in slice 1 on the
MVME167, controller #0, disk drive #00.
* Create a usr file system using 1 Kbyte logical blocks
on slice 2 on the MVME167, controller #0, disk drive #00.
* Install On-line Manual Pages Object Package (OLMP).
* Do Not Install On-line Problem Descriptions (Tars on Tape)
---> Is all of this information correct (y, n, q, ?):
28
If the summary information is correct, type y and press [Return]. If it
is not correct, type n, press [Return], and then enter the information
correctly when prompted.
When the information is correct and you reply y to the above prompt,
phases 3 and 4 of the installation begin.
Note: Phases 3 and 4 may take from 30 to 90 minutes to complete.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
446 Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures
Procedure 6: Load the operating system tape on an IPE Module or an
Application Module with an MVME167 card (continued)
Figure 200
BOS installation, phases 3 and 4
***> Checking tape in drive
Phase 3. Prepare Installation Disk Drive(s)
***> Retensioning tape (in background)
***> Formatting root file systemÕs disk drive
***> Writing slice table to /dev/rdsk/m167_00s7
***> Creating the root file system
***> Labeling the root file system
***> Creating the usr file system
***> Labeling the usr file system
***> Installing boot-loader on root file systemÕs disk drive
***> Mounting root file system as /root
***> Making the /tmp directory
***> Making the /usr directory
***> Mounting usr file system as /root/usr
Phase 4. Install BOS Software
***> Waiting for tape to complete retensioning
***> Copying files; this will take from 10-35 minutes
depending upon your system configuration...
70240 blocks
1200 blocks
10960 blocks
***> Making the root file system lost+found directory
Reserving 160 entries
***> Making the usr file system lost+found directory
Reserving 960 entries
***> Installing /etc/badtracks/m167_00 bad spot list
***> Creating sysadm(1M) package information file
***> Setting up the new operating system
***> Creating root and usr file system associated device nodes
***> Setting permissions on installation diskÕs root directory
***> Running mkcomply to confirm correct installation
***> Setting rootÕs password entry
New password:
29
30
At the ÒNew password:Ó prompt, press [Return].
The system responds with ÒRe-enter new password:Ó
Press [Return] again.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures 447
Procedure 6: Load the operating system tape on an IPE Module or an
Application Module with an MVME167 card (continued)
Figure 201
BOS installation, completion
***> Unmounting all mounted file systems
***> Synchronizing the installation disk
BOS product installation is completed.
You must RESET the system and allow it to autoboot from the hard disk
**************************
**** RESET THE SYSTEM ****
**************************
31
32
Remove the operating system tape from the drive.
Proceed with Procedure 7 and go through the setup.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
448 Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures
Procedure 7: Reboot and go through setup
If you have just installed the operating system tape, ensure that you perform
the following procedure before you load the application tape.
Note: If you are upgrading Meridian Link to co-residency and your
Application Module needs an MVME332 ACC card, ensure that you
have installed the ACC card before starting this procedure (refer to
Procedure 29: Installing MVME332XT or MVME332XTS ACC card,
in Chapter 17, ÒHardware upgradeÓ).
1
Press the red RESET button on the MVME147 or MVME167 SBC
card or the IPE Module.
System start-up messages appear on the system console (see
Figures 202 and 203).
Figure 202
MVME147 Application Module start-up messages
Copyright Motorola Inc. 1989,1990, All Rights Reserved
VME147 Monitor/Debugger Release 2.42 - 08/01/91
CPU running at 25 MHz
FPC passed test
MMU passed test
COLD Start
Onboard RAM start = $00000000, stop = $007FFFFF
No offboard RAM detected
Figure 203
IPE Module or MVME167 Application Module start-up messages
Copyright Motorola Inc. 1988 - 1992, All Rights Reserved
MVME167 Debugger/Diagnostics Release Version 1.4 - 07/22/92
COLD Start
Local Memory Found =00800000 (&8388608)
MPU Clock Speed =25Mhz
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures 449
Procedure 7: Reboot and go through setup (continued)
The autoboot process then starts. Autoboot messages for the IPE
Module or MVME167 card are shown in Figures 204 and 205.
Messages for the MVME147 card are similar.
A series of test messages appear on one line across the screen for
approximately ten minutes, then the system start-up messages
appear.
Figure 204
System autoboot messages 1
Testing Complete
Autoboot in progress ... To abort hit <BREAK>
Booting from: VME167, Controller 0, Drive 40
Loading: Operating System
Volume: V/68
IPL loaded at: $001F0000
MVMETAPE IPL Version 1.0
***********************************************************************
System V/68 Release R3V7 M68040 Version 920526
Real mem = 6291456
Avail mem = 4956160
Buffers
= 60
***********************************************************************
Copyright (c) 1984-1992 Motorola Inc. All rights reserved
INIT: SINGLE USER MODE
***
erase = # kill = @ intr = DEL quit = ^|
***
167 SCSI configuration
Device
-------
Addr Vers Revision Serial# Blocks Size Vendor Description
---- ---- -------- ------- ------- ---- -------------------
Disk
Tape
Enter <cr> to pause in a single user shell before init.
00 0002 9324... ....... 0478845 0512 SEAGATE ST3283N
40 0001 RV F... ....... 0000000 0000 TEAC
MT-2ST/N50
Default boot sequence continuing...
The system is coming up. Please wait.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
450 Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures
Procedure 7: Reboot and go through setup (continued)
Figure 205
System autoboot messages 2
This machine has not been used as a customer machine yet. The messages that
follow are from checking the built-in file systems for damage that might have
occurred during shipment. As long as you do not see either of the messages
BOOT SYSV68
or
FILE SYSTEM WAS MODIFIED
all is well. If either message does come out, call your service representative.
However, the machine is still usable unless you are told otherwise.
Checking file systems:
/dev/root
File System: root Volume: R3
** Phase 1 - Check Blocks and Sizes
** Phase 2 - Check Pathnames
** Phase 3 - Check Connectivity
** Phase 4 - Check Reference Counts
** Phase 5 - Check Free List
1992 files 27376 blocks 31684 free
/dev/usr
File System: usr Volume: R3
** Phase 1 - Check Blocks and Sizes
** Phase 2 - Check Pathnames
** Phase 3 - Check Connectivity
** Phase 4 - Check Reference Counts
** Phase 5 - Check Free List
2861 files 44730 blocks 327360 free
Node name set to sysV68.
Welcome!
This machine has to be set up by you. When you see the "login" message type
setup
followed by the RETURN key. This will start a procedure that leads you through
those things that should be done the "first time" the machine is used.
Until you do so, the above filesystem shipment damage check will be run
each time you boot.
mount -f S51K /dev/usr /usr
Checking for system dump ...
Expreserve notification performed.
Error logging started.
Stream Error logging started.
netspec "tcpip" not set up.
Line printer scheduler started.
The system is ready.
Console Login:
2
3
At the ÒConsole Login:Ó prompt, type root and press [Return] to log
in as the root user.
At the ÒPassword:Ó prompt, press [Return].
The root password is reset once the application is installed.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures 451
Procedure 7: Reboot and go through setup (continued)
4
At the Ò#Ó prompt, type portconfig -m and press [Return].
The following messages appear on your screen.
Figure 206
Portconfig warning
THIS WILL REMOVE EXISTING tty NODES IN Ô/devÕ AND
CREATE NEW ONES BASED ON THE DRIVERS CONFIGURED INTO THE
MOST RECENTLY BUILT KERNEL IN Ô/usr/src/uts/m68k/cfÕ AND THE CURRENT
HARDWARE CONFIGURATION. ARE YOU SURE THIS IS WHAT
YOU WANT TO DO?
(default = n) [y, n]:
5
6
If there is a tape in the drive, unlock the tape drive and remove the
tape.
Type y and press [Return].
The port configuration messages (shown in Figure 207) appear on
your screen.
Note: Figure 207 shows an entry about adding MVME167 controller
board entries. This is present even though the SBC card is an
MVME147 card or the module is an IPE Module, and is a result of the
software supporting the IPE Module and the MVME147 and MVME167
cards. Ignore the entry.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
452 Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures
Procedure 7: Reboot and go through setup (continued)
Figure 207
Portconfig messages
-----------------------------------------------
Found a vme332xt driver entry in /usr/src/uts/m68k/cf/master (major # 34)
Found a configured board (board 0)
Removing existing /dev/tty entries for module 1
rm -f /dev/tty1[0123456789]
Making tty entries for board 0
Ports appear on backpanel module 1/dev:
tty11 tty12 tty13 tty14 tty15 tty16 tty17 tty18 tty19
Adding m332xt Controller board 1 associated entries to /etc/inittab.
-----------------------------------------------
Found a m564 driver entry in /usr/src/uts/m68k/cf/master (major # 40)
-----------------------------------------------
Found a z8530 driver entry in /usr/src/uts/m68k/cf/master (major # 33)
Found a configured board (board 0)
-----------------------------------------------
Found a m681con driver entry in /usr/src/uts/m68k/cf/master (major # 42)
-----------------------------------------------
Found a c240con driver entry in /usr/src/uts/m68k/cf/master (major # 45)
Adding MVME167 Controller board associated entries to /etc/inittab.
----------------------------------------------
Removing /dev/tty entries for non-configured back panel modules:
rm -f /dev/tty2[123456789]
rm -f /dev/tty3[123456789]
rm -f /dev/tty4[123456789]
rm -f /dev/tty5[123456789]
rm -f /dev/tty6[123456789]
rm -f /dev/tty7[123456789]
rm -f /dev/tty8[123456789]
rm -f /dev/tty9[123456789]
----------------------------------------------
Use Ôsysadm ttymgmtÕ to turn these entries on in /etc/inittab
Current back panel layout should be as follows:
712/147
_________
| _ _ |
1437/332xt
| | | | | |
| | | | | |
| |_| |_| |
| tty cons|
| 02
| _
|
_ |
| | | | | |
| | | | | |
| |_| |_| |
| tty tty |
| 03 01 |
| _
_ |
| | | | | |
| |_| | | |
|ether|_| |
| net
|
|
_ |
| _ | | |
| | | | | |
| | | | | |
| |_| |_| |
| pr SCSI|
|_________|
#
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures 453
Procedure 7: Reboot and go through setup (continued)
7
At the Ò#Ó prompt, type setup and press [Return].
The setup procedure begins.
Figure 208
Time zone prompt
The first step is to set the timezone, date, and time of the system
clock.
Current time and time zone is: 12:37 EDT
Change the time zone? [y, n, ?, q]
8
You are prompted to change the time zone. Type in your response
(y if you wish to change the time zone, n if the time zone is already
correct) and press [Return].
If you typed n, go on to step 11 where youÕre prompted to change
the date and time. If you typed y, the time zone selection list
appears.
Figure 209
Time zone menu
Available time zones are...
1. Greenwich
(GMT)
2. Atlantic
3. Eastern
4. Central
5. Mountain
6. Pacific
7. Yukon
8. Alaska
9. Bering
10. Hawaii
(AST & ADT)
(EST & EDT)
(CST & CDT)
(MST & MDT)
(PST & PDT)
(YST & YDT)
(AST & ADT)
(BST & BDT)
(HST)
11. Middle European (MET)
12. East European (EET)
13. Set TZ variable for any other time zone info
Enter zone number:
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
454 Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures
Procedure 7: Reboot and go through setup (continued)
9
At the ÒEnter zone number:Ó prompt, type the number corresponding
to your time zone and press [Return].
If your time zone is not listed in time zones 1Ð12, type 13 and press
[Return]. You will see explanatory messages. At the ÒEnter 3-letter
time-zone-nameÓ prompt (Figure 210), type three letters to represent
your time zone and press [Return]. At the ÒEnter time difference from
GMTÓ prompt, type the difference between your local time and
Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). Use a minus if your time zone is west
of GMT.
Figure 210
Additional time zone menu
Enter 3-letter time-zone-name (a thru z or A thru Z)
Enter time difference from GMT (use Ò-Ó if west of GMT)
Figure 211
DST prompt
Does your time zone use Daylight Savings Time during the year? [y, n, ?, q]
10
You are prompted to indicate whether your time zone uses Daylight
Savings Time during the year. Type in your response (y if Daylight
Savings Time applies, n if it does not) and press [Return].
The system response reflects whether or not the Daylight Savings
Time selection was changed.
Figure 212
Date and time change prompt
Time zone now changed.
Note:
Any logins and processes running when the time zone changes, and
all their child processes, will continue to see the old time zone.
The cron will be restarted at the end of this procedure.
Current date and time: Tue. 06/29/93 09:37
Change the date and time? [y, n, ?, q]
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures 455
Procedure 7: Reboot and go through setup (continued)
11
You are prompted to change the date and time. If you do not wish to
change the date and time, type n, press [Return], and proceed to
step 17. If you wish to change the date and time, type y and press
[Return].
Figure 213
Month prompt
Month
default 06
(1-12):
12
When prompted, type the number corresponding to the current
month and press [Return].
Figure 214
Day prompt
Day
default 29
(1-31):
13
When prompted, type the day and press [Return].
Figure 215
Year prompt
Year
default 93
(70-99):
14
When prompted, type the year and press [Return].
Figure 216
Hour prompt
Hour
default 09
(0-23):
15
When prompted, type the hour and press [Return].
Figure 217
Minute prompt
Minute
default 37
(0-59):
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
456 Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures
Procedure 7: Reboot and go through setup (continued)
16
When prompted, type the minutes and press [Return].
Figure 218
Date and time set prompt
Date and time will be set to:
6/29/93 09:37. OK? [y, n, q]
17
You are prompted to confirm the date and time. Type y and press
[Return].
Once the application starts, the time will be set to the time on the
Meridian 1. The system response reflects any time or time zone
change with a Òcron abortedÓ message.
Figure 219
Time change confirmation
Sat Sep 18 11:19:00 EDT 1993
The date and time are now changed.
cron aborted: SIGTERM
The cron has been restarted to pick up the new time and/or time zone.
The next step is to set up logins.
The first one you make should be for yourself.
Anytime you want to quit, type "q".
If you are not sure how to answer any prompt, type "?" for help,
or see the AdministratorÕs Guide.
If a default appears in the question, press <RETURN> for the default.
Note: Ensure that you respond with q to the remaining prompts.
Entering any other data may prevent applications from functioning
properly.
Figure 220
UserÕs name prompt
Enter userÕs full name [?, q]:
18
You are prompted to enter a user login name. Type q and press
[Return].
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures 457
Procedure 7: Reboot and go through setup (continued)
Figure 221
Administrative passwords prompt
Do you want to give passwords to administrative logins? [y, n, ?, q]
19
You are prompted to give passwords to administrative logins. Type q
and press [Return].
Figure 222
Change system name prompt
This machine is currently called "sysV68".
Do you want to change it? [y, n, ?, q]
20
You are prompted to change the name of the system. For security
reasons, you should change the system name from the default,
sysV68. Type y and press [Return].
Figure 223
System name prompt
What name do you want to give it? [q]
21
You are prompted for the new system name. Type the new name
and press [Return]. Figure 224 appears.
Figure 224
Setup end message
This completes your initial setup of the machine. You may now log into your
login.
#
22
23
To install the application software, go to Procedure 8, step 3.
If you need to go to the ÒConsole Login:Ó prompt (for example, if you
are not installing Meridian Link or CCR immediately), type exit and
press [Return].
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
458 Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures
Procedure 8: Load the application software from tape
Before loading the application tape (labelled Tape 2 of 2), ensure that you
reboot and go through setup as described in Procedure 7. This procedure
assumes you are at the ÒConsole Login:Ó prompt. If you have just performed
Procedure 7, you may see the Ò#Ó prompt; if so, skip steps 1 and 2 and go to
step 3.
WARNING
If you plan to use Ethernet, ensure that your module is
connected to a working Ethernet backbone.
!
1
At the ÒConsole Login:Ó prompt, type root and press [Return] to log
in as the root user.
2
3
At the ÒPasswordÓ prompt, press [Return].
At the root shell prompt Ò#,Ó type sysadm and press [Return].
Figure 225
System administration menu
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION
1 diagnostics
2 diskmgmt
3 filemgmt
4 machinemgmt
5 packagemgmt
6 softwaremgmt
7 syssetup
system diagnostics menu
disk management menu
file management menu
machine management menu
package management menu
software management menu
system setup menu
8 ttymgmt
9 usermgmt
tty management menu
user management menu
Enter a number, a name, the initial part of a name, or
? or <number>? for HELP, q to QUIT:
4
At the system administration menu, type 6 and press [Return].
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures 459
Procedure 8: Load the application software from tape (continued)
Figure 226
Software management menu
SOFTWARE MANAGEMENT
1 installpkg
2 listpkg
3 removepkg
install new software package onto built-in disk
list packages already installed
remove previously installed package from built-in disk
Enter a number, a name, the initial part of a name, or
? or <number>? for HELP, q to QUIT:
5
At the software management menu, type 1 and press [Return] to
select the install option.
Figure 227
Drive selection menu
Select which drive to use:
1 ctape
2 diskette1
3 hddiskette1
Enter a number, a name, the initial part of a name, or
? for HELP, q to QUIT:
6
You are prompted to select a drive. Type 1 and press [Return] to
select the ctape (cassette tape) option.
Figure 228
Insert medium prompt
Insert the removable medium for the package you want to install
into the ctape drive.
Press <RETURN> when ready. Type q to quit.
7
You are prompted to insert the medium. Insert the application tape
(tape 2 of 2) into the tape drive and wait until the tape indicator light
turns off.
Once the tape is inserted correctly and the latch is completely
closed, the tape indicator light goes on, flashes briefly, then goes off
again. Wait until the light goes off before proceeding to the next step.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
460 Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures
Procedure 8: Load the application software from tape (continued)
Figure 229
Insert tape into the tape drive
IPE Module drive
Application Module drive
Arrow
points in
Application tape
T a p e 2 o f 2
T h i s s i d e i n
Notch
points down
Lock the tape drive latch
after tape is inserted
Eject
button
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures 461
Procedure 8: Load the application software from tape (continued)
WARNING
Risk of system interruption
Do not attempt to press a keyboard key until the tape
active indicator light goes from on to off and stays off.
The tape drive can enter a nonoperational state if
operations are attempted before the drive is completely
ready.
8
9
When the tape indicator light is off, press [Return] to start the auto-
loading of the application software.
The system response is ÒInstalling Meridian Applications.Ó
You are prompted to press [Return] to continue. Press [Return].
A series of software install messages appears for approximately ten
minutes (Figure 230). If an error occurs, contact your Nortel support
personnel.
Figure 230
Software install messages 1
190 blocks
Preparing for installation. Please wait.
Preparing for installation successful.
10 blocks
30 blocks
7780 blocks
1100 blocks
110 blocks
1080 blocks
2080 blocks
430 blocks
11000 blocks
11320 blocks
.
(A series of messages appears on the screen.)
.
Installation Complete.
Host based X.25 is installed.
Setting file permissions and ownerships. Please wait.
Setting file permissions and ownerships completed.
06/01/94 19:56:44 Invoking maint
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
462 Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures
Procedure 8: Load the application software from tape (continued)
Figure 231
Meridian 1 ID prompt
Please enter the Meridian 1 ID of this site:
(or Q or q to quit)
10
The system prompts you for the Meridian 1 ID. Type your ID and
press [Return].
Note: If you make a mistake while typing your Meridian 1 ID or
keycode, do not try to backspace and correct the error. Instead,
continue until step 19, where you will be able to type n, press [Return],
and return to step 10.
Note: Input for the Meridian 1 ID is case sensitive; input for the
keycode is not case sensitive.
Figure 232
Keycode prompt 1
Please enter your keycode (5 groups of 4 characters):
Keycode group 1 (or Q or q to quit):
11
The system prompts you for your keycode. Type the first four-
character group of your keycode and press [Return].
Figure 233
Keycode prompt 2
Keycode group 2 (or Q or q to quit):
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures 463
Procedure 8: Load the application software from tape (continued)
12
You are prompted for the second group of keycode characters. Type
the second group and press [Return].
Figure 234
Keycode prompt 3
Keycode group 3 (or Q or q to quit):
13
You are prompted for the third group of keycode characters. Type
the third group and press [Return].
Figure 235
Keycode prompt 4
Keycode group 4 (or Q or q to quit):
14
You are prompted for the fourth group of keycode characters. Type
the fourth group and press [Return].
Figure 236
Keycode prompt 5
Keycode group 5 (or Q or q to quit):
15
You are prompted for the fifth group of keycode characters. Type the
fifth group and press [Return].
A list of configured applications appears.
Note: Optional feature prompts will not appear if the features were not
configured in the keycode. For example, if Meridian Link was not
purchased, the prompts in Figures 237, 238, and 239 will not appear.
Figure 237
Meridian Link protocol prompt
Please enter the Meridian Link protocol, x for X.25, <cr> for TCP/IP):
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
464 Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures
Procedure 8: Load the application software from tape (continued)
16
If you are activating the Meridian Link application, you are prompted
to enter the Meridian Link protocol.
If you are using the X.25 protocol, type x, press [Return], then go to
step 19.
If you are using the TCP/IP protocol, press [Return], then go to
step 17.
Figure 238
IP address prompt
Meridian Link using a TCP/IP connection.
If you would like a default gateway IP address configured or changed, please
enter the IP address in internet dot notation (e.g. 47.82.45.10). For no change
enter <cr>:
17
To configure or change a default gateway IP address, type the IP
address in the decimal format and press [Return]. If no modification
or configuration is required, simply press [Return].
Figure 239
Subnet mask prompt
Saving default gateway IP address:
If you would like a default subnet mask configured or changed,
please enter the subnet mask (e.g. 255.255.0.0). For no change enter <cr>:
18
To configure or change a default subnet mask, type the subnet mask
address in decimal format and press [Return]. If no modification or
configuration is required, simply press [Return].
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures 465
Procedure 8: Load the application software from tape (continued)
Figure 240
List verification prompt
Saving default subnet mask:
The following applications are configured:
Meridian Link
Large CCR
The following packages are configured:
1
96
97
98
99
100
101
Ethernet NSE software is enabled.
Is this correct (y/n/q)?
The system lists the application or applications installed.
Note: Figure 240 only shows applications that have been selected;
they are actually enabled when the system reboots at the end of this
procedure.
To check that the correct application has, or applications have, been
installed, refer to the checklist (Table 17) you completed in the ÒIPE
Module and Application Module: Meridian Link/CCR softwareÓ
section in Chapter 6, ÒSite survey/installation checklist.Ó
19
The system prompts you to verify that the list is correct.
If the list is incorrect, type n and press [Return]. You are returned to
step 10. Rekey your Meridian ID and keycode. If the list of
applications is still incorrect, type q and press [Return]. The
message ÒSoftware not configuredÓ appears. Call your Nortel
support personnel for a new keycode.
If the list is correct, type y and press [Return].
If you did not purchase CCR or NSE, go to step 25.
If you did not purchase CCR but you have enabled NSE, go to step
21. For more information about Ethernet connections, refer to
ÒInstalling Ethernet LAN supportÓ in Chapter 9, ÒMeridian Link/CCR
interface cabling.Ó
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
466 Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures
Procedure 8: Load the application software from tape (continued)
If you have purchased CCR, go to step 20.
Figure 241
CCR customer number prompt
Please enter the CCR customer number (0-99):
20
You are prompted to enter your CCR customer number (Figure 241).
Type the number and press [Return].
Figure 242
Ethernet connection prompt
Installing NSE R3V7.1. Please wait.
Is your module connected to the Ethernet (y/n) ?
21
You are asked whether your IPE Module or Application Module is
connected to Ethernet (Figure 242).
Note: Your module must be connected to Ethernet before you type y.
For more information about Ethernet connections, refer to ÒInstalling
Ethernet LAN supportÓ in Chapter 9, ÒMeridian Link/CCR interface
cabling.Ó
If your module is not connected to Ethernet, type n and press
[Return]. Go to step 25.
If you are connected to Ethernet and you plan to use it in the near
future, type y and press [Return]. You see a message asking you to
wait. Then you see more installation messages (Figure 243). Go to
step 22.
If you are connected to Ethernet but do not plan to use it in the near
future, you may choose to type n and press [Return]. Disabling
Ethernet support increases the processing power available to your
application(s). Go to step 25.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures 467
Procedure 8: Load the application software from tape (continued)
ATTENTION
If you disable Ethernet support, you must perform a complete
reinstallation of the base operating system and application(s) before
you can reenable Ethernet support.
Note: A two-minute pause occurs at this point before the following
messages shown in Figure 243 appear.
Figure 243
Software install messages 2
Configuring your system for NSE. Please wait.
/usr/src/uts/m68k/sysgen/sysgen -l /usr/src/uts/m68k/sysgen -big
make -f io.mk MAKE=make FRC= DASHG= DASHO=-O INCRT=/usr/include
LIBDIR=../cf SYS= CFLAGS= -O -I/usr/include -DLAI -DINKERNE
L -DSTREAMS -DBRIDGE CPU=m68k CC=/bin/pcc/cc
make -f scsi.mk "MAKE=make" "CC=/bin/pcc/cc" "FRC=" "INCRT=/usr/include"
"DASHO=-O" "CFLAGS=-O -I/usr/include -DLAI -DINKER
.
.
.
Warning: ./config.h: 358: NBLK4 redefined
rm -f sysV68 sysV68.nm
ld -o sysV68 ld.VME131 m68kvec.o low.o conf.o lib.io lib.ml lib.os
lib.s5 lib.bpp lib.fpack lib.nosrc lib.fpsp lib.du lib.tc
pip lib.nfs lib.bppv2 lib.c37x lib.kdb lib.lnc lib.nsedebug lib.sbc lib.scsi
lib.wan lib.x25 lib.stub lib.io lib.ml lib.os
lib.s5 lib.bpp lib.fpack lib.nosrc lib.fpsp lib.du lib.tcpip lib.nfs lib.bppv2
lib.c37x lib.kdb lib.lnc lib.nsedebug lib.sbc lib.scs
i lib.wan lib.x25 lib.stub
mcs -da "SYSTEM V/68 - R3V7" sysV68
chmod 755 sysV68
../kdb/kdbnm -q sysV68
../kdb/kdbnm: not enough space for symbol table
../kdb/kdbnm: need total of 145908 bytes at k_symtab
../kdb/kdbnm: 135168 bytes were reserved for symbols, 135168 bytes were used
sysV68 made.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
468 Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures
Procedure 8: Load the application software from tape (continued)
Figure 244
Module name prompt
ADD MODULE NAME AND ADDRESS TO TCPIP TRANSPORT PROVIDER DATABASE
If you are not sure how to answer any prompt, type "?" for HELP.
Enter the MODULE NAME to be added to the tcpip transport
provider database [?, or module name]:
22
You are prompted for the name of the Application Module or
IPE Module (Figure 244). (The term Òmodule nameÓ refers to an
Ethernet host computer, which in this case is the IPE Module or
Application Module.) Type the module name and press [Return]. The
module name must not exceed eight alphanumeric characters. For
more information about module names, consult your network
administrator.
Figure 245
Module address prompt
Enter the MODULE ADDRESS to be added to the tcpip transport
provider database [?, or module address]:
23
You are prompted for the address of the IPE Module or Application
Module (Figure 245). Type the module address and press [Return].
The module address must be four numbers separated by periods,
such as Ò12.234.67.89.Ó For more information about module
addresses, consult your network administrator.
Figure 246
Reenter prompt
If you made any mistakes in entering the module name and IP address,
you can correct them. Would you like to re-enter the module name or
IP address? [y, n]
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures 469
Procedure 8: Load the application software from tape (continued)
24
You are asked whether you want to reenter the module name or
address (Figure 246).
If you have not made a mistake, type n and press [Return].
If you want to reenter the module name and address, type y and
press [Return]; you will return to step 22.
Figure 247
Reboot prompt
Would you like to reboot the system now (y/n) ?
25
You are prompted to reboot the system (Figure 247). Type y and
press [Return].
Figure 248
Reboot messages 1
INIT: New run level: 6
The system is coming down. Please wait.
System services are now being stopped.
Terminating Applications
/usr/bin/maint: /dev/tty: cannot create
cron aborted: SIGTERM
The system is down.
NOTICE: System Reboot Requested (0)
The system clears and the messages in Figure 249 appear.
Note: The following figure is illustrative only. Your messages may be
different, depending on the application(s) purchased.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
470 Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures
Procedure 8: Load the application software from tape (continued)
Figure 249
Reboot messages 2
Copyright Motorola Inc. 1988 - 1992, All Rights Reserved
M4120 Debugger/Diagnostics Release Version 1.1 - 09/30/92 (IR01)
COLD Start
Local Memory Found =01000000 (&16777216)
MPU Clock Speed =25Mhz
Autoboot in progress... To abort hit <BREAK>
Booting from: M4120, Controller 0, Drive 0
Loading: Operating System
.
(diagnostic messages)
.
Initializing For Applications
Configure Link 0 : successful
Enable Link 0 : successful
Application release successful
Starting Applications
06/01/94 20:55:53 Starting CCR Application...
Starting Customer Controlled Routing Processes...
Performing modem reset...
Connected
Sending atz
to the device.
Done modem reset.
The system is ready.
Console Login:
26
Remove the application tape from the cassette tape drive.
The appearance of the ÒConsole Login:Ó prompt indicates that the
new application software is now installed. You may now log in to the
system to perform other commands. You may also restore
configuration files and data files from backup if necessary
(Procedure 9: Restore configuration files and data files from the
backup tape).
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures 471
Procedure 9: Restore configuration files and data files from
the backup tape
1
2
At the ÒConsole Login:Ó prompt, type maint and press [Return].
You are prompted for a password. Type the password and press
[Return]. The default password is maint.
3
At the Òmaint>Ó prompt, type rstdata and press [Return].
Prompts similar to the following appear:
Figure 250
Rstdata prompt
Make sure tape is in drive
When ready, enter ÔyÕ to continue, or ÔnÕ to quit:
[y,n]
4
You are prompted to prepare the tape drive. Insert the most recent
backup tape for your application data.
Note: Wait until the tape indicator light turns off before proceeding to
the next step.
5
When the tape is ready, type y and press [Return].
Figure 251
Stop applications prompt
The restore will not succeed with an application running.
Enter ÔyÕ to stop the application(s) and continue, or ÔnÕ to quit: [y,n]
6
If an application is not running, go to step 7. If an application is
running, you will be prompted to stop all applications. Type y and
press [Return].
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
472 Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures
Procedure 9: Restore configuration files and data files from the backup
tape (continued)
Figure 252
Rstdata messages screen 1
Stopping application(s)
02/02/94 16:00:27 Notifying Meridian Link of Shutdown...
02/02/94 16:00:37 Stopping Meridian Link application
Release Communication Resources...
Please wait while tape file list is extracted.
You may be prompted about restoring link control files (Figure 253).
Figure 253
Restore link control files prompt
Link control files are present in this Restore list.
Do you want to restore link control files (y/n)?
7
If you have already configured the links for Release 3 (refer to
Chapter 15, ÒLink configurationÓ) and you do not want to overwrite
them with backed-up Release 2 configuration, type n and press
[Return].
If you have not configured the links for Release 3, or if you wish to
restore the Release 2 configurations, type y and press [Return].
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures 473
Procedure 9: Restore configuration files and data files from the backup
tape (continued)
Figure 254
Rstdata messages screen 2
Files will be restored to:
/usr/maint/files/AMprofile
/usr/maint/files/AutoStart
/usr/maint/files/IncrDY
/usr/maint/files/IncrTM
/usr/maint/files/Port
/usr/maint/files/Prefs
/usr/maint/files/Speed
/usr/maint/conf/hdlchlnk.dataf
/usr/maint/conf/hdlcmlnk.dataf
/usr/maint/conf/lh.config
/usr/mlusr/conf/loop13DCE.d
/usr/mlusr/conf/loop13DTE.d
/usr/mlusr/conf/loop31DCE.d
/usr/mlusr/conf/loop31DTE.d
/usr/mlusr/conf/tscfg.datafile
/usr/mlusr/conf/vlink.datafile
/usr/mlusr/conf/x25bcf333.2
/usr/mlusr/conf/x25hlink.datafi
(Actual list of directories may differ depending on the application)
Please enter ÔyÕ to do restore, or ÔnÕ to quit: [y,n]
8
You are prompted to restore the files. Type y and press [Return].
Various prompts appear, followed by the message ÒRestore
successfulÓ when the procedure is completed (Figure 255).
Note: The following figure is illustrative only. It shows restoration
messages for Meridian Link. If you are restoring for CCR, your
messages will be different.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
474 Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures
Procedure 9: Restore configuration files and data files from the backup
tape (continued)
Figure 255
Rstdata messages screen 3
Starting restore
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
4k
4k
4k
4k
4k
4k
4k
4k
4k
4k
4k
4k
4k
4k
4k
4k
6k
4k
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
6k
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
usr/maint/files/AMprofile
/usr/maint/files/AutoStart
/usr/maint/files/IncrDY
/usr/maint/files/IncrTM
/usr/maint/files/Port
10k
14k
18k
22k
26k
30k
34k
38k
42k
46k
50k
54k
58k
62k
66k
72k
76k
/usr/maint/files/Prefs
/usr/maint/files/Speed
/usr/maint/conf/hdlchlnk.dataf
/usr/maint/conf/hdlcmlnk.dataf
/usr/maint/conf/lh.config
/usr/mlusr/conf/loop13DCE.d
/usr/mlusr/conf/loop13DTE.d
/usr/mlusr/conf/loop31DCE.d
/usr/mlusr/conf/loop31DTE.d
/usr/mlusr/conf/tscfg.datafile
/usr/mlusr/conf/vlink.datafile
/usr/mlusr/conf/x25bcf333.2
/usr/mlusr/conf/x25hlink.datafi
Restore successful
Configuration changed, restarting link processes.
Configure Link 0 : successful
Configure Link 1 : successful
Configure Link 2 : successful
Enable Link 0 : successful
Enable Link 1 : successful
Enable Link 2 : successful
Link 0 : enabled but down
Link 1 : enabled but down
Link 2 : enabled but down
Link 0 : up
Link 1 : up
Link 2 : up
Application release successful
9
If, in step 6, you stopped any applications, you are prompted to
restart them. Type y and press [Return] to restart the applications.
10
11
Unlock the tape drive and remove the cassette tape. Keep this and
label it with the date, and store it with all your backup tapes in a safe
place in case you need to use it again.
Perform Procedure 10: Verify the installation.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures 475
Procedure 10: Verify the installation
This procedure assumes that you have
¥
¥
¥
¥
loaded the operating system (using Procedure 5 or 6)
rebooted the operating system (using Procedure 7)
loaded the application tape (using Procedure 8)
restored the Release 2 configuration files and data files (using
Procedure 9)
This procedure verifies that Meridian Link Release 5C and CCR Release 3C
have been installed completely and correctly.
1
2
At the ÒConsole Login:Ó prompt, type maint and press [Return].
You are prompted for a password. Type the password and press
[Return]. The default password is maint.
3
At the Òmaint>Ó prompt, type fileverif and press [Return].
Messages appear as shown in Figure 256.
Figure 256
File verification messages
FILE VERIFICATION AS OF 09/20/93 12:13:01
................................................................
................................................................
................................................................
................................................................
................................................................
Static file verification found everything to be in order.
................................................................
................................................................
................................................................
................................................................
................................................................
Permissions and ownership tests found everything in order.
Structural verification found maint data files to be in order.
4
Type exit and press [Return] to go to the ÒConsole Login:Ó prompt.
Meridian Link and CCR have now been installed and verified.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
476 Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures
Procedure 11: Back up configuration files and data files
1
At the ÒConsole Login:Ó prompt, type maint (if you are not already
logged in) and press [Return]. The default password is maint.
2
Insert the backup tape into the drive.
Ensure that the tape is a backup tape and not a system tape,
because any information on the tape will be overwritten by the
backup. Ensure that the tape is not write-protected.
Note: Ensure you use the correct backup tape. An IPE Module uses a
600-Mbyte tape. An Application Module uses a 155-Mbyte tape.
3
At the Òmaint>Ó prompt, type backdata and press [Return] to start
the backup process.
Figure 257
Backdata messages 1
Files will be backed-up from:
/usr/maint/files/AMprofile
/usr/maint/files/AutoStart
/usr/maint/files/IncrDY
/usr/maint/files/IncrTM
/usr/maint/files/Port
/usr/maint/files/Prefs
/usr/maint/files/Speed
.
.
.
(Actual list of directories may differ depending on the application)
Make sure tape is in drive
When ready, enter ÔyÕ to continue, or ÔnÕ to quit:
[y,n]
4
You are prompted to continue the backup process. Wait until the
tape LED goes off before typing y and pressing Return.
Various messages appear; the backup is complete when the
message ÒBackup successfulÓ appears.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures 477
Procedure 11: Back up configuration files and data files (continued)
Figure 258
Backdata messages 2
Starting backup
c 4k of
c 4k of
c 4k of
c 4k of
c 4k of
c 4k of
c 4k of
.
6k
[1] usr/maint/files/AMprofile
10k [1] /usr/maint/files/AutoStart
14k [1] /usr/maint/files/IncrDY
18k [1] /usr/maint/files/IncrTM
22k [1] /usr/maint/files/Port
26k [1] /usr/maint/files/Prefs
30k [1] /usr/maint/files/Speed
.
.
Backup successful
maint>
5
6
At the Òmaint>Ó prompt, type exit and press [Return] to log out of
maint.
Unlock the tape drive and remove the cassette tape. Keep this and
all your backup tapes in a safe place in case you need to use them
again.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
478 Chapter 14: Software installation, upgrade, and update procedures
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
479
Chapter 15: Link configuration
This chapter describes the initial configuration procedures for the links used
by the applications, and refers to the procedures in Chapter 14, ÒSoftware
installation, upgrade, and update proceduresÓ earlier in this guide.
Note: The redundancy feature does not affect link configurations as
described in this chapter.
Default configuration
Systems shipped from the factory are configured as described in the
following sections. The default configuration for link 0 applies to Meridian
Link, CCR, and co-resident systems. Configurations for link 1 and link 2 are
for Meridian Link and co-resident systems only.
Link 0ÑApplication Module Link
Link 0 is defined as the Application Module Link (AML), with the
following characteristics (which are described in more detail later in this
chapter):
Protocol: HDLC
Machine ID: SL16
Delay: 0
Link type: 1
Port type: H
PDN type: 0
Baud rate: 19200
RFS timer: 150
Remote address: 3
Maximum out frames (K): 7
Physical DTE(0)/DCE(1): 0
Maximum Frame length: 135
Fail timer: 50
Internal address: 1
T1: 20
Maximum trans attempts: (N2): 8
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
480 Chapter 15: Link configuration
Link 1ÑX.25 protocol (Meridian Link)
Link 1 is defined as the host link using the X.25 protocol if services 97, 98,
100, or 101 are equipped with the following characteristics (which are
described in more detail later in this chapter):
Protocol: X25
Link type: 2
Machine ID: x25dest
Delay: 0
Port type: X
PDN type: 44
Baud rate: 19200
RFS timer: 150
Physical DTE(0)/DCE(1): 1
Maximum Frame length: 135
Fail timer: 150
Internal address: 1
Remote address: 3
Maximum out frames (K): 7
Local DTE address: 000000990100
Flow control negotiation: 0
Outgoing packet size: 128
Outgoing window size: 2
Incoming throughput class: 10
Lowest LCN for DTE/DCE: Ð1
Lowest LCN: 1
T1: 30
Maximum trans attempts (N2): 7
Incoming packet size: 128
Incoming window size: 2
Throughput negotiation used: 0
Outgoing throughput class: 10
Highest LCN for DTE/DCE: Ð1
Highest LCN: 4095
LOC LIC: Ð1
T10: 1800
HOC HIC: Ð1
T11: 2000
T13: 1800
T12: 1800
T14: 600
T15: 1500
Maximum T12 retries: 3
T16: 1300
Maximum T13 retries: 3
If your Meridian Link application requirements are satisfied by the default
configuration, no more procedures are required. You may choose to verify
the status of the link using Procedure 12: Verifying the link status, in this
chapter.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 15: Link configuration 481
Link 1ÑTCP/IP host link protocol (Meridian Link)
Link 1 is defined as the host link using the TCP/IP protocol if service 95 is
equipped, with the following characteristics (which are described in more
detail later in this chapter):
Protocol: LAN
Machine ID: Lanlink
Delay: 0
Link type: 2
Port: 3000
If your Meridian Link application requirements are satisfied by the default
configuration, no more procedures are required. You may choose to verify
the status of the link using Procedure 12: Verifying the link status, in this
chapter.
Link 2ÑMeridian Mail Link (optional for Meridian Link)
Link 2 is defined as the Meridian Mail Link (MML) with the following
characteristics.
Protocol: ASYNC
Machine ID: MeridianMail
Delay: 0
Link type: 3
TTY: 3
If your link requirements are satisfied by the default configuration, no more
procedures are required. You may choose to verify the status of the link
using Procedure 12: Verifying the link status, in this chapter.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
482 Chapter 15: Link configuration
Changing your configuration
Use the following procedures (as your requirements dictate) to verify or
reconfigure application software:
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
Procedure 12: Verifying the link status
Procedure 13: Changing AML (link 0) parameters
Procedure 14: Changing Meridian Link (link 1) parameters
Procedure 15: Changing Meridian Mail Link (link 2) parameters
Procedure 16: Replacing the default configuration file
Procedure 17: Creating a new configuration file
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 15: Link configuration 483
Procedure 12: Verifying the link status
1
Log in as mlusr (if you are not already logged in). The default
password is mlusr.
2
Type status link 0 and press [Return] to verify the status of the link
to Meridian 1.
The response ÒLink 0: UpÓ indicates that the link is functioning
properly. If you receive a different response, refer to the Application
Module and Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Module Diagnostic and
Maintenance Guide (NTP 553-3211-510).
3
Meridian Link only
Type status link 1 and press [Return] to verify the status of the link
to the host computer.
The response ÒLink 1: UpÓ indicates that the link is functioning
properly. This message appears only if a host application is
connected. If you receive a different response, refer to the
Application Module and Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Module
Diagnostic and Maintenance Guide (NTP 553-3211-510).
4
Meridian Link only
Type status link 2 and press [Return] to verify the status of the link
to the host computer.
The response ÒLink 2: UpÓ indicates that the link is functioning
properly. This message appears only if a host application is
connected. If you receive a different response, refer to the
Application Module and Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Module
Diagnostic and Maintenance Guide (NTP 553-3211-510).
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
484 Chapter 15: Link configuration
Procedure 13: Changing AML (link 0) parameters
Meridian Link and CCR are shipped with a default configuration for the
AML. If the default configuration is not appropriate for your system, you
can use this procedure to change it. Note that you cannot change the values
for the protocol, link type, and port type parameters. For more information
about AML parameters, refer to Table 141 at the end of this procedure.
CAUTION
Risk of potential data loss
Do not use the change link command without the
direction of Nortel support personnel or host computer
support personnel.
!
1
2
Log in as mlusr (if you are not already logged in). The default
password is mlusr.
At the Òmlusr>Ó prompt, type display link 0 and press [Return] to see
the current configuration for the link to the Meridian 1 system.
The default link configuration appears, as shown below.
Figure 259
Link 0 parameters
Protocol: HDLC
Machine ID: SL16
Delay: 0
Link type: 1
Port type: H
PDN type: 0
Baud rate: 19200
RFS timer: 150
Remote address: 3
Maximum out frames (K): 7
Physical DTE(0)/DCE(1): 0
Maximum Frame length: 135
Fail timer: 50
Internal address: 1
T1: 20
Maximum trans attempts: (N2): 8
mlusr>
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 15: Link configuration 485
Procedure 13: Changing AML (link 0) parameters (continued)
3
Type change link 0 and press [Return] to begin making changes to
the link.
The first parameter appears, along with possible and current values.
Note: All the fields displayed in Figure 260 except for ÒLink typeÓ and
ÒPort typeÓ may be changed by executing the Òchange link xÓ
command.
Figure 260
Change link parameters
Machine ID
Current
>
SL16
4
To change the parameter, type the new value and press [Return]. To
leave the parameter unchanged, just press [Return].
Refer to Table 141 for information on link parameters.
5
6
Continue with remaining parameters until the ÒConfirm (yes or no)Ó
prompt appears.
To confirm the changes, type yes and press [Return].
If you made a mistake and wish to redo your changes, type no,
press [Return], and restart this procedure from step 3.
At this point, the changes you have made are temporary. They are
saved in memory, but not on disk (which means that if the system is
restarted, the changes are lost).
7
To save your changes, go to the appropriate procedure:
¥
Procedure 16: Replacing the default configuration file
Procedure 17: Creating a configuration file
¥
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
486 Chapter 15: Link configuration
Procedure 13: Changing AML (link 0) parameters (continued)
Table 141
AML (link 0) parameters
Link parameter
Allowed values
(defaults in parentheses)
Description
Protocol*
(HDLC)
(1)
Link protocol used
Link type*
Machine ID
Type of link (1=AML)
(SL16)
Logical name assigned to the
attached Meridian 1
Delay
(0)Ð9999
Maximum time (in seconds)
between packet transmissions
Port type*
(H)
H=HDLC
Physical DTE/DCE
0, 1
0 if link port is configured as
DTE; 1 if the port is configured
as DCE
PDN type
0, 40Ð48
Packet data network type. This
parameter is dependent on the
type of network configured.
The possible values are:
0 Ñ LAPB
40 Ñ Datex-P (Germany)
41 Ñ Transpac (France)
42 Ñ PPS (United Kingdom)
43 Ñ Datapak (Sweden)
44 Ñ Telenet (USA)
45 Ñ DDN (USA)
46 Ñ Accunet (USA)
47 Ñ Datapac (Canada)
48 Ñ Tymnet (USA)
The default values are 0 for
LAPB and 44 for X.25.
Note: Parameters marked with an asterisk (*) cannot be changed.
Ñ continued Ñ
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 15: Link configuration 487
Procedure 13: Changing AML (link 0) parameters (continued)
Table 141
AML (link 0) parameters (continued)
Link parameter
Allowed values
(defaults in parentheses)
Description
Maximum Frame Length
Baud rate
(135)
300 600 1200 2400 4800
9600 (19200) 38400 48000
56000 64000
Must be identical to that specified
on the Meridian 1 or host
computer configuration; if
modems are used, must also
match baud rate of the modem
Fail timer
RFS timer
0Ð(50)Ð9999
0Ð(150)Ð9999
Timer value (in 1/10 second
increments) for monitoring the
signals that indicate link failure
Timer value (in 1/10 second
increments) for monitoring CTS
or DTR signals after line opening
Internal address
Remote address
(1), 3
1, (3)
1 for DCE; 3 for DTE
3 for DCE; 1 for DTE. (This value
must be different from the value
of the internal address. The
combination of values for internal
address and remote address
must be the opposite of the
values for the host. That is, if the
values for the host are 3, 1, the
values for the link must be 1, 3.)
T1
0Ð(20)Ð9999
Frame recovery time (in 1/10
second increments); must be
identical to the time specified on
the host computer configuration
Ñ continued Ñ
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
488 Chapter 15: Link configuration
Procedure 13: Changing AML (link 0) parameters (continued)
Table 141
AML (link 0) parameters (continued)
Link parameter
Allowed values
(defaults in parentheses)
Description
Maximum out frames (K)
1Ð(7)
LAPB window size; must be
identical to the size specified on
the host computer configuration
Maximum trans attempts
(N2)
1Ð(8)Ð9999
Maximum number of retries to
complete a transmission; must
be identical to the number
specified on the Meridian 1
configuration
Ñ end Ñ
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 15: Link configuration 489
Procedure 14: Changing Meridian Link (link 1) parameters
(Meridian Link only)
Meridian Link is shipped with a default configuration for the Host Link. To
make changes to the configuration file, use this procedure. Note that you
cannot change the values for some parameters. X.25 and LAPB parameters
are detailed in Table 142, TCP/IP parameters in Table 143.
CAUTION
Risk of potential data loss
Do not use the change link command without the
direction of Nortel support personnel or host computer
support personnel.
!
1
2
Log in as mlusr. The default password is mlusr.
At the Òmlusr>Ó prompt, type display link 1 and press [Return] to see
the current configuration for the link to the host computer.
The default link configuration is displayed, as shown under the
ÒDefault configurationÓ section earlier in this chapter.
3
4
Type change link 1 and press [Return] to begin making changes.
The first parameter appears, along with the current value.
Either type a new value for the parameter and press [Return] or just
press [Return] to leave the current value unchanged.
Refer to Table 142 or Table 143 for information on link parameters.
5
6
Continue changing parameters until the ÒConfirm (yes or no)Ó prompt
appears.
To confirm the changes, type yes and press [Return]. If you made a
mistake and wish to redo your changes, type no, press [Return], and
restart this procedure from step 3.
At this point, the changes you have made are saved in memory, but
not on disk (if the system is restarted, the changes are lost).
7
To save your changes, go to the appropriate procedure:
¥
Procedure 16: Replacing the default configuration file
Procedure 17: Creating a configuration file
¥
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
490 Chapter 15: Link configuration
Procedure 14: Changing Meridian Link (link 1) parameters (continued)
Table 142
X.25 and LAPB parametersÑLink 1
Link parameter
Allowed values
(defaults in parentheses)
Description
X.25, LAPB parameters
Protocol*
X25, HDLC
Link protocol used
Link type*
2
Type of link (2 = Host Link)
Machine ID
x25dest, hdlcdest
Logical name assigned to the
attached host
Delay
(0)Ð9999
Maximum time (in seconds)
between packet transmissions
Port type*
X, H
0, 1
X = X.25, H = HDLC
Physical DTE/DCE
0 if link port is configured as
DTE; 1 if the port is configured
as DCE
PDN type
0, 40Ð48
Packet data network type. This
parameter is dependent on the
type of X.25 network configured
on the host. Possible values are:
0 Ñ LAPB
40 Ñ Datex-P (Germany)
41 Ñ Transpac (France)
42 Ñ PPS (United Kingdom)
43 Ñ Datapak (Sweden)
44 Ñ Telenet (USA)
45 Ñ DDN (USA)
46 Ñ Accunet (USA)
47 Ñ Datapac (Canada)
48 Ñ Tymnet (USA)
The default values are 0 for
LAPB and 44 for X.25.
Note: Parameters marked with an asterisk (*) cannot be changed.
Ñ continued Ñ
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 15: Link configuration 491
Procedure 14: Changing Meridian Link (link 1) parameters (continued)
Table 142
X.25 and LAPB parametersÑLink 1 (continued)
Link parameter
Allowed values
(defaults in parentheses)
Description
Maximum Frame Length*
Baud rate
135
300 600 1200 2400 4800
9600 (19200) 38400
48000 56000 64000
Must be same as baud rate on the
Meridian 1 or host computer config-
uration; if modems are used, must
also match baud rate of the modem
Fail timer
RFS timer
0-(50)Ð9999
Timer value (in 1/10 second
increments) for monitoring the
signals that indicate link failure
0Ð(150)Ð9999
Timer value (in 1/10 second
increments) for monitoring CTS or
DTR signals after line opening
Internal address
Remote address
(1), 3
1, (3)
1 for DCE; 3 for DTE
3 for DCE; 1 for DTE. (This value
must be different from the value of
the internal address. The
combination of values for internal
address and remote address must
be the opposite of the values for
the host. That is, if the values for
the host are 3, 1, the values for the
link must be 1, 3.)
T1
0Ð(20)Ð9999
1Ð(7)
Frame recovery time (in 1/10
second increments); must be
identical to the time specified on
the host computer configuration
Maximum out frames (K)
LAPB window size; must be
identical to the size specified on the
host computer configuration
Note: Parameters marked with an asterisk (*) cannot be changed.
Ñ continued Ñ
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
492 Chapter 15: Link configuration
Procedure 14: Changing Meridian Link (link 1) parameters (continued)
Table 142
X.25 and LAPB parametersÑLink 1 (continued)
Link parameter
Allowed values
(defaults in parentheses)
Description
Maximum trans attempts
(N2)
1Ð(8)Ð9999
Maximum number of retries to
complete a transmission; must
be identical to the number
specified on the host computer
configuration
Local DTE address
000000990100
X.25 Òcall requestÓ address that
identifies the AM. When the host
sends the X.25 call request
packet to set up the SVC, it must
specify the AMÕs local DTE
address. The default value is
000000990100.
X.25-only parameters:
Flow control negotiation
(0)Ð1
An X.25 service that allows flow
control parameters (packet size
and window size) to be
negotiated between the host and
the AM. Not supported by the
AM. Default value is 0 (no flow
control negotiation). Use flow
control negotiation (packet size
and window size) 0 = no;
1 = yes.
Incoming packet size
Outgoing packet size
16 32 64 (128) 256 512
1024 2048 4096
Maximum X.25 packet size; must
be identical to the size specified
on the host computer
configuration
16 32 64 (128) 256 512
1024 2048 4096
Maximum X.25 packet size; must
be identical to the size specified
on the host computer
configuration
Ñ continued Ñ
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 15: Link configuration 493
Procedure 14: Changing Meridian Link (link 1) parameters (continued)
Table 142
X.25 and LAPB parametersÑLink 1 (continued)
Link parameter
Allowed values
(defaults in parentheses)
Description
Incoming window size
1Ð(2)Ð7
Maximum number of outstanding
incoming packets without an
acknowledgment
Outgoing window size
1Ð(2)Ð7
Maximum number of outstanding
outgoing packets without an
acknowledgment
Throughput
negotiation used
(0)Ð1
Specify whether throughput negotia-
tion may be used: 0 = no; 1 = yes
Incoming throughput
class
3Ð(10)Ð12
Maximum amount of incoming
information on a connection basis,
meaningful only if Throughput
Negotiation Used is set to yes.
Outgoing throughput
class
3Ð(10)Ð12
(-1)
Maximum amount of outgoing
information on a connection basis,
meaningful only if Throughput
Negotiation Used is set to yes.
Lowest LCN for
DTE/DCE*
Specifies the lowest X.25 virtual circuit
number that will be assigned for an
incoming (if DTE) or outgoing (if DCE)
X.25 call request. Not used by the AM.
Default value is Ð1.
Highest LCN for
DTE/DCE*
(-1)
Specifies the highest X.25 virtual circuit
number that will be assigned for an
incoming (if DTE) or outgoing (if DCE)
X.25 call request. Not used by the AM.
Default value is Ð1.
Note: Parameters marked with an asterisk (*) cannot be changed.
Ñ continued Ñ
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
494 Chapter 15: Link configuration
Procedure 14: Changing Meridian Link (link 1) parameters (continued)
Table 142
X.25 and LAPB parametersÑLink 1 (continued)
Link parameter
Allowed values
(defaults in parentheses)
Description
Lowest LCN*
(1)
Specifies the lowest X.25 virtual
circuit number that will be assigned
for an incoming or outgoing X.25 call
request. Default value is 1.
Highest LCN*
LOC LIC*
(4095)
(-1)
Specifies the highest X.25 virtual
circuit number that will be assigned
for an incoming or outgoing X.25 call
request. Default value is 4095.
Specifies the lowest X.25 virtual
circuit number that will be assigned
for an incoming (if DCE) or outgoing
(if DTE) X.25 call request. Not used
by the AM. Default value is Ð1.
HOC HIC*
(-1)
Specifies the highest X.25 virtual
circuit number that will be assigned
for an incoming (if DCE) or outgoing
(if DTE) X.25 call request. Not used
by the AM. Default value is Ð1.
T10
0Ð(1800)Ð9999
0Ð(2000)Ð9999
Amount of time (in 1/10 second
increments) the AM will wait for an
X.25 restart confirmation packet
after sending an X.25 restart packet
to the host.
T11
Amount of time (in 1/10 second
increments) the host will wait for an
X.25 call accept packet after
sending an X.25 call request packet
to the AM.
Note: Parameters marked with an asterisk (*) cannot be changed.
Ñ continued Ñ
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 15: Link configuration 495
Procedure 14: Changing Meridian Link (link 1) parameters (continued)
Table 142
X.25 and LAPB parametersÑLink 1 (continued)
Link parameter
Allowed values
(defaults in parentheses)
Description
T12
0Ð(1800)Ð9999
0Ð(1800)Ð9999
0Ð(600)Ð9999
0Ð(1500)Ð9999
0Ð(1300)Ð9999
Amount of time (in 1/10 second
increments) the AM will wait for an
X.25 reset confirmation packet
after sending an X.25 reset
request packet to the host.
T13
T14
T15
T16
Amount of time (in 1/10 second
increments) the AM will wait for an
X.25 clear confirmation packet
after sending an X.25 clear
request packet to the host.
Amount of time (in 1/10 second
increments) the AM will wait for a
packet with any P(R) value after
sending an X.25 data packet to
the host.
Amount of time (in 1/10 second
increments) the AM will wait for a
packet with a P(R) value that
acknowledges a transmitted X.25
data packet to the host.
Amount of time (in 1/10 second
increments) the AM will wait for an
X.25 interrupt confirmation packet
after sending an X.25 interrupt
request packet to the host.
Maximum T12 retries
Maximum T13 retries
0Ð(3)Ð9999
0Ð(3)Ð9999
Ñ end Ñ
Maximum number of times the AM
sends reset requests due to T12
time outs.
Maximum number of times the
MLM sends clear requests due to
T13 time outs.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
496 Chapter 15: Link configuration
Table 143
TCP/IP parametersÑLink 1
Link parameter
Allowed values
(defaults in parentheses)
Description
TCP/IP parameters
Protocol*
LAN
2
Link protocol used
Link type*
Type of link (2 = Host Link)
Machine ID
Lanlink
Logical name assigned to the
attached host (case-sensitive)
Delay
Port
(0)Ð9999
3000
Maximum time (in seconds)
between packet transmissions
Port number used for listen
socket.
Note: Parameters marked with an asterisk (*) cannot be changed.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 15: Link configuration 497
Procedure 15: Changing Meridian Mail Link (link 2)
parameters (Meridian Link only)
Meridian Link is shipped with a default configuration for the Meridian Mail
Link. If the default configuration is not appropriate, you can use this
procedure to change it. Note that you cannot change the values for the
protocol and link type parameters. For more information, refer to Table 144
at the end of this procedure.
CAUTION
Risk of potential data loss
Do not use the change link command without the
direction of Nortel support personnel or host computer
support personnel.
!
1
2
Log in as mlusr (if you are not already logged in). The default
password is mlusr.
At the Òmlusr>Ó prompt, type display link 2 and press [Return] to see
the current configuration for the link to the host computer.
The default link configuration is displayed, as shown in Table 144.
3
4
Type change link 2 and press [Return] to begin making changes to
the link.
The first parameter appears, along with possible and current values.
Either type a new value for the parameter and press [Return] or just
press [Return] to leave the current value unchanged.
Refer to Table 144 for information on link parameters for the MML.
5
6
Continue changing parameters until the ÒConfirm (yes or no)Ó prompt
appears.
To confirm the changes, type yes and press [Return].
If you made a mistake and wish to redo your changes, type no,
press [Return], and restart this procedure from step 3.
At this point, the changes you have made are temporary.
They are saved in memory, but not on disk (which means that if
the system is restarted, the changes are lost).
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
498 Chapter 15: Link configuration
Procedure 15: Changing Meridian Mail Link (link 2) parameters
(continued)
7
To save your changes, go to the appropriate procedure:
¥
¥
Procedure 16: Replacing the default configuration file
Procedure 17: Creating a configuration file
Table 144
Link parametersÑLink 2
Link parameter
Allowed values
(defaults in parentheses)
Description
Protocol*
Link type*
ASYNC
3
Link protocol used
Type of link (1 = AML link, 2 = host link,
3 = Meridian Mail Link)
Machine ID
Delay
Meridian Mail
Logical name assigned to the Meridian
Mail system
0
Maximum time (in seconds) between
packet transmissions
Port number
tty03
The port used for Meridian Mail Link
Note: Parameters marked with an asterisk (*) cannot be changed.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 15: Link configuration 499
Procedure 16: Replacing the default configuration file
Meridian Link and CCR are shipped with a default link configuration. The
default configuration is shipped in the following file or files:
¥
¥
AML (link 0): /usr/mlusr/conf/hdlcmlnk.datafile
Host Link (link 1): /usr/mlusr/conf/x25hlnk.datafile (Meridian Link
only)
¥
MML (link 2): /usr/mlusr/conf/vlink.datafile (Meridian Link only)
If you have changed the default parameters in Procedure 13, 14, or 15, you
can do one of the following:
¥
Use this procedure to replace the default configuration with the
changed configuration.
¥
Use Procedure 17 to store the changed configuration in another file.
1
2
Use Procedure 13, 14, or 15 to change the configuration
parameters.
At the Òmlusr>Ó prompt, type save link x (where x is the link number)
and press [Return].
The following messages appear, in which ÒfilenameÓ represents the
name of the default configuration file.
Figure 261
Save link parameters
File "filename" already exists. OK to overwrite?
Confirm? (yes or no):
3
Type yes and press [Return] to confirm that you wish to overwrite
the file.
Your changes have now been saved on the hard disk.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
500 Chapter 15: Link configuration
Procedure 17: Creating a configuration file
Meridian Link and CCR are shipped with a default link configuration for
the links. The default configuration is shipped in the following file or files:
¥
¥
AML (link 0): /usr/mlusr/conf/hdlcmlnk.datafile
Host Link (link 1): /usr/mlusr/conf/x25hlnk.datafile (Meridian Link
only)
¥
MML (link 2): /usr/mlusr/conf/vlink.datafile (Meridian Link only)
If you have changed the default configuration in Procedure 13, 14, or 15,
you can do one of the following:
¥
Use this procedure to store the changed configuration in another file, so
preserving the default configuration.
¥
Use Procedure 15 to replace the default configuration.
1
2
Use Procedure 13, 14, or 15 to change configuration parameters.
At the Òmlusr>Ó prompt, type save link x filename (where x is the
link number and filename is a file name that you choose), and press
[Return].
Figure 262 is an example of saving parameters for link number 0 in a
file called Òsavedata.Ó The configuration file must be located in the
/usr/mlusr/conf directory.
Figure 262
Save link file
mlusr> save link 0 savedata
mlusr>
The changes have now been saved in a new configuration file.
3
At the Òmlusr>Ó prompt, type change linkctl and press [Return] to
change the link control file.
This file contains link control information, which includes the name of
the configuration file that defines the link parameters.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 15: Link configuration 501
Procedure 17: Creating a configuration file (continued)
4
The process is shown in Figure 263. At each ÒEntry>Ó prompt, type
your responses as indicated in bold type. Where you see Ò<cr>,Ó just
press [Return].
Note: Figure 263 is illustrative only. It shows the process for Meridian
Link or co-resident systems. References to link 1 and link 2 will not be
present for CCR-only systems.
Replace the word ÒfilenameÓ with the name of the file you chose in
step 2.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
502 Chapter 15: Link configuration
Procedure 17: Creating a configuration file (continued)
Figure 263
Change linkctl
mlusr> change linkctl
Current Control File Image
0
1
2
HDLC
X25
ASYNC
/usr/mlusr/conf/hdlcmlnk.datafile
/usr/mlusr/conf/x25hlnk.datafile
/usr/mlusr/conf/vlink.datafile
Current Entry > 0
Type : "delete" to remove
"<ret>" to keep as is,
"<link number> <link type> <file name>" to change
HDLC
/usr/mlusr/conf/hdlcmlnk.datafile
Entry > <cr>
Current Entry > 1
X25
/usr/mlusr/conf/x25hlnk.datafile
Type :
"delete" to remove
"<ret>" to keep as is,
"<link number> <link type> <file name>" to change
Entry > 1 X25
/usr/mlusr/conf/filename.datafile <cr>
Note: When typing the information, the entries HDLC, X25 and ASYNC
must be in uppercase and the pathname of the file must be in all
lowercase. The number of spaces between each parameter doesnÕt
matter. Do not type any control characters or escape sequences.
New Entry
Type :
"<ret>" end changes
"<link number> <link type> <file name>" add entry
Current Entry > 2
Type : "delete" to remove
"<ret>" to keep as is,
"<link number> <link type> <file name>" to change
ASYNC
/usr/mlusr/conf/vlink.datafile
Entry> <cr>
New Control File Image:
0
1
2
HDLC
X25
ASYNC
/usr/mlusr/conf/hdlcmlnk.datafile
/usr/mlusr/conf/filename.datafile
/usr/mlusr/conf/vlink.datafile
Confirm? (yes or no):
5
Type yes and press [Return] to confirm that you wish to save your
changes to the link control file.
Any time the system is restarted, the link parameters will be read
from your configuration file.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
503
Chapter 16: Additional application
configuration
In addition to configuring the links, you may need to perform other
procedures to configure the application or applications.
The Meridian Link application is shipped from the factory configured so
that the application starts automatically (auto-start) whenever the IPE
Module or Application Module is restarted.
The CCR application is shipped from the factory configured in the
following manner:
¥
The Meridian 1 customer number is configured according to
information given at ordering time.
¥
¥
No regular backups are scheduled.
CCR starts automatically (auto-start) whenever the IPE Module or
Application Module is restarted.
¥
¥
¥
English is the default system language, French is the default secondary
language.
All terminal/printer ports are off; that is, configured for printers at 9600
baud.
No printers are defined.
For CCR-only or co-resident systems, you may need to do the following:
¥
¥
perform Procedure 18: Turn off auto-start
perform Procedure 19: Change the Meridian 1 customer number
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
504 Chapter 16: Additional application configuration
¥
¥
¥
¥
perform Procedure 20: Schedule regular backups
perform Procedure 21: Change the default system languages
perform Procedure 22: Configure terminal ports
perform Procedure 23: Configure printer ports
This chapter describes the procedures for changing these default
characteristics.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 16: Additional application configuration 505
Procedure 18: Turn off auto-start
Meridian Link and CCR are configured by default to restart automatically
any time the system is powered down and up again (for example, in the
event of an unscheduled power outage). If you wish to start the CCR
application manually every time the IPE Module or Application Module is
rebooted, follow this procedure to turn off auto-start.
Note: This does not affect Meridian Link.
1
2
Log in as maint. The default password is maint.
At the Òmaint>Ó prompt, type bootconfig and press [Return].
The following prompt appears:
Figure 264
Bootconfig prompt
Application is configured to start when the system boots
Do you want to disable starting the application? [y,n]
3
Type y and press [Return] to turn off auto-start.
The ÒAuto start disabledÓ prompt confirms your change.
Figure 265
Auto-start disabled message
Auto start disabled
maint>
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
506 Chapter 16: Additional application configuration
Procedure 19: Change the Meridian 1 customer number
When you order CCR, you specify the customer number for the Meridian 1
system to which the CCR Module or IPE Module will be connected. CCR is
thus shipped with the customer number configured. If you want to change
the customer number (for example, if you connect the CCR Module or IPE
Module to a Meridian 1 system with a different customer number), use this
procedure.
1
2
At the ÒConsole Login:Ó prompt, type maint (if you are not already
logged in). The default password is maint.
At the Òmaint>Ó prompt, type applconfig and press [Return].
The following messages appear:
Figure 266
Customer number prompts
Enter a new value to change the following application parameter:
Enter Customer Number value as: 0-99
Enter a return for no change
Change ÔMSL-1 Customer NumberÕ from Ô1Õ to:
3
The range of possible values (0Ð99) and the current value are
displayed. Type the new customer number and press [Return].
The following message appears.
Figure 267
Commit prompt
Do you want to commit this new value? [y,n]
4
Type y and press [Return] to confirm that you will use the new
customer number.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 16: Additional application configuration 507
Procedure 20: Schedule regular backups
For security reasons, you should back up regularly. Use this procedure to
schedule regular backups or to change the schedule. You should try to
schedule backups for off-peak hours (such as during the night).
1
2
At the ÒConsole Login:Ó prompt, type maint (if you are not already
logged in). The default password is maint.
At the Òmaint>Ó prompt, type backconfig and press [Return].
The following prompt appears:
Figure 268
Backup schedule prompt
A backup has not been scheduled.
Do you want to schedule a backup [y,n]:
3
Type y and press [Return] to indicate that you wish to schedule a
backup.
You are prompted to change the scheduled backup.
Figure 269
Backup time prompts
Enter time in 24-hour form:
Enter return for no change
Change scheduling time from Ô02:00Õ to:
00:00Ñ23:59
4
To change the scheduled backup time, type a new time in the form
00:00Ð23:59 and press [Return]. To indicate that you do not wish to
change the default scheduling time, just press [Return].
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
508 Chapter 16: Additional application configuration
Procedure 20: Schedule regular backups (continued)
Figure 270
Backup day prompts
Enter day in the form: SUN=Sunday, MON=Monday, ..., ALL=all
Enter a return for no change
Change scheduling day from ÔSUNÕ to:
5
To change the scheduled backup day, type a new day (in the form
SUN for Sunday, MON for Monday, etc., or ALL to specify daily
backup) and press [Return]. To indicate that you do not wish to
change the scheduled backup day, just press [Return].
Figure 271
Reoccurring backup prompt
Should tape backup be reoccurring? [y,n]:
6
You are prompted to indicate whether the backup should reoccur
(that is, either everyday or once a week on the day you specified). If
you wish the backup to occur regularly, type y and press [Return]. If
you wish to schedule a single backup only, type n and press
[Return].
The following prompt appears:
Figure 272
Backup tape notice
ATTENTION: Make sure a tape is in the drive prior to scheduled backup time
maint>
7
Ensure that you have a backup tape in the tape drive before the
specified time, and not a system tape with software on it. Ensure that
the backup tape is NOT write-protected.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 16: Additional application configuration 509
Procedure 21: Change the default system languages
CCR enables you to display text on your screen in one language or two. Use
this procedure to define or change the languages displayed. For example, if
the prompts on your screen are in English, you can use this procedure to
change them to French, if you prefer.
1
2
At the ÒConsole Login:Ó prompt, type maint (if you are not already
logged in). The default password is maint.
At the Òmaint>Ó prompt, type langconfig and press [Return].
The system displays your language options.
Figure 273
Langconfig options prompt
Your pre-configured login languages are:
Default:
Secondary:
English
None
Would you like to configure new language options?
3
Type y and press [Return] to confirm that you want to change the
language configuration.
If you do not wish to make changes, type n and press [Return]. This
returns you to the Òmaint>Ó prompt.
Figure 274
Default language prompt
System language options:
1. English
2. French
Please select the CCR default language. Select a number or
press <Return> for default (English):
4
The system again displays your language options (each one
numbered) and prompts you to select the default language. Type the
number corresponding to the language you wish to use as the
default language and press [Return].
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
510 Chapter 16: Additional application configuration
Procedure 21: Change the default system languages (continued)
Figure 275
Secondary language prompt
System language options:
1. English
2. French
3. None
Please select the secondary language for the Login Screen. Select
a number or press <Return> for default (French). Choosing None
will result in a single language system:
5
The system again displays your language options and prompts you
to select the secondary language. To select a secondary language,
type the number corresponding to the language you wish to use as
the secondary language and press [Return]. To indicate that you
wish a single-language system, just press [Return].
Figure 276
Language options confirmation prompt
Your login language selections are:
Default:
Secondary:
Is this selection correct? (y,n):
English
French
6
The system displays your language selections and prompts you to
confirm that they are correct. Type y and press [Return] to indicate
that your selections are correct.
All future application logins will reflect these language choices.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 16: Additional application configuration 511
Procedure 22: Configure terminal ports
CCR supports eight ports, each of which can be configured for a terminal or
a printer. Use this procedure to configure a port for a terminal.
1
2
At the ÒConsole Login:Ó prompt, type maint (if you are not already
logged in). The default password is maint.
At the Òmaint>Ó prompt, type portconfig and press [Return].
The port configuration menu appears.
Figure 277
Port configuration menu
CCR Port Configuration Utility
1:
2:
List Port Characteristics.
Change Port Characteristics.
Enter the number of the function you want to perform.
(Hit the <RETURN> key to EXIT)
3
Type 2 and press [Return] to change port characteristics.
Figure 278
Port number prompt
Enter PORT number (7 or 8):
4
You are prompted to enter the port number. Type the number
corresponding to the port you wish to change and press [Return].
Note: The number of ports displayed in Figure 278 depends on the
number of ports available. The example shown is for an IPE Module
with co-resident CCR and Meridian Link.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
512 Chapter 16: Additional application configuration
Procedure 22: Configuring terminal ports (continued)
Figure 279
Port state prompt
Available states:
off (printer)
Select a state (default: ÒoffÓ):
on (terminal)
5
You are prompted to select a state (ÒoffÓ selects a printer; ÒonÓ
selects a terminal). To configure the port as a terminal, type on and
press [Return].
Figure 280
Baud rate prompt
Available BAUD Rates:
1200
Select a BAUD rate (default: 9600):
2400
9600
6
You are prompted to select a baud rate. Press [Return] to leave the
baud rate unchanged.
Figure 281
Port configuration confirmation
STATE = on
BAUD = 9600
Do you want to install these new characteristics (y/n)?
7
You are prompted on whether you want to install these new
characteristics. Type y and press [Return] to indicate that you wish
to apply your changes.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 16: Additional application configuration 513
Procedure 23: Configure printer ports
CCR supports eight ports, each of which can be configured for a terminal or
a printer. Use this procedure to configure a port for a printer.
1
2
At the ÒConsole Login:Ó prompt, type maint (if you are not already
logged in). The default password is maint.
At the Òmaint>Ó prompt, type portconfig and press [Return].
The port configuration menu appears.
Figure 282
Port configuration menu
CCR Port Configuration Utility
1:
2:
List Port Characteristics.
Change Port Characteristics.
Enter the number of the function you want to perform.
(Hit the <RETURN> key to EXIT)
3
Type 2 and press [Return] to change port characteristics.
Figure 283
Port number prompt
Enter PORT number (7 or 8):
4
You are prompted to enter the port number. Type the number
corresponding to the port you wish to change and press [Return].
Note: The number of ports displayed in Figure 283 depends on the
number available. The example shown is for an IPE Module with
co-resident CCR and Meridian Link.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
514 Chapter 16: Additional application configuration
Procedure 23: Configuring printer ports (continued)
Figure 284
Port state prompt
Available states:
off (printer)
Select a state (default: ÒoffÓ):
on (terminal)
5
You are prompted to select a state (ÒoffÓ selects a printer; ÒonÓ
selects a terminal). To configure the port as a printer, type off and
press [Return].
Figure 285
Baud rate prompt
Available BAUD Rates:
1200
Select a BAUD rate (default: 9600):
2400
9600
6
You are prompted to select a baud rate. Press [Return] to leave the
baud rate unchanged.
Figure 286
Port configuration confirmation
STATE = off
BAUD = 9600
Do you want to install these new characteristics (y/n)?
7
8
You are prompted on whether you want to install these new
characteristics. Type y and press [Return] to indicate that you wish
to apply your changes.
The portconfig command executes and you return to the Òmaint>Ó
prompt.
At the Òmaint>Ó prompt, type printconfig and press [Return].
The printer configuration menu appears.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 16: Additional application configuration 515
Procedure 23: Configuring printer ports (continued)
Figure 287
Printer configuration prompt menu
CCR Line Printer Configuration Utility
1: Add a printer.
2: Delete a printer.
3: List of configured printers.
4: Status of configured printers.
5: Enable a configured printer.
6: Disable a configured printer.
7: List/Delete printer job.
Enter the number of the function you want to perform.
(Hit the <RETURN> key to EXIT)
9
Type 1 and press [Return] to add a printer.
You are prompted to enter the printer name.
Figure 288
Printer name prompt
CCR ADD Printer Operation
Enter printer name:
10
Type the name you wish to use to refer to the printer and press
[Return].
The name can be up to 14 characters in length and should not
include any spaces.
You are prompted to enter the port number.
Figure 289
Port number prompt
Enter PORT number (7 - 8):
Note: The number of ports displayed in Figure 289 depends on the
number available. The example shown is for an IPE Module with co-
resident CCR and Meridian Link.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
516 Chapter 16: Additional application configuration
Procedure 23: Configuring printer ports (continued)
11
Type the number corresponding to the port and press [Return].
A list of printer models appears.
Figure 290
Printer model menu
Select a Model number from the list provided below:
1. HP Rugged Writer.
2. HP LaserJet II, III, IV or DeskJet.
3. Other (dumb).
Enter the number of the desired printer type here:
12
Type the number corresponding to the printer model from the list and
press [Return].
The following messages appear:
Figure 291
Printer enabled message
Line printer scheduler stopped
destination ÒPrinter1Ó now accepting requests
printer ÒPrinter1Ó now enabled
(Hit the <RETURN> key when finished)
The printer is now configured and is ready to use. Repeat this
procedure for any other printers you wish to configure.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
517
Chapter 17: Hardware upgrade
This chapter provides procedures to enable you to
¥
¥
upgrade an Application Module SBC from an MVME147 card to an
MVME167 card
upgrade an Option 11 IPE Module to an Options 21Ð81 IPE Module
To upgrade an Application Module SBC card from an
MVME147 card to an MVME167 card
¥
¥
¥
perform Procedure 24: Software powerdown
perform Procedure 25: Hardware powerdown
perform Procedure 26: Upgrading the Application Module from an
MVME147 card to an MVME167 card
To upgrade an Option 11 IPE Module to an Options 21Ð81
IPE Module
¥
perform Procedure 27: Upgrading an IPE Module from Option 11 to an
Options 21Ð81 IPE Module
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
518 Chapter 17: Hardware upgrade
Procedure 24: Software powerdown
1
2
Log in as maint. The default password is maint.
At the Òmaint>Ó prompt, type powerdown and press [Return].
The following messages appear:
Figure 292
Powerdown messages 1
Would you like to power down or reboot?
Powering down allows you to turn the system off.
Rebooting will automatically restart the system.
Enter p to power down, r to reboot, or q to quit:
3
Type p and press [Return] to confirm that you wish to power down.
The following messages appear:
Figure 293
Powerdown messages 2
Running subcommand 'powerdown' from menu 'machinemgmt',
MACHINE MANAGEMENT
Note: If more than one user is logged in to the system, a list of the
logged-in users will appear on the screen.
Users currently logged in:
disttech
root
Once started, a powerdown CANNOT BE STOPPED.
console
tty01
Oct 26 13:38
Oct 25 21:20
Do you want to start an express powerdown? [y, n, ?, q]
4
A list of logged-in users appears. You are prompted to start an
express powerdown. Type y and press [Return].
If you wish to alert all users currently logged in to the system of the
powerdown, type n and press [Return]. If you do, you are prompted
to enter the number of seconds the system should wait after the
warning message. Type the number of seconds that will allow the
users to save their work and log off. Then press [Return].
The messages shown in Figure 294 appear on the screen.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 17: Hardware upgrade 519
Procedure 24: Software powerdown (continued)
Figure 294
Shutdown message screen
Shutdown started.
Mon Sep 20 12:17:20 PDT 1993
Broadcast Message from root (console) on sysV68 Mon Sep 20 12:17:21...
THE SYSTEM IS BEING SHUT DOWN NOW ! ! !
Log off now or risk your files being damaged.
INIT: New run level: 0
The system is coming down. Please wait.
System services are now being stopped.
Terminating Applications
/usr/bin/maint: /dev/tty: cannot create
cron aborted: SIGTERM
The system is down.
NOTICE: System Halt Requested (0)
NOTICE: System secured for powering down.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
520 Chapter 17: Hardware upgrade
Procedure 25: Hardware powerdown
1
2
Complete Procedure 24: Software powerdown.
Set the MPDU circuit breaker for the Application Module to OFF
(down) or press the black power pushbutton on the IPE Module.
The top breaker powers the Application Module next to the MPDU
(on the left-hand side facing the AEM). The bottom breaker powers
the second module.
Wait 60 seconds before adding or removing hardware, or before
trying to restore power.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 17: Hardware upgrade 521
Procedure 26: Upgrading the Application Module from an
MVME147 card to an MVME167 card
1
2
3
4
5
Complete Procedure 25: Hardware powerdown.
Loosen the screws at the top and bottom of the card.
Use the ejectors to unlock the card.
Pull the MVME147 card out of the Application Module.
Slide the MVME167 card into the Application Module. Firmly press
the middle of the faceplate to seat the card.
6
7
Tighten the screws on the faceplate of the replacement card.
Restore power to the Application Module by setting the MPDU circuit
breaker to ON (up).
The system reboots into the ÒConsole Login:Ó prompt.
8
Complete Procedure 6: Load the operating system tape on an IPE
Module or an Application Module with an MVME167 card.
9
Complete Procedure 7: Reboot and go through setup.
10
11
Complete Procedure 8: Load the application software from tape.
Complete Procedure 9: Restore configuration files and data files
from the backup tape.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
522 Chapter 17: Hardware upgrade
Procedure 27: Upgrading an Option 11 to an Options 21Ð81
IPE Module
The Option 11 IPE Module frame is narrower than the Options 21Ð81
module frame. When converting from an Options 21Ð81 frame to an Option
11, use the same procedure as outlined below. Note that the screw holes in
the Options 21Ð81 module frame are in the same locations as the Option 11
module frame.
1
2
Remove the IPE Module from the Option 11.
Lay the module on its side with the outside of the disk drive card
facing up and the faceplate of the IPE Module facing you.
3
4
Remove the SCSI terminator from the faceplate.
Using a small Phillips screwdriver, unscrew the six screws located
on the outside of the disk drive card.
These screws are indicated by arrows printed on the disk drive card.
Set the screws and flat washers aside.
5
6
7
Hold the disk drive card by the edges. Push the disk drive card away
from the faceplate, then lift it up and away.
To separate the disk drive card from the CPU card, disconnect the
SCSI I/O cable from the CPU card at connector J14.
Pull open the ejectors at either end of the SCSI cable plug on the
CPU card and lift the connector out of the plug.
8
9
Disconnect the power cable from the CPU card at connector J5.
Turn the CPU card over and remove the Option 11 bracing support.
This bracing support sits inside the module between the CPU and
disk drive cards. Hold the support with one hand while removing the
screw from the CPU board with the other.
10
Remove the six screws and flat washers securing the CPU card to
the IPE Module frame.
11
12
Pull the CPU card away from the faceplate and lift.
Place the CPU card against the Options 21Ð81 module frame,
making sure the edges of the card are securely against the
faceplate.
Line up the Abort and Reset switches with the corresponding cutouts
in the faceplate.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 17: Hardware upgrade 523
13
14
Replace the six screws and flat washers, reattaching the CPU card
to the Options 21Ð81 IPE Module frame.
Insert the Options 21Ð81 bracing support.
This bracing support sits inside the module between the CPU and
disk drive cards. Hold the support with one hand while inserting the
screw into the CPU board with the other.
15
16
Turn the CPU card and frame over and reconnect the disk drive card
to the CPU card by connecting the power cable to the CPU card at
connector J5.
Connect the disk drive cardÕs SCSI I/O cable to the CPU card at
connector J14. Make sure the SCSI plugÕs key bumps are lined up
correctly and the latches are closed.
Note: To install the IPE Module, refer to Table 11 in Chapter 5,
ÒHardware installation overview.Ó
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
524 Chapter 17: Hardware upgrade
Procedure 28: Installing the cables for Ethernet LAN support
(Application Module)
This procedure assumes that your Application Module contains the
following:
¥
¥
¥
an MVME167-02 SBC card
an MVME712M transition card
a generic I/O panel
Application Modules are not shipped with the following two cables that are
essential for Ethernet LAN support:
¥
an NT7D47DA internal cable to connect the MVME712M card to the
Ethernet port of the generic I/O panel
¥
an NT7D47EA external drop cable to connect the Ethernet port of the
generic I/O panel to the Ethernet
This procedure describes how to install these cables.
1
Ensure that power to the Application Module is turned off. You may
need to perform Procedure 25: Hardware powerdown.
2
3
Loosen the four screws in the front of the Application Module.
Using the handles on each side, slide the Application Module out 9
or 10 cm (3 or 4 in.) to provide access to the connectors of the
MVME712M card.
4
Remove the eight screws holding the generic I/O panel to the rear of
the AEM and move the generic I/O panel outside the AEM so that
you can work on it.
5
6
Connect the end marked P1 of the NT7D47DA cable to the Ethernet
connector of the MVME712M card.
Remove the standoff screws from the end marked P2 of the
NT7D47DA cable and connect that end to the Ethernet port at the
rear of the generic I/O panel. Use the standoff screws to attach the
P2 end to the generic I/O panel.
7
Reinstall the generic I/O panel using the eight screws removed in
step 4.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 17: Hardware upgrade 525
8
9
Slide the Application Module back into place and tighten the four
screws.
Connect the NT7D47EA cable to the Ethernet port on the generic I/O
panel. This cable will be connected to an Ethernet transceiver. For
more information, refer to ÒInstalling Ethernet LAN supportÓ in
Chapter 9, ÒMeridian Link/CCR interface cabling.Ó
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
526 Chapter 17: Hardware upgrade
Procedure 29: Installing the MVME332XT or MVME332XTS
ACC card
1
2
3
4
5
Complete Procedure 3: Hardware powerdown.
Loosen the screws at the top and bottom of the card.
Use the ejectors to unlock the card.
Pull the card out of the Application Module.
Check the switches and jumpers on the replacement card (see
Tables 145 and 146).
6
Slide the replacement unit into the Application Module. Press hard in
the middle of the faceplate to seat the card.
7
8
Tighten the screws on the faceplate of the replacement card.
Restart power to the Application Module.
Table 145
MVME332XT ACC card switch settings
Position
6
Switch
S1
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
on off
off off
off
on
off
on
off
on
on
on
S2
Table 146
MVME332XT ACC card jumper settings
Block
J1
Jumper setting
1Ð2, 5Ð6, 7Ð9, 8Ð10, 11Ð12, 15Ð17
1Ð2
J4
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
527
Chapter 18: Acceptance testing
This chapter describes the various acceptance tests you can perform.
Meridian Link/CCR
After you have installed Meridian Link, CCR, or both, check that the
installation was successful by following the procedure below.
This procedure assumes that you have
¥
¥
¥
¥
loaded the operating system (using Procedure 5 or 6)
rebooted the operating system (using Procedure 7)
loaded the application software (using Procedure 8)
restored the configuration files and data files (using Procedure 9)
1
2
At the ÒConsole Login:Ó prompt, type maint and press [Return].
You are prompted for a password. Type the password and press
[Return]. The default password is maint.
3
At the Òmaint>Ó prompt, type fileverif and press [Return].
Messages appear as shown in Figure 295.
Figure 295
File verification messages
FILE VERIFICATION AS OF 09/20/93 12:13:01
09/20/93 12:13:01 FILE VERIFICATION AS OF 09/20/93 12:13:01
Static file verification found everything to be in order.
Permissions and ownership tests found everything in order.
Structural verification found maint data files to be in order.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
528 Chapter 18: Acceptance testing
4
5
Type exit and press [Return] to go to the ÒConsole Login:Ó prompt.
CCR or Meridian Link or both have now been installed and verified.
Unlock the tape drive and remove the tape.
To ensure that CCR is working correctly, you may want to create a simple
script and execute it. For information on creating and executing a script,
refer to the CCR User Guide (P0747008).
Note: If you have never written a script nor used script commands,
you may need to refer to someone who has, such as a CCR
administrator.
1
2
Log into CCR by typing ccrusr and pressing Return.
When prompted, type the password and press [Return]. The default
password is ccrusr.
3
4
5
6
When prompted, type in a user ID (such as 0001) and press
[Return].
When prompted, type in the user password (such as admin) and
press [Return].
Write a simple script. Refer to the chapter ÒWriting scriptsÓ in the
CCR User Guide.
Validate the script to confirm its accuracy. Refer to the chapter on
ÒWriting scriptsÓ in the CCR User Guide.
7
8
Correct any errors found during validation.
Install the script. Refer to the chapter ÒWriting scriptsÓ in the CCR
User Guide.
9
Associate the script to a CDN. Refer to the chapter ÒAssociating
CDNs and scriptsÓ in the CCR User Guide.
10
Execute the script by dialing the CDN.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 18: Acceptance testing 529
Meridian Mail
This section describes how you can use Edit Voice to create voice segment
files, how to record voice segments, and how to use them.
Using Edit Voice to create voice segment files
Meridian Link provides the Edit Voice feature to define, organize, and store
voice prompts in segment files. This section later describes how Play Voice
uses the voice segments defined in Edit Voice to answer a customerÕs
account balance query.
Once the mailbox has been configured, you can use the Meridian Link
editvoice command to record your applicationÕs prompts in a voice segment
file. Online help is available for the command, and within the edit voice
session as well.
The application opens a voice segment file by name, and then selects voice
segments within the file by number. Consequently, you must define the file
name and the prompt segment sequence before you begin recording.
A single voice segment file can hold 1000 segments, and each segment can
be up to 30 seconds in length. Thus, although an application can have only
two voice segment files open against a voice channel at a time, this
constraint is unlikely to present a problem.
Applications normally use one voice segment file for all prompts, because a
list of segments from one file may be concatenatedÑwithout noticeable
spacingÑwithin one playvoice command. To see how this works, see
ÒExample of customer account balance queryÓ later in this section.
In general, only one voice segment file is needed. However, there may be
external reasons to use more than one voice segment file within an
application. For example, if prompts from several different voice files are
used, each separate file must be specified in a separate Play Voice message,
and there will be noticeable pauses within the prompts. Several voice
segment files may be needed for applications with multiple menus, or where
different areas of the prompts are changed at different times.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
530 Chapter 18: Acceptance testing
Recording and trimming voice segments
In Edit Voice, each voice segment has a title and text associated with the
recording. In general, you will want to create the new file, and then create
the segments in the order you plan to use them.
When creating voice segments, enter the title and text before you start
recording. You can then record with the text on-screen in front of you, so
you are sure that you wonÕt forget any part of your planned prompts.
ItÕs almost impossible to record without leaving some silence at the front
and end of the recording, so you would normally use the trimsilence
command to trim the ends of a recorded digit, thus creating a more natural-
sounding message.
Use the Edit Voice Trim Silence facility to cut blank space from prompts
that will be concatenated. For example, if you want to record the digits
ÒoneÓ and ÒtwoÓ for playback in a sequence of digits, you will record
Ò...one...Ó and then record Ò...two....Ó When you hear digits recorded this
way played back in sequence, it sounds like Ò...one......two....Ó However,
after using the Trim Silence feature, you would hear Òone..twoÓ instead. It is
best to run Edit Voice in a quiet environment, since background noise will
prevent you from using Trim Silence.
Creating a header file
If you define the segments the same way both in the application and in the
voice segment file, you will not need a header record.
When you save the file, you can optionally use the editvoice command to
write a ÒCÓ language header file to associate the prompt titles you created
with the segment number they are recorded in. This file may be moved to
tape with the backfiles command and transferred to your host computer
from the tape if your host is compatible with the Motorola UNIX System V
bru tape format.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 18: Acceptance testing 531
Using Edit Voice for the first time
The first time the editvoice command is run, it prompts you to create a
VPE.PRO file. If someone else has already been using Edit Voice for
another application, you must use the maint filedelete command to delete
the existing VPE.PRO file before you start your session.
When creating your VPE.PRO file, Edit Voice prompts you for the mailbox
number (the mailbox you created earlier, for your application), the mailbox
password (which normally defaults to the same as the mailbox number), and
the phone you want to record from.
Example of customer account balance query
If your application wants to obtain a customerÕs account number and read
back the customerÕs current balance, the prompts might look like those in
Figure 296 and the session might resemble the Play Voice example session
in Figure 297.
Figure 296
Example of voice segment file
AddBalFile
Seg 1:Please enter your account number.
Seg 2:Your current balance is...
Seg 3:...dollars and...
Seg 4:...cents.
Seg 5:...One...
Seg 6:...Two...
Seg 7:...Three...
¥
¥
¥
Seg 13:...Nine...
Seg 14:...no...
Seg 15:...thousand...
Seg 16:...hundred
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
532 Chapter 18: Acceptance testing
Figure 297
Example of Play Voice session
Call Offered--->
<--- Answer Call
Call Answered--->
<--- Play Voice (AddBalFile) Seg 1
Play Voice End--->
<--- Collect Digits
Collect Digits End--->
<--- Play Voice (AddBalFile) Seg 2, Seg 7, Seg 15,
Seg 6, Seg 16, Seg 3, Seg 14, Seg 4
For further information on the Voice Prompt Editor, refer to the Meridian
ACCESS Voice Prompt Editor UserÕs Guide (NTP 555-7001-318).
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
533
Chapter 19: Single Terminal Access
This chapter describes how to configure the Meridian 1 to support Single
Terminal Access (STA). STA is available with X11 release 19 and greater,
and provides integrated access to operation, administration, and
maintenance (OA&M) functions for the systems it monitors. STA allows a
single terminal to access the Meridian 1 and up to three other applications,
including Meridian Link/CCR. For more information, refer to the ÒSingle
Terminal AccessÓ chapter in the X11 System Management Applications
(NTP 553-3001-301).
Hardware and software requirements
To implement STA to support Meridian Link/CCR, the following hardware,
software, cabling, and connections are required:
¥
¥
a VT220 terminal or compatible
available ports on an MSDL card (NT6D80)
Ñ one for the STA terminal (must be port 0)
Ñ one for each STA-monitored system (Meridian Link/CCR)
Note: You can also use a port on the MSDL card for the AML
connection.
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
one MSDL faceplate cable (NTND27) for the STA port
one MSDL faceplate cable (NTND27) for each monitored system port
one NT1R03 or NT7D58 cable for each monitored IPE system
one NT7D61 cable for each monitored Application Module system
one null modem adapter for each NT7D61, NT1R03, or NT7D58 cable
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
534 Chapter 19: Single Terminal Access
¥
¥
one 25-pin straight-through cable for the STA terminal
the following software packages:
Ñ Single Terminal Access (STA) (package 228)
Ñ MSDL (package 222)
Ñ MSDL SDI (package 227)
Before you begin
To ensure successful STA implementation, the following criteria must be
met:
¥
The IPE Module must be connected to a Meridian 1 Options 21Ð81
system, or the Application Module must have an MVME712M
transition card.
¥
¥
¥
An MSDL card must be installed in your system and set for RS-232
DCE. For information on installing an MSDL card, refer to Chapter 8,
ÒHardware installation procedures.Ó
Port 0 on the MSDL card must be available for the configuration of an
STA terminal, which acts as a switchboard between the multiple
applications.
At least one other port must be available for your STA system port
connection to the Meridian Link/CCR.
Note: In order to get optimum use out of the STA feature (that is, to
allow for connection to Meridian MAX and Meridian Mail), you may
need additional available ports on your MSDL card.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 19: Single Terminal Access 535
Figure 298
STA for Meridian Link/CCR on an IPE Module
Meridian 1
I/O Panel
VT220
STA Terminal
Mini SCSI
DB
NTND27AB
25-pin straight
25
Port 0
DB 25
MSDL
Shielded
Connectors
Mini SCSI
Port x
(x=1 or 2
or 3)
NTND27AB
DB
25
IPE Shelf
NT1R03DB
Null Modem
NT1R03BA
Ethernet
Port 1
DB
25
NT1R03AA
Port 3
Port 5
Port 7
Female Connector
Male Connector
DB 25
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
536 Chapter 19: Single Terminal Access
Figure 299
STA for Meridian Link/CCR on an Application Module
Meridian 1
I/O Panel
VT220
STA Terminal
Mini SCSI
NTND27AB
NTND27AB
25-pin straight cable
DB
25
Port 0
MSDL
Shielded
Connectors
Card 1
Conn 1
Mini SCSI
Port x
NT7D61XX
DB
NT7D79BA
DB
25
DB
25
SP1
9
(x=1 or 2 or 3)
Shielded
Connectors
Null Modem
Generic
I/O Panel
MVME
712M
Female Connector
Male Connector
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 19: Single Terminal Access 537
Setting up STA
1
Access LD 22 to verify that your system is equipped with the
following software:
¥
¥
¥
MSDL (222)
MSDL SDI (227)
STA (228)
2
Set up a VT220 or compatible terminal for STA. The setup
parameters vary according to terminal type. For more information,
refer to Chapter 10, ÒInstalling peripheral devices.Ó
Note: It is important that the [ESC] key is set up correctly (Ô~Key) or
you will not be able to toggle from one system to another.
3
4
Access LD 48 and type STAT MSDL to check if there is an MSDL
card available in your system.
Type STAT MSDL x to check the port assignments of port x on the
MSDL cards (where x is a port number). Determine whether you will
use an existing MSDL or whether a new one must be installed.
5
6
7
Connect an NTND27AB cable from port 0 on the MSDL card to the
shield connector on the Meridian 1 I/O panel.
Connect a 25-pin straight cable from the other side of the shield
connector (on the I/O panel) to the STA terminal.
Connect an NTND27AB cable from another port on the same MSDL
card to the shield connector on the Meridian 1 I/O panel.
If you are using an IPE Module, connect a null modem adapter
between the other side of the shield connector to either an
NT1R03DB or an NT7D58 cable. This cable runs to port 1 on the
IPE Module. Refer to Figure 298.
If you are using an Application Module, connect a null modem
adapter between the other side of the shield connector to an
NT7D61 cable. This cable runs to the Application ModuleÕs I/O panel
(J7 on the I/O subpanel or SYS CONS on the universal or generic
I/O panel). Refer to Figure 299.
Note: Steps 8Ð15 are performed on the Meridian 1 terminal. Ensure
that the ÒCaps LockÓ is set to the on position.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
538 Chapter 19: Single Terminal Access
Configure the MSDL port for STA. Define the port and its
8
characteristics by responding to the following prompts in LD 17.
Substitute the device number where ÒxÓ appears in the Response
column.
Table 147
LD 17ÑConfigure MSDL port
Prompt Response
Comment
REQ
CHG
Create or change information in the database
Configuration record data block
TYPE
ADAN
CFN
NEW TTY x
Add TTY with a logical ID x (0-15). The TTY
number must be the same as the DNUM of
the MSDL.
CTYP
GRP
MSDL
0
Card type is MSDL (automatic response)
Network Group Number (this prompt appears
only for Option 81 systems)
DNUM
x
Device number; same as TTY (automatic
response)
PORT
DES
0
Admin port number (automatic response)
Designate port 0 for the STA terminal.
Baud rate
STA_ADMIN
BPS
9600
PARY
STOP
BITL
NONE
Parity type
1
Number of stop bits
8
Data bit length
PARM
FUNC
USER
XSM
RS-232 DCE
ABD FCL LME
Interface and transmission mode
MSDL card functions
MTC SCH BUG Output message types
NO SDI port for the system monitor
Log buffer size
TTYLOG <cr>
<cr> through remaining prompts
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 19: Single Terminal Access 539
9
Verify the above configuration in LD 22.
10
Access LD 48 to verify that your MSDL is enabled. Type
STAT MSDL x.
Note: If the MSDL is not enabled, type ENL MSDL x.
Figure 300 shows that the MSDL is enabled but the port is not
enabled.
Figure 300
STAT MSDL
STAT MSDL 11
MSDL 11: ENBL
SDI
11 DIS PORT 0
11
Return to LD17 to configure the TTY port as the STA port and to set
up additional ports for system monitors.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
540 Chapter 19: Single Terminal Access
Table 148
LD 17ÑConfigure MSDL port
Prompt
Response
Comment
REQ
CHG
Create or change information in the
database
TYPE
ADAN
TTY
CFN
Configuration record data block
Add STA with a logical ID x (0-15)
Device number (MSDL SDI TTY)
NEW STA x
0-15
Note: Use the same TTY number
you assigned to the ADAN prompt in
step 8.
CTYP
GRP
MSDL
0
Card type is MSDL (automatic
response)
Network Group Number (this prompt
only appears for Option 81 systems)
DNUM
0Ð15
0
Device number; same as TTY
(automatic response)
ADMIN_
PORT
Admin port number (automatic
response)
LANG
(ENG)
P1, P2, P3
Language supported (automatic
response for Release 19)
ADDITIONAL
PORTS*
The MSDL port(s) cabled to the SYS
CONS port
* If one of the ADDITIONAL PORTS must be deleted, type an ÒXÓ before
the port number (for example, XP2).
12
Verify the above configuration in LD 22.
13
14
Access LD 48 and type ENL STA x to enable the STA port.
Type STAT STA x to verify the status of the STA application.
Figure 301 shows STA 0 on port 0 (admin port) is enabled.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 19: Single Terminal Access 541
Figure 301
STAT STA
STAT STA 0
STA 00
STAT: ENABLED
TGT: ENABLED
PORT 00 ADM PORT ABD ENABLED Admin Terminal
15
To verify port configurations on the MSDL, type STAT MSDL x.
Figure 302 shows the STA Administration terminal on port 0 and the
STA monitored system on port 3.
Figure 302
STAT MSDL
STAT MSDL 11
MSDL 11: ENBL
STA ADM 0 OPER PORT 0
STA
0
PORT 3
The STA Main Menu appears on your terminal. If it does not come
up, try pressing Return several times. If you do not get the menu,
check the terminal parameters, as described in Chapter 10,
ÒInstalling peripheral devices.Ó
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
542 Chapter 19: Single Terminal Access
Figure 303
STA Main Menu
STA Main Menu
F6: View Port Configuration
F7: Change Port Configuration
F8: Port Maintenance
F9: Access Options
F10: Connect to Meridian 1
-----------------Meridian 1 Single Terminal Access Port Status------------------
MSDL Port:
Port Name:
Port Status: enabled
0
1
2
3
Admin Terminal
non-sta port
non-sta port
disabled
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
16
At the STA Main Menu, click <PF7> to change the port configuration.
17
You are prompted for a port number. Type the MSDL port number
you have designated to connect to the Meridian Link/CCR system
console port (Ò1Ó for P1, Ò2Ó for P2, or Ò3Ó for P3).
18
19
20
At the login prompt, type your system name.
At the password prompt, type the Meridian 1 password.
Complete your port configuration by using the up/down arrow keys to
go to each field, and the left/right arrow keys to select your entries.
See Table 149 for the correct responses.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 19: Single Terminal Access 543
Table 149
Port configuration
Prompt
Response
PORT TYPE
PORT NAME
BAUD RATE
DATA BITS
System
Meridian Link/CCR
9600
8
STOP BITS
1
INTERFACE
EMULATION
CONNECT SEQUENCE
RS-232 DCE
EM200 8-bit Ctrl
Ctrl-R (Read the instructions under
the function keys on how to enter
this information)
LOGOUT SEQ
Note: Step 20 must be completed for each port connected to a
monitored system.
21
22
Click <PF7> to proceed to the Port Maintenance Menu.
Select ÒEnable portÓ using the up/down arrow keys and press
[Return] to enable the Meridian Link/CCR system port.
STA is now available to monitor both Meridian Link/CCR and the
Meridian 1. You can access Meridian Link/CCR by pressing the
assigned function key as shown on the STA Main Menu. You may
have to press [Return] several times to get a response.
23
To return to the STA Main Menu, press [ESC] and type STA. Press
[Ctrl]+[R] to refresh the screen when needed.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
544 Chapter 19: Single Terminal Access
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
545
Chapter 20: Ordering
Table 150 lists field-replaceable Application Module items and the quantity
required for operation. Table 151 lists field-replaceable IPE Module items
and the quantity required for operation.
Table 150
Field-replaceable Application Module items
Eng. code
(if applicable)
Common
product
code
Description
Applies to
Qty.
1
NT7D63AA
NT7D63AB
A0374107
Application Module chassis
assembly
Systems with
MVME712A/
MVME712AM
A0403312
Application Module chassis
assembly
Systems with
MVME712M
1
NT7D64AA
NT7D64DC
NT7D62AB
A0374109
A0374110
A0387828
A0352271
A0351919
A0600181
A0352210
Power supply, AC
AC version
DC version
All systems
All systems
All systems
All systems
All systems
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Power supply, DC
Disk/tape unit 172M
High-density data cassette tape
MVME147SA-1 SBC card
MVME167-03x SBC card
MVME333-2 XCC card and
MVME705B transition card
Ñ continued Ñ
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
546 Chapter 20: Ordering
Table 150
Field-replaceable Application Module items (continued)
Eng. code
(if applicable)
Common
product
code
Description
Applies to
Qty.
A0376918
A0601182
A0351167
A0376528
MVME332XTS ACC card
MVME712M transition card
MVME712AM transition card
MVME712A transition card
All systems
All systems
N. America
1
1
1
1
Inter-
national
NT6D51AA
A0387982
NT6D51AA transition card
All systems
1
1
NT7D46AB
NT7D46AD
NT7D46AF
NT7D46AL
NT7D46AT
NT7D46AV
A0373932
A0373933
A0373934
A0373935
A0373936
A0373937
0.6 m (2 ft) SDI Paddle Board cable
1.8 m (6 ft) SDI Paddle Board cable
3 m (10 ft) SDI Paddle Board cable
6 m (20 ft) SDI Paddle Board cable
10.6 m (35 ft) SDI Paddle Board
cable
Connec-
tions to the
XS01 board
13.7 m (45 ft) SDI Paddle Board
cable
NTND27AB
A0393419
1.8 m (6 ft.) MSDL to Meridian 1 I/O
panel SCSI II cable
All systems
All systems
1
1
NT7D58AB
NT7D58AD
NT7D58AF
NT7D58AL
NT7D58AT
NT7D58AV
A0373938
A0373939
A0373940
A0373941
A0373942
A0373943
0.6 m (2 ft) ESDI/MSDL cable
1.8 m (6 ft) ESDI/MSDL cable
3 m (10 ft) ESDI/MSDL cable
6 m (20 ft) ESDI/MSDL cable
10.6 m (35 ft) ESDI/MSDL cable
13.7 m (45 ft) ESDI/MSDL cable
NT7D61AB
NT7D61AD
NT7D61AF
NT7D61AL
NT7D61AT
NT7D61AV
A0374031
A0374070
A0374071
A0374072
A0374073
A0374074
0.6 m (2 ft) SDI card cable
1.8 m (6 ft) SDI card cable
3 m (10 ft) SDI card cable
6 m (20 ft) SDI card cable
10.6 m (35 ft) SDI card cable
13.7 m (45 ft) SDI card cable
All systems
All systems
1
3
NT8D96AE
A0388536
2.4 m (8 ft) VME multi-port cable
Ñ continued Ñ
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 20: Ordering 547
Table 150
Field-replaceable Application Module items (continued)
Eng. code
(if applicable)
Common
product
code
Description
Applies to
Qty.
P0713556
P0715244
Dummy panel
I/O subpanel (to be
discontinued)
P0735020
P0744890
P0735022
A052758
Universal I/O panel
Generic I/O panel
Bracket
All systems
All systems
All systems
All systems
1
1
1
Card slot blank faceplate
Ñ end Ñ
Table 151
Field-replaceable IPE Module items
Eng. code
(if applicable)
Common
product
code
Description
Applies to
Qty.
NT1R02AA
NT1R02BA
A0617009
A0617010
A0600072
Option 11 IPE Module
Options 21Ð81 IPE Module
Upgrade chassis
Option 11
1
1
1
Options 21Ð81
Option 11 to
Options 21Ð81
A0352271
A0400295
High-density data cassette tape
All systems
All options
1
1
NT1R03AA
NT1R03BA
Shielded four-port octopus
cable with an Ethernet
connector
A0400297
Shielded four-port octopus
cable
All options
1
ÑcontinuedÑ
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
548 Chapter 20: Ordering
Table 151
Field-replaceable IPE Module items (continued)
Eng. code
(if applicable)
Common
product
code
Description
Applies to
Qty.
NT1R03CA
NT1R03HF
NT8D93AJ
A0401483
A0402669
A0357270
Extension cable
Option 11
2
1
1
Modem cable (3 m, 10 ft)
All options
All options
SDI cable for NT8D41 Paddle
Board (5 m, 16 ft)
NT8D93AW
NTAK19AA
NTAK19BA
NT1R03DB
A0357271
A0372718
A0372719
A0402335
SDI cable for NT8D41 Paddle
Board (15 m, 48 ft)
All options
Option 11
Option 11
All options
1
1
1
Two-port SDI cable for
NTAK03AA TDS/DTR card
Four-port SDI cable for
NTAK02AA SDI/DCH card
Extension cable; 25-pin D-type
subminiature cable; male-male
(0.6 m, 2 ft)
NT1R03DC
NT1R03DF
NT1R03DP
NT1R03DV
A0402336
A0402337
A0402338
A0402339
Extension cable; 25-pin D-type
subminiature cable; male-male
(1.2 m, 4 ft)
All options
All options
All options
All options
Extension cable; 25-pin D-type
subminiature cable; male-male
(3 m, 10 ft)
Extension cable; 25-pin D-type
subminiature cable; male-male
(8 m, 25 ft)
Extension cable; 25-pin D-type
subminiature cable; male-male
(14 m, 45 ft)
Ñ continued Ñ
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 20: Ordering 549
Table 151
Field-replaceable IPE Module items (continued)
Eng. code
(if applicable)
Common
product
code
Description
Applies to
All options
All options
All options
All options
Qty.
NT1R03EB
NT1R03EF
NT1R03EP
NT1R03EV
A0402330
A0402332
A0402333
A0402334
Extension cable; 25-pin D-type
subminiature cable; male-
female (0.6 m, 2 ft)
Extension cable; 25-pin D-type
subminiature cable; male-
female (3 m, 10 ft)
Extension cable; 25-pin D-type
subminiature cable; male-
female (8 m, 25 ft)
Extension cable; 25-pin D-type
subminiature cable; male-
female (14 m, 45 ft)
Ñ end Ñ
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
550 Chapter 20: Ordering
Component failure rates
Failure rates for basic Application Module components in terms of the
number of expected failures in one million hours of operation are listed in
Table 152 and the rates for basic IPE Module components are listed in
Table 153.
Table 152
Application Module projected component failure rates
Part
number
Component
Failure rate
per million
hours
Mean
time
between
failures
NT7D18AA
Application Equipment
Module
1.43
699,500
NT7D62AA
NT7D64AA
NT7D64DC
A0351919
A0600164
A0351167
Disk tape assembly
AM power supply, ac
AM power supply, dc
MVME147 SBC card
MVME167 SBC card
17.24
13.89
13.89
11.98
11.98
11.98
58,000
72,000
72,000
83,500
83,500
83,500
MVME712AM transition
card with modem
A0352210
A0351166
MVME333-2 XCC card
11.72
16.67
85,500
60,000
MVME705B transition
card
A0376918
A0351356
MVME332XTS ACC card
11.98
83,500
TEAC MT-2ST/N50
cassette tape drive
- at 15 min per 8 hours
93.46
29.07
10,700
34,400
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 20: Ordering 551
Table 153
IPE Module projected component failure rates
Part Number
Component
Failure Rate
Per Million
Hours
Mean
time
between
failures
SMM167 SBC card and
adapter card
6.83
146,500
A0617011
A0617012
240-Mbyte disk drive
600-Mbyte tape drive
IPE Module
7.69
13.33
27.93
130,000
75,000
35,800
A0617009
A0617010
These failure rates should be used in conjunction with the spares planning.
For more information, refer to Spares Planning (NTP 553-3001-153).
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
552 Chapter 20: Ordering
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
553
List of terms
ACD
See Automatic Call Distribution (ACD).
ACD DN
AEM
See Automatic Call Distribution Directory Number (ACD DN).
See Application Equipment Module (AEM).
See Application Module (AM).
AM
AML
See Application Module Link (AML).
Application Equipment Module (AEM)
Module Packaging within the Meridian 1 Universal Equipment Module that
supports the Application Module.
Application Module (AM)
NortelÕs Motorola-based application processor that is packaged within an
AEM in a Meridian 1.
Application Module Link (AML)
A Nortel internal and proprietary link that connects the Meridian 1 (via
ESDI or MSDL) to the IPE Module or the Application Module.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
554 List of terms
attendant
A PBX operator position. Attendants typically receive incoming calls and
extend them to the desired party. PBX users typically contact the attendant
by dialing 0. The Meridian 1 supports multiple attendants, and offers
features such as busy lamp field showing the busy/idle state of DNs.
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
This is a feature offered by the Meridian 1 that queues and distributes
incoming calls to a number of answering positions. Calls are queued until an
agent is available. If multiple agents are available, calls are serviced in the
order they arrive and are distributed so that the workload at each answering
position is approximately equal. ACD has many additional features,
including recorded announcement (RAN), music while queued, night
treatment, overflows, statistics/reports, and networking with ISDN.
Automatic Call Distribution Directory Number (ACD DN)
An ACD DN is the queue where incoming calls wait until they are
answered. Calls are answered in the order in which they entered the queue.
Base Operating System (BOS)
MotorolaÕs SYSTEM V/68 Base Operating System (UNIX). UNIX
System V Release 3 Version 7.1 (V/68 R3V7.1) is used with the IPE
Module or the Application Module.
CDN
See control directory number (CDN).
Command and Status Link (CSL)
A Nortel internal and proprietary link, also known as AML.
Control Directory Number (CDN)
A Control DN is a special ACD DN, configured in Meridian 1, to which no
agents are assigned. To control calls in the CDN you need to create a script,
otherwise the calls are put into the default mode. A call script is associated
with a CDN, so that all calls entering a CDN are handled by the same call
script.
CSL
See Command and Status Link (CSL).
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
List of terms 555
Customer Controlled Routing (CCR)
CCR is a product that enables you to control and route Automatic Call
Distribution (ACD) calls entering your Meridian 1 system. You can provide
specific recorded announcements, music, and so on before assigning a call
to an agent.
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
An attribute of a trunk. The central office passes the extension number of
the called party over a DID trunk to the PBX when offering a call to the
PBX. The PBX is then able to automatically route the call to the extension
without requiring operator/attendant assistance. In this way, a single trunk
can terminate calls for many different extensions (but not simultaneously).
directory number (DN)
The number that identifies a telephone set on a PBX or in the public
network. It is the number that a caller dials in order to establish a connection
to the addressed party. The DN could be a local PBX extension (local DN),
a public network telephone number, or an ACD DN, the pilot or group
number for an ACD queue.
Directory Number Identification Service (DNIS)
A service provided on a trunk. DNIS identifies to the called system the last
digits of the number actually dialed by the caller. Meridian Link Release
5C and CCR Release 3C, in conjunction with X11 Release 24, support from
seven to 31 DNIS digits. The DNIS digits are sent as in-bank DTMF tones
on non-ISDN trunks, or using dial pulses on dial pulse (DIP) trunks. On
ISDN PRA trunks, DNIS is carried in the called party IE field of the Q.931
Setup message.
DN
See directory number (DN).
DNIS
See Directory Number Identification Service (DNIS).
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF)
The signaling method used with touch-tone 2500 telephones. Digits are sent
as in-band tones, each digit being a unique combination of 2 out of 16 tones.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
556 List of terms
Enhanced Serial Data Interface (ESDI)
A Nortel Meridian 1 pack, numbered QPC513. This card supports internal
communications between the Meridian 1 CPU and other components within
the Meridian 1 system.
Intelligent Peripheral Equipment (IPE) Module
NortelÕs smaller application processor that can be packaged in a Meridian 1
Option 11 cabinet or in an Options 21Ð81 IPE shelf.
Interactive Voice Response (IVR)
A system/facility that plays voice menus to callers, and acts upon user input
(typically DTMF digits from a touch-tone phone).
IPE Module
Meridian 1
See Intelligent Peripheral Equipment (IPE) Module.
Meridian 1 is the private branch exchange (PBX) that handles the calls to
and from an organizationÕs ACD system. It routes calls to the various
queues and provides the framework for all the ACD features available
through various applications.
Meridian Link
Meridian Link is an application that allows a Meridian 1 system to
exchange information with a host computer so that users can integrate the
capabilities of both into a business application.
Module Power Distribution Unit (MPDU)
Part of an AEM that provides power to the Application Modules housed
within it.
Multi-use Serial Data Link (MSDL) card
This card supports internal communications between the Meridian 1 CPU
and other components within the Meridian 1 system.
Northern Telecom Publication (NTP)
A collection of documents and manuals that describe the Meridian 1 product
portfolio and how to install, administer, and maintain it.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
List of terms 557
Operations, Administration and Maintenance (OA&M)
The tools, typically software, that enables a technician to configure,
administer, and maintain a system.
overlay
Generally used to describe some software that is not always memory
resident; it is loaded on request. In the Meridian 1, most configuration,
administration and maintenance functions are done from a tty terminal using
various overlays. Each overlay is designed for a specific task: for example,
Overlay 10 is used to configure PBX (500/2500) sets, 11 to configure
proprietary sets, Overlay 23 to configure ACD queues, Overlay 17 to
configure I/O ports, Overlay 15 to configure customer data, Overlay 48 to
configure link maintenance, etc. The Meridian 1 currently has some 100
overlays. An overlay is loaded from the tty by typing LD nn where nn is the
overlay number. Overlays are exited by typing ****.
private branch exchange (PBX)
A CPE telephone switch, typically used by a business to service its internal
telephone needs. A PBX typically offers many more advanced features that
are generally available on the public network. A PBX interfaces with the
public network central office via circuits known as trunks. PBX is also used
as a name for a family of telephone sets: 500 (rotary) and 2500 (touch-tone)
sets.
profile
All CCR users have a profile that defines their level of access to the system.
QPC513
A Nortel Meridian 1 circuit pack, also known as ESDI (Enhanced Serial
Data Interface). This card supports internal communications between the
Meridian 1 CPU and other components within the Meridian 1 system.
route
Route usually refers to a trunk route. This is a collection of trunks that share
many common characteristics, such as trunk type (for example, DID). On
the Meridian 1, trunks must be associated with (belong to) a trunk route.
Routes are configured in Overlay 16 on the Meridian 1.
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
558 List of terms
SDI port
This is used for the optional sharing features that allow the IPE Module or
the Application Module console to access Meridian 1 administration and
maintenance programs.
Stand-alone System Interactive Diagnostics (SSID)
A set of diagnostic tools that provide confidence tests on various IPE
Module or Application Module hardware components.
terminal number (TN)
The physical address of a device (for example, telephone set, trunk, and
attendant) on the Meridian 1 PBX. The TN is composed of the loop, shelf,
card, and unit IDs.
trunk
Trunks are the physical links, or circuits, that enable telephone
communication, such as the link between a PBX and the public central
office (CO). There are various trunk types, which provide services such as
Direct Inward Dialing (DID trunks), ISDN, central office connectivity (CO
trunks). Trunks can be analog or digital. Digital trunks use A/B signaling, or
D-channel signaling in the case of ISDN. Trunks are configured on the
Meridian 1 in Overlay 14.
Versa Module Eurocard (VME)
VME bus is an industry standard, high-performance, 32-bit computer bus.
Voice Response Unit (VRU)
A device that plays voice menus to a caller and responds to caller
instructions entered on a touch-tone phone. Also known as IVR or
Interactive Voice Response.
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
559
Index
administration
CCR 33
administrator
A
A/B switchbox
connecting 276
Meridian Link 17
AEM see Application Equipment
Module (AEM)
configuration 35
agent login ID 15
AM see Application Module (AM)
AML 299, see Application Module Link
(AML)
Application Equipment Module (AEM)
configuration 19
definition 553
sharing system consoles 276
switching applications 277
ACC card
description. 68
indicators 68
acceptance testing 527
ACD see Automatic Call Distribution
(ACD)
ACD DN
configuring 344
defining default 344
defining IVR handling 345
definition 554
power 53
Application Module (AM)
cable requirements 216
cabling to external equipment 227
components 54
to the VSDN Table 364
ACD telephones
defining as AST 337
active status change event 330
adapter board 78
definition 553
description 50
field-replaceable items 545
front view 56
hardware upgrade paths 51, 52
installation overview 88
installing 125
power supply 79
projected component failure rates 550
rear view 57
adding
channels to Meridian Mail 367
connection to Meridian Mail 255
Meridian Mail 364
new mailbox 368
voice processing capability 255
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3CInstallation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
560 Index
receiving and unpacking 116
scheduling 507
backplane
cable rerouting 185
Base Operating System (BOS) see BOS
board
SBC card (description) 58
Application Module Link (AML)
changing parameters 484
default configuration 479
definition 553
adapter 78
description 15
parameters 486
redundant Meridian Link 16
Application Module power supply
installing 127
BOS see Base Operating System (BOS)
definition 554
description 13, 31
installation (phase 1) (IPE Module or
MVME167 card) 438
application tape
loading onto hard disk 458
applications
using A/B switchbox to switch 277
assigning
installation (phase 1) (MVME147
card) 421
installation (phase 2) (IPE Module or
MVME167 card) 443
installation (phase 2) (MVME147
card) 424
installation (phases 3 and 4) (IPE
Module or MVME167 card) 446
installation (phases 3 and 4)
(MVME147 card) 427
loading (IPE Module or MVME167
card) 429
status change events 333
telephones to status message groups
335
association
CCR 31
AST
defining ACD telephones 337
defining non-ACD telephones 341
asynchronous communication controller
(ACC) card 68
loading (MVME147 card) 413
breakers
MPDU 127, 128
attendant 317, 554
auto-start 505
C
cable
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) 554
required package 36
Automatic Call Distribution Directory
Number (ACD DN) see ACD
DN
ESDI/MSDL (Options 21Ð81) 173
external I/O (Application Module) 221
external I/O (IPE Module) 154
internal I/O (Application Module) 219
MVME332XTS card settings and
cable connections 136
MVME333-2 card settings and cable
connections 137
MVME705B card settings and cable
connections 138
B
backing up
configuration files and data files 476
restoring configuration files and data
files 471
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index 561
MVME712M card settings and cable
connections 141
null modem RS-232 connections 275
octopus (IPE Module) 152
power 216
SDI (Application Module) 250
SDI Paddle Board (Application
Module) 251
system console 248
TCP/IP 249
X.25 249
call handling 30
requirements (Application Module)
216
requirements (IPE Module) 151
RS-232 pin connections 274
to external equipment 224
to generic I/O panel 223
to I/O subpanel 221
Calling Line Identification (CLID)
required package 37
card
ACC 68
description 70
to universal I/O panel 222
cabling
ESDI switch and jumper locations 149
installing ESDI 145
installing MSDL 145
installing SDI/DCH card 142
MSDL switch and jumper locations
147
MVME147SA-1 description 58
MVME167-03 description 62
MVME332 card installation 526
MVME332XTS jumper settings and
cable connections 136
Application Module to external
equipment 227
Application Module to Meridian 1
245, 246
ESDI/MSDL 247
host computer 249
installing Ethernet cables 524
internal modem 253
IPE Module to Meridian Mail 172
Meridian Mail 254
MVME705B card 133
MVME712A card 140
MVME712AM card 139
Option 11 IPE Module to external
equipment 177
Options 21Ð81 I/O cabling to Meridian
1 175, 176
Options 21Ð81 IPE Module SDI
cabling 173
MVME333-2 jumper settings and
cable connections 137
MVME705B cable connections 133
MVME705B description 74
MVME705B jumper settings 133
MVME705B jumper settings and
cable connections 138
MVME712A and MVME712AM
cards description 72
MVME712A cable connections 140
MVME712A jumper settings 140
MVME712AM jumper settings and
cable connections 139
Options 21Ð81 IPE Module SDI
Paddle Board 174
Options 21Ð81 IPE Module to external
equipment 209
peripheral devices 273
rerouting backplane cables 185
MVME712M description 70
MVME712M jumper settings and
cable connections 141
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
562 Index
NT6D51AA description 76
option settings 129
power sense 82
command interface
OA&M 26
components
SDI/DCH switch settings 142, 143,
146
transition 70
transition option settings 129
XCC 66
Application Module 54
IPE Module 46
concepts
Meridian Link 15
configuration
card SMM167 card 46
caution 54, 55, 60, 64, 116, 119, 120,
121, 125, 129, 185, 186, 192,
203, 206, 207, 208, 216, 261,
268, 387, 399, 458, 484, 489,
497
additional application 503
changing 482
creating 500
Gandalf LDS 120E hardware 281
notifying host of status changes 330
replacing default 499
configuration file
CCR see Customer Controlled Routing
(CCR)
backing up 476
CDN see Control DN (CDN), see
Control DN (CDN)
changing
downloading to PC 266
restoring from backup 471
configuring
AML parameters 484
configuration 482
ACD DNs 344
auto-start 505
customer number 506
host link parameters 489, 490, 497,
499
auto-terminating DN 322
CDNs 346
default languages 509
DN as an AST telephone 341
DNIS 319
Dual VAS ID 353
ESDI port (X11 Release 17) 299
ESDI port (X11 Release 18) 305, 308,
538, 540
Meridian Mail Link parameters 497
Channel Allocation Table (CAT) 366,
367
checking
card option settings 129
checklist
Meridian 1 software 94
Meridian Mail hardware 100
site survey/installation 91
co-residency
overview 1
command
continuity 16
loopback 16
Command and Status Link (CSL) 554
IDC 324
links 479
Meridian 1 293, 295
MSDL port 305, 308, 538, 540
Phantom Loops 349
Phantom Superloops 350
printers 513
redundant Meridian Link 298
route 320
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index 563
SDI port for conshare (X11 Release
17) 315
SDI port for conshare (X11 Release
18) 317
terminals 511
CPE 557
CPU adapter card
jumpers 123
creating
configuration file 500
header file 530
trunk route 325
connecting
Meridian Mail ACD queue 358
Phantom Sets 351
voice segment files 529
CSL see Command and Status Link
(CSL)
Customer Controlled Routing (CCR)
administration and maintenance 33
co-residency with Meridian Link 1
consoles and printers 33
description 27, 30
A/B switchbox 276
Application Module to external
equipment 227
Gandalf LDS 120E modem 280
Option 11 IPE Module to external
equipment 177
Options 21Ð81 IPE Module to external
equipment 209
to Meridian Mail 255
connector
hardware components 27
software requirements 97
customer number
I/O (Application Module) 82
I/O (IPE Module) 42
connector panel
changing 506
Option 11 42
conshare
D
data files
backing up 476
restoring from backup 471
DCE
configuring SDI port 317
console
cable pin 248
cabling 248
CCR system 32, 33
system 17
connections 273
default
using A/B switchbox 276
continuity command 16
Control Directory Number (CDN) see
Control DN (CDN)
Control DN (CDN) 346
configuring 346
definition 554
description 30, 31
convention
changing languages 509
defining ACD DN 344
default configuration
link 0 (AML) 479
link 1 480, 481
link 2 481
replacing 499
defining
a block of DNIS numbers 328
ACD DN with IVR handling 345
ACD group and agents 335
notation for CCR Module applications
293
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
564 Index
ACD telephones as AST 337
CDNs 346
IDC translation tables 326
new mailbox 368
non-ACD telephones as AST 341
status message groups 333
virtual agent DNs for voice channels
360, 361
defining a block of numbers for IDC
328
enabling 319
partial digit conversion 329
routing by 324
dot-matrix printer switch settings 268
downloading
configuration file 266
DTE
connections 273
DTMF see Dual Tone Multi-Frequency
(DTMF)
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) 555
Dual VAS ID 14
configuring 353
voice channels in CAT 366
DeskJet 272
DeskJet 500 272
diagnostic tools 16, 32
dial-up modem 282
Dialed Number Identification Service
(DNIS)
configuring 319
Direct Inward Dialing (DID) 555
directory number (DN) 294
configuring ACD DNs 344
configuring as AST telephone 341
configuring auto-terminating DN 322
configuring Control DNs 346
defining ACD DN with IVR handling
345
defining default ACD DN 344
definition 555
Directory Number Identification Service
(DNIS) 555
disconnected
status change event 330, 331
disk drive
IPE Module 49
disk slicing table 424
disk/tape unit
description 80
E
editvoice command
creating a header file 530
creating voice segment files 529
recording and trimming voice
segments 530
using for the first time 531
enabling
DNIS 319
ESDI port (X11 Release 18) 312
ESDI port (X81 or X11 Release 17)
302
Enhanced ACD Routing
required package 36
Enhanced Serial Data Interface (ESDI)
see ESDI card
ESDI card
definition 556
installing 145
jumper and switch locations 149
ESDI port
configuring (X11 Release 17) 299
installing 127
DN see directory number (DN)
DNIS see Directory Number Information
Service (DNIS)
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index 565
configuring (X11 Release 18) 305,
308, 538, 540
generic I/O panel 86, 235
cabling 223
group
assigning status change messages 333
building ACD groups 335
Group 0
status change messages 332
Group 1
status change messages 332
enabling (X11 Release 18) 312
enabling (X81 or X11 Release 17) 302
ESDI/MSDL cabling 173, 247
Ethernet LAN-based host 24
Ethernet LAN-based PC
description 5
installing cables 524
Expanded DNIS support 14, 32
external equipment
H
cables from CCR Module 224
connecting to Application Module 227
connecting to Option 11 IPE Module
177
hardware
CCR components 27
installation overview 87
IPE Module 39
Meridian 1 18, 34
connecting to Options 21Ð81 IPE
Module 209
external I/O cables
powerdown 520
unpacking and inspecting 115
upgrade paths 51, 52
hardware configuration
Gandalf LDS 120E modem 281
header file
description (Application Module) 221
description (IPE Module) 154
pinouts 155
F
faceplate
IPE Module 46
field-replaceable items
ordering 545
creating 530
Hold In Queue for IVR 37
host address
description 7
host computer cabling 249
host connection considerations 24
redundant Meridian Link 24
Host Enhanced Routing (service 100) 23
Host Enhanced Voice Processing (HEVP)
23, 363
file
backing up 476
downloading PC configuration 266
restoring 471
Host Link
G
changing parameters 489, 490, 497,
499
default configuration (X.25) 480, 481
description 15
Gandalf LDS 120E modem
connecting 280
hardware configuration 281
jumper option settings 281
host link default configuration
(ISDN/AP) 481
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
566 Index
host name
installing
Application Module 88, 125
description 7
host port pinout 249
host support
service requirements 23
service requirements (overview) 18
HP LaserJet II 269
HP LaserJet III 270
HP LaserJet IV 271
HP Rugged Writer 268
Application Module power supply 127
application tape in tape drive 400
BOS (IPE Module) 429
BOS (MVME147 card) 413
BOS (MVME167 card) 429
BOS tape in tape drive 418
cables for Ethernet support 524
checklist 91
disk/tape unit 127
ESDI card 145
hardware 87
IPE Module 88, 120
MSDL card 145
MVME332 card 526
NTAK02 SDI/DCH card 142
peripheral devices 261
software 371, 373
I
I/O
cable pinouts 155
cabling to Meridian 1 245, 246
connectors (Application Module) 82
connectors (IPE Module) 42
external cables (Application Module)
221
internal cables (Application Module)
219
panel 83
Intelligent Peripheral Equipment (IPE)
Module see IPE Module
interactive diagnostics (SSID) 32
Interactive Voice Response (IVR) 13,
345, 556
configuring ACD DN 344
required package 37
interface
subpanel cabling 84, 221
subpanel connections 231, 232
IDC
defining a block of DNIS numbers 328
defining translation tables 326
partial digit conversion 329
Inbound Call Management (service 97)
23
OA&M 26
internal I/O cables 219
Application Module 219
internal modem cabling 253
IPE Module 556
Incoming DID Conversion (IDC)
configuring 324
indicator
cable requirements 151
cabling to external equipment (Option
11) 177
cabling to external equipment
(Options 21Ð81) 209
components 46
ACC 68
IPE Module 47
SBC card 59, 63
XCC 66
install command
example of use 388
CPU adapter card jumpers 123
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index 567
definition 556
faceplate 46
field-replaceable items 547
hardware 39
indicators (LEDs) 47
jumper option settings
Gandalf LDS 120E modem 281
jumper setting
MVME333-2 XCC card 131
installation 120
K
keycode
installation overview 88
Meridian Mail cabling 172
NT1R03AA/NT1R03CA cable
connections (Option 11) 180
NT1R03BA/NT1R03CA cable
connections (Option 11) 181
octopus cables 152
description 4, 372
example of use 389, 402, 462
L
LAPB
Option 11 connector ports 42, 95, 96,
97, 99
Option 11 SDI and ESDI/MSDL
cabling 169
parameters (Meridian Mail Link) 498
LaserJet II 269
LaserJet III 270
LaserJet IV 271
projected component failure rate 551
receiving and unpacking 116
rerouting backplane cables 185
SBC card (description) 46
switches 47
LD 10 337, 341
LD 11 339, 342
LD 14 322
LD 15 319, 324, 333
LD 16 320, 325
LD 17 299, 305, 308, 315, 317
LD 17 538, 540
LD 2 353, 354
IVR see Interactive Voice Response
(IVR)
LD 23 335, 344, 346
LD 23 358
LD 37 318
J
jumper
ESDI card locations 149
MSDL card locations 147
MVME332XTS transition card
settings 136
MVME705B card settings 133
MVME705B transition card settings
137, 138
MVME712A card settings 140
MVME712AM card settings 139
MVME712M transition card settings
141
LD 48 312
LD 49 326, 328
LED (light emitting diode)
IPE Module 46
SBC card 59, 63
limited-distance modem
description 278
Gandalf LDS 120E 280
USRobotics Sportster 279
link
configuration 479
settings for SDI/DCH card 143
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
568 Index
link 0
hardware 18, 34
software 21, 36
changing parameters 484
default configuration 479
description 15
parameters 486
software checklist 94
Meridian Link
concepts 15
link 1
description 15
messages 13
overview 9
redundancy 14
changing parameters 489, 490, 497,
499
default configuration 480, 481
description 15
software requirements 95
Meridian Link application
co-residency with CCR 1
overview 13
link 2
changing parameters 497
default configuration 481
description 15
Meridian Mail
parameters 498
adding a connection 255
adding ACD DNs to the VSDN Table
364
adding channels 367
cabling 254
call processing 357
Channel Allocation Table (CAT) 367
configuration 355
configuring for Host Enhanced Voice
Processing 363
link status
verifying 483
loading
application software 399
application tape onto hard disk 458
BOS (IPE Module) 429
BOS (MVME147 card) 413
BOS (MVME167 card) 429
location
UDS EC224A/D switches 288
Ven-Tel 2400 Plus II switches 289,
291
creating ACD queues 358
defining a new mailbox 368
defining virtual agent DNs 360
hardware checklist 100
IPE Module cabling 172
software requirements 26, 99
Meridian Mail Link (MML)
changing parameters 497
default configuration 481
description 16
loopback command 16
M
maintenance
CCR 33
Meridian Link 17
menu
select drive 397
start-up interrupt 414
Meridian 1
parameters 498
Meridian Terminal Emulator 267
message
Meridian Link 13
configuration 293
configuration overview 295
power down 411
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index 569
shut down 412, 519
status change 330
system restart 413
MVME147 card
description 58
indicators (LEDs) 59
MVME167 card
description 62
tape insertion 398
MML see Meridian Mail Link (MML)
modem 278
dial-up 282
indicators (LEDs) 63
switches 63
Gandalf LDS 120E 280, 281
limited-distance 278
switch locations and settings for Ven-
Tel 9600 Plus 292
MVME332XTS card
installing 526
jumper settings and cable connections
136
switch locations for Ven-Tel 2400
Plus II 289, 291
MVME333-2 card
description 66
switch settings for UDS EC224A/D
288
jumper settings and cable connections
137
switch settings for Ven-Tel 2400 Plus
II 288, 290
MVME333-2 XCC card
jumper settings 131
MVME705B card
cable connections 133
description 74
USRobotics Sportster 279
Ven-Tel 2400 Plus II 288, 290
Ven-Tel 9600 Plus 291
Module Power Distribution Unit (MPDU)
see MPDU
jumper settings 133
jumper settings and cable connections
138
MPDU 556
circuit breakers 127, 128
definition 556
location 53
MVME712A card
description 72
jumper settings and cable connections
140
MVME712AM card
cable connections 139
description 72
jumper settings 139
MVME712M card
description 70
MSDL card 556
definition 556
installing 145
jumper and switch locations 147
MSDL port
configuring (X11 Release 18) 305,
308, 538, 540
MTE7 267
Multi-use Serial Data Link (MSDL) card
see MSDL card
jumper settings and cable connections
141
multiline telephones
defining as AST 339
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
570 Index
NT7D47DA cable
pinout 260
NT7D47EA cable
pinout 260
NT7D58 cable pinout 174, 247
NT7D61 cable
pinout 250
NT8D84AA cable
pinout 251
NTAK02 SDI/DCH card
installing 142
NTAK19AA cable
pinout 166
NTAK19BA cable
pinout 167
N
no message
status change messages Group 0 332
non-AST telephones
defining as AST 341
Nortel Publication (NTP) 556
notation
X11 software 294
notation conventions
CCR Module applications 293
notifying host of status changes 330
NT1R03AA cable
pinout 159
port 5 pinout 184, 214, 215
NT1R03AA cable connections
Options 21Ð81 IPE Module 212
NT1R03AA/NT1R03CA cable
connections
Option 11 IPE Module 180
NT1R03BA cable
pinout 160
NTND27AB cable
pinout 162, 163, 164, 165
NTP see Nortel Publication (NTP)
null modem RS-232 cable
pin connections 275
O
port 8 cabling 169
NT1R03BA cable connections
Options 21Ð81 IPE Module 212
NT1R03BA/NT1R03CA cable
connections
OA&M see Operations, Administration,
and Maintenance (OA&M)
octopus cables
IPE Module 152
Option 11 IPE Module 181
NT1R03CA cable
pinout 161
off-hook
status change event 330
on-hook
NT1R03D cable
pinout 156
status change event 330
opening
NT1R03E cable
pinout 157
NT1R03HF cable
pinout 158
NT6D51AA card 76
NT7D46 cable
pinout 251
Ven-Tel 2400 Plus II modem 288, 290
Ven-Tel 9600 Plus modem 291
operating system (BOS) 31
Operations, Administration and
Maintenance (OA&M) 277, 557
interface description 26
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index 571
Operations, Administration, and
Maintenance (OA&M)
definition 557
parameters
link 0 (AML) 486
link 2 (Meridian Mail Link) 498
PBX 554, see private branch exchange
(PBX)
Option 11
connector panel 42
description 39
PC
expansion cabinet 41
IPE Module SDI and ESDI/MSDL
cabling 169
downloading configuration file 266
running Reflection 4+ 266
peripheral devices
main cabinet 40
cabling interface 273
installation 261
personal computer (PC) 266
Phantom Loop
configuring 349
NT1R03AA/NT1R03CA cable
connections (IPE Module) 180
NT1R03BA/NT1R03CA cable
connections (IPE Module) 181
upgrade to Options 21Ð81 522
Options 21Ð81
Phantom Sets
creating 351
description 44
I/O cabling to Meridian 1 175, 176
I/O connectors 45
Phantom Superloop
configuring 350
pin connections
IPE Module SDI cabling 173
IPE Module SDI Paddle Board cabling
174
null modem RS-232 cable 275
RS-232 cable 274
pinout
NT1R03AA and NT1R03BA cable
connections (IPE Module) 212
upgrade from Option 11 522
ordering
field-replaceable items 545
Outbound Call Management (service 98)
23
external I/O cables 155
host port 249
NT1R03AA cable 159
NT1R03AA cable, port 5 183, 184,
214, 215
NT1R03BA cable 160
NT1R03CA cable 161
NT1R03D cable 156
NT1R03E cable 157
NT1R03HF cable 158
NT7D46 cable 251
NT7D58 cable 174, 247
NT7D61 cable 250
NT8D84AA cable 251
NTAK19AA cable 166
NTAK19BA cable 167
NTND27AB cable 162, 163, 164, 165
overlay 317, 557
P
P2 adapter board 78
panel
generic I/O 86, 235
I/O 83
universal I/O 85, 233
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
572 Index
system console cable 248
Play Voice session example 532
port
changing link 0 (AML) parameters
484
changing link 1 (host link) parameters
489, 490, 497, 499
changing link 2 (Meridian Mail Link)
parameters 497
configuration settings 124
configuring ESDI (X11 Release 17)
299
configuring ESDI (X11 Release 18)
305, 308, 538, 540
configuring MSDL (X11 Release 18)
305, 308, 538, 540
configuring applications 388
loading application software 399
loading application tape onto hard disk
458
enabling ESDI (X11 Release 18) 312
enabling ESDI (X81 or X11 Release
17).i.LD 48 302
loading operating system 429
loading operating system (MVME147
card) 413
enabling SDI 318
powerdown 520
port 5
rebooting and setup 448
replacing Application Module
MVME147/67 SBC card 521
restoring backed-up files 471
updating application software 397
verifying link status 483
profile 473, 474, 557
pinout 183, 184, 214, 215
port 5 cabling (IPE Module) 173
port 8 cabling IPE Module 169
position ID 356, 362
power cables 216
power harness 217
wiring diagram 218
power sense card
description 82
power supply
description 79
installing in an Application Module
127
power, AEM 53
CCR 31
Q
QPC513 557
Queue to commands 32
R
powerdown
rebooting system 448
recording
hardware 520
powerdown notification message 411
printer
configuring 513
voice segments 530
redundancy 14
AML connection 16
host connections 24
redundant Meridian Link
configuration 298
installation 39
setting up 261
private branch exchange (PBX) 557
procedure
backing up files 476
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index 573
Reflection 4+
using on PC 266
remote maintenance 32, 72
Remote Supervisor Login
Ven-Tel 2400 Plus II switch settings
288, 290
SDI cabling
Options 21Ð81 IPE Module 173
SDI Paddle Board
cabling (Application Module) 251
cabling (Options 21Ð81 IPE Module)
174
Ven-Tel 9600 Plus switch settings 292
replacing
Application Module MVME147/167
SBC card 521
replacing default configuration file 499
requirements
SDI port
configuring for conshare (X11 Release
17) 315
configuring for conshare (X11 Release
18) 317
definition 558
Meridian Mail software 26
services (host support) 18, 23
restoring from backup 471
ringing
enabling 318
SDI/DCH card
installing 142
jumper settings 143
status change event 330
route
definition 557
S2 switch settings 142, 146
select drive menu 397
service 100 23
trunk route administration 320, 325
routing by DNIS number 324
RS-232 cable
pin connections 274
Rugged Writer 268
service 101 23
service 97 23
service 98 23
service requirements
host support 18, 23
set feature notification
agent login ID 15
setting
S
SBC card
DeskJet 500 switches 272
DeskJet switches 272
dot-matrix printer switches 268
Gandalf LDS 120E jumper options
281
Application Module 58
description 62
indicators (LEDs) 59, 63
SCMM167 card 46
switches 59, 63
HP LaserJet II switches 269
HP LaserJet III switches 270
HP LaserJet IV switches 271
HP Rugged Writer switches 268
MVME705B card jumpers 133
MVME712A card jumpers 140
MVME712AM card jumpers 139
scheduling
traffic statistics 354
scheduling regular backups 507
script 346, 554
description 31
SDI
cabling (Application Module) 250
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
574 Index
options on cards 129
port configuration 124
Standalone System Interactive
Diagnostics (SSID) see SSID
SDI/DCH card jumper S2 143
SDI/DCH card switch S2 142, 146
UDS EC224A/D switches 288
Ven-Tel 2400 Plus II switches 288,
290
start-up interrupt menu 414
statistics
traffic 353, 354
status change events
assigning to groups 333
subpanel
setting up
after rebooting 448
terminals and printers 261
traffic statistics 354
VT220, VT320, and VT420 261
setup values
connections 231
I/O 83, 84
subpanel, I/O
connections 232
switch
VT220 263
VT320 264
VT420 265
DeskJet 500 settings 272
DeskJet settings 272
dot-matrix printer settings 268
ESDI card locations 149
HP LaserJet II settings 269
HP LaserJet III settings 270
HP LaserJet IV settings 271
HP Rugged Writer settings 268
IPE Module 47
locations and settings for UDS
EC224A/D 288
locations and settings for Ven-Tel
9600 Plus 292
locations for Ven-Tel 2400 Plus II
289, 291
MSDL card locations 147
SBC card 59, 63
settings for Remote Supervisor Login
288, 290
settings for SDI/DCH card 142, 146
settings for Ven-Tel 2400 Plus II 288,
290
sharing system console
using A/B switch box 276
shutdown message 412, 519
Single Terminal Access (STA) 37
single-line telephones
defining as AST 337
site survey 91
SMM167 card 46
software
CCR Module and IPE Module 31
installing 373
installing, upgrading, and updating
371
Meridian 1 21, 36
Meridian Mail 26
operating system (BOS) 31
overview 13
upgrade paths 373
SSID 558
definition 558
description 16
standalone system 32
switchbox, A/B 276
connecting 276
switching applications 277
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index 575
switching application
using A/B switchbox 277
system console 17, 32
cable pinout 248
MVME712A jumper settings and
cable connections 140
MVME712AM jumper settings and
cable connections 139
MVME712M jumper settings and
cable connections 141
translating DNIS to ACD DN 324
translation tables
cabling 248
sharing using A/B switchbox 276
system console CCR 33
system restart messages 413
system setup 448
defining 326
trunk
definition 558
route administration 320, 325
turning off auto-start 505
T
tape 399
insertion message 398
installing application tape in tape drive
400
U
installing BOS tape in tape drive 418
loading application 399
tape drive
UDS EC224A/D modem
switch locations and settings 288
universal I/O panel 85, 233
cabling 222
IPE Module 49
TCP/IP cabling 249
terminal
configuring 511
updating
software 371
upgrading
setting up 261
from Option 11 to Options 21Ð81 522
hardware upgrade paths 51, 52
software 371
terminal number (TN) 294
definition 558
testing
software upgrade paths 373
USRobotics Sportster modem
switch settings 279
acceptance 527
TN see terminal number (TN) 558
tools
diagnostics 16, 32
traffic statistics 353, 354
transition card
description 70
V
variable
CCR 31
VASID
MVME332XTS jumper settings and
cable connections 136
MVME333-2 jumper settings and
cable connections 137
MVME705B jumper settings and
cable connections 133, 138
definition 296
Ven-Tel 2400 Plus II modem
opening 288, 290
switch settings 288, 290
Ven-Tel 9600 Plus modem
Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C Installation and Upgrade Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
576 Index
opening 291
switch locations and settings 292
verifying
X
X.25 cabling 249
X.25 communication controller (XCC)
card 66
link status 483
Versa Module Eurocard (VME) 558
VME bus backplane 82
voice channel
adding to Meridian Mail 367
defining virtual agent DNs 360
voice processing 369
voice processing capability
adding 255
X.25 parameters (Meridian Mail Link)
498
X11 software notation 294
XCC card
description 66
indicator 66
jumper settings 131
Voice Response Unit (VRU) 558
voice segment file
creating 529
recording and trimming 530
voice segment file example 531
VRU see Voice Response Unit (VRU)
VSDN Table
adding Meridian Mail ACD DNs 364
VT220
setting up 261
setup values 263
VT320
setting up 261
setup values 264
VT420
setting up 261
setup values 265
W
wiring
power harness 218
write-protecting tape 399
553-3202-210 Standard October 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Meridian Link/
Customer Controlled Routing
Installation and Upgrade Guide
Copyright © 1998 Northern Telecom
All rights reserved
Information subject to change without notice.
Meridian 1, SL-1, and Nortel are trademarks of Northern Telecom.
UNIX is a trademark of AT&T.
Motorola is a trademark of the Motorola Corporation.
MVME products are trademarked by the Motorola Corporation.
Ethernet is a trademark of the Xerox Corporation.
Reflection is a trademark of Walker Richer & Quinn, Inc.
DEC, VT220, VT320, VT420 are trademarks
of Digital Equipment Corporation.
UDS is a trademark of Motorola Incorporated.
NTP 553-3202-210
Product release: Meridian Link Release 5C/CCR Release 3C
Release: Standard 1.0
October 1998
Printed in U.S.A.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|